A GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



HEBREW LANGUAGE 



BY MOSES STUART, 

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF SACRED LITERATURE IN THE THEOLOGICAL 
INSTITUTION AT ANDOVER. 



THE FIFTH EDITION, CORRECTED AND ENLARGED, REPRINTED WITH THE 
CONCURRENCE OF THE AUTHOR. 





OXFORD: D. A. TALBOYS, 

AND 118 FLEET STREET, LONDON. 
M DCCCXXXVIII. 



f 



1 






THE 
PUBLISHER TO THE READER. 



The principal reasons that have induced me to reprint the 
following work, are the high encomiums which have been be- 
stowed upon it by all acquainted with its usefulness ; the 
difficulty of obtaining a sufficient supply from America to 
meet the demand ; and the high price at which it must be 
sold wdien procured, in consequence of the expensiveness of 
importation. 

Among those most conversant with the subject in this Uni- 
versity, whom I may particularise as approving of this Gram- 
mar, are Dr. Nicol, the late Regius-professor of Hebrew, who 
regretted that he could not constantly recommend it to his 
pupils from the difficulty they found in obtaining it ; and Dr. 
Pusey, the present Regius-professor, who recommends its em- 
ployment to beginners ; and Dr. Lee, the Regius Professor at 
Cambridge, says, " Dr. Gesenius is closely followed by Pro- 
fessor Stuart, in the very excellent Hebrew Grammar which he 
has published. To these names I might add a host of others, 
if they were not in themselves quite sufficient. Neither is 
it a slight recommendation of this work, that it has passed 
through three editions in America 3 ; where it has been adopted 
in all the principal seminaries, and where the study of He- 
brew is made an object of much greater importance than it is 
with us. This leads me to mention that this reprint is made 
with the fall sanction and approbation of the learned Author. 

The following paragraphs are extracted from a letter re* 
ceived by the Publisher from Professor Stuart : — 

" Justice and propriety oblige me to say, that the manner in 
which you have executed my Hebrew Grammar, (two copies 

a The present edition is printed from the fifth American one. 



11 TO THE READER. 

of which have come to hand, and for which I sincerely thank 
you,) is very attractive to me, and a pretty good pledge that 
you would fulfil my expectations in the manner in which I 
could wish my book to be presented to the British public. 
Your reprint is certainly a book that neither you nor the cor- 
rectors need to be ashamed of. We outdo you in Hebrew 
type — that is no fault of yours ; you outdo us in paper, in ink, 
in the general neatness of the whole thing — and I believe there 
are fewer errors of the press in your edition than in the Ame- 
rican one. 

" I hope you have found encouragement to print my Chres- 
tomathy b also ; without which the Grammar will have but an 
imperfect circulation ; and with which it has had a large one in 
this country." 

b This, which is a selection of easy lessons adapted to this Grammar, has 
now been published at Oxford uniformly with it ; where has also appeared, 
AN INTRODUCTION to WRITING HEBREW : containing a Series 
of Progressive Exercises for Translation into Hebrew. With an English- 
Hebrew Lexicon, and an Appendix on the Pause. From the German of 
A. Gkaefenhan. With references throughout to the Grammars of Pro- 
fessors Stuart and Lee, 8vo. 9s. 



PREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 



I have revised the present edition of my Hebrew Grammar 
throughout, and made a considerable number of additions and 
corrections of a subordinate kind. Most of the section on the 
quantity and quality of the vowels I have written over again, 
and given the whole a shape, which, I hope, w r ill render it 
more intelligible to beginners. It is the most difficult part of 
the grammar, so far as a satisfactory mode of representation is 
concerned. The dubious appearance of so many vowels makes 
the subject obscure to a tyro ; and scarcely any labour which 
a grammarian can bestow upon it, will make it explicit at first. 
The numbering of paragraphs, in a few cases, has necessarily 
undergone some change in the remodelling of this section, and 
to these the references in the Chrestomathy will not exactly 
correspond. Still, the student who is advertised of this, w r ill 
experience no serious difficulty in finding the principles that 
correspond to his references, although they may now bear a 
name different from the former one, or be designated by a dif- 
ferent number. 

I have availed myself, in the present edition, of the correc- 
tions and of some additions, which my friend Mr. J. Seixas, in 
a very obliging manner, has suggested to me. For his atten- 
tion bestowed on this subject, and the labour which he has 
performed in making the suggestions just noticed, I return 
him my most sincere thanks and acknowledgments. A fuller 
catalogue still of irregular forms, according to a desire which 
he has expressed, would have been made out, had the limits 
of my work permitted. 

I have added a Synoptical View of all the Conjugations of 
the Hebrew Verbs, at the close of the Paradigms ; for which I 
doubt not I shall receive the thanks of the beginner, and even 
of the proficient in Hebrew. 

The reader will perceive hy comparison, that the present 
edition is somewhat enlarged. This is owing in part to the 

b 



IV PREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 

mode of printing adopted, which is designed to render the 
different paragraphs and sections more conspicuous to the 
eye. 

The author has often been asked, whether be intended to 
publish an abridged form of this Grammar. As a friend to 
the radical study of the Hebrew, he must answer in the nega- 
tive. The phenomena of the Hebrew language he is not able 
to state in a shorter compass than he has done, and make them 
explicit and intelligible to learners. Any Grammar that pro- 
fesses to do so, must either be obscure, or leave many of the 
phenomena of the language untouched. Of what ultimate and 
solid use can the study of Hebrew be, when one half, or any 
considerable proportion, of forms and idioms are left unex- 
plained and unnoticed? Those who wish a "royal road" to 
the Hebrew, may publish such grammars or .study them, if 
they are content to acquire the name of Hebrew scholars 
without the reality. More than this cannot be acquired, while 
a considerable part of forms and idioms are unnoticed and un- 
known. With the right of others to publish abridged gram- 
mars, the writer of this does not expect or wish in any way to 
interfere. His own full conviction, after teaching Hebrew for 
a quarter of a century, is, that all abridged methods of study- 
ing it will of course abridge any good ground for expecting 
real and solid profit from the undertaking. " Drink deep, or 
taste not," is his most serious advice to all theological stu- 
dents ; but he does not say this, in reference to his own He- 
brew Grammar. Whatever Grammar the student may use, 
let him not expect solid improvement without extensive and 
accurate study. 

MOSES STUART. 

Andover Theol. Seminar y^ 
March, 1835. 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 



ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 



ALPHABETS .... 9 

Ancient number of letters . . .12 

Arrangement of letters . . .12 

Age of their names . . . .12 

Significance of the names . . .12 

Pronunciation of the names . . .12 

Later Hebrew alphabet . . .13 

Final forms of letters . . . .13 

Sounds of letters . . . .13 

Dilated letters . . . ► .15 

Unusual letters . . . .15 

Similar letters. . . . .15 

Classification of the letters . . .16 

Aspirates, Quiescents, Gutturals, Liquids . 16 

VOWELS 17 

Not original . . . . .17 

Vowel letters . . . . .17 

Ground of classification . . .18 

Quality and quantity of vowels . . IS 

Pure and impure vowels . . .19 

Long and short . . . .19 

Long by nature, and by position . . 19 

Pure long vowels . . . .20 

Impure long vowels . . . .29 

Doubtful appearances of them . . 20 

Daghesh'd long vowels . . .21 

Impure vowels long by position . . 22 

Short vowels . . . . .23 
Kind of syllables in which the various vowels 

may stand . . . .24 

Qibbuts vicarious . ... .24 

SHEVA 25 

Design of it . . . . .25 

When employed . . . .25 

Sheva vocal . . . . ,26 

Sheva silent . . . . .26 

Composite Shevas . . . .27 

When employed . . . .27 

Used out of the common course . . 27 

General principal in regard to Shevas . 27 

Not employed under Quiescents . . 28 

COALESCENCE OF VOWELS AND 

QUIESCENTS . . . .28 

Table exhibiting this . . . .28 

Sound of coalescing Quiescents not lost . 29 
The Ehevi, when they retain a consonant 

power . . . . .29 

Otium of the Ehevi . . . .30 



COALESCENCE OF VOWELS 
DAGHESH'D LETTERS 



AND 



Vowels affected by omitted Gutturals and 

Resh 30 

Vowels affected by the omission of other 

Daghesh'd letters . . . .31 

ORTHOGRAPHY OF THE VOWELS . 31 
Proper place of the vowels . . .31 

Diacritical point over Shin and Sin . 32 

Vav with Hholem over it , .32 

Orthography of the vowels as connected 

with the Quiescents . . .32 

Words written plene and defective . . 32 

No certain rule for them . . .33 

ORTHOGRAPHY OF QA.METS HHA- 

TEPH . - . . .33 

In a mixed syllable . . . .33 

In a simple syllable . . . .34 

PATTAHH FURTIVE . . .34 

DAGHESH 35 

Daghesh forte . . . . .35 

Orthography of it . . . .35 

Omission of it . . . . .36 

Division of Daghesh forte . . .36 

Euphonic Daghesh and its kinds . . 36 

DAGHESH LENE . . . .37 

General rule for the insertion of it . . 37 

for the rejection of it . . 38 

General exceptions to the rules . . 38 

Particular exceptions to the same . . 39 

RAPHE 40 

MAPPIQ 40 

METHEGH 40 

Distinguished from Silluq . . .41 

Cases in which it is either uniformly or 

usually employed . . .41 

Cases in which usage is various . . 41 

Methegh before Maqqeph . . .42 

Use of several Metheghs on the same word 42 
Use of Conjunctives instead of Methegh . 42 

MAQQEPH 43 

Effects of it on the vowel and tone . . 43 

End answered by it . . . . 43 

RULES FOR READING HEBREW . 43 

Exemplification . . . .44 

Accents, table of them . . .47 

Various alleged uses of them . . 49 

Proper place of writing them . . 51 

TONE-SYLLABLE . . . . 51 

General rule for it ; and exceptions . 51 

Shifting of the tone syllable . ; .54 

Critical marks, and Masoretic notes . 55 



CONTENTS. 



PART II. 



CHANGES AND PECULIARITIES OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS. 



Letters of the same organ easily commuted 
Assimilation of Consonants . 
Consonants cast away or dropped . 
Consonants added .... 
Transposition of Consonants . 

PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTU- 
RALS AND RESH . 

Daghesh forte omitted in them, and com- 
pensation for it . 

Gutturals prone to the A sound 

Commonly take a composite Sheva . 

PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS . 
General principles regulating them . 
Other ways in which quiescence is effected, 

besides those involved in the general 

principle ..... 
Peculiar usage of Aleph, He, Vav, Yodh, 

when they would have a vowel, and 

be preceded by a Sheva 
Peculiarities of Aleph 
Peculiarities of Vav and Yodh 
Peculiarities of He .... 
Commutation of the Quiescents for each 

other ..... 

Quiescents used as Paragogic letters 

CHANGES OF THE VOWELS . 
Vowels mutable and immutable 
Composite Sheva commuted . 
Proper mutable Vowels 
Changes of vowels limited to their respec- 
tive classes ..... 



Corresponding long and short vowels 
Rules of exchanging long vowels for short 
When short vowels become long 
Pause accents lengthen short vowels 
Falling away ofvowels 

when the tone is moved forward one 

syllable ..... 

■ ■ moved forward two syllables 

Changes in vowels by reason of const, state 
by reason of accession at the end . 



Rise of new vowels 

What these usually are 

What they are before composite Shevas 

New vowels when two Shevas come to- 
gether, of which the first is composite 

Rise of furtive vowels 

Euphonic changes of the vowels 

Vowels changed by Accents . 

Accents sometimes lengthen short vowels . 

They shorten long ones 

They restore vowels that had been dropped 

They turn simple Sheva into Seghol 

composite Sheva into the correspond- 
ing long vowel . . . 

Effect of pause accents not uniform . 

Vowels changed by accession and transposi- 
tion . . . . . 

Vowels changed by the position of certain 
letters and words .... 

Changes in the vowel-points of the article . 

■ of the particles 

of the conjunct. Vav 

of the interrog. J*f . 



PART III. 



GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE OF WORDS. 



Radical words . . . .77 

Conformity to their principles . . 77 

Biliteral roots . . . . .77 

Quadriliteral and Quinquiliteral roots . 78 

Parts of speech . . . .78 

Grammatical structure of words . . 78 

Various ways of expressing case, number, 

gender, person, etc. . . .78 
Composite words . . . .78 
Mode of writing particles and oblique pro- 
nouns . . . . .78 

ARTICLE 79 

Assimilation of it . - .79 

PRONOUNS. . . . .79 

Pronouns personal [Norn.] . . .79 

Oblique cases of them : « .80 

Pronouns demonstrative . . -80 

relative . . . • 80 

interrogative . . - .81 

VERBS . . . . .81 

Classification . . . . .81 

Inflection . . . .81 

Conjugation . . .. . .81 

Usual conjugations . . . .82 

Peculiar conjugations. . . .82 

Unusual conjugations. . . .83 



Conjugations of pluriliteral verbs . . 83 

All conjugations do not belong to any one 

verb . . . . .83 

Names of the conjugations . . .84 

Root of verbs . . . . .84 

Forms of the root . . . .84 

Niphal and its signification . . .85 

Piel 85 

Pual, etc. . . . . '85 

Hiphil, etc. . . . . .86 

Hophal, etc. . . . . .86 

Transposition of the letters prefixed to 

Hithpael 86 

Significations of the conjugation . . 87 

Unusual conjugations . . . .87 

Mood, tense, number, person and gender of 

verbs . . . . .88 

Ground-forms of verbs . . .88 

Formation of the Prasterite tense . . 88 

Inf. const, and absolute . . .89 

Formation of the Fut. tense . . .89 

The prseformative letters of the Fut. tense 

expel the pneformatives of the derived 

conjugations . . . .90 

Final vowels of the Future . . .90 

Imper. mood . . . . .90 

Participles of transitive verbs . . 90 

of intransitive verbs . . . 91 

Subj. and Opt. moods . . .91 



CONTENTS. 



Vll 



Paragogic and apoc. Futures . . 92 

Imp. parag. and apoc. . . .93 

Future with Vav conversive . . .93 

Prater with Vav . . . .94 

General remarks on paradigms of verbs . 94 

Paragogic letters suffixed to verbs . . 94 
Verbs with Quiescents defectively written . 95 

REGULAR TRANSITIVE VERBS ; 

notes and explanations . . .95 

REGULAR VERBS INTRANSITIVE; 
notes . . . . .99 

VERBS WITH GUTTURALS . . 100 

Verbs Pe Guttural ; characteristics, etc. . 100 
Notes on paradigm .... 101 
Verbs Ayin Guttural; characteristics, etc. . 102 
Notes on the Paradigm . . . 102 

Verbs Lamedh Guttural ; characteristics, 

etc. . . . . .103 

IRREGULAR VERBS ; definition . 104 

First Class; PE ALEPH, characteristics 104 
Notes on the paradigm . . . 105 

PE YODH; characteristics. . .105 

First Class of Verbs Pe Yodh ; characteris- 
tics . . . . .105 
Notes on the Paradigm . . . 106 
Second Class of verbs Pe Yodh ; characteris- 
tics . . . . .107 
Notes on the Paradigm . . .108 
Third Class of verbs Pe Yodh ; characteris- 
tics . . . . .108 
VERBS PE NUN; characteristics . 108 
Notes on the Paradigm . . . 109 

Second Class » . . . .110 

VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ; characteris- 
tics, etc. . . . . . ib. 

Notes on the Paradigm . . . 112 

Peculiar anomaly of these verbs . . 114 

VERBS AYIN VAV ; characteristics, etc. 115 
Notes on the Paradigm . . .117 

VERBS AYIN YODH . . .119 

Third Class . . . . .120 

VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH ; characteris- 
tics, etc. . . . . .120 

Notes on the Paradigm . . . 120 

Interchange of forms between these Verbs> 

and Verbs Lamedh He . . . 121 

VERBS LAMEDH HE; characteristics, 
etc. ..... 

Notes on the Paradigm 

Apocopate Future of Kal 

of Hiphil . 



Peculiar Anomalies 
Imitations of Verbs Lamedh Aleph . 
General Remarks on these . 
VERBS LAMEDH TAV . 



122 
. 123 
. 123 
. 126 
. 126 
. 126 
. 126 
. 126 



VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS . 127 

Relation of irregular verbs to each other . 128 
Plurilateral Verbs .... 129 
PARTICIPLES . . . .129 

VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 130 

Table of the forms of such suffixes . . 132 

Notes on the Table of them . . . 132 

Notes on the Paradigm of them as attached 

to the verb . .* . . 134 

Verbs Lamedh He with suffixes . . 135 

NOUNS ; derivation and declension . 135 

Nouns primitive, derivative, and denomi- 
native ..... 136 
Composite and proper . . . 137 

Gender of Nouns .... 137 

of the plural .... 138 

Formations of Fern, nouns, with Table . 139 
Formation of the plural, masc. and fern. . 140 
Heteroclites ..... 141 
Formation and use of the Dual . . 142 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS; const.-state 143 
Suffix-State ..... 144 
Table of suffix pronouns . . . 145 

Rules for suffixes .... 146 
Vowel-changes in nouns on account of de- 
clension ..... 147 
Laws of such vowel changes . . .147 

Suffixes attached to the plural . . 148 

NOUNS MASC. Dec. I. . 
Dec. II. 

Dec. III. IV 150 

Dec. V. . . • . .151 

Dec. VI. . . . . .152 

Notes on the A. E. O. class of Dec. VI. 153 

■ Segholates of Verbs Ayin Vav, etc. . 154 

Segholates of Verbs Lamedh He . 154 

Infinitive Segholates 

■ Anomalous Plurals of Segholates 

Dec. VII. . . 

Dec. VIII 

Dec. IX 

NOUNS FEM. Dec. X. XI. 
Dec. XII. XIII. 
Dual Number of Nouns 
Heteroclites or anomalous Nouns , 



. 148 



154 
155 
15.5 
i 56 
157 
5 58 
159 
160 



NUMBERS ; cardinal and ordinal . . 160 

Notes on the Paradigm . . . 162 

Method of Notation .... 162 
ADJECTIVES . . . .162 

PARTICLES 163 

Adverbs . . . . .163 

Prepositions ..... 164 
Table of them with pronouns, etc. . . 165 

Conjunctions ..... 166 
Interjections ..... 166 



ARTICLE . 

Insertion of it . 
Omission 

Article before Adjectives 

NOUNS ; case absolute 



PART IV. 




SYNTAX. 




. 167 


Cases relative ; Norn. 


. 171 


. ib. 


Genitive Case . 


. 172 


. 16S 


Gen. with Lamedh 


. ib. 


. 169 


General remark on it 


. 173 




Gen. sometimes follows adjectives 


. 174 


. 170 


various meanings of it . 


. ib. 



vm 



CONTENTS. 



Dat. case 175 

Accusative ....... ib. 

Accus. put after Participles and Verbals . 176 
Voc. and Abl. cases 177 

CONSTRUCT STATE . . . . ib. 
Form of it not confined to position before a 

Genitive ib. 

Refers solely to the relation of two nouns to 

each other 178 

Apposition- 179 

Gender of nouns and adjectives . . . ib. 
Number of nouns used collectively . . 180 

Pluralis Excellentias ib. 

Use of the plural in poetry . . . . ib. 

Repetition of nouns ib. 

with the copula 181 

Nouns employed as adjectives . . . ib. 
When employed as adjectives . . . 182 
Circumlocutory phrases used in the room of 

adjectives ib. 

ADJECTIVES ; often used as nouns . . 183 

used as predicates of a sentence . ib. 

■ article before them in this case . 184 

Adjectives qualifying nouns . . . ib. 

Plur. adjectives with Dual Nouns . .185 
Adj. with nouns of common gender . . ib. 

Position of adjectives ib. 

Construct state of them .... 186 
Comparative degree of adjectives . . ib. 

Superlative ib. 

Various methods of making a superlative . 187 



NUMERALS 

Cardinal numbers used for Ordinals . 

PRONOUNS ; use of the primitive ones 

used for the verb of existence 
Case of suffix-pronouns 

Exceptions 

Position of noun-suffixes 

Position of pronouns in a sentence 

Place of reflexive pronouns supplied by v£ 

rious nouns 

Anomalies of pronouns 

Relative pronouns .... 

VERBS ; general principle of concord 
Concord with nouns of multitude 



ib. 
190 
ib. 
191 
ib. 
ib. 

192 
193 
ib. 

194 
ib. 



Verbs with several connected Nominatives 194 
Concord of nouns with the verb of existence 195 
Anomalies in concord of verbs ; number . ib. 

as to gender 196 

as to both number and gender . . 197 

Peculiar Anomaly 198 

Impersonal Verbs ib. 

Verbs with indefinite Nominatives . . 199 

TENSES ; various meaning of the Prater 200 
of the Future 201 

IMPERATIVE MOOD . . . .203 
Use of Composite Verbs .... 204 
Cases governed by Verbs . . . . ib. 
Verbs governing two Accusatives . . 205 
Passive Verbs 206 

INF. ABSOLUTE, and its various uses . ib. 
Inf. const, and its various uses . . . 20S 

PARTICIPLES 211 

Verbs used as adverbs 213 

PARTICLES ; adverbs . . . . ib. 

Prepositions 214 

Conjunctions 215 

Interjections ib. 

PLEONASM ib. 

ELLIPSIS 217 

of nouns ib. 

of pronouns 218 

of the verb of existence . . . ib. 

of adverbs 219 

of prepositions 220 

of conjunctions .... . ib. 

■ in poetic parallelism .... 221 

Change of construction .... 222 

Constructio pragnans : 223 

Zeugma. . . » . . . . ib. 

Hendiadys ib. 

Paronomasia 224 

Paradigms of verbs, nouns, etc. 

Synoptical View of all the Conjugations of 
the Hebrew Verbs 



PART I. 
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 



I. ANCIENT HEBREW ALPHABET. 



Form 


Repre- 
sented by 


Sounded 

as 


N dints in 
Hebrew ; 


which are 
represented by 


N 


N 


? 


*)bk 


ttaleph 


n 


bh,h 


v,b 


JV2 


Beth 


d 


gh,g 


g 


bwz 


Gimel 


i 


dh,d 


(Sfia 


V T 


Daleth 


n 


h 


h 


KH 


He 


i 


V 


V 


11 

T 


Vav 


r 


z 


z 


13 


Zayin 


n 


hh 


hh 


JTrj 


Hheth 


tD 


t 


t 


aia 


Tet 


> 


y 


y 


TV 


Yodh 


a 


kh,k 


kh,k 


6)3 


Kaph 


^ 


l 


l 


ID? 

V T 


Lamedh 


D 


m 


m 


nn 


Mem 


3 


n 


n 


W 


Nun 


D 


s 


s 


^JftD 


Samekh 


V 


y 


a 


IS 


yayin 


S 


ph,p 


fiP 


K3 


Pe 


hj 


ts 


ts 


TO 

" T 


Tsadhe 


P 


q 


q 


^p 


Qoph 


"i 


r 


r 


tfn 


Resh 


ID 


sh, s 


sh, s 


p$ 


Shm 


I) 


th-, t 


th, t 


T 


Tav 



and sounded as 



Aw'-lef 

Baith 

Gee-mel 

Daw'-leth 

Hay 

Vawv 

Zayin 

Hhaith 

Tait 

Yoadh 

Kaf 

Law'-medh 

Maim 

Noon 

Saw'-mekh 

A-yin 

Pay 

Tsaw-dhey 

Qoaf 

Raish 

Sheen 

Tawv 



►signification ot' 
the names. 



ox. 

house. 

camel. 

door. 

hollow. 

hook. 

armour. 

travelling-scrip 

serpent. 

hand. 

hollow-hand. 

ox-goad. 

water. 

fish. 

prop. 

eye. 

mouth. 

screech-locust. 

ear. 

head. 

tooth. 

cross. 



II. LATER HEB 


. ALPHABET. 


III. ORIENTAL ALPHABETS. 


Forms. 


Kep. 


Sounded 


Names. 


Arabic 


Syriac 


Hebrew 


Samar. 






by 


as 




alphabet. 

\ 


alphabet. 


coin-letter. 


alphabet. 


Heb. 


H 


K 


5 


Kaleph 


tw a 


A- 


N 


n 


bh 


V 


Beth 


i 


.a 








2 


b 


b 










9 


1 


21 


gh 
g 


g 

g 


Gimel 


z>- 


^. 


, v^i 


1 


J) 


"T 


dh 


f th in 
t that, 


Daleth 


J 


J 


Tl 






1 


d 


d 




J> 






°S 


1 


n 


h 


h 


He 


Jb 


OT 


L ? 


=C 


n 


i 


V 


V 


Vav 


J 


O 


|l^ A 


* 


i 


r 


z 


z 


Zayin 


/ 


I 


■ 


4s 


r 


n 


hh 


hh 


Hheth 


^ £>- 


A/ 


B^> 


■^ 


n 


to 


t 


t 


Tet 


lfr]» 


■6 




V 


23 


•> 


y 


y 


Yodh 


J 


* 


JX^X 


nr 


^ 


T»3 


kh 


kh/h 


Kaph 


r 


D 




a 


3 


"7*3 


k 


k 




\s=> 










^ 


1 


1 


Lamedh 


) 


Nk 


ZK 


Z 


^ 


D, D 


m 


m 


Mem 


*0 


3> 


i±l ^ 


^ 


D 


lO 


n 


n 


Nun 


j 


J 


a s 


2 


: 


D 


s 


s 


Samekb 




£0 




a 


D 


y 


V 


a 


yayin 


£ £. 


-b 





V 


y 


^3 


ph 


ph,f 


Pe 


£ 


a 




* 


3 


3 


P 


P 














r»* 


ts 


ts 


Tsadhe 


*o *a 


3 


14A /vV* 


-m 


a 


p 


q 


q 


Qoph 


• 


ja 


PP 


V 


P 


n 


r 


r 


Resh 


/ 


9 


cjq 


°i 


n 


tf 


sh 


sh 


Shin 


A 


^a 






to 


'V 


s 


s 


Sin 


AM 




Wcto 


XXX 


to 


n 


th 


th 


Tav 


5 


z 








n 


t 


t 




; J 




X 


A 


n 



IV. TABLE OF THE VOWELS. 



I. Class ; A sound, corresponding vov 


'el-letter, Aleph. 




Names. Form. Sound. ] 


lep. by 


Y?P Qamets 


ft ND ZDD 

T T T 


= a in a// 


a 


nns Pattahh long 


Q 


= a in father 


A 

a 


. . . . Pattahh short 


p tOO 


= a in {£*" 


a 


^yo Scghol long 


*? n ? ? 


= a in hate 


e 


. . . . Seghol short 


9 B» 


= a in icftwate 


e 



II. Class; £" and /sound, corresponding vowel-letter, Yodk. 



iy* Tseri 


d >p zap 


= ey in ^/zez/ 


e 


^3D SeghoWowg- 


*? HD ID 


= ey in 'purvey 


e 


. . . . Segh5l S#0?^ 


D tOD 


= e in (S** 


e 


> 

pTrr Hhireq /o;?,g- 


>p D 


= i in machine 


i 


Hhireq $Aon? 


D ZOp 


= i in {$T' e 


1 



III. Class; O and U sound, corresponding vowel-letter, Vav. 



DVin Hholem 


b to rob 


= in go 


o 


*.>««- .»*s^. S Qamets Hhu- 


T T 


= o in {JJ** 


6 


pjlfe Shureq 


•ID tMD 


= oo in ^oo/z 


u 


y^i? Q^buts^~ 


D Dp 


= oo in moon 


u 


.... Qibbuts /o/?g 


D 


= ae in rue 


u 


. . . . Qibbuts short 


Dp 


= u in /z^/Z 


ti 



I\ r . [Half-vowels] Sheva, simple and composite. 



njtf Sheva (simple) 

nr)B nan Hhateph Pattahh 

btob ^t?n Hhateph Seghol 

ypp T *)Bn Hhateph Qamets 



p 


= e in 0<?g7/j 


n 


= oj in Zita/zy 


k 


= e in oegi/z 


n 

t: 


== o in uwr^ 



12 U 1 — 5. alphabet. 

Remarks on the Alphabet. 
% 1. The ancient number of letters was only 22 ; which is clear from 
the alphabetic Psalms, viz. Ps. xxv, xxxiv, xxxvii, cxi, cxii, cxix, cxlv; 
also from alphabetic compositions in Prov. xxxi. 10 seq.; Lam. i — iv. 
But in Ps. xxv, xxxiv, cxlv, one letter is omitted ; in Ps. xxxvii, 2 is 
repeated and V is omitted. All the other Shemitish alphabets, (and 
probably the ancient Greek one also), had originally the same number 
of letters, viz. 22. 

JVote. The present square form of the Hebrew letters is not the most ancient one. This is 
evident from inscriptions on Hebrew coins stamped in the time of the Maccabees, which have 
characters such as are designated in alphabet No. III.. The present square letter is evidently de- 
rived from the Aramrean forms of letters, and probably originated some time after the birth of 
Christ. This Kopp has recently shown, in a satisfactory manner, in his Bilder und Schriften 
der Vorzeit, II. p. 95 seq., particularly p. 156 seq. 

§ 2. The usual arrangement of the letters is fully settled by the 
same alphabetic compositions in the Hebrew Scriptures, which are 
noted above. Most of the arrangement seems to have been originally 
accidental ; yet not all of it. For example, the Liquids b, 72, 2, are 
ranged together. Za-ym (T) meaning shield, and Hheth (n) probably 
meaning travelling-scrip, are associated. So Yodh (^) hand, and Kaph 
(3) hollow-Hand ; Mem (a) water, and Nun (2) fish ; also 2ayin (v) 
eye, Pe (2) mouth, Qoph (p) ear, Resh ("i) head, and Shin (2?) tooth. 
In Lam. i — iv., V stands ranged, after Q ; which shows that the ar- 
rangement of the alphabet was not uniform in all cases, at the time 
when this book was written. 

§ 3. The age of the alphabetic names seems to mount higher than 

that of the Hebrew,, or of any of the present Shemitish languages. Some 

of the forms of these names are like the Aramaean, e. g. ^5, W3, D £; 

> > -i >. 

two seem to be of appropriate Hebrew stamp, viz. V.l, ^37 ; but n?.*}, 

b^2, nh\ } TtfJ, *T»D, w ith Vj, and V® (instead of P#) are mani- 
festly exotics, derived from a kindred language which is now no more, 
but which, as the more simple forms of the words show, was probably 
older than the time of Moses. 

§ 4. The significance of the names is, in most cases (not in all), suf- 
ficiently plain. The names are borrowed from natural objects ; but the 
resemblance of the letters to them is not to be traced in many of the 
present Hebrew letters, which differ much from the form of the cor- 
responding ancient ones. Alphabet No. I. col. 7, shows the most pro- 
bable original significations. For an admirable exhibition of the very 
ancient forms of Shemitish letters, Kopp's Bilder und Schriften der 
Vorzeit II. 157, may be consulted. 

§ 5. The pronunciation of the names is given in No. I. col. 6, as 
exactly as the English alphabet will permit. The vowels in col. 5 of 



§§ 6 8. ALPHABET. 13 

the same, are sounded as directed in the table of the vowels under 
No. IV. 

§ 6. The later Hebrew alphabet, as it now appears in all our pointed 
Hebrew books, consists of twenty -nine letters, as given in No. II. 
Six of these, as the alphabet shows, have two sounds each, but retain 
only the ancient single name; one (W Sin, pronounced Seen) is fur- 
nished with a point over its left tooth, (Shin has one over the right 
tooth, ID), and also with a different name, in order to distinguish it. 
The modern Arabians have twenty-eight letters, six of which are thus 
distinguished merely by a diacritical point ; as is the case with the 
same number of letters, in the later Hebrew alphabet. Comp. Arabic 
alphabet in No. III. 

§ 7- The final forms of five of the letters appear in the short left- 
hand column of them, in the alphabet No. II. They are doubtless 
subsequent in their origin to the original forms ; but when they were 
introduced is not known. When manuscripts were written conti- 
nuously, i. e. without separating the words, (as they originally were), 
these final letters aided very much in making the proper divisions. 
Why more of them were not invented for that purpose, it is difficult to 
say. The practice of employing the final forms at the end of words, 
is universal, so far as they go. Conceit or mistake has excepted only 
some two or three cases; e. g. 2ft (for )£), Job xxxviii. 1, nS"]Cv (f or 
7izn72h) } Is. ix. 6; Neh. ii. 13. 

§ 8. The sounds of the letters are given according to the usage of 
the most enlightened Hebrew scholars of the present time. There is 
a difference of opinion among the learned about some of the niceties of 
sound, in regard to several of them. But in respect to a language which 
has been dead for 2000 years, such questions can never be determined 
with satisfactory certainty. I add a few remarks on particular letters, 
which are of the more difficult class. 

Aleph (S), all agree, was of a very slight sound. It easily coalesced 
with, or conformed to, other proximate sounds. I have chosen the 
spiritus lenis of the Greeks to represent it. Practically we do not 
sound it at all, at least not perceptibly. In theory it is a real conso- 
nant ; and the Hebrews doubtless sounded it, so as to make it per- 
ceptible in most cases. 

Beth (n), bh=v. So the modern Greeks sound their jS. 

Gimel (n), when it is equivalent to gh, is represented in the alpha- 
bets as sounded like g. But the real sound is quite uncertain. The 
Arabians sound the same letter (^) like our j ; just as in English, we 



14 § 8. ALPHABET. 

sound g soft before e and i. I follow the general usage, and sound it 
as g hard, because the other sound is unknown to us. 

Daleth (T), dh = ih in that ; a sound which much perplexes Euro- 
peans of the continent ; but which is altogether easy and familiar to the 
English, and to the modern Greeks who so sound their S. 

He (n) is a feeble h. Vav (*i) is a feeble v. The Arab sounds it 
like our w ; which, more probably, was the Hebrew usage. I conform 
to general European usage. 

Hheth (n) hh, i. e. a strong aspirate. Yet it was not always so in 
practice, among the Hebrews; for at the end of words it appears to 
have been very much softened. E. g. the Seventy represent f"H^., by 
®dppa; and ^?^, by 2aAa. But they translate EPT } by Xa//.; and 
vrH, by 'Pa^'A. The Arabians have two gradations of sound for this 
letter. 

Tet (to) is a hard guttural kind of t, for which we have no due re- 
presentative in English. The corresponding Greek letter is 6. 

Kaph (D), kh, a difficult sound. The Greeks have it in their %. 
The usual practice sounds it like 'h, i. e. makes a kind of guttural of 
it. Kh can be distinctly sounded by special effort ; but what is gained 
bv this, is not worth the trouble necessary to gain it. Common usage 
sounds ^5, as be-hdw. I would conform to this, as it is so much easier 
than to sound kh fully ; or it may be read be-kaw, by giving to D the 
same sound as 2=&. 

Samekh (D) is sounded as the Greek a-, of which it is the undoubted 
prototype. It does not differ perceptibly in sound from the letter 
W, Sin; and the Hebrews have, in their orthography, written many 
words indifferently with either the one or the other, as D^S and EDS 
to divide. 

The sound of Ayin (V) is represented by ("), the double spiritus 
asper of the Greeks, for want of a better representative. Grammarians 
have represented it by g, gh, hgh, sounded gutturally; also by hh, hhh, 
and by the nasal gn, ng, ngn. The Arabians have two sounds for it ; 
the deeper one is scarcely attainable by any European. The ancient 
Hebrews appear to have had two also ; e. g. the Sept. render iTJD3? 
Yopoppx, H-TO Ta^a. ; but v?? 'HA/, P 2?-? 'ApaX'/JK. That it sometimes 
had comparatively a feeble sound, is evident from its admitting of 
coalescence or contraction, as ^5 for vP!2 ; also from its commutation 
with ft; see in the Hebrew lexicon under W. Europeans generally 
neglect to sound it. Jerome calls it a vowel; see above, in 'A/x-aA^'/c, 
the ground of this. The vowel accompanying it should have a strong 



§§ 9 11. ALPHABET. ]5 

impetus of the voice in pronouncing it; and this will bring the sound 
near to that which the Arabians give. 

Tsadhe (^), ts hard. Qoph (p), a deep guttural k, pronounced 
with impetus. Resh ("")), the rolling r of the French, or the Greek p. 
Tav (n), t soft. 

§ 9. Dilated letters are a mere expedient to make out the adjust- 
ment of a line ; for the Hebrews do not separate words at the end of 
lines. The usual ones are K, n, S; □; n, i. e. N, n, b, D, i"l. 

Q§ 10. Unusual letters. These are, (1) Literce majusculce ; as ^5?% 
Ps. lxxx. 16. (2) Minuscules; as DNTarQ, Gen. ii. 4. (3) £ms- 

pensce ; as ^_!!P, Ps. lxxx. 14. (4) Inverses; as ^Dlpl, Num. x. 35. 
The Rabbins find mysteries in these ; the considerate critic will find 
only mistakes in copying, or conceits of the copyists. 

§ 11. Similar letters. These are numerous in the Hebrew alpha- 
bet. The student should carefully note them, at the outset. They 
are as follows ; 

D Kaph 

3 Nun 
1 Kaph 
1 Resh 

* Yodh 

I Nun 

1 

Explanations. 
(1) S is distinguished from 3, by the right angle which its perpen- 
dicular side makes with the strokes at the top and bottom of the letter; 
3 is round at its corners instead of being angular. In some printed 
copies, 3 is distinguished from 2 only by the roundness of its corner at 
the bottom. (2) 3 is distinguished from 3, by having the stroke at the 
bottom united to the perpendicular only by a small point at the corner; 
in 3, the bottom stroke is united without any variation of its magnitude. 
(3) h f final descends below the line ; 1 does not. (4) 1 is distin- 
guished from *"), by having a right angle at the top, at which part 1 is 
round or obtuse. (5) 1 descends to the bottom of the line ; i does not. 
(6) 1 final falls below the line; 1 does not. (7) The top of T is conti- 
nued a little to the right of the perpendicular, while that of 1 is not ; 
the upright line of T is small at the top, where it inclines to the right, 
while it is gibbous below; which is not the case with 1. (8) t descends 
only to the line ; ) final falls below it. (9) n has no space between its 



1. 


Beth 


n 


2. 


Gimel 


j 


3. 


Daleth 


i 


4. 


Daieth 


i 


5. 


Vav 


i 


6. 


Vav 


i 


7. 


Zayin 


r 



8. 


Zayin t 


INun 


9. 


Hheth n 


nHe 


10. 


Hheth n 


jn Tav 


11. 


Mem D 


Tet 


12. 


Mem D 


D Samekh 


13. 


Tsadhe y x 


y Ayin 



16 §§ 12, 13. CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. 

left side and the top; n exhibits a small chasm. (10) n has a small 
dotted circle at the bottom of the perpendicular stroke on the left hand ; 
n has not this mark. (11) to is open at the top; ft at the bottom. (12) 
D is almost round ; U final is a square or parallelogram. (13) ^ is angu- 
lar on the right side of it, and the bottom is parallel with the line ; 'S turns 
to the left only. Final y, in its falling stroke, either turns a little to 
the right, or descends perpendicularly; it also falls below the line. 

N. B. The learner will find it altogether the easiest method of making himself familiar with 
the distinctions between the Hebrew letters, and with the respective sounds of the letters, (as also 
af the vowels), to practice writing them down, calling each aloud by its name, and uttering the 
sound of it -as often as he writes it. Let this practice be persisted in, until all the vowels and con- 
sonants can be recognized with facility and pronounced readily; their distinctions definitely de- 
scribed and drawn with the pen at pleasure ; and their names familiarly recalled. In this way 
the student learns to write Hebrew letters and vowels, (which he should by all means do) ; and 
he fixes the names, forms, and sounds of all the written signs indelibly upon his memory. 

[]§ 12. Classification of the consonants. This has been usually 
made agreeably to the organs principally employed in pronouncing 
them, as follows ; viz. 

n V technically called ^HPTS . 

b a n AaVett 

3 p P?^ 

Of these, the most important classes are the Gutturals and the La- 
bials. But N is oftentimes not a Guttural ; and 1 is not unfrequently 
treated like one.] 

§ 13. A much more important division than this, for practical pur- 
poses, is one which selects only those letters that are the subjects of 
some special peculiarity. This is as follows, viz. 

{a) Aspirates ; viz. 2, 1, 7, 2, B, n, technically called 
B^ghadh-ksphath (/IB? in). 

They are named Aspirates, because, when there is no point (Da- 
ghesh) in them, they are aspirated, i, e. associated with an /i-sound ; 
see alphabet No. II. 

When they are destitute of this point or Daghesh, these letters are called, by the older gram- 
marians, molles and raphatcs ; with it, durce and dagessatce. 

(b) Quiescents; viz, U, tf, % *», technically named &eh e vl 
(^rm). The reason of this is, that the sound of these 
letters, being in itself somewhat feeble, often coalesces 
with the vowel sound which precedes ; so that these let- 
ters are said to quiesce, i. e. to lose their separate sound 
as consonants, by falling into the preceding vowel 



(a) Gutturals 


N 


n 


(b) Labials 


3 


i 


(c) Dentals 


? 


D 


(d) Linguals 


1 


ft 


(e) Palatals 


3 


•> 



§§ 14, 15. VOWELS. 17 

(c) Gutturals; viz. N, il, n, V, or a-h a hhay (#nntt), a s 
stated above. 

Besides these four letters, Resh (*1) has a claim occasionally to he reckoned with the Guttu- 
rals, because it is treated in the same way as they are ; see § 111, seq. Aleph and He, moreover, 
often become Quiescents, (see b above) : so that they are to be reckoned as Gutturals, only when 
they have a distinctive consonant sound, or (in technical language) are moveable. 

(d) Liquids ; viz. b, D, 2, 1 ; of which i is to be re- 
garded only as a kind of half-liquid. Sometimes it is 
a kind of Guttural/ according to the statement above. 
Technically these may be called, limnar p^?). 

N. B. The student should impress these classes, particularly the three first, deeply on his 
memory. 

VOWELS. 

§ 14. Originally the Hebrew alphabet consisted only of consonants. 
Some learned men have maintained the contrary, and averred that 
N, 1, \ were originally designed to be voivels. But the fact that these 
letters constitute essential parts of the triliteral roots in Hebrew, and 
that they are susceptible of forming syllables by union with every sort 
of vowel-sound, proves beyond all reasonable doubt that they are essen- 
tially consonants. 

§ 15. But as the sound of K, \ \ was feeble, and often in prac- 
tice was made to coalesce with the vowel which preceded them, it was 
natural that in process of time they should come to be considered, in 
many cases, as representatives of the vowels with which they were 
customarily made to coalesce. Hence, in later Hebrew writings, we 
find N, >, \ not unfrequently used in the room of vowels ; more rarely 
in the early writings. But the still later Chaldseo-Rabbinic Hebrew 
employs these three letters very often, merely for the purpose of desig- 
nating vowels. For these reasons, these three letters are called vowel- 
letters, by recent grammarians, when they are spoken of in reference 
to the usage now in question. The older grammarians called them, 
with like reference, matres lectionis, i. e. authors or guides of [right] 
reading. In reference to another ground of classification, these same 
letters (together with n) are called Ehevi (^t!^) or Quiescents ; see 
§ 13. b. 

[The most ancient Hebrew MSS. consisted of only the letters in the alphabet No. I., but in a 
very different shape from the present one ; see § 1. Note. When the diacritical signs, i. e. small 
dots in or over a letter, which distinguish the later alphabet and increase the number of letters, 
together with all the vowel-points and accents, were first introduced, no historical documents 
satisfactorily shew. But it is now generally agreed, that the introduction was a gradual one; 
and that, however early some few particular things in the general system may have been com- 
menced, yet the whole system of diacritical signs, vowel-points, and accents, was not completed, 

C 



18 §§16 21. VOWELS ; QUALITY AND QUANTITY. 

so as to exist in its present form, until several centuries after the birth of Christ ; almost certainly 
not until after the fifth century. In regard to reading MSS. destitute of all this system of helps, 
there is no serious difficulty; at least none to any one who well understands the language. The 
same thing is habitually done, at the present day, by the Arabians, the Persians, and the Syrians, 
in their respective tongues; and in Hebrew, by the Jewish Rabbies, and all the learned in the 
Shemitish languages.] 

§ 16. From what has just been said, the student will see why (in 
the Table, No. IV.) N, \ and \ are represented as vowel-letters cor- 
responding to their respective classes of vowels. It is because these 
letters were occasionally employed (S more rarely) to designate more 
or less of the vowel-sounds, which are associated with them. 

§ 17- In the same Table, in column 2nd, the letters M 71 1 13 •» ft 
are so arranged as to form syllables by the help of the vowels. They 
are so used merely to exhibit to the learner the manner in which the 
Hebrew vowels are written, in respect to the alphabetic letters or con- 
sonants with which they are associated, i. e. whether they are written 
above, below, or in them. 

§ 18. The student must free himself, at the outset, from the habit 
of giving English sounds to the English representatives of the Hebrew 
vowels, and be very careful always to sound these representatives as 
directed in the table. 

§ 19. The ground of classification in the Table No. IV. is, that the 
vowels in these respective classes not only have a natural relation to 
each other in respect to the sound, butjfor the most part are often com- 
muted for each other. Seldom does commutation take place without 
the limits of the respective classes. 

Quality and Quantity of the Vowels. 

Q§ 20. The division in respect to quantity, among the older gram- 
marians, v/as as follows ; viz. Long — Qamets, Tseri, Hhireq magnum, 
Hholem, Shureq ; Short — Pattahh, Seghol, Hhireq parvum, Qamets 
Hhateph and Qibbuts. But all of these so called short vowels, are in 
fact often long, with the exception of Qamets Hhateph. Hence the 
student is greatly perplexed and misled, by such a division. A much 
better one is that proposed by the ancient Jewish grammarians, and 
lately adopted by the leading Hebrew grammarians in Germany ; the 
basis of which is exhibited in Table IV. In like manner, the Arabic 
has only three classes of vowels.] 

Ewald, in his Hebrew grammar (1827), has attempted to reduce the vowels to two classes; 
with much ingenuity, but not satisfactorily. 

§ 21. The vowels may be distributed into different 
classes, both in respect to quality and quantity. 



§§22 — 27. vowels: quality and quantity. 19 

§ 22. (a) In regard to quality, they may be consi- 
dered as pure or impure. 

The quality of vowels, with respect to the kinds of sound which they represent and the rela- 
tions of those sounds to each other, is represented in Table No. IV. The quality of purity or im- 
purity remains to be considered here. 

§ 23. A pure vowel is one with which no consonant 
sound coalesces. 

§ 24. An impure vowel is one with which a conso- 
nant sound coalesces. 

E. g. in "i^t da-bhar, both vowels are pure; the first in "^f, because 
no consonant follows ; the second in ~>2, because, although a consonant 
follows, it preserves its distinct sound, and does not coalesce with the 
vowel. On the contrary, in Nil bd, the ^ has no distinct sound, be- 
cause it coalesces with the Qamets; and in T?.? , (so written instead 
of ^T7]5, § 111. § 112.), the Qamets contains a coalescent Resh, which 
is suppresed in the writing by omitting a Daghesh in the 1 ; in both 
which cases Qamets is impure. And thus of all the other vowels, 
which admit a consonant to coalesce with them ; see § 58, § 59. 

§ 25. (b) In regard to quantity, vowels are divided 
into long and short. 

This classification cannot always be made out by inspection, or according to the appearance 
merely of the vowels; for, as will be seen in the sequel, the appearance of some of them is often 
very doubtful, or determines nothing in regard to quantity. 

§ 26. The long vowels may be divided into two 
classes. (1) Those long by nature and form; i. e. such 
as are always long. (2) Those long by position; i. e. 
long as to quantity in consequence of a peculiar posi- 
tion, while their form or appearance is the same as that 
of short vowels. These last may be named (in regard 
to their appearance only) doubtful. 

It is difficult to find appropriate technical terms for the designation 
of all the different sorts of Hebrew vowels. The meaning (as here 
given) of a vowel long by nature and form, is, that such vowel has a 
form which always designates a quantity that may properly be called 
naturally long. 

§ 27. Long by nature and form are Qamets, Tseri, 
Hhireq long or magnum, Hholem, and almost always 
Shureq. 



20 §§28 — 31. vowels: quality and quantity. 

Note. Hhireq is called magnum, when a Yodh quiescent, either 
expressed or implied, immediately follows it. For exceptions to the 
length of Shureq, see § 31. Note 3. 

§ 28. Long by peculiar position, (elsewhere short and 
always short in appearance,} may be Pattahh, Seghol, 
Hhireq, and Qibbuts. 

In this respect, these vowels correspond with the doubtful or double 
timed Greek vowels, a, i, v. 

Division of vowels long by nature and form. 

§ 29. These are naturally divided into pure and im- 
pure. 

§ 30. The pure long vowels are Qamets, Tseri, and 
Hholem. 

But these, let it be particularly noted, are pure only when no con- 
sonant coalesces with them, i. e. when they contain neither a Quies- 
cent nor a Daghesh'd letter; see § 23, § 53, and § 58. E. g. "O^T 
da-hhar, ?B? shen, 'T2\)\ yiq-tol. 

Hhireq magnum and Shureq are always impure, because Yodh or 
Vav, either expressed or implied, always follows them and coalesces 
with them ; § 53, 

§ 31. The impure long vowels may be distributed into 
two classes, not essentially different in nature, but differ- 
ing merely as to the methods in which they are formed. 

(a) Such as are formed by coalescence with one of 
the Ehevi (k, T\, % i 9 § 13. b), either expressed or im- 
plied ; § 53. 

These may be called quiescent lono vowels, for the sake of dis- 
tinction. 

E. g. Qamets, as in ^2 °® * Tseri, as in T? ben; H72 gde ; Hhireq 
magnum, as in T 1 ? nir ; Hholem, as in ib lo ; Tip qol; and Shureq., 
as in Q!)p qum. In all such cases, the Quiescent makes an addition to 
the quantity of the original vowel, by coalescing with it. See § 55. 

Note 1 . Appearance merely will not determine whether a vowel 
long by nature and form is pure or impure; inasmuch as the quiescent 
letter which coalesces with it, is often omitted in the writing ; e. g. E|"J 
qdm (impure) stands for 0}ij qavam, ^? nir for "^ , 'P qol for Vlp, etc.; 
see § 63. In a multitude of cases the student can distinguish whether 



§ 31. VOWELS : QUALITY AND QUANTITY. 21 

vowels of this kind are impure, only by obtaining a knowledge of ety- 
mology and the analogies of the Hebrew language. 

Note 2. Vice versa, the Quiescents are sometimes inserted after 
vowels long by nature and form, without mixing with them and render- 
ing them impure ; in which case they are merely a kind of fulcrum for 
the vowel; e.g. "fl"?! yll-modh with Hholem pure,= ,, T"^; ^50 
so-bhebh with Tseri pure, = ~^; see § 64, and comp. §^ 14 — 16, 
which exhibit the grounds of introducing such anomalies. 

Anomalies. 

[[Note 3. There are a few cases also, in which Shureq appears t© 
be short, i. e. to be the same as Qibbuts, even when it seems to co- 
alesce with Vav. These are when it stands before a daghesh'd letter; 
e. g. nfvin hhuq-qa, Tl&R zun-nd, V T^3?^ md-^un-zi, et<r. In Chaldee, 
Syriac, and Arabic, this is very common. But there are so few cases 
of this nature in Hebrew, that they seem to result merely from the use 
of a vowel-letter by transcribers as the sign "of a vowel ; see §§ 14 — 16. 

Note 4. Similar cases of Hhireq with Yodh are also affirmed by 
most grammarians to exist. But the examples evidently do not justify 
this conclusion, inasmuch as they amount only to different modes of 
orthography and pronunciation in respect to the same word ; e. g. 2b|?T 
ziq-ldgh and ^i? s ? zl-qeldgh, BFHSJi? qim-mosh and tril^f? qi-mosh, £'r.:?? 
pil-le-ghesh and E«v S pi-le-ghesh, D^THD mo-rig-glm and DXXHTE 
mo-rl-ghlm ; see § 64, respecting Yodh fulcrum. ~\ 

(b) Vowels that would otherwise be short, when fol- 
lowed by a daghesh'd letter which is merely implied (not 
expressed), sometimes become long in respect to both 
nature and form. 

E. g. ^>D3 be-rekh, so written instead of "H?^ btr-rekkj T^St bd± 
rekh, instead of sf3? bar-rekh, etc. In all such cases, the sign of the 
daghesh'd letter, (i. e. the point or dot in the middle of the consonant) 
is omitted, because its sound coalesces with that of the vowel which 
precedes, and prolongs it. In this respect, the present cases under b 
differ often, in regard to orthography, from those under a above ; inas- 
much as those under a may insert or omit the quiescent letter which 
coalesces (see Xote 1), but those under b regularly demand the omis- 
sion of the Daghesh which would stand for a letter. For the sake of 
distinction, this class of vowels maybe called daghesh'd long vowels. 

Note 1 . Here, as in the class a above, the mere form of the im- 
pure vowel will not distinguish it from a pure vowel ; for the form of 



22 §§ 31, 32. vowels : quality and quantity. 

both is the same. Nothing but a knowledge of Hebrew etymology and 
forms will enable the student to make the appropriate distinction. 

QNote 2. It is far from being the case, that all the impure long 
vowels, which are formed by the coalescence of daghesh'd letters with 
them, take the form of vowels long by nature and form, like those 
above designated. In a majority of instances, vowels long merely By 
position are formed, in such cases, by the suppressed daghesh'd letter ; 
as may be seen by consulting the examples under § 33, § 58. Why 
the Hebrews at one time wrote "^TC^ for »H? , TH5 for "^2 } i. e. em- 
ployed long vowels in point oiform as well as nature, and yet at another 
time, (and indeed in far the greater number of instances,) used in such 
cases vowels long merely by position, as EH3 for EH?, ^HS for vn2 } 
(not On.3, vHS^ etc.) it is impossible for us to say. The fact we know ; 
but as to this variety of sound and orthography, we can only say : Sic 
voluit usus.~\ 

Q 32. Remarks. I have intimated above, that the two different 
classes of impure vowels, long by nature and form, are not essentially 
diverse in their essence. The fact seems simply to be, that all impure 
vowels, long by form and nature both, are made so by the coalescence 
of a consonant with them ; and whether this consonant is one of the 
Quiescents or one of the Gutturals, it matters not, for the effect is the 
same, viz., the prolongation of the vowel. Most vowels (perhaps all) 
before they become prolonged by Quiescents, are, i. e. would in their 
proper nature be, short', e. g. ^^^, originally ^??; ^5 , originally 
^TB, etc. In the same manner, the vowels long by nature and form, 
which are made so by the coalescence of a daghesh'd letter, are in 
their own original nature short ; e. g. "H*^ for ?f *?.^ , etc. But whether 
there was any practical difference in the length of the sound, between 
the pure long vowels and the impure, is a point which we have no cer- 
tain means of determining. If the proof could be certain, that to any 
vowels originally long a coalescent letter has been added, (which Ge- 
senius seems to suppose in his large Grammar,) these would be de- 
cidedly the longest sort of vowels. But I know of no way in which 
this can be satisfactorily shown. Original principles show, that impure 
vowels are made (at any rate mostly) from vowels originally short,] 



Impure vowels long by position. 

§ 33. These are formed in the same way as the im- 
pure vowels which are long by nature and form both, i. e. 



§§ 33, 34. vowels : quality and quantity. 23 

by the coalescence of a daghesh'd letter suppressed, or 
(in some cases) of a Quiescent either expressed or im- 
plied. But the form of all such vowels is the same as 
that of the short vowels; see § 58. § 55, 

Of course it is only from a knowledge of etymology and of the analogy of forms, that the stu- 
dent can be enabled, for the most part, to determine when these vowels are actually long. 

[Note. Pattahh, Hhireq, and Qibbuts (not vicarious), are made long 
by position, only by the coalescence of an implied Daghesh'd letter ; as 
bns bd-hel, for 7F£2 bah-hel; Erp ni-hham, for DH3 riihh-hham ; 
^nn ru-hhats, for V^T? ruhh-hhdts. For cases like n*nj?b, nTJNQ, 
where Pattahh and Qibbuts apparently have a quiescent M, see § 118 
with the notes, and also the lexicon. — Seghol may be made long, either 
by a Quiescent, as ^, ^, nZJ ? ge, tse, me ; or by the coalescence of a 
daghesh'd letter, as D^rjn M-ha-rhn, nn?? pe-hha, ^™ ^e-hhav, 
where the Gutturals H, n, exclude the Daghesh forte which belongs 
to them. See §§ 58. 111. 112. 54. — Qamets Hhateph is never long. 

Remark. Whether there was any practical difference between the length of the sound of 
vowels long merely by position and having the form of short vowels, and pure vowels long by 
nature and form, is what we have no certain means of determining. Probably the former were 
shorter, i. e. somewhat less prolonged ; for the form itself of them would seem to intimate this.] 

Vowels properly short. 

§ 34. These are Pattahh,, Seghol, Hhireq, Qamets 
Hhateph, and Qibbuts (not vicarious), simply and only 
when they are pure, i. e. have no coalescent letter in 
them. 

£Note 1 . The short vowels may stand either in a mixed syllable,* 
or in a simple one t ; e. g. ^ dcil, ?5 ben, n.3j?b mtq-ne, ^^^ 
hhokh-ma, ~^l?£ muq-tar, in mixed syllables; and MJZ2 me-lekh, ^¥2 
na-^ar, vj*1 vay-yi-ghel, >?ng &d-h°lo, in simple syllables. This lat- 
ter class of short vowels is naturally pronounced somewhat longer than 
the former, as the stress of voice falls almost uniformly on the short 
vowels when they happen to be in a simple syllable. 

Note 2. Some cases are dubious in respect to appearance ; e. g. 
"")? appears short, but is in fact i. q. "TO. So in y P\l, Qibbuts appears 
short, but is i. q. '^jj, Qibbuts being vicarious. In like manner, ap- 
pearances are frequently dubious in regard to simple syllables; e. g. 
EHD with an impure Hhireq long by position (§ 33), and v2*1 with 
a Hhireq pure and short ; so ^H22 with an impure Pattahh long by 

* A mixed syllable is one which ends in a vocal, i. e. moveable, consonant. 
t A simple syllable is one which ends in a vowel, either pure or impure. 



24 §§35 41. SYLLABICATION. 

position (§33), but n?2 with a pure short one. If the student can dis- 
cover, whether the vowel is pure or not, he of course can determine the 
quantity. Experience only, with a knowledge of etymology and ana- 
logy, will enable him to do this ; nor is it usually at all difficult, after 
a moderate progress in the language.] 

§ 35. The student will see, by Table No. IV., that Seghol is reck- 
oned both to the first and second class of vowels. The reason is, that 
it is often put in the place of Qamets and Pattahh, as well as ex- 
changed with Tserij and so it is treated as belonging to both classes. 
Compare § 19. 

Syllabication as affected by the Vowels. 

§ 36. Pure long vowels naturally stand in a simple 
syllable ; they are employed in a mixed one, only when 
it is accented. 

E. g. *iyj da-bhdr, H2E7 she-nd; W shen, vtiip^ yiq-tol. 

§37. The same is true of the quiescent long vowels, 

§ -SI, B* 

E. g. K? ba, DN|J qam ; nb} g de } I s ! ben ; ^ U, ^ n ir ; ft 15, 
'V qol; ^Eftp qu-mu, Mp qum. 

§ 38. But daghesKd vowels (§ 31. b), long by nature 
or position, can stand only in a simple syllable. 

E. g. Tjn2 bd-rekh, brjp. ne-hal, T^a bo-ralch ; bnS, DTO, YTT) ; 
all with the first vowel impure and daghesh'd. 

§ 39. The short vowels stand either in a mixed or 
simple syllable; see § 34. Note 1. 

§ 40. Much the greater number of syllables not final 
in Hebrew, end in a vowel. Very few mixed syllables 
(not final) have long vowels in them. 

§ 41. Qibhuts vicarious is nothing more than a mere 
expedient for representing Shureq when the Vav falls 
out ; and it may be either in a simple, or in a mixed 
syllable. 

E. g. ^ qu-mu, i. q. ^P ; btt|7 qd-tul, i. q. VltDjJ. In a mixed 

syllable (e. g. vE)) it appears like Qibbuts short, and only a knowledge 

of the nature of Hebrew forms can determine the quantity. 

General Remarks. No theory of the Hebrew vowels has ever yet been 
broached, which is not liable to some objections. Almost all beginners complain of 



§§ 42—44. sheva. 25 

this part of Hebrew Grammar as complicated and difficult. It is somewhat so ; and 
yet far less so than the vowels in our own mother tongue, or in the Greek language. 
The relation of long and short with respect to Hebrew vowels, is for us more a matter 
of theory than of practice. In this light, however, it is very important to the student, 
who, without understanding this theory well, cannot analyze with satisfaction or suc- 
cess great numbers of changes in the forms of Hebrew words. Hebrew grammars in 
general have not at all recognised the fact, that both Quiescents and suppressed da- 
ghesh'd letters coalesce with the preceding vowel and lengthen it and make it impure, 
on principles which are in all important respects substantially the same. The prin- 
ciple at the basis of every possible case of this nature is very simple, viz. thai a con- 
sonant suppressed in sound, finds its equivalent in the preceding vowel by augmenting its 
length. That Quiescents and Gutturals are, in general, the only classes of letters 
which are subject to the law of suppression, belongs to the nature of the language. 
The developement of facts respecting these phenomena, belongs to grammar. But, as 
before intimated, whether a long vowel (Qamets for example) was any longer when 
it included a Quiescent, than when it included a daghesh'd letter, (e. g. ^S 9 TfHS) ; 
or whether Qamets in "H^S was any longer than Pattahh impure and long in ^H2 ■ 
and many other questions of the like nature ; we have no means of certainly deter- 
mining, nor is it necessary to determine such questions. If a student understands 
well the distinction between pure and impure vowels, and between long and short 
ones, he need not trouble himself to inquire how long the Hebrews dwelt on the 
sounds of the one or the other. If he complains that the system is complicated, he 
will remember that this belongs to the language ; therefore he should not charge it 
upon Hebrew grammar, which does no more than to state facts as they are. 



SHEVA. 

§ 42. The Hebrews never amalgamated two or more consonant- 
sounds together, (as we do in plan, stripe, shrink, etc.), except at the 
end of a word; and even then very rarely, and never to the extent of 
more than two letters. In a multitude of cases they even supplied a 
furtive vowel in the final syllable of words, in order to shun the amal- 
gamation of two consonants ; e. g. for "}?C? sephr, they wrote and read 
*1pD se-pher. Still they admit, in a few cases, such forms as ^T^i"? 
qa-talt. 

§ 43. When two consonants begin a syllable they are 
not combined in one sound, but a very short vowel, i. e. 
a kind of half-vowel, is supplied, after the first letter, in 
order to smooth the transition to the second letter. 
This is called Sheva, mtf . 

Note. Instead of saying bra, bre, by one impetus of voice as we 
do, the Hebrews pronounced b e ra, b p re, i. e. with a short vowel-sound 
between the two consonants. 

§ 44. Shevas usually mark either the beginning or 
the end of syllables. 

Note. The only exception is a Sheva on the penult letter of a word,, 
whose final syllable ends with two consonants, as ^\7^P r qa-talt. 

D 



26 §§ 45 — 48. sheva vocal and silent. 

§ 45. (a) All syllables beginning with two conso- 
nants,, have a Sheva (either simple or composite) under 
the first of them, (b) All syllables ending with one or 
two vocal consonants, take a Sheva simple (either ex- 
pressed or implied) under them. 

§ 46. All Shevas at the beginning of syllables are 
vocal, i. e. are sounded ; all Shevas at the end are silent. 
Hence result the following rules ; viz. 

Sheva Vocal. 

(a) Such are the composite Shevas ; because they are always placed 
at the beginning of a syllable (b) Simple Sheva, after a simple syl- 
lable; as ^P,? la-medha. (c) After another Sheva; as ^Pf- V 1 ^' 
medhu. But if the second Sheva be at the end of a word, it is not 
vocal ; as ^"JyJ la-mddht ; see i below, (d) Under a letter at the be- 
ginning of a word, as *TE? Umbdh. (e) Under a letter with Daghesh 
forte expressed; as **n^7 lim-m€dhu = ^^'Ql , § 71* (f) Under a 
letter in which a Daghesh forte is implied; as ^VH (=^V»3) hdl-Ulu 
or perhaps ha-Ulii, not read as ^n hdl-lu. 

f Note. The common maxim of grammarians in regard to the case 
f, is, that " Sheva is always vocal when under a letter which is imme- 
diately repeated." This is evidently incorrect; e. g. TTJH heir-re (not 
har-rere), " 1 55? libh-bhe (not lib-bebhe), and so /?70 (plur. const, of 
V?n) j s hhal-le, not hhal-lele. On the contrary, ^yn reads hdl-Ulu, 
because it belongs to a Daghesh'd form of the verb '1^}, and the Da- 
ghesh is omitted merely from the frequent usage of rejecting it from a 
letter when it would be immediately followed by a vocal Sheva ; see 
§ 73. Note 3. Some knowledge of Hebrew forms is necessary, in order 
to distinguish such cases.] 

Sheva Silent. 

(g) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable; as ""^fl yil-modh. 
(h) After a long vowel in a mixed tone-syllable; as n2~p7.n til-modh-nd. 
(i) Two Shevas at the end of a word are both silent ; -^"Jy? la-mddht. 

§ 47- The form of all the Shevas is exhibited fully by Table IV. 
No. IV. The composite Shevas are so called, because each is made 
by a union of Sheva with one of the short vowels; as is evident from 
inspection. 

§ 48. The quantity of all the Shevas is, at least in 



§§ 48 52. SHEVA SILENT. 27 

theory, the same ; i. e. none of them is considered as a 
proper vowel. 

E. g. 1p9 peqodh, ^11 z a hdbh, **M s e Ze, ^n M°Z?, are all con- 
sidered as monosyllabic. What practical difference between the 
length of these sounds existed amongst the Hebrews, cannot now be 
determined, 

§ 49. The composite Shevas belong appropriately to 
the Gutturals, and are commonly used under them in- 
stead of simple Sheva. 

Note. No definite rules can be given as to the kind of Sheva 
under the respective Gutturals, for usage varies them in different words 
which have the same letters, and in different positions. In general, 
T\, Jl, V, at the beginning of words take (_.) ; but S takes (...). 

§ 50. Gutturals (and other letters) which take a com- 
posite Sheva, must always begin a syllable. A Guttural 
which ends a Syllable, must, like the other consonants, 
take Sheva simple ; for there is no other silent Sheva. 

E. g. *F$f®& ska-may-ti, ^HJ yehh-ddl njitj yeh-ge, TD*g yetf-sor. 

[_k 51. The composite Shevas (_.) and ( T .) occur, not unfrequently, 
under most of the other consonants besides Gutturals ; e. g. ^HT 
z a habh, c ^7i?: q°dha-shhn, etc. But (...) is limited to Gutturals. 

Note. No uniform rules can be given for such cases. The general 
principle seems plainly to be, a design to mark the letter which takes 
a composite Sheva, as having a real vocal Sheva; and consequently 
to advertise the reader, that the preceding vowel is not to attach 
to itself the letter to which the Sheva belongs; e. g. ^Hfi u-z a habh, not 
uz-habh; "7J5H hd-bh a ra-kha, not Mbh-ra-kha ; Tjb^ri ti-mHokh, 
not tim-lokh. There can scarcely be a doubt, that all such Shevas as 
these are designed only to designate some peculiar niceties practised 
in oral enunciation. They cannot be considered as belonging to the 
essential forms of words ; nor can they be reduced to rule.] 

§ 52. It is a general principle, that all moveable con- 
sonants * not immediately followed by a vowel, must 
have a Sheva of some kind, either expressed or implied. 

At the end of words in general, Sheva is not usually expressed but 
only implied; e.g. Ej7 qd m, the same as ^^.. The exceptions to this 

* A moveable consonant is one which is sounded, and does not quiesce or coalesce. 



28 §§ 52 54. COALESCENCE OF VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. 

rale are, (1) In a final Kaph ; as "^D. (2) When the final syllable 
ends with two consonants; as J\!T?J la-madht ; but here, in case the 
penult consonant is a Guttural, this consonant takes a Pattahh furtive 
instead of a Sheva simple ; see § 233. Note. 

Note 1. The Quiescents, when they coalesce witjj the preceding 
vowel, have no Sheva. Whenever these letters have a Sheva, they are 
to be regarded as moveable consonants. 

Note 2. When a word ends with two consonants, of which the first 
is a Quiescent, usage is various as to Sheva under the final letter ; 
e. g. we find both nS3 and 0^2. 

General Remarks. There can be but little doubt, that the composite Shevas were more dis- 
tinctly sounded than the simple ones. Hence their application to the Gutturals, which peculiarly 
needed more vowel aid to enounce them than other consonants. Hence too their use in regard 
to other letters, for the sake of more distinct pronunciation; § 51. Note. But the niceties of 
living vernacular pronunciation are now lost; most of them no more to be recalled. Present 
general usage among Hebrew scholars, is all that is aimed at in this grammar. 



COALESCENCE OF VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. 

To such a coalescence, the preceding explanations have rendered it necessary to advert. It 
must now be more fully explained. 

§ 53. The sound of the quiescent letters, n, R, \ \ 
being feeble, (specially at the end of a syllable,) they 
always coalesce with the vowel-sound which precedes 
them, in case they have no vowel of their own, nor any 
Sheva expressed or implied ; i. e. such coalescence takes 
place, provided that such vowel-sound is homogeneous *. 

§ 54. The following table exhibits the coalescence of the respective 
Quiescents, with their homogeneous vowels. 

Aleph (n) quiesces in Qamets (=) as in $% ba. 

- Tseri (-) - - 0*n resh. 

- Seghol (-) - - rurcaian tim-tse-na. 

- Hholem(-) ">?N S yo-mer. 

Yodh 0) — - Tseri (-) - - r? ben. 

- Seghol (-) - - W| ge. 

- Hhireq ( T ) - - H din. 



* That vowel sound is called homogeneous, which is adapted to coalesce with the Quiescents 
respectively; that is called heterogeneous, which is not adapted to coalesce. 



^ 54 56. COALESCENCE OF VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. 29 

Vav Q) quiesces in Hholem (-) as in b)p qol. 

- Shureq (-I) D-lp qum. 

He (n) — - Qamets (-) r6| gJa. 

- Tseri (-) - - rfta gt le. 

- Seghol (-) n?ii go-le. 

- Hholem (-) rnii ga-lo. 

In English we have a multitude of cases similar to these ; e. g. low, s7ww, etc., -with w quies- 
cent ; say, day, etc., with y quiescent. Almost every letter in our alphabet is, in some situations, 
quiescent before or after some other letter. 

Note 1. There are some other cases besides those presented in the 
above Table, of which quiescence has been affirmed by most gram- 
marians ; e. g. ptCSH ri-slion, fifinjp? liq-ratk, «"nM3 pu-ra. But 
here S is otiant, and does not quiesce in Hhireq, Pattahh, and Qib- 
buts; and so elsewhere; see § 118 with the Notes. 

Note 2. Although the Hholem is written over the 1, as in i ; and 
the Shureq is written in it, as *1 ; yet in both cases these vowels usually 
belong to the preceding consonant ; e. g. in vSp to the p, in Dip to the 
p. Cases like V® yd-von occur; but they are easily distinguished, 
because the letter preceding the 1 has then a vowel of its own, inde- 
pendently of that connected with the 1. 

§ 55. The sound of the Quiescents, in case of coa- 
lescence, is not lost, but united with the preceding vowel ; 
so that it makes such vowel protracted. 

§ 56. The Ehevi (in**) retain their proper consonant 
power, i. e. do not quiesce, (1) Always at the beginning 
of a syllable. 

E. g. 1E*J &a-mar, EH hem, "T^J yd-lddh, T?1 ve-ledh. 

(2) Always when they end a syllable, in case they 
have a simple Sheva under them, either expressed or 
implied. 

E. g. ib^J yetf-sor, T^H?. neh-pakh, ^f?H? sha-lav-ti, s n hhdy, 
1p qdv. In the two last cases, the Sheva is implied, i. e. ^Hr^n^ and 
"112== *]p; see §52. 

(3) Usually, when preceded by a heterogeneous vowel. 

E. g. 1*3 tdv, 1p qdv, V^ shd-lev, 1? ziv, ^n hhdy, *>ia goy, ^'3 
gd-luy, D*j? qdy-yem, DJp qdv-vdm, etc. In all cases of this kind, it 



30 §§ 56 — 58. otium of the ehevi, etc. 

is easy to judge whether the Ehevi quiesce or are moveable, by the 
nature of the preceding vowel. See further on the Quiescents> § 115, 
seq. 

Note 1. In the middle of a word, the Ehevi are always marked 
with a Sheva in case they are moveable ; at the end of a word, as Sheva 
is not written (§ 52), one must judge from the nature of the vowel 
which precedes, whether the Ehevi are quiescent or not. 

Note 2. In the middle of words, all the Ehevi not unfrequently 
resist coalescence, i. e. remain moveable. He (n) always resists it, 
when in such a condition ; and M sometimes, even when the vowel is 
adapted to coalescence. At the end of words, all the Ehevi generally 
(not all of them uniformly) coalesce, unless the preceding vowel is 
heterogeneous. Compare § 119. b. § 120. b. 121. b. 

Otium of the Ehevi. 

§57. There are some cases, in which the Ehevi are 
neither moveable consonants, nor coalescent with pre- 
ceding vowels. They are then said to be otiant, (in 
otio, otiantur). 

This happens in the following cases, viz. (a) When preceded by 
silent Sheva; as N^n nn ^ t) \^s tffit. (b) Preceded by a Quiescent; 
as JIN'On he '- b he -t ha, with S otiant. (c) Followed by Daghesh forte ; 
as rtJTTTO ?ndz-ze—'i~l'?.'fi . (d) Yodh preceded by Qamets and fol- 
lowed by 1 with a Sheva implied, is otiant ; as "^"J^I debhd-rdv, where 
Sheva is implied under the final 1, § 52. 

Note. In such cases the otiant letter is mostly (not always) retained, out of regard to ortho- 
graphy, and to indicate the etymology of the word. So in a multitude of cases in English, we 
have otiant vowels ; as in honour, hear, moan, etc. 

Coalescence with Vowels of Dagheslid letters omitted. 

§58. The Gutturals and Resh scarcely ever admit 
Daghesh, i. e. reduplication ; § 71- §111. In cases where 
by analogy they ought to be doubled but are not, the 
letter omitted by excluding the Daghesh, coalesces with 
the preceding vowel and lengthens it; § 31 b. § 33. 

E. g. V??] hd^a-rets, instead of VT^n hatf-tfa-rets ; "1$N> ye- 
Rd-mer, instead of *"lp*^ yi^-^a-mer; ^H? bd-hel, with Pattahh im- 
pure (§ 33), instead of 'HI? bah-hel ; 'HS bi-liel with Hhireq impure 
(*§ 33), instead of ^HS bih-hel ; E^nW &a-hhim with Pattahh impure 
(§ 33), instead of E^HW ^dhh-hlum ; EH3 ni-hhdm with Hhireq impure 
(§ 33), instead of DHD nihh-hhdm ; 13?? bd-yer (§ 33), instead of IT? 



§§ 59 — 61. ORTHOGRAPHY OF VOWELS. 31 

baV-Ver ; E37E me-Vim, instead of Q*3?E miy-Vim ; ?T"]5 be-rekh, in- 
stead of "JT7}21 bir-rekh; TH^ ba-rekh, instead of "*!"?]? bar-rekh, etc. 
Comp. § 111. § 112. 

Note. In regard to this usage it is plain, that an excluded daghesh'd 
letter lengthens the quantity of the preceding vowel ; for in some cases 
this is expressed by using a vowel long by nature instead of a short 
one, as "HT!^ f° r *T»? • When in other cases the form of a doubtful 
vowel remains, the quantity of it is of course long, § 33. 

To give reasons why a doubtful vowel is at one time used, and at another a vowel long by na- 
ture before the Gutturals excluding Daghesh, is out of our power. See § 31. b. Note 2. 

[§ 59. Some other letters occasionally omit Daghesh, 
with a similar effect (for the most part) on the preceding 
vowel. 

E. g. ^7?J vd-yeht, instead of ^H*! vay-yehi. But it is doubtful how 
such cases as ^Hpl (for •inp')) were read ; i. e. whether they were pro^ 
nounced yi-qehhu or yiq-hhu. The probability is, that there was a 
variety of pronunciation ; for some of them are marked with a Methegh 
(§ 85), as > n^J (for "TOl); some with composite Sheva, as n nji"£? lu- 
q°hha (for nnp7) ; both of which show that the first syllable is to be 
read as a simple one, vd-yeht, lu-q°hha ; and so of others like them. 
But some words have neither of these marks, e. g. ^np"! (for ^ n iT.) ; 
and in such cases they are probably to be read as ^Hpl yiq-hhu, etc. 
The omission of Daghesh, in all such instances, seems to have respect 
only to the niceties of pronunciation in regard to a few words; which 
niceties the Punctators strove to express. It does not belong to the 
essential form of words.] 

ORTHOGRAPHY OF VOWELS. 

§ 60. The two first classes of vowels are all written 
under the consonants ; see table No. IV. Of the third 
class, Qibbuts also is written under them ; but Hholem 
is written over, and Shureq in them. Qamets, however, 
is written in the bosom of a final Kaph. 

E. g. *F kha. 

§ 61. The proper place of a vowel is under or over the middle, or 
(as they are now printed) the right side, of a consonant. Shureq is al- 
ways written after the consonant to which it belongs, i. e. in the bosom 
of the following 1 . Hholem is commonly written over the right side of 
the letter next following that to which it belongs, as D-H torn, vip qdl; 
but sometimes necessity prevents this, e. g. in V^IP, where the type will 



32 §§ 62 64. ORTHOGRAPHY OP THE VOWELS. 

not admit such a disposition of the Hholem. Hholem, when it follows 
N, is commonly written over its left side, as ^5^ ; but not if followed 

by i, as VlS. 

§ 62. The diacritical point over & and ttf often coin- 
cides with Hholem; in which case it. serves the double 
purpose of marking the vowel and of distinguishing the 
letter. 

(1) Sin (W) beginning a syllable, is read so ; e. g. HJtt? so-ne. (2) xfi 
following a consonant that has no vowel, contains a Hholem for that 
consonant, and also marks sh ; e. g. T1W72 mo-she. (3) W with two 
points beginning a syllable, is read sho ; e. g. *"iptB sho-mer. (4) tE7 
with two points ending a syllable, is read os ; e. g. tPS'T. yir-pos. 

Note. Vav (l) with a Hholem over it and a vowel under it, is joined 
as a moveable consonant with the vowel under it ; e. g. H17 /o-ve, 
nj»T yeho-va, the Hholem belonging to the preceding letter. 

Vowels in connection with the Quiescents. 

§ 63. As the Ehevi or Quiescents drop their distinct 
consonant-sound in coalescence (§ 53) ; and the words 
with vowel-points are sounded in the same manner, 
whether the Quiescents are omitted or inserted (§31. a. 
Note 1) ; so, in practice, they are often omitted. 

Note. Words in which the Quiescents are inserted, are said to be 
written fully ; those in which they are omitted, to be written defec- 
tively. In both cases, the pronunciation and quantity of the vowels 
remain the same ; as the following example will show. 

Written fully. Written defectively. Read. 

vwba vftn ma-U-thi. 

T^ *"12 nzr. 

V»p Vp qol. 

D^jJ DD|7 qd-mus. 

§ 64. There are some cases in which Vav and Yodh (particularly 
the former) are inserted, when they are not proper Quiescents, and 
have no influence on the sound or the nature of the vowel. In all 
these cases, they are considered as mere orthographic Fulcra. 

E. g. TlB?^ the same as ^y>\ y'il-mddh ; ^^ D , the same as ^SD 
so-bhbeh; "'ijpn, the same as ^.H hhiiq-qe; comp, § 31. a. Notes 2. 3. 

In all probability such forms sprung from the practice of employing Vav and Yodh as vowel- 
letters, §'15. How to distinguish such cases from those where Vav and Yodh are employed as 
true Quiescents, etymology only can teach ; and with a knowledge of this, it is very easy. 



§§ 65, 66. ORTHOGRAPHY OF QA3IETS HHATEPH. 33 

§ 65. No certain rule can be given for the insertion or omission of 
Quiescents, when there is a real coalescence. More generally, when 
two syllables are immediately connected in both of which there is a 
Quiescent, the first syllable omits it; e. g. P^?, E^iH?. But instances 
of a contrary usage also exist; e. g. riblp==rnb ; lp; and sometimes 
both Quiescents are omitted, as D#b$ for D^tf ; so 12 for 1^ , etc. 
Even the same word is variously written ; e. g. Vl'Wprj ? TJIDpry , 
Vjb^prj, Tjbpn, all pronounced h a qz-mo-thi. 

Orthography of Qamets Hhatepk. 

From No. IV. in the Table of Vowels it appears, that Qamets Hhateph (short o) has the 
same form with Qamets, viz. ( T ). It is important, therefore, to point out how they may be dis- 
tinguished. 

I. Qamets Khateph in a mixed syllable. 

§ 66. (a) The figure ( T ) followed by simple Sheva 
without any Methegh between, is short O, if in a syllable 
not accented. 

E. g. HBpn hhokh-ma, not hha-khema. But with a Methegh it 
reads thus, ^^ft hha-khema. With an accent it reads as Qamets; 
e. g. •"^.1? mav-ta, ^V2? shdv, H^ b lay-la. For an account of the 
Methegh, see § 85. 

[[Note. There are some few cases where Methegh does not distin- 
guish Qamets from short 0; e. g. riia'QHjT dor-bho-nolh, not dhd-rebho- 
noth; so ??"")(£ qor-bdn, not qd-rebhdn; TIP?? shom-rd, not shd-merd. 
But in these and the like cases, manuscripts and editions vary as to the 
Methegh, whicli must be considered as irregular here. Of course, ety- 
mology only can settle the true pronunciation in doubtful cases.] 

(b) When followed by a letter with a Daghesh forte, 
in a syllable not accented ( T ) is short o. 

E. g. D^-HS bot-tim, ^2n hhon-ne-ni. If the syllable is accented, 
> i> 

it is read as long A ; e. g. !"TEP ydm-md, n^S^ lam-md, etc. 

[[Note. A euphonic Daghesh (§ 75, seq.) at the beginning of a 
word, does not make short of the ( T ) belonging to the last syllable of 
the preceding word ; it remains long A still ; e. g. 121 ^J??^, read slid- 
khdn-tab-bo. But this is merely a euphonic matter, and is contrary to 
the laws of the language in general. 

Note 2. A Methegh after ( T ) does not in this case always denote 
long A ; e. g. Q^^i? bot-te-khem, not bd-te-khem. See the note under 
a above, where the principle is the same. Etymology only can deter- 
mine such cases.] 

E 



34 §§ 67 — 69. PATTAHH FURTIVE, 

(c) The figure ( T ) in a final mixed syllable unaccented, 
is short 0. 

E. g. d lJt- vdy-yd-qom, with accent on the penult. With accent 
on the ultimate, as in ET^H ha-tfd-dhdm, the ( T ) ultimate is long A. 

Remark. All the cases, a, b, c, are virtually one and the same, 
i. e. they are all cases of ( T ) in a mixed unaccented syllable; e. g. 
H??n hhokh-md, E\n:n — D\Fim bot-tim, ^1 = 'Q?}^.vdij-yd-qdm, 
all virtually the same as the case exhibited under the letter a above. 

II. Qamets Hhateph in a simple syllable. 

§ 67. The figure ( T ) is short O in a simple syllable, 
(a) When Qamets Hhateph, i. e. short O, immediately 
follows. 

E. g. rf?y$ po-ydl-khd, ^^lJ qo-tobh-kha. Here a Methegh al- 
ways stands after the first short o. 

Note. But there are cases here, where etymology only can distin- 
guish the true vowel ; e. g. ^^ T qd-ton-nl (with Methegh according 
to § 87* e) ; not qo-ton-ni, because the root is ]^rj qa-ton. 

(b) When the composite Sheva, Hhaceph Qamets (;.), 
immediately follows. 

E. g. ibgg pd-y°lo, ^ng bo-hliri. Methegh always stands after 
the ( T ) here also. 

[[Note. Etymology alone can determine the reading in some of 
these cases. E. g. n ^T?Vf ha-Vfniy-ya, because ^J is the article (§ 162. 
§ 152. a. 2) ; H^S? bd-tf niy-ya, because ^ nas the article included 
in it (§ 152. Note) ; ^^S5 bo-^my-yd, because ^ is the simple pre- 
position S , § 139. 

§ 68. The nouns bghttf sho-ra-shim (from B^fr"), and ^tthf? qo- 
dhd-shim (from E?7FP) are altogether anomalous in their reading.] 

PATTAHH FURTIVE. 

§ 69. This is a short Pattahh, employed for the sake 
of ease and euphony, when a word has either of the 
Gutturals, PT, n, yr, at the end of its final syllable, pre- 
ceded by a long vowel not of the A class. 

E. g. *!P^2 ga-bho a h, TVD ru a hh, ^D re a ^. In order to pronounce 
these, lay the stress of the voice on the proper vowel, and just touch 
the Pattahh ; somewhat as a in the English words trial, vial, etc. The 



§§ 70 73. DAGHESH FORTE. 35 

furtive Pattahh is sounded before the final consonant. As it is merely 
a euphonic help, and belongs not to the essential form of the word ; so 
it falls away, as soon as the syllable in which it stands changes its rela- 
tive position; e. g. TVTL ru a hh, plur. rhnTI ru-hhoth. 

Note. Aleph, when at the end of a word, never takes Pattahh fur- 
tive. Pattahh furtive is seldom employed unless the vowel that imme- 
diately precedes it is of an immutable nature. When it is mutable, the 
usual method is to exchange it for a common Pattahh, in which case 
Pattahh furtive is superseded; comp. § 113. notes 1, 2. 

DAGHESH. 

§ 70. Daghesh (^7) * s a P°i n t in the bosom of a 
letter. It serves two purposes ; (1) To double a letter. 
(2) To remove its aspiration. 

§ 71. When Daghesh serves to double the letter in 
which it is written, it is called Daghesh forte. When it 
only removes aspiration, it is called Daghesh lene. 

Note. For another peculiar kind of Daghesh forte, called Daghesh 
euphonic, see § 75. 

/. Daghesh forte. 

§ 72. (a) Daghesh forte distinguished from Daghesh 
lene, The former is never written in the final letter of a 
word, unless such letter has a vowel ; nor in the first 
letter, (although Daghesh euphonic appears here) ; and 
it is always immediately preceded by a vowel-sound. 

Note. This last circumstance separates it entirely from Daghesh 
lene ; which is preceded immediately by a silent Sheva. If at any 
time a vowel immediately precedes a Daghesh lene, that vowel must 
be at the end of a preceding word, and this word have a disjunctive 
accent (§ 93). Comp. § 79. 3. 

§ 73. (b) Orthography of Daghesh forte. When the 
same letter is to be repeated, and the first one takes a 
silent Sheva, it is the usual practice to designate it by 
the point Daghesh forte ; e. g. b®\)=btoto$ qit-tel. 

[[Note 1 . Still there are many cases of a different orthography, which 
may be called plenary. E. g. iV?E tsil-lo, instead of "&? ; E"H^ 



36 §^ 73 75. DAGHESH FORTE EUPHONIC. 

for EMtth yeshod-dem, etc. ; particularly in derived forms of words, 
as f"lV?,7 (not rft»J?) from n Y?f7, etc., in which cases Daghesh forte is 
not used. 

Note 2. If the /?-s£ of the two letters must have a Sheva vocal, 
Daghesh forte is excluded ; e. g. C^bb^ yd-hlim, not °^ dl-lim.^ 

Note 3. Practice not unfrequently omits Daghesh forte, when it 
would be immediately followed by a vocal Sheva, in case it were in- 
serted ; e. g. ^HiT yiq-hhu, instead of WiyP. yiq-qehhu. Particularly is 
Daghesh omitted in such cases, if another letter of the same kind im- 
mediately follows ; as lV?n ha-hlii (not hal-lu) because the word 
stands for ^ibbn ; which can be known, however, only by etymology. 
Comp. § 46./. Note. 

£Note 4. Shureq is written in the same manner as Daghesh forte, 
in the letter i; e. g. si. But is easily distinguished. When the pre- 
ceding letter has no vowel, the point stands for Shureq ; when it has 
one, it stands for Daghesh forte ; e. g. D r ip is read qum, but EJI? is 
sounded qiv-vdmr\ 

[§ 74. (c) Division of Daghesh forte. (1) It is com- 
pensative, i. e. it merely supplies a letter omitted in the 
writing. 

E. g. rana na-thdn-nu for ^^3, XDl\ fig-gash for tfel (§ 107. a), 
where 3 is assimilated. 

(2) Characteristic, i. e. it distinguishes the particular 
form of a word. 

E. g. bi2)J7, the form of the conjugation Piel, in distinction from 
'^)J the form in Kal, 

Note. In ^N at, probably for J 1 )?**; D^tp sheta-yhn, for E\m^27; 
and such cases as ^H$ ka-rcit, for ■^01? ; the Daghesh in the Tav is 
properly compensative, although in a peculiar way.] 

Daghesh forte Euphonic. 

§ 75. All those kinds of Daghesh forte which are 
merely occasional, and have respect only to peculiar 
modes of reading in particular cases, are thus named. 

Of these there are three kinds ; (a) Daghesh conjunctive. So the 
first species of euphonic Daghesh may be named. It is frequently in- 
serted in the initial consonant of a word, when it is preceded by a 
vowel unaccented. E. g. "*? ^T 1 *? qa-ri-thal-li, njTTD m ciz-ze = '^ : >^ , 
TSlTjDnj ye-hh e seb-bo. The vowels Qamets, Pattahh, and Seghol, are 



§§ 76 79. DAGHESH LENE. 37 

almost the only ones employed before Daghesh conjunctive. Some- 
times examples are found like ^^ ^P^p, qu-muts-ts&u. Daghesh 
conjunctive is frequent, especially in the Psalms. It is rarely found 
after words with an accent on the ultimate ; and where it is so, the 
reading is doubtful. 

§ 7& (b) Daghesh affectuosum. This is a euphonic Daghesh, some- 
times inserted in the penult letter of a word, when the tone falls on the 
penult syllable of the same; e. g. ^^Ttrj hlid-dhel-lu, instead of ^^"l^J 
hha-dhdu ; IRHi ye-hhdt-tu, instead of r ^H^.. It were better to call 
this, Daghesh accented. The object of it seems to be, to create a 
penult syllable on which the voice can rest, without the intervention 
of a Sheva before the final syllable. 

§ 77- (c) Daghesh acuting. This appears in some cases where a 
letter would by analogy have a Sheva silent ; and it both doubles the 
letter, and makes Sheva vocal; e. g. rj~?^? Rek-kere-kd, instead of 
rrpW Kehh-re-ha; la^Sfn for i2 N 9?n, Ex.' ii. 3. 

BemarJi. In all cases of euphonic Daghesh, the manner of reading only is concerned ; not 
the essential forms of words. The Daghesh of this kind is merely an attempt to preserve some 
niceties of pronunciation.] 

II. Daghesh lene. 

§ 78. Daghesh lene belongs only to the Aspirates *W2 
J133 (Bfghadh ktphath) ; and when inserted, it is a sign 
that they are to be pronounced without any aspiration, 
i. e. without an A-sound. 

E. g. n is bh, but S = b ; D = kh, 2 = h, etc. See Alphabet, No. II. 

Note 1 . Daghesh forte also appears in the Aspirates, as often as 
in other letters. But it is easily distinguished from Daghesh lene ; for 
Daghesh forte is always preceded by a vowel belonging to the letter 
immediately before it ; while the preceding letter has a silent Sheva 
under it, in case the Daghesh is lene ; or if such preceding letter have 
a proper vowel, this vowel has a disjunctive accent upon it (§ 93), and 
belongs to a preceding word; § 79. 3. 

Note 2. Daghesh forte in an Aspirate, not only doubles it, but also 
(by usage in pronunciation) removes the aspiration ; e. g. ^?^ t^djj-pl, 
not *i,aph-pi, although when written out in full it would seem to be the 
latter, as ^SS?^ . Ease of enunciation demands the doubling of the 
letter without the aspiration. 

General rules for the insertion of Daghesh lene. 

§ 79. (1) It is inserted in all Aspirates . standing at 
the commencement of a chapter or verse. 



38 §§ 79 — 81. DAGHESH LENE. 

E. g. Gen. i. 1, in JTEJMna the Beth takes Daghesh lene; so at 
the beginning of a verse, Gen. iii. 5, ^2 ki (not ^ kht), etc. 

(2) In all cases, after a silent Sheva either expressed 
or implied. 

E. g. in -^71?? > Tav has a Daghesh lene after a silent Sheva ex- 
pressed; in N?S? 737, Pe has one after a Sheva implied under the b, 
§52. 

(3) When preceded by a vowel (either pure or im- 
pure) at the end of a word having a disjunctive accent, 
an Aspirate at the beginning of the word that follows, 
takes a Daghesh lene. 

E. g. Ps. i. 3, VS? ^t 5 !!* where the Kaph must be aspirated, were 
it not that the disjunctive accent (Rebhi a v) is on the preceding syl- 
lable HJ. And so of all the other Disjunctives; see the accents, 
§ 92, seq. 

General rules for the rejection of Daghesh lene. 

[§ 80. It is rejected, (a) When the Aspirates stand 
next after a vocal Sheva. (b) After a vowel either pure 
or impure, whether this vowel be within the same word, 
or at the end of a preceding one which has no dis- 
junctive accent upon it. 

E. g. Gen. i. 2, ^rfn Tlsl^, where the Tav in H/T^ follows a 
vocal Sheva p. ye) ; and in ^Vin thb-hu (not to-hu), the n follows a 
vowel with a quiescent letter, and that vowel is associated with a con- 
janctive accent (Merka), and consequently n remains aspirated. So 
after a composite Sheva; e. g. *^5, *S a bhodh (not ¥ a bodh), because 
such Sheva is always vocal, § 46. a. 

Note. In cases where a mere Pattahh furtive precedes an Aspirate, 
it takes Daghesh lene; e. g. ^HlTj la-qa a hht, so written instead of 
nnflb; §233, Note.] 

Usual Exceptions to the general rules. 

Etymology and special usage have made many exceptions to these 
general rules. 

Q 81. (1) An Aspirate in the middle of a word, which is derived 
by inflection from a form of the same word that excluded Daghesh 
lene, also excludes it. 

E. g. ^T? ridh-phu (not y&fj) because the ground-form is *1"H, 



§§ 81, 82. DAGHESH LENE. 39 

where the Pe, being immediately preceded by a Hholem, cannot take 
a Daghesh lene, § 80. So ^bp mdl-khe, ground-form Qv?^ in 
which 3 is preceded by a vowel ; ^X^l ya-dz-bhu, ground-form 
- 1 *:?-, where 3, having a vowel before it, cannot receive Daghesh lene; 
Infinitive mode "T22J heghodh, and with suffix 1"p2 bigh-dho, because 
1 in the ground-form has a vowel before it. 

(2) Loose prefixes (which in fact are separate words) do not affect 
the insertion or omission of Daghesh lene, in respect to the second let- 
ter of any word when it is an Aspirate. 

E. g. ^H? with the preposition 2J prefixed, is written 2H32 bikh- 
thabh (not 2^?2) ; 1 S 03 with 3 prefixed, ^533 kikh-pkir, (not 
T«9); b«| with ^ b^b ligh-'bhul (not Vl2t}V). etc. 

Note 1. The Inf. mode with such a loose prefix, varies in its usage. 
E. g. TQD, Inf. ISP, with prefix *?, ispb Ih-podk; and such is the 
wore common usage. But we find also b33, Inf. bb^ with prefix ^, 
bQ?2 bhi'phol; with ?, bsp3 km-phol ; but with *?, ^Q^b Un-pol. 
Usage therefore is variable in regard to this mode. 

Note 2. But when the prefix is closely united to a word, so as to 
constitute (as it were) an essential part of the word itself, then the ge- 
neral rule (§ 79. 2) is followed ; e. g. iSPI yis-podh (not ^SPI ) Fut. of 
Kal from the root *"f?9 sa-phddh ; or (if you please) from the Inf. form 
iSP sephodh. So in Hiphil, b^tpn ftfcA-pi/ (not b^Stpn ), from bsttf 
In all such cases, the prefix is considered and treated as an essential 
and formative part of the word.] 

Particular Exceptions to the general rules. 

E§ 82. (1) Rejection of Daghesh lene. (a) The suffix pronouns, 
*F, a ?, I?) reject it (6) Generally, an Aspirate preceding the final 
syllable m ; as fVDbp , HTO, nVT^etc. ; but not always, as n^nn 
tar-but h. (c) The various forms of "TJ3 ; e. g. "n?2J, "H?5, etc. 

(2) Admission of it contrary to the general rales, (d) Some words 
beginning with two Aspirates, viz. 22, 22, 33; e. g. Jerem. iii. 25, 
^K?22 n23t£?a ; Ex. xiv. 17, n3n?4 njQgfcSV, Is.x.l9,^P^3:i? sb. 
In all such cases manuscripts and editions differ ; some extending the 
rule so as to begin with Daghesh lene in most cases v/here a word 
commences with two Aspirates, others scarcely observing such a rule 
at all (e. g. Michaelis' Hebrew Bible), (e) A few words which usage 
only has excepted from the general rule ; e. g. ^HP? from ^7^ , ^tp"] 
from D^ttH. (/) An apparent exception is an Aspirate after n 3 n<, : , 
which takes Daghesh lene. But the Hebrews read this word ^"TN. 
& a do-ndy, which ends in the consonant y having a silent Sheva.] 



40 §^ 83 — 85. RAPHE — MAPPIQ — METHEGH. 

Remark. The detail of Daghesh lene, as to some few words and forms, is not regulated by any 
established usage ; the Masora, the Rabbins, manuscripts, and editions, differing in respect to 
some particulars. But as nothing important in grammar depends on the insertion or omission of 
Daghesh in such cases, the student need not be perplexed if he occasionally meet with instances 
not conformed to the general principles. Mistakes in printing and transcribing have occasioned 
some of these anomalies ; and conceit has increased the number. 



RAPHE. 

§ 83. Raphe (p&l) means soft. It is a small parallel 
stroke of the same form as Pattahh, put over Aspirates, 
to show that they retain their aspiration ; e. g. I"™? 
kha-bhtdha ; and so it is directly the opposite of Da- 
ghesh lene. 

The printed editions of the Hebrew Scriptures have long ceased to 
use this sign, (which indeed is quite superfluous), with the exception of 
a very few solitary cases ; e. g. Judg. xvi. 16. 28; Num. xxxii. 42, in 
Van der Hooght. In ancient manuscripts it was very common ; and it 
was sometimes employed, moreover, to show that Daghesh forte was 
omitted ; sometimes, that Mappiq did not belong to n ; and sometimes, 
to note that W and n at the end of words were quiescent. 

MAPPIQ. 

§ 84. Mappiq (p??) is a point in the bosom of a 
final n, (which is almost always quiescent,) denoting 
that it is moveable. 

E.g. HJ yah (HJ would read yd) ; nsa gfi-bhah, (rQ«t must be 
written «"J!2| , and read gd-bha). 

Note. Mappiq is now used only in final n ; but in some Hebrew 
manuscripts it is found in the other Quiescents, denoting that they are 
moveable. 

METHEGH. 

§ 85. Methegh (^Q&) is a small perpendicular mark (,), 
preceding the tone-syllable more or less according to 
the various purposes for which it is employed, and de- 
noting a secondary or half-accent, analogous to that 
on the first syllable of our English words un dertake, 
nomination, etc. 



§§ 86, 87- METHEGH. 41 

The word Methegh (frcenum, retinaculum) denotes, when technically employed, a holding in 
or restraint of the voice, viz. in reading, (decora suspensio vocis) ; which of course gives a kind 
of halftone or accent to the syllable. It does not, like the other accents, relate to the connection 
of words with each other, but only to the manner of reading the syllable on which it is placed ; 
and is therefore of comparatively little importance to us. 

Note. The mark ( , ) on the last or on the penult syllable of a verse, 
is always the accent Silluq, not Methegh. 

Q§ 86. Manuscripts and editions differ widely as to the frequency 
of using Methegh ; the Spanish manuscripts exhibiting it very sparingly, 
the German ones very frequently. The Codex Cassel. scarcely has it 
at all. In regard to many cases, the Jewish grammarians themselves 
are not agreed about the use of it. Consequently there is much dis- 
crepancy respecting it in our best Hebrew Bibles.] 

Uniform or general use of Methegh. 

£§ 87- It is uniformly employed, (a) Before all the composite 
Shevas, when they are preceded by a vowel, (and is technically called in 
this case Tl^? ma-\A a rikh, i. e. prolong er); e. g. *TOT£!, ^IJ^S-j ^ ^VlS* 
^■?J., *PC?iv> etc. (b) Almost uniformly, in such cases, after the 
composite Sheva has fallen away by inflection, etc. ; e. g. ^^?,!, by in- 
flection VTQS^, preserving the Methegh ; (or this case may be ranked 
with e below), (c) After a long vowel next before the tone-syllable, and 
followed by a Sheva vocal ; e.g. H/TH, vj^ "^T^, ^Y^ ^i?| 
with Qibbuts vicarious, (d) The verbs H^n and <T}TJ> when they take 
formative or other prefixes with a short vowel, employ Methegh after 
such vowel; e. g. ^Hj? njTJJ , n ?. n ,l Imp. with 1 Gen. xii. 2, f^Tjl, 
etc., nearly without exception in good editions. In principle, this may 
be classed with h below. 

Very generally employed, (e) On the second syllable before 

< < 

the tone, where it is a simple one; as EIWH, If??*'?- (/) But if this 

be a mixed syllable, then on the third before the tone, provided it be 
simple; e. g. T^J, ]n57n^. (g) After a short vowel made long 
by position (§ 33), before a letter which excludes Daghesh forte either 
necessarily or arbitrarily ; as E^nn, CnTT^, n>»$]?, ?P.?}!, Hibn^ 
H^^P^, 2 K. ii. 11, etc. But this is sometimes neglected, as "JJ^nH; 
specially when Yodh with Sheva follows the vowel made long by 
omitting the Daghesh, e. g. 1'5^-j ^1?1-j etc - > an d commonly so, in 
regard to Hhireq, as Piel EPP, vn3, etc., without Methegh.] 

The qualifying terms, almost uniformly, very generally, will of course advertise the student 
that he is not to expect uniformity in the cases ranged under them. 

Occasional use of Methegh. 

\_ (k) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable (not made by Daghesh 
forte), especially after Pattahh and short Hhireq, Methegh is placed, 

F 



42 §§ 87- METHEGH. 

sometimes on the first, and sometimes on the second syllable before the 
tone ; e. g. on the first, as «^ , Hp"]? , &YV- , D^ntb , vpty , Is. 
x. 34, ^VjlJ, P s . Ixxvi. 12, ^Tjl, ^33^; with other short vowels, 
nSrjJ (d above), nln,^, r™$ s Aomra, 7?^^ gor6a?z, l^J c/dr&aw, 
^7^1? y a mddhkha,etc; on the second, as ^qj$#71, ^Si") >X DnqjT^, 
etc. The cases with other vowels than Pattahh or short Hhireq, are 
rare, (i) On the first syllable of a polysyllabic word, when this syllable 
ends with a daghesh'd letter ; e. g. PJ^JJ, *&&#% &$!%&, TW&fr 
etc. ; especially when the first letter is Vav conversive, Mem prefix, or 
He article.] 

Rare use of Methegh. 
[_(j) Very seldom, after a Vocal Sheva under the first letter; as 
H^\ } ^Htj? ? "^"jT; more rarely still, even before Sheva initial, as O^J-, 
Est. ix. 7 — 9, ten times. In these cases it is called Methegh initial; 
the older Jewish grammarians named it ^!J^, mugitus ; a name after- 
wards extended to Methegh generally.] 

Methegh before Maqqeph. 
[ (Z) The general principle is the same as if the two words joined by 
Maqqeph were one, (they being read as one) ; so that the above rules 
generally apply; e. g. ^"^g, e; frn^J, h; '^P?, e; "1^3 
V"7!^'7, 6, etc. (m) In many cases long monosyllables before Maqqeph 
take a Methegh (often otherwise), although a tone-syllable follows im- 
mediately, e. g. ^8"^?, *"fT"N^rj ; and even when it does not, and the 
monosyllable is a mixed one, as D"TH _ ^tp, etc. contrary to e. Short 
vowels before Maqqeph commonly reject Methegh; as f" 1 ^""^, etc.] 

Such are the numerous and very indefinite (not to say contradictory) principles for the use of 
Methegh. No wonder that no two editions or manuscripts agree in regard to it. Some of the 
very words employed here as examples, are differently marked in different editions. 

Note 1. The conjunction ^ (and) does not generally receive Me- 
thegh. 

Note 2. Several Metheghs may appear on the same word, if the 
diiferent rules for writing it should require them; e. g. ErT^§!^)r>, for 
the Methegh on S, see e above ; for that on £, see a. 

Note 3. Instead of Methegh, the conjunctive accents (especially 
Munahh, Qadma, and Merka, § 93) are frequently used, when a word 
has a distinctive upon it; e. g. ff^Sp^Jp with Munahh under a, in^ 
stead of E^lp^p with Methegh ; and so in very many cases. 



H 87 90. MAQQEPH READING OP THE HEBREW. 43 

MAQQEPH. 

§ 88. Maqqeph (*)i??)> somewhat like our hyphen, 
connects two words together, and makes them as one 
in respect to interpunction and reading. 

E. g. Q^t^n-nN, in-npnM . Usually either the former or latter 
word in cases of this nature, is short ; as in the examples produced. 

§ 89. The word before Maqqeph throws off its tonic 
accent ; and a long vowel in its final syllable is for the 
most part shortened, if pure. 

E. g. V^ST^' where ^¥ has no accent, Gen. i. 15. For the 
reason why the long vowels before Maqqeph (which removes the tone) 
are shortened, see § 36. § 129. a. But here, the punctators were not 
uniform ; for we have ^V\~ ^7. lebh-Ddvidh (not TH'jJ), and without 
Methegh too, in 1 Sam. xxiv. 6; but also E)^"2b lebh-tfish, 2 Kings, 
xii. 5 ; and thus in other cases. 

£Note 1. Maqqeph sometimes appears between several words in 
succession, as iv~lt^S"73"nN. Mostly it is employed only between 
words closely connected in sense, e. g. between prepositions and their 
nouns, words in regimen, etc. ; but its use is not confined to these, 
and it is very arbitrary in many cases, about which manuscripts and 
editions, and also Jewish grammarians and critics, disagree. In some 
few cases it stands after a polysyllabic word ; as na'Tjbni"}?]^ Gen. vi. 9. 

Note 2. Maqqeph might itself well be called a conjunctive accent 
sui generis, as it in most cases plainly supplies the place of a usual 
Conjunctive. E. g. the famous Jewish critics, Ben Asher and Ben 
Naphthali, disagree, in a multitude of cases, respecting the answer to 
the question, whether a Maqqeph or Conjunctive is to be be put on cer- 
tain words. It differs from other Conjunctives only in this, viz. that 
it usually causes the preceding long mutable vowel to be shortened. 
In like manner Pesiq, inserted between words, is reckoned a disjunc- 
tive accent, § 93. No. 20. 

RULES FOR READING HEBREW. 

§ 90. The principal difficulty is, to know where to begin and end 
a syllable. The following rules may aid the learner. 

1. Every syllable must begin with a moveable letter. 

Note. Vav with Shureq (3) in the beginning of words is the only 
exception, and is sounded u = oo in English. In "lEM &a-mdr, TOT 



44 ^§ 90. READING OF THE HEBREW. 

^d-mddh, etc., the M and 17 are moveable, although we do not sound 
them, because we know not what sound to give them. 

2. No syllable can have more than two moveable letters before its 
vowel ; and none admits more than one after its vowel, except a final 
syllable which may have two. 

3. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable, when followed by a let- 
ter which has a vowel belonging to it. 

4. Every short vowel in a mixed syllable, is followed by a simple 
Sheva expressed or implied, or by a Daghesh forte ; e. g. <V")2l bar-zel, 
in which the first syllable has a Sheva expressed, the second a Sheva 
implied; so ^W? lim-?nedh = ^^^l '. 

5. Every long vowel makes a mixed syllable, when followed by a 
simple Sheva expressed or implied, or by an implied Daghesh forte, 
provided such vowel be in a tone-syllable. E. g. E("J , qam ; VEny%p. 
yiq-tol-na, where the Hholem is in a mixed tone-syllable ; HSJ yam- 
?nd = '^^^; f^ ^eth, where Sheva is implied under the n. 

6. A long vowel, not in a tone-syllable, makes a simple syllable, 
though followed by a Sheva ; e. g. J ""?^ qd-teld, E S "!?S bo-gedhzm ; 
but not always so before a Maqqeph, as ^T^"^?. lebh-Davidh. 

7- Every vowel followed by a real Quiescent makes a simple syl- 
lable, provided the letter next after the Quiescent have a vowel be- 
longing to it, or the Quiescent stands at the end of a word. E. g. in 
rPtPSn re-shith, ^7? is a simple syllable, because the W which comes 
next after it has a vowel of its own ; in ^? bd-rd, W^ i s a final simple 
syllable. 

8. Every vowel followed by a real Quiescent makes a mixed syl- 
lable, if the next succeeding moveable letter is destitute of a vowel. 
E. g. in JT^WH re-shith ; iTH7 is a mixed syllable because n has no 
vowel of its own. But such syllables must always be tone-syllables ; 
excepting the very few cases where quiescent -1 is irregularly used in 
short syllables ; see § 31 . Note 3. 

9. Short vowels make a simple syllable, when the next succeeding 
letter has a vowel of its own. 

10. Every composite Sheva, and every simple Sheva vocal, stands 
of course at the beginning of a syllable, § 46. 

11. The vowels long by position, i. e. the doubtful vowels having a 
daghesh'd letter in them, always stand in a simple syllable. 

Exemplification of reading Hebrew. 
% 91. (1) Genesis i. 1, H^WTaj bere-shith ; 5 with Daghesh lene, 



§ 91. READING OF THE HEBREW. 45 

79. 1*; with Sheva under it, 45, and with Sheva vocal, 46. — M*n re, 
with a quiescent long vowel, 31 . a, quiescent in Aleph, 54. S- — H^tt? shith, 
with a quiescent vowel followed by quiescent Yodh, 54, •»•; n without 
any Sheva expressed, having one implied, 52 ; also without a Daghesh 
lene because it follows a vowel, 80. — f^tp is a mixed syllable, 90. 8. 

(2) ^"ijp ba-ra ; 2J with Daghesh lene because the preceding letter 
has a silent Sheva implied, 79. 2, 3 a simple syllable, 90. 3. — N*J ra, 
vowel protracted and impure, 31, a, S quiescent, 54. 

(3) E^rpM ^lo-him ; H with composite Sheva, 49, which is moveable 
46. a. — "b Id, simple syllable, 90. 3. — D^H him, with Yodh quiescent, 
54, and Hhireq impure and protracted, 31. a, and in a mixed syllable, 
90.8. 

(4) riM tfeth, 90. 5.— B}OB?n hash-sha-ma-yhn ; ^H Ms/i, this syl- 
lable comprising the *A which is made by the Daghesh forte in the XD 3 
71 and 73, also, 90. 4. — tp s/*a, 90. 3.—*? ma, with Pattahh pure and 
short, 34, also with accent upon it, 100. b, and in a simple syllable, 
90. 9. — O? yim, with short Hhireq, 141 and 100 a, mixed short syl- 
lable, 90. 4. 

(5) riN 1 ] veeth ; Vav moveable, 56. 1, nN as above in No. 4. 

(6) VlV} ha-&a-rets ; n 90. 3.— M 90. 3, and with N moveable, 
56. 1. — V"?. rets, with short Seghol, 34, and in a mixed syllable, 90. 4. 

(7) Verse 2. VT^m veha-^a-rets ; "J ve, in No. 5. 

(8) ni 7].'IJ hd-yetha; H with Qamets long, 66. «, under e. g., *! ye, 
Yodh moveable, 56. 1. — Tin tha, n without Daghesh lene, 80. a, and 
followed by n quiescent, 54 n. 

(9) Jirfn tho-hu ; n without Daghesh lene, 80. 6. — ATI hu with n 
moveable, 56. 1, and with 1 quiescent, 54 1. 

(10) ^nni va-bho-hu; J va\ 56, 1, simple syllable, 90. 3.— h bho, 
n without Daghesh lene, 80. b; simple syllable, 90. 3. — ATI hu, as 
before. 

(11) ?T$Hl vekho-shekhj ) ve, 56. 1.—WT1 hho, Hholem in a pure 
syllable ; the point over the right tooth of the Shin stands as well for 
the vowel Hholem as to mark sh, 62. 2 ; read as a simple syllable hho, 
90. 3. — ^\W shekh, short Seghol and mixed syllable, see in No. 6; 
Sheva silent in the final Kaph, 52. 1 . 

(12) 'V ^dl, 90. 4 ; the V is moveable here, although we do not 

* Note. In this exemplification, the first number in any reference stands for a section (§) in the 
Grammar ; others which follow this, stand for the subdivisions under the section. 



46 §§ 91—93. ACCENTS. 

sound it, because we know not how to sound it. — ^ pene ; Pe with 
Daghesh lene, 79. 2, Sheva vocal, 46. d. — s 3 ne, 54 \ 

(13) Dinn tkekom ; n without Daghesh lene, 80. 6. — Din /*6m, 
90.8, 

(14) nnj veru a hh; ) ve, in No. 5.— nn r£ a M, with Pattahh fur- 
tive, 69. 

(15) D'rf^ tflo-him, see No. 3.— HSm^ merd-hhe-pheth ; "1 with 
Pattahh long, 33 and 90. 11. — n Me, with Seghol pure and short, 34, 
also accented, 100. a. 

(16) N^'b^ ydl pene, see No. 12. E.^n hdm-ma-yim, the letter 
signified by Daghesh forte in Mem attaches to the first syllable, ham, 
90. 4.—? ma, 90. 3.— E^ 2/im, with short i, 328. 

(17) Verse 3. Vdy-yo-mer Wlo-him yehi, Sor (with M moveable, 
56. 1, although we do not sound it); vd-ycki &or, (in vd the Pattahh 
has a Daghesh implied in it, and is to be regarded as long, 59). 

(18) Verse 4. N"]*D vdy-ydr (with N otiant at the end, 57- a) K e /o- 
him eth hd-^or hi-tobh, vay-ydbh-del & e lo-him ben hd-tfor u-bhen 
(u 90. 1, Note) hd-hho-shekh (H, 33 and 58; see also in No. 11). 

(19) Verse 5. Vay-yiq-ra \glohim la-Ror yom, veld-hho-shekh (v 
Id, 33) qa-ra lay-la ( w /ay, 66. a. under e. g.) vd-yehz (vd in No. 17) 
Ve-rebh vd^yehz bhoqer yom ^e-hkddh (Se 33 and 58). 

ACCENTS. 

§ 92. The other small marks of various forms accom- 
panying the Hebrew text,, are accents.* They are di- 
vided into two great classes ; viz. (a) Such as separate 
words, or parts of sentences, from each other ; which 
are called disjunctives, (b) Such as serve to show that 
words are to be closely connected, either in the reading 
or in the sense ; which are called conjunctives. 

§ 93. The following table exhibits the forms, names, and classifica- 
tion of the accents. Some of them are used both in poetry and prose; 
and such have no mark prefixed. Others are peculiar to prose, and 
these have (f) prefixed. Others are peculiar to poetry, and these have 



* Usually called tonic accents, in order to distinguish them from Methegh which is called the 
iphonic accent. 



§ 93. ACCENTS. 47 

(*) prefixed. Poetry means (according to the accentuators) only the 
books of Job, Psalms, and Proverbs, called technically ^l?2$?. {truth), 
these being the three initials of the Hebrew names of these books. 

Note. The reader will observe, that the parallel blank line within the parentheses which stands 
next after the numbers, is intended to represent the line of Hebrew letters ; and consequently the 
position of the accents in relation to the letters over or under which they stand, is thus marked. 

I. Disjunctives. 
(1) Pause accents or Disjunctives of the first class. 

1. (! — ) Silluq, P^vp f i. e . stop, pause. In connection with the 

two large points that always follow it, it is named 
jTIDQ *pD^l jTlvp , pause at the end of a verse. Else- 
where this same mark stands for Methegh ; §85. 
Note, 

2. ( A — ) Athnahh, n ?0^, i.e. respiration. 

* 3. ( — < ) Merka Mahpakh, TfGrjtt N?*7», a composite accent, see 

Nos. 23. 25. 

(2.) Occasional Pause accents, or Disjunctives of the second class. 

•f 4. ( v — ) Tiphhha, nTOtt (posterius), i. e. palm of the hand, so 
called from the shape. It is also named NrHft retard- 
ation, and (when next before Silluq and Athnahh) 
^7*:^ strong. In poetry,, it is merely a Conjunctive ; 
see No. 30. 

* 5. ( — J Tiphhha (anterius) ; praepositive, § 95. a. 
f 6. ( : — ) Zaqeph Qaton, T^P T WXj elevator minor. 

f 7* ( l: — ) Zaqeph Gadhol, vil| *)[?.$, i. e. elevator major. 
•f 8. ('*' — ) Segholta, &Fv?SQ t i. e. cluster of grapes; postpositive, 
§ 95. a. 

(3.) Lesser Disjunctives, or Disjunctives of the third class. 
f 9. ( — ) Tebhir, "1 > ^ , i. e. interruption. 

10. (* — ) Rebhi a , y?"], i. e. resting or lying over. 
•11. ('— -) Rebhi a Geresh, a composite accent, with the Geresh prae- 
positive, comp. Nos. 10, 15 ; also § 95. a. 
f!2. ( J — ) Pashta, StotpS, i. e. expansion (of the voice); postposi- 
tive, § 95. a. 
13. C* — ) Zarqa, W|"J"Jt, i. e. dispersion; postpositive. In poetry 
(when not postpositive) it is a mere Conjunctive ; see 
No. 31, also § 95. a. 



48 § 93. ACCENTS. 

fl4. ( — K ) Yethibh, ^7], i. e. sitting; prsepositive. It is also 
called pTiffi ")?>' tuba anterior, and b?3tp» ^ tuba 
inferior ; see § 95. a. 

*15. ( v — ) Geresh, ^"7!? > *• e - expulsion. Also called 0"Jto shield, 
(Arabic, * j clypeus), and ^7*^ retention (J *| co/zz- 

fl6. (" — ) Garshayim, U]W^\1 3 i. e . double Geresh. Also called 
°:bnt9 , ppn$ ? dual and plural of D"it? */„Wd. 

fl7- (~ 9 ) Telisha Gedhola,^™ nw<b^] f i, e . evulsio major; also 
^9"]-^ ; prepositive, § 95. a. 

fl8. ( Qp — ) Q«rwe Pkra, rnQ ^|2, i. e . the two horns of a heifer, 
(from the shape). 

19. (n_ ) p^er, ntB , i. e . disperser. Also Vb| -£B . 

20. ( I ) Pesiq, |TDi? , i. e . cessation, written in the line between 

words, and placed (as here) perpendicularly. Also 
called ^lJP? , separation. Always preceded by a Con- 
junctive on the word after which it is placed. 

II. Conjunctives. 

21. G— J — ) Munahh, H^P , j. e . joined. Also "lift Sbfo" £w£a recto, 

and "JT^H "15^ tuba ambulans. In poetry both superius 
and inferius. On an ultimate syllable, and followed 
by Athnahh, Zarqa, or Zaqeph Qaton, it is called 
^v^ , i7/z«/, i. e. ascent. When placed at the be- 
ginning of a word, and followed by Zaqeph Qaton, it 
is named '2pDP mekharbel, sieve, i. e. agitation (of the 
voice). 

22. ( J — •) Qadhma, W^TR, i, e. before. 

23. (,— ) Merka, N3~)tt (apoc. form of NS'JNB),; i. e . prolonging; 

also in™, TTO id- 

f24. (,— ) ifefcrAra Khephula, rh^ «?"??, i. e. Merka doubled. 
Also p^tj-in ]nn : , ^o ?Ws. 

25. (>—<—) Mahpakk, ^?H£ , i. e. inversion. Also ?T?HJ$ npffir 

crooked trumpet, tpDH *1?.tt? inverted trumpet. In 
poetry, superius or inferius ; in prose, inferius. 

26. (*— ) Shalsheleth, rfyvfrti, i. e . chain. 
f27- ( s — ) Darga, N |TH, i- e. steps, gradation. 



^§ 94. ACCENTS. 49 

f 28. ( Q — ) Telisha Qetanna, n^tf Htt^b/} } j. e . evulsio minor. Also 
Stp^rn (evadicaior ?) postpositive, § 95. a. 
29. ( v — ) Yerahh, TTV (properly n!?J), i. e. moon. Also rnj 
i23i^"J5 f Ae 7720072 a day old ; n ^37 ? round ; b| ^5 , 

*30. ( v — ) Tiphhha (posterius), in poetry a Conjunctive; compare 
No. 4. 

*31. ( — eo ) Zarqa, in poetry a Conjunctive, when it is not postposi- 
tive; see No. 13.] 

§ 94. The accents are said to be subservient to three 
purposes; viz. (1) To mark the tone-syllable. (2) To 
serve as signs of interpunction. (3) To regulate the 
reading, or rather, the cantlllating of the Scriptures. 

§ 95. (1). To mark the tone-syllable, is what they gene- 
rally do. But the cases of exception are very numerous. 

£(a) Eight of them are ahvays confined to the same position, let the 
tone be where it may ; e. g. Segholta, Pashta, Zarqa (No. 13), and 
Telisha Qetanna, must always be put over the last letter of a word, and 
are therefore called postpositive ; while Tiphhha anterius, Yethibh, 
Telisha Gedhola, and Geresh in the composite accent Rebhi* Geresh 
(No. 11), belong only to the first letter of a word, and are therefore 
called prepositive ; see the Table. Of course these accents some- 
times fall in with the tone-syllable ; but oftentimes the reverse of this 
happens. 

The student then can never depend on the accents as universal and safe guides, in respect to 
the tone of words. He must therefore resort to the general principles which regulate the tone, in 
all doubtful cases. • 

(b) Many words have two accents on them. In this case, if both 
accents are of the same form, the^?^ marks the tone; e. g. ^T1H } with 
the tone on the penult. If the accents are of different forms, then the 
last (left hand one) marks the tone-syllable, i. e. if it belong to those 
accents which always mark the tone; e. g. E'Hlp? ;^ > where 0^1- is 
acuted. Here is one Conjunctive and one Disjunctive upon the word; 
but sometimes there are two Disjunctives, as ^"3i?., Lev. x. 4; and 
sometimes even two on the same monosyllable, as Ht, Gen. v. 29. 
Very often, two Conjuntives are put upon one and the same word, as 
Vilf, Ps. xcvi. 1. 

Remark. All this shows an utter improbability that the accents were originally invented for 
the purpose of marking the tone. The numerous cases of double accentuation, and of prcepositive 

G 



50 §§ 96, 97- ACCENTS. 

and postpositive accents that do not coincide with the tone-syllable, prove that the marking of it 
by the accents in general, is merely a secondary and not a primary object of these signs. If we 
say it is a primary one, how are we to explain it, that one and the same syllable has two tones 
at the same time 1 For so we must conclude from this principle, and from the occurrence of such 
examples as J"K • But if the cantillation is marked by the accents (§ 97), then two accents may 
both be expressed by variations of the voice, when on the same syllable ; but how are they to be 
accounted for on any other ground 1] 

§ 96. (2) Accents mark in part the interpunction. 

This is the use most commonly assigned to them as the principal 
one. In many cases, in fact, the accents accord well with the divisions 
of sense. In the poetical books, the pause-accents are useful in mark- 
ing the end of o-t/%6* ; and they generally do this with accuracy. But 
in all parts of the Bible there is a multitude of cases, where the accents 
make pauses in utter disagreement with the sense. So obviously is this 
the case, that the Punctators cannot be supposed, by any one, to have 
been ignorant of it. 

E. g. in Gen. i. 1, we have O^^?., i- e. a pause-accent (Athnahh) 
of the largest kind, like our colon, placed between a verb with its sub- 
ject, and the Ace. case which the verb governs ; and so, in many hun- 
dreds of instances. This serves to show, that the use of the accents 
by way of interpunction is only secondary. 

[Note. The pause-accents are supposed to mark the greater divisions of the sense, (like our 
colon and semicolon) ; the Disjunctives of the second class, subdivide these ; and those of the 
third class make a division of these parts into minuter portions still, (like our comma, and as it 
were like a-half comma) ; so that a verse is broken up into very small portions, of one, two, or 
three words each, rarely of more. But all this arrangement of accents has its regular order, for 
the most part; for there is a prescribed consecution of the accents, each Disjunctive having its 
appropriate place when admitted by the nature and length of a verse, and its respective Con- 
junctives (showing what words are to be joined together) being regularly attached to it, i. e. pre- 
ceding it. The manner and order of this consecution belongs properly to a treatise of the accents. 
The student who wishes to become acquainted with it, may find it represented at great length in 
Boston's Tractatus Stigmologicus, Wasmuth's Instit. Accentuum, Abicht de Accentibus ; and in 
the second edition of this Grammar, in the Appendix, he wi|j find an abridged exhibition of the 
whole system, on which much time and pains were bestowed.] 

§ 97. (3) Accents also mark the cantillation. 

The Jews do not read, but cantillate the Scriptures ; as the Mos- 
lems do their Koran. The accents direct this. The Koran too has 
marks for such a purpose. This appears to me plainly to have been 
the original design of the accents, viz. to guide the recitativo. Now 
as this was regulated, more or less, by the tones of words and by the 
sense of a passage, so the accentuation very often (and more usually) 
accords with these objects ; but still, in a multitude of cases it has no 
direct reference to them, but merely to reading or cantillation. 

For an exhibition in musical notes of the recitativo power of the accents, see Jablonskii, Praef. 
ad Bib. Heb. § 21, and Bartoloccii Bibliotheca Rabbin, iv. p. 341. 



§§ 98 100. TONE-SYLLABLE. 51 

§ 98. The proper place of an accent (neither prsepositive nor post- 
positive), is over or under the left side of the letter which begins a syl- 
lable. The imperfection of types, however, sometimes prevents the 
•printed books from following this rule. 

Remark. The student should gradually make himself acquainted with the accents, so as to 
distinguish and to name them. The Conjunctives often shew what words should be connected in 
sense ; the Disjunctives, which should be separated. They serve, therefore, as an index of the 
construction which the Accentuators put upon the Hebrew text. In a very great number of 
cases, the pause-accents (and sometimes all the others) atfect the form of words, by their influence 
on the vowels; so that the student should by no means supersede so much attention to them, as 
will enable him readily to distinguish their nature and office, so far as they have an influence on 
the tone, or interpunction, or on the vowel-system. One must often be in the dark on these sub- 
jects, who is not familiar in some degree with the power of the accents. Let him therefore at- 
tend, in a moderate degree at first, but still without intermission, to this subject until he is master 
of the whole. 



TONE-SYLLABLE. 

§ 99. The general rule is, that the tone is on the last 
syllable.* 

To this there are many exceptions. In Syriac and Arabic, the penult is more generally ac- 
cented. 

Note. Technically an oxytone, i. e. a word with the tone on the 
ultimate, is called 3H7P MUrciy (from below); a word with the tone 
on the penult, is called ^^V^ 1 MilVel (from above). 

Exceptions. 
Several classes of words have the tone on the penult, viz. 
§ 100. (a) All Segholate forms, i. e. those which have 
a furtive vowel in their final syllable, § 359. 

[[This vowel is almost universally Seghol, Pattahh, or short Hhireq, 
§ 34. In a few cases, Shureq appears to be furtive, and consequently 

employed as a short vowel ; e. g. in ^HFl a nd ^H2 y which stands for 

.> .•> 

inn and 1£wl. In proper names ending with ^TV\ , the penult syllable 

is accented, as ^H^E) Micaiah ; so also in ^nritpj*}, where the ^ is 
quasi furtive, § 1 20. b.~] 

(b) All duals are penacuted ; and plurals of the same 
form with duals. 



* Words with the tone on the ultimate, are not marked in this grammar with the accent, ex- 
cept for special purposes. The reader will understand, therefore, that a word without a tone- 
accent noted, is after this to be regarded as having the tone on the ultimate. From this remark, 
however, the Hebrew that is exhibited in the syntax is to be excepted, where the penult tone 
syllables are not marked, except for special purposes. 



52 § 100. TONE-SYLLABLE. 

E. g. dual, D^f! ; plurals like the dual, D?B , n?E£P ; in all which 
cases the final Hhireq is short. 

[(c) Apocopated futures in verbs H7, which take a 
furtive vowel; as ^ fe% § 283. 3. 7. § 288. 

(d) All the forms of regular verbs, which receive for- 
mative syllabic suffixes beginning with a consonant ; ex- 
cepting those which have DJR and 1-H, § 194. § 197. 

Exceptions to this rule may be found, but they are either the result of error in copyists or 
printers, or the accent has been moved from its proper place by some of the causes described in 
§101. 

(<?) In Hiphil of regular verbs, all the persons are 
penacuted, in case of accession at the end, which have 
Yodh characteristic between the two last radicals. The 
other persons follow the rule in d, 

(/) In Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal of verbs W 9 
the tone rests on the penult in all the persons which have 
formative suffixes beginning with a vowel, i. e. wherever 

^-, V-r, is added to the root. See Par. XIL 

T •> > 

But sometimes the tone is Milra ; as ^1, Imper. ^"J . Such ex- 
ceptions are limited chiefly to Kal. 

Note. In all the persons of these verbs which have formative syl- 
labic suffixes beginning with a consonant, (excepting the suffixes D-PJ and 
1-PJ), the tone rests on the epenthetic 1 or \- (§ 259) which is inserted 
between the verb and the formative suffix. To this rule there are a 
few exceptions ; as VT^ ., etc., where the tone is on the ultimate. 

N. B. Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel of these verbs are regularly accented; i. e. they have their 
tone like the corresponding conjugations in a regular verb. 

(t 

(g) In Kal, Niphal, and Hiphil of verbs W, the tone 
rests on the penult, in those persons which have formative 
suffixes beginning zvith a vowel, i. e. the surf. n. ? ^ \_. 

In a few cases,, the tone here is on the last syllable; as ^^, Imper. 
^t^. This is very rare,, except in Kal. Comp. above under f ; see 
Par. XIII. 

Note. As in the case of verbs ^ above (f, Note), so here all the 
persons of those verbs which have an epenthetic "l or ^ (§ 268. c) be- 
fore formative suffixes beginning with a consonant, (excepting the suf- 



§§ 100. TONE-SYLLABLE. 53 

fixes D^J and )^X) have the tone on the epenthetic syllable, i. e. on the 

penult. 

N. B. All the other parts of the verbs 13? are regularly accented, viz. Hophal, 
Polel, Polal, Hjthpolel, and those persons in Kal which have formative syllabic 
suffixes beginning with consonants and not preceded by an epenthetic syllable 

(1 or \-) ; as Pi'Qp etc. So participles of these verbs, in the fern, and plural, are 

regularly accented. Comp. under/. 

(li) The paragogic endings »"L and n. 9 when suffixed 
to verbs, affect the tone in the same manner as the for- 
mative suffixes H-, ^ and \. 

Of course they draw down the tone upon the ultimate, in all cases 
except such as are noted above, under e,f, and g, where it is penacute 
with these paragogics. 

E. g. Milra, rn$T for ygt, Imp. Piel of IB? . Mitel, nSDN for 
nD«, 1 pers. Fut. of ZOD ; mD*« fo r CTD, from Dffn ; 71Wp2 fo r Q.p3, 
from ISfip. 

Note. H- and H- paragogic are rarely added to any persons, ex- 
cept those which end with a radical letter of the verb ; and this mostly 
in the Fut. tense. In the Prseter, only the 3rd pers. feminine, in a very 
few cases, receives a paragogic H- or H-, (all other apparent cases of 
paragoge in the Prseter being quite doubtful) ; and this 3rd pers. femi- 
nine retains, like a paragogic noun, the accent on the penult, contrary 
to h above. 

E. g. nnkgqn, Josh. vi. 17; nnfe? ; 2 Sam. i. 26, with Pat- 
tahh under H, where we might expect Qamets. 

(J) Nouns, pronouns, adverbs, and (in a few cases) 
participles, are penacuted, when they have >"L or »"L pa- 
ragogic or local. 

> > > , > . 

E. g. naj, TV&T7 } TXfoW 9 nnP2 ma sc. In a few instances, the ac- 
cent in such cases is found on the ultimate. 

Note. Yodh paragogic always draws down the accent upon itself, 
unless there are special causes to counteract this. 

(j) Verbs, nouns, etc., are penacuted with the follow- 

> •> > > > >>> 
ing suffix-pronouns ; viz. ^- ^- *3- -in. -in_ ^PL PL n_ 

>>>.> ,< T TT. 

^- to- ^_ ID- and some others ; also with ^- D_ 1- short- 
ened from ^- D- ]- ; which latter suffixes are Milra or 
acuted on the ultimate. 

The suffix pronoun ▼[, preceded by a Sheva vocal, is Milra ; pre- 

> > 

ceded by a vowel, Milel ; e.g. T?^! , but ^FVjy! . 



54 § 101. SHIFTING OF THE TONE-SYLLABLE. 

(k) Nun epenthetic always makes the tone penult; 
e. g. *3TD^ nanjj. Nun parogogic always brings it to the 
final syllable ; as VVttlP}^ but with Nun, flrfiDfi. 

(7) Pause-accents frequently, (sometimes other ac- 
cents,) occasion the tone to stand upon the penult, when 
its regular place would be on the ultimate ; and vice 
versa. 

E. g. *&]? , JQjga ; najl, nbj] . This properly belongs to the next 
head ; but it is well here to advertise the student, that there is a class 
of penacuted words, which are made so as it were accidentally , their 
proper accent being on the ultimate.] 

Shifting of the tone-syllable. 

[§ 101. The rules in § 99. § 100, constitute the regular and usual 
principles of accentuation. But the tone-syllable is often shifted from 
its natural place ; e. g, 

(a) Vav prefixed to the Praeter of verbs, commonly 
makes the word Milra. 

E.e. vrntri vnnan- nbh& frbsNi • Hinh. nrbn nram. 

-"*&* ■ : - t » • : - t :> t : - t> t: - t:» lxl r t • : • ' t • : • : 

So too in verbs 27S7 and ,W, § 100./, g, and also in h. 

Exceptions. (1) Always, the lirst pers. plur. of verbs ; as W.Bfcfj . 
(2) Generally, verbs whose third radical is a Quiescent; as Q^JI , 
ty*^ft 9 ^3^?^- (3) Verbs with a pause-accent on the penult. (4) 
When a tone-syllable immediately follows, the tone is then commonly 
(not always) thrown back; as ^51 ^H^Sh. 

Note. Besides these exceptions, there are other occasional instances of exception to the rule 
in a above, which either want of consistency, or inaccuracy in transcribers, has occasioned. 

(b) Vav conversive prefixed to the Future, commonly 
(not always) makes the word Milel. 

E. g. "^S^ , *""9^*1 . In such cases, the verb must end with a 
radical letter, and its penult syllable be simple; otherwise the change 
in question is excluded. 

Note 1. Apocopated verbs with a furtive final vowel, are all ac- 
cented on the penult in the Future. See § 182. 2. y. § 288. 

Note 2. Futures with Vav conversive remain Milra, (a) In the 
first pers. sing. ; as "fo^ . (b) In verbs «b ; as N^pH • (c) With a 
pause accent on the final syllable. 



§§ 101 103. CRITICAL MARKS, ETC. 55 

(c) The particle ^ {not) before the Future, usually 
(not always) makes it Mile I. 

E. g. n3\n"7N do not reprove, *lDln"7N you mtist not add, with 
the tone on the penult. But here practice is not uniform, as the ac- 
cent is sometimes on the ultimate. 

Verbs H7 preceded by vH , commonly suffer both apocope and re- 
traction of the accent. 

(d) A word regularly Milra, if immediately followed 
by a tone-syllable, more usually becomes Milel. 

E. g. "H ^n, regularly accented "'DIPT; "lift ^, standing alone, 
7^33 . But as the penult syllable is often not adapted to receive an 
accent, and as the change of tone would, in some cases, have a ten- 
dency to obscure the sense in reading, the usage in question is often 
neglected. 

(e) The Imp. and Fut. apocopated, with an optative 
or hortative sense, commonly (not always) throw back 
the accent. 

E. g. ^&n keep thyself, for "lfrtfrj; NTT* let him see, for n&T ; 
> > 

nin for nSl^n . The Future always does this, when it has a furtive 

vowel. 

N. B. Pause accents frequently occasion the tone to be shifted both 

forwards and backwards ; see above, § 100. /.] 

CRITICAL MARKS, AND MASORETIC NOTES. 
[_%. 102. In the common editions of the Bible with Masoretic notes, 

o 

etc., a small circle over any word, e. g. N^n, shows that the margin 
is to be consulted, either for a different reading (as Gen. viii. 17, N!Tn 
in the case above), or for literce majores or minores, Pisqa, puncta ex- 
traordinaria, etc. The mark (*) over words in Van der Hooght, etc., 
refers to a marginal note.] 

[§ 103. Qeri and Kethibh. There are a considerable number of 
marginal readings (about 1000) in our common Hebrew Bibles, most 
of which are quite ancient. Some of them correct grammatical ano- 
malies, some are euphemisms, and some propose a different word. They 
are probably the result of an ancient recension of Hebrew manuscripts. 
The marginal word is called "Hi? Qerf, which means read; i. e. this 



56 §§ 103, 104. CRITICAL MARKS, ETC. 

word is to be read instead of the word in the text to which it relates, 
and which is called ^05 Kethibh, i. e. written or text. The vowel- 
points under the Kethibh belong to the Qeri, which is printed without 
points. If a word is omitted in the text, the vowel-points stand in the 
place with a small circle over them, while the letters belonging to them 
are printed in the margin ; as in Judg. xx. 13. This is called !, *?)| 
!2Tp S A read but not written. If a word is superfluous in the text, 
it is left unpointed ; as in Ezek. xlviii. 1 6. This is called *HQ ^1 ^-HP, 
written but not read.~\ 

§ 104. Literce majores et minores distinguish themselves, § 10. 
Pisqa (Mf?p5) means separation, i. e. a space left in the text in the 
middle of a verse ; as in Gen. xxxv. 22. 

Puncta extraordinaria are marked thus, •V"tj"?^1. See Gen. xviii.9; 
xxxiii. 44, where are examples of points over the letters which are ex- 
traordinaria. 

The Rabbins regard these as designating some mysterious significations of the words over 
which they are placed. Probably the original design of them was, to denote that the reading 
was suspicious. The number of words over which they are found is only fifteen. For a full 
account of all the marginal and other notes in the Masoretic editions of the Hebrew Bibles, see 
the preface to Van der Hooght's Hebrew Bible, §§ 23 — 25. See also the like explanations, at the 
close of Hahn's edition of the Hebrew Bible. 



PART II. 

CHANGES AND PECULIARITIES OF CON- 
SONANTS AND VOWELS. 



CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 

[§ 105. It is a principle occasionally developed in the Hebrew lan- 
guage, that letters of the same organ are easily commuted. E. g. ^%, ^|, 
*H, all mean back; and the like in a number of cases, in the dif- 
ferent classes of letters mentioned in § 12. But changes of this nature 
belong to lexicography, as they do not affect the grammatical forms of 
words .J 

§ 106. The changes which affect the consonants, 
may be ranked under (a) Assimilation. (Jj) Casting 
away, (c) Addition, (d) Transposition. 

§ 107. (a) Assimilation. Several consonants are oc- 
casionally assimilated ; viz. 

£(1) In the first syllable of words ; viz. (a) Nun most frequently of 
all ; e. g. n : ft? for ntttt f r0 m this, ttfe? for &IV. . This is very com- 
mon in verbs }5 (§ 252), but not universal, (b) Lamedh rarely ; pro- 
bably in the article ^H hi all cases (§ 163), as D^H for D^jbtt? Vt, 
etc. Also in the verb nfTv - as Fut. ngl for ^flT, . (c) i?e^A very 
seldom; in^N, as W]*# instead of vfp m 1^, ^Ao wi/Z 6e; «§? 
for NQH3 t which is the form of the word in Syriae and Arabic, (d) 
Tav ; as in the prseformative HH (in Hithpael), where it often assimi- 
lates itself to the first radical of the verb, e. g, ^ITJ for "lawn, etc. ; 
see § 187. o. 2. 3. (e) Mem; but only in a few foreign words, as 
"T^Q 1 ? for T^b, in Greek Xa/MraSe*. (/) Yodh; in some verbs '•B, 
§ 251 . 

(2) In the last syllables of words. In all the cases under No. 1, the 
assimilation, as we have seen, is indicated by a Daghesh forte in the 
letter with respect to which such assimilation takes place. But assimi- 
lation occasionally happens at the end of words, where a Daghesh forte 
cannot be written, § 72. This takes place in cases where a furtive 
vowel would stand in the final syllable of a word, provided its full form 
were given to it; e. g. nri for ™?., H*i for *)?*?, n ? for ^?.3, etc. 

H 



58 §^ 108 110. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS, 

So also nb for rrf$ 9 nnw f or nirjN, nn$» f or nrjrjtpE, rnttf^ for 



nrnttfD 



Note. A long vowel in such cases of assimilation and contraction 

(as fl-P] for JTJIJ), is rather unusual. The other examples here exhibit 

only Pattahh, as the vowel appropriate to the contracted form. 

Remark. All languages have a practical tendency toward shortening words, and 
assimilating some of the letters. E. g. in Greek, (TvXkci[xf3avu> instead of avvkafi- 
fiavoj ; and so at the end of words, odovg for odovr (Gen. doovrog), KXrjfirjg for 
KXr]jxr]VT (Gen. KX^jUJjvroc). In Latin, illustris for inlustris, etc.] 

§ 108. (b) Consonants cast away or dropped. In- 
stances of this nature occur ; viz. 

\_{a) At the beginning of words, by aph^resis, when a Sheva 
would be under the first letter. E. g. (1) Aleph; as ^H3 for ^05^, 
and so not unfrequently. (2) Yodh ; as "T 1 ? for "tV>, V^S for V^. 
(3) Mem ; as n^b for ri^b*? . (4) Nun ; as W. for 10? . It is doubt- 
ful whether any letter which has a proper vowel, suffers aphceresis. 
It seems to be limited to cases where Sheva is used under a letter. 

(b) In the middle of words, by Syncope. This happens, when a 
Sheva immediately precedes the letter dropped. In cases of syncope, 
the vowel of the letter syncopated takes the place of this Sheva ; e. g. 
Hv?^ for *&«£, D^P for D^"Jp; ^>\ for "TBbrr , -» Tfbfcb for tflklh; 
^ for ^5 , ^ for ^ ; ^? for ^ ; ^2 for b^ , etc. ' Syncope of M 
is pretty frequent; of n, very common; of 1 and \ more seldom, ex- 
cept in verbs nb ; of 37 very rare; see § 118, seq. 

(c) At the end of words, by apocope. (1) Mem and Nun at the 
end of all plural nouns, etc., in the construct state ; see § 332. (2) 
Perhaps Nun at the end of some proper names ; as "H?^ f or "p^p . 
(3) n final is usually dropped when words receive suffixes, etc. 

Note. The omission or dropping of the Quiescents as such, which 
ofter happens, is treated of in §§ 63 — 65.] 

§ 109. (c) Consonants added. This sometimes hap- 
pens, 

\_{a) At the beginning of words, by prosthesis ; e. g. ;V2F] and 
yi»r)fc$; "IR-, "rtPbS; (so Greek X 6U, e%0e ? ). (b) In the middle of 
words, by epenthesis ; e. g. ^T^P^^; Jf?P.^l^ for ^TP-ft^ • (<?) At 
the end of words, by paragoge ; as ^btQp"^ ^bl^p"). Also H- and H ? 
are frequently added by paragoge ; so \ and \ sometimes, to participles 
and nouns. See § 125. b. c. d.~] 

§110. (d) The grammatical transposition of letters is 



§§ 110 113. PECULIARITIES OF GUTTURALS, ETC. 59 

limited principally to the conjugation Hithpael, when it 
begins with a sibilant letter; § 187. b. 

£In lexicography there are a considerable number of transpositions ; 
e. g. Sfr| and E??3, a lamb; TV&b and Tlbl^W , a garment; Tlfiy 
and nbTO , wickedness, etc. Such transpositions are most frequent, 
between the Sibilants and Resh. 

Note. The exchange of a letter for one of the corresponding class 
which may fill its place, is not an unfrequent thing in lexicography ; 
as ty , V^y , and Db}7 s to exult; "^D and~Q?, to shut up. But 
these changes belong not to grammar. In Hithpael only is the trans- 
position in question a grammatical one; § 187- &•] 

PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTURALS AND RESH. 

§ 111. The Gutturals are never doubled in pronun- 
ciation ; and Resh in this respect is usually like them. 
Hence Daghesh forte (which is a sign of reduplication) 
is not admissible in the Gutturals > nor usually in Resh. 

A few cases only occur of Daghesh forte in Resh ; as fV^S , T3B? , 

rnft, etc. 

§ 112. As a compensation for Daghesh forte excluded 
from the Gutturals and Resh, the preceding vowel is 
lengthened ; § 58. and comp. § 59. 

E. g. ^H? instead of T33, 0?$ instead of D'?a, ?D? instead of 
^2 , etc. But n and n commonly take impure Pattahh before them 
(§33); as bn2 instead of bns ; QV7« instead of O^M . 

[[Note. In a great number of cases, Pattahh impure and long is 
employed as a compensative vowel; almost always before n and n, 
when the A sound is required. In other cases, impure Hhireq (§ 33) 
is sometimes adopted instead of Tseri ; e. g. "^21 (not "")??5) instead of 
TVS biy-Ver ; so V^? (not V*$?) for Y""$? ; also Qibbuts long and im- 
pure instead of Hholem, as ^^TO (not ™rp) instead of n ?^?. It 
follows that the student must not always expect a vowel long in appear- 
ance before the Gutturals ; for impure long Pattahh and Hhireq are 
frequently used instead of Qamets and Tseri; § 33. The use of im- 
pure Qibbuts (except as being vicarious for Shureq) is unfrequent.] 

§ 113. The Gutturals usually take the A sound be- 
fore them ; most frequently in a final syllable, but not 
unfrequently in a penult one. 



60 §§ 113 116. PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS. 

E. g. SStp (I m p.) instead of *btj? , 3TT$ instead of 3Tn| . In a pewwfc ' 
syllable ; ^V2 instead of "^ , ^0! instead of *te»7! . 

£Note 1. In almost all cases, where the final syllable has a Guttural 
at the end, and has also a mutable vowel, that vowel is exchanged for 
Pattahh; as Kal Imp. Wtd t instead of Sbtp"; Piel ^P , instead of 
WSNt, etc. 

Note 2. In case the final syllable with a Guttural has a long vowel, 
which is immutable, Pattahh furtive is put under the Guttural, as 
y>9#n, nSna, etc. See § 69. 

Note 3. Resh never takes a Pattahh furtive ; and in this respect 
is not like the Gutturals.] 

§ 114. Instead of simple Sheva vocal, the Gutturals 
usually take a composite Sheva ; comp. § 49. 

E. g. <U'$, "*Pl!, s «3« But Sheva simple stands under the Gut- 
turals, at the end of a mixed syllable and after a short vowel, i. e. when- 
ever a silent Sheva is required; as ^^IJ, ^-H^; comp. § 50. 

PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS. 

In treating of the vowels, it was necessary to notice the quiescent 
and otiant power of the letters Sn V (Ehevi), §§ 53 — 57, so far as 
might serve to illustrate the nature of the vowel sounds in which they 
quiesce. But a more particular notice of the various phases and 
powers of these letters is demanded ; and such an one is proper here. 

Principles which regulate Quiescence. 

§ 115. The letters N, % * (Evi) quiesce, when a ho- 
mogeneous vowel precedes them (§ 53), and according 
to the analogy of other consonants they would stand at 
the end of a mixed syllable, and take a simple Sheva 
silent either expressed or implied ; § 56. 2. 

E. g. MSO instead of MS15 = b?2», Tlir\n>n instead of TVfrr&, Z&? 
instead of nayi* nafan instead of ^71 . 

Note. If the preceding vowel be naturally heterogeneous, yet in 
many cases this does not exclude quiescence, because a peculiar expe- 
dient is often adopted in order to effect it; see § 117- 1. Comp. with 
this, § 56. 3. 

Such is the general rule for cases of quiescence, subject however to 
many exceptions. But quiescence is not limited to this case only ; for, 

§ 116. Quiescence sometimes happens, when the Evi 



§§ 116 — 118. PECULIARITIES OP QUIESCENTS. 61 

would (by analogy) have a vowel ; specially when they 
would take & furtive one; comp. § 119. c. 3. § 120. c. 

E. g. Dip instead of D\"J, D=lp instead of E^iJ; HSSp? instead of 

h$$# s HM"I instead of Bftfcjn, nib? instead of r0|, rpntp instead of 

< ' .* 
i"VOtp; and so often, when the vowel preceding the furtive one is ho- 
mogeneous. But usage only can enable the learner to distinguish such 
cases. 

§ 1 1 7. The general rule demands that the preceding 
vowel should be homogeneous, as a condition of quies- 
cence ; but quiescence is often effected in cases when 
such preceding vowel would be naturally heterogeneous. 
This happens in two different ways : 

(1) The vowel may conform to the Quiescent, in 
order to become homogeneous. 

E. g. for ^tpjn (which would be the regular analogous form), is 
substituted ^tSHH, i. e. the heterogeneous short Hhireq in the syllable 
VI 3 conforms to, or becomes homogeneous with, the Vav in 'in. So 

nbto for nh)v 9 rv>b| f or Jjfpj, e tc. 

(2) The Quiescent may conform to the vowel, so as 
to become homogeneous with it. 

E. g. ONjj for mjj, nbs f or ^bs, nbiv f or ibnJ, e tc. 

Practice only can teach the student what cases come within these rules. 

Special usage in regard fos, H, 1, V 

§ 118. The letters X, i, % and likewise n, having a 
vowel of their own, and being preceded by a consonant 
with Sheva, oftentimes remit their vowel to the place 
of the preceding Sheva, and become either otiant or 
quiescent. 

E. g. CTtpW-} for D^ST, jittfrO for P^w, "^2 for ^S2, rrixz 
for mW2 ; SiS f or tiM? (boo), »p for qjp/v? for m, ^'for *&] 

nya for'nn^, n^s f or my*, jftfra for )^n>^ } -iba ( w i t h Yodh 

omitted) for ^fH, etc. So in respect to n; e. g. "H-?? - ^ or "H^^?^ ? , 
b^pb for Vfcfjnb, etc.; see Note 3 below. 

QNote 1 . This has been usually named Syriasm ; but improperly, 
since it appears so very often in Hebrew (taking all the cases together) 



62 ^§ 119. PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS. 

as to show that it is a property of the dialect, and not the result of error 
in Syriazing transcribers. Usage only can determine the cases in 
which it is admitted. 

Note 2. Such instances have also been represented by all the 
grammarians as mere quiescence, in respect to N. That they are not 
so, however, but cases of otium, seems to be plain from the following 
examples ; viz. iHN^pb (instead of nH~l|T?), which with a sing, suffix 
makes ^"IN^b , with a plural one niqtilftb • so rosbt? (instead of 
nZJ'N^O), construct state np^?p, w j tn sumx Tj^sbp; showing that 
the Pattahh is not affected by the N in such cases, but still remains 
short (as it plainly is) in the syllables H&l, 5"? . Aleph then appears 
to have no effect on the mutability or quantity of the vowel which pre- 
cedes it, in such cases; and consequently it is otiant. Instances of 
Vav, Yodh, and He, do not occur in the same way as those above of 
Aleph; but such cases as "»? for ^, r& for ^V; *h$ for fty\, ^fl- 
for *iim, Tfb^b fo r TF^jrf?, etc., show that Vav, Yodh, and He, do 
become quiescent or otiant, and in the like way with N. Yodh and Vav 
are usually retained in such words as HD^M (for HD^), N121 (for ^5); 
and in these cases they appear to be quiescent. The principle is ex- 
tensive in regard to Vav and Yodh in the so-called verbs Hv, which 
are properly lb and ^b • and it will account for a great part of the 
abridged forms of these verbs ; see § 281. 

Note 3. Nj % \ rij being quiescent or otiant, are frequently 
omitted in writing; e. g. #2 for *&«$, ^H! for bn^ ; N2 for KCJ 
bevo, && for -T^lg; *»? for ^, *hl> for *???., b^pV for b^nV, 
etc. ; see § 57- § 63. Vav and Yodh are usually dropped when otiant, 
and He always when it is in the middle of a word.] 

Peculiarities of Aleph. 

Q§ 119. These are so many, that they need a separate statement. 

(a) Aleph is sometimes, (1) A Guttural; as in *P$£. (2) A 
Quiescent; as in "1W», NSE. (3) It is sometimes treated as a com- 
mon moveable consonant; as in *\?3, phir. D'W^ n ^p^? botf-sha. 
Usage only can determine all the respective cases of these different 
powers. 

(b) Aleph at the end of a word has no guttural power (comp. § 69, 
Note), but is either quiescent, otiant, or employed like other con- 
sonants ; e. g. quiescent, as in N2B ; otiant, as in N^Spn ^ S~]*1 ? see 
§ 57- b. a ; or it retains a common consonant power, as in Segholates, 
e. g. Nl?5, plur. Q^b:? ; N^D, with suffix ON^D sobh-tfam. 



§§ 119, 120. PECULIARITIES OE QUIESCENTS. 63 

(c) Aleph in the middle of a word. (1 ) Like other Gutturals, it 
takes a composite Sheva where they take one. But in some cases it 
drops such Sheva, and quiesces in the preceding vowel and lengthens 
it ; e. g. "lb»b instead of "V^b, E'nb.sb instead of D'nb.^b ? niN2 in- 
stead of HJSD 9 nnS for 2HMM , etc. ; comp. § 152. c. 2. These may be 
called cases of contraction. In njiTO the points are not appropriate; 
for the Jews read "^"T^ v = ^"TfcO y a § the Pattahh seems to be long. 
The word, however, is sui generis in respect to form. (2) But where 
other Gutturals take a Sheva silent (§ 114. Note), Aleph usually be- 
comes quiescent, e. g. ^nHlSB • but with another Guttural, as VinctP. 
(3) Aleph penult, in words that would regularly be Segholates and 
where M would have a furtive vowel, more usually (not always) rejects 
such furtive vowel, and quiesces in the preceding vowel (if homo- 

geneous) and lengthens it if it is short ; e. g. E7H1 for EJ^p , riN!|ft2 

> 
for nNSp? ; § 116. (4) Aleph sometimes remits its vowel to the pre- 
ceding letter with Sheva, and becomes otiant ; § 118. 

(d) Aleph at the beginning of a word. (1) If it have a proper vowel, 
it is regular. (2) If it should regularly have a composite Sheva, in 
some few cases (after the manner of the Syriac) it employs a long vowel 
instead of it; e. g. ]^« instead of p»§, Cn37DM for Cn?DW ; , TpbnH 
for ^nbrTM . The student should remember, that this happens only at 
the beginning of words.] 

Peculiarities of Vav and Yodh. 

[§ 120. (a) At the end of syllables and words, Vav and Yodh, in 
case they would regularly have a silent Sheva and are preceded by 
homogeneous vowels, uniformly quiesce ; § 115. (b) They quiesce at 
the end of words, also, when analogically they would be preceded by a 
silent Sheva or by a furtive vowel; e. g. "H? instead of p.S or ^s, 
VP : for jrp. or V$, ^ni instead of ITii, *nh$\ for T\h$\ with Pat- 
tahh furtive. To this principle there are a few exceptions in respect 
to Vav ; e.g. *l^j?. . 

Note. With M the case is different ; e. g. ^0 (instead of NtoJi) 
with S otiant; on the other hand, ^bs w ith S moveable like other 
consonants. 

(c) Vav and Yodh penult, which would regularly take a furtive 
vowel, reject it, and quiesce in a preceding homogeneous vowel; e. g. 
nib| instead of riib} ge-lo-veth, nW] instead of npl reVo-vetk, 
n^tp instead of JT&tp; comp. § 119. c. 3.] 



64 



§§ 121 — 124. PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS. 



Peculiarities of He. 

Q 121. (a) At the beginning and in the middle of words, when re- 
tained, it is always a moveable consonant. Apparent exceptions are 
some compound proper names (as "WSiTJS? with quiescent n), which 
depend only on the transcriber. (6) At the end of words, it is nearly 
always quiescent; as H73 gd-ld, § 54. When moveable it is marked 
with Mappiq ; as ^5^ ga-bhdh, § 84. (c) Like M, it is capable of 
having a furtive homogeneous vowel before it without quiescence, e. g. 
H52, n ?l?. , n 9? ) etc.; for it must in such cases be considered as 
moveable; comp. M in § 119. b, in M*?5 f etc. (d) He n is frequently 
made otiant, at the end of a word, by a Daghesh forte euphonic ; e. g. 
Hrnft = H-?n, rntaVTft mat-tobh, "H? nb^ y5-sep-perl But this 
belongs merely to modes of reading, and not to the grammatical forms 
of the language.] 

Commutation, Apocope, and Paragoge of Quiescents. 
§ 122. Commutation. This naturally results from the fact, that 
the same vowels are homogeneous with different Quiescents. (1) At 
the end of words. E. g. 

as 



M- 

T 
M- 

«: 
n- 

T 

n- 

H- 

1 



is put for H- 



n- 
n. 
m- 

T 

si 

rf- 

ML 



Mpnp f 

Nil?*? . 


or nnn|7 


M2tt^ 


naah 


*$5 . 


rfa 


ntppB . 


. MltfpB 

t ': • 


rn§ . 


wj| 


aJVn . 


a?rfn 


Sot . 

T " 


r 


^V. . 


. - CMn 


pttfvn . 


. flffiferi 



(2) Sometimes in the middle of words ; as 0^22 for D"»pS5 , D»p 
f or D^,^nfor^n 

§ 124. Apocope. Not only are Quiescents frequently 
omitted in writing words (§ 63), but apocope in certain 
cases is even a law of the language. 

Q (a) In verbs H7, in the apoc. Fut. and Imper., and when they have 
suffixes : § 283. 3. y. § 313. 

(b) In nouns with suffixes or increase, derived from the same class 
of verbs ; § 378. &.] 



§§ 125 ]27. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 65 

§ 125. Paragoge. The Quiescents (with a vowel 
preceding them) often constitute a paragogic ending. 

[_(a) Aleph is sometimes paragogic, after the syllables \ f '}, ^; 
e. g. «>,73==^;, «i2in = 'l2-l , N^pJJ^SD 1 ?^ they go. This last form 
with N paragogic, is a usual one in Arabic. 

(b) Also n- n- n-; e.g. bb]?H, nV^pM; ]#t : , na^T.; in , 

(c) More seldom *|; e.g. pronoun suffix D-, parag. IE-:; so the noun 
^1H, parag. W.n. 

(d) Rarely \ ; as D"*j?S , ^^ ; but Foc?A is often inserted be- 
tween two words united to form a proper name ; e. g. "^If. waft, 'N 
Goe?, united '^"pSl Gabriel, i. e. man of God.] 

Note. Several pronouns are of the same form and sound as some of these paragogic letters. In 
such cases, the connection of the word with the context must determine whether such doubtful 
forms are pronouns or paragogic letters,. 

CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 

§ 126. The changes which words in the Hebrew undergo, in order 
to designate their various relations and significations, are effected partly 
by a change in the vowels, and partly by a change in the consonants. 
The laws which regulate the vow el- changes, are the subject of our pre- 
sent consideration. 

Vowels Mutable and Immutable. 

§ 127. General principle. Pure vowels are muta- 
ble ; impure ones immutable. See § 23, seq. 

[^Exceptions. Long impure vowels are sometimes exchanged, (1) 
For each other; as D1DB plur. D^D^p 9 where **l is exchanged for n, 
(2) For long pure ones; as Imp. 2nd pers. masc. CWp, 2nd pers. plur. 
fern. n ?PP, with Hholem pure ; Niph. Fut. 3rd. masc. sing. Dlj^ with 
Hholem impure and protracted, 3rd plur. fern. nDpj|Xn with Hholem 
pure and mutable; Hiph. Imper. 2nd. pers. plur. masc. -i^^i^, plur. 
fern. njv&PH with Tseri pure. (3) For short pure ones; as '1"T|, 
const. "b'J? gedhol; ™??nj, constr. Hftpn. (4) For Shevas ; e. g. 
*V?, fern, nilbj. All long pure vowels are from their very nature 
mutable. 

All these changes, excepting No. 1, and the first instance in No. 3, are very frequent in He- 
brew. The laws of declension, in such cases, supersede the usual laws of the vowels, applicable 
to other cases ; so that one can call no vowel in Hebrew absolutely immutable ; all being liable 
in certain cases to change. But ivJien and where this happens, can be learned only by prac- 

I 



66 §§ 127 — 129. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 

tice. Nor can one avoid the conclusion above, by saying that the different persons, genders, etc., 
require in themselves different vowels, as pure, impure, etc. ; for these changes are in the usual 
course of declension, conjugation, regimen, etc., which occasion almost all the vowel changes in 
the language. 

Note 1. The composite Shevas, in the like way, are frequently ex- 
changed for each other, in the course of declension ; e. g. ^7??? niasc, 
part., fern. nttb^3 ; nbgj, with suffix ^P«!. The A sound appears 
to be shorter than the E sound. 

Note 2. The vowels that are properly and usually mutable, are 
these; viz. Qamets, Tseri, and Hholem, long and pure; Pattahh, 
Seghol, Hhireq, Qamets Hhateph, and Qibbuts, short and pure. The 
other vowels are immutable in the sense above defined, i. e. they re- 
main immutable, unless a particular form of a word becomes more im- 
perious than the usual laws of the vowel-changes.] 

Gesenius says, that the quiescent long vowels are immutable always and in all circumstances, 
Heb. Gramm. 9th edit. § 16. But surely there are a multitude of exceptions to this rule, as the 
cases above presented show. He also states, that short vowels before a Daghesh forte are immu- 
table ; but he must have overlooked such instances as ninH } in pause rT.Rc$ etc. 

General principles of Vowel-changes. 

§ 128. (a) The changes of vowels for each other, are 
very generally (not always) limited to the respective 
classes to which they belong; § 19. 

Note. A few seeming exceptions appear; e. g. *TE plur. E^P; 
:nto plur. D^P . So Hiph. b^n f 2 pers. Ph^rj . Every lan- 
guage has some such anomalies. Practice only can teach how to dis- 
tinguish them. 

(b) Each long mutable vowel has one or more cor- 
responding short ones, for which it may be exchanged ; 
and vice versa. E. g. 

Long pure Vowels, Corresponding short ones. 

Qamets ( T ) Pattahh ...„(_) 

f Pattahh (sometimes) ( ) 

Tseri (..) <^ Seghol . . . . (") 

LHhireq . . . . ('.) 

Hholem (') /Qibbuts . . . . (...) 

tinoiem { ) \Q ame ts Hhateph . ( T ) 

Long mutable Vowels exchanged for corresponding short ones. 

[§ 129. (a) When they are in a mixed syllable on 
which the tone rested, and from which the tone, for 



§§ 129, 130. CHANGES OP THE VOWELS. 67 

some special cause, has been removed either forward or 
backward. 

(1) Forwards; e. g. ^ Q?T_ ; b5$, D^tpv. )i } *J32 ; %,7», 
tf?VV\yiq-tdl-kha; -labj , HJ^rj . before Maqqeph, as blD , ^V^? 
kol-tiPshSr, § 89. (2) Backwards, i. e. towards the right hand; as 
*fe, T^h, Qp;, D|f T !^z/-2/«-^om; DHO^a, On&if3 . The reason 
of such changes is, that long vowels cannot stand in mixed syllables 
unless they are tone-syllables, § 36. Of course, when the tone is re- 
moved they must be shortened. 

fNote 1. A few solitary cases are found of apparent exception to 
this principle; e. g. 1 Sam. xvii. 35, YWprn in the Kethibh. But 
the first Yodh here is merely a fulcrum, § 64; the word is read vd- 
h a mit-tiv, with the first i short. 

(b) When they are in a mixed syllable, which the 
construct state requires to be shortened. 

E. g. ^57 word, but rT } r T ""^ the word of Jehovah ; where the 
original syllable "Q is shortened to "">5 ; see § 342. b. 

(c) Long vowels before a Daghesh forte latent in a 
final letter (not a Guttural), when a change in them is 
required, for the most part are exchanged for an appro- 
priate short vowel. 

< 

E. g. (a) Tseri goes into Hhireq parvum ; as E& (Daghesh forte 

being implied in the □), with suffix ^^ . (b) Hholem into Qibbuts 

. > > .«► > 

short; as pfT, T1JH1, but sometimes into Qamets Hhateph, as TO, ''•TO 

oz-zi. 

Note. If the tone remains, the vowel continues long in such cases ; 

e. g. n^IZ7 sham-ma, HEn hem-ma. 

(d) A pause accent falling on final Tseri, not unfre- 
quently changes it into Pattahh ; see § 145.] 

Short Vowels in mixed syllables made long. 

§ 130. (a) This happens, when the form of the word 
is so changed that they come to stand in a simple syl- 
lable. 

E. g. -m*, *1#; SPT, tth ; bfijj, ibfcfp. So of course before a 
Quiescent ; as NEE instead of N2» , nba instead of nba = ^2 . 



68 §§ 130 133. FALLING AWAY OF THE VOWELS. 

[(b) When a Daghesh forte is omitted in writing, a 
short vowel placed before it becomes long, either by na- 
ture and form, or by position ; see § 112. § 58. § 59. 
§33. 

E. g. TI? instead of TO , TO instead of TO , TO instead of 
Tp_S, long by nature and form; bns for bnS, Cm for EH3, etc., 
long by position ; see § 33. 

Note 1. Daghesh forte implied in a letter at the end of a word, (it 
cannot be written in such a case, § 72), usually prolongs the vowel 
which precedes; e. g. 'J! instead of v^ ;) DS instead of EN, ^"T. for 
^Sry? yith'dvv ; but sometimes the vowel remains short, as 'T. for Wl , 
1Q (not 2D) for 2HD ^ an ^ often so in verbs W. 

Note 2. In the case b above, the syllable with the short vowel be- 
coming a simple one by the coalescence of the implied daghesh' d letter, 
the vowel must of course be lengthened, according to the rule a above. 
Before n and n, the vowel Pattahh usually remains in such cases, and 
becomes of course long ; § 33. 

(c) The article prefixed to a few words,, lengthens the 
short vowel in them. 

E. s . E ^, Q ^ n ; ^,^71- ns, nan- ne, nsn- vns.v^n. 

Usage only can distinguish such cases; and they are not numerous.] 

[§ 131. A pause-accent falling on Pattahh or Seghol 
pure, commonly (not always) lengthens them. 

E. g. E^tt 3 D?£ ; blirj s b^n . Occasionally other accents do the 
same; see § 149.] 

Falling away of the vowels. 

§ 132. Vowels are said to fall away, when they are 
dropped and a Sheva takes their place. 

E. g. ^"t? t[j where the vowel under the "7 in the first word, 
falls away in the second. 

Note. Apocope of vowels is dropping them at the end of a word ; 
as ^j?y, "*I4*1, where the Seghol of the first word is dropped. 

Falling away by change of Tone- syllable. 

§ 133. (a) When the tone is moved forward one syl- 



§§ 134, 135. FALLING AWAY OF THE VOWELS. 69 

lable, i. e. moved toward the left hand, the penult vowel 
of the ground-form* falls away, if pure and mutable. 

E. g. "OT, "n^ . dfo, *hySl . If the tone is not shifted, the vowel 



remains ; e. g. ^^, ^SDJ 



(b) If the tone is moved forward two syllables, both 
the ultimate and penult vowels, when mutable, fall 
away. 

E. g. -)^T, E$rOT; )f?X, dh^tft; where both vowels of the 
ground-fcrm vanish. In regard to the short Hhireq which takes the 
place of one of them, see § 137- In regard to Sheva being inserted 
when the vowel is dropped, see § 52. 

Falling away on account of Regimen. 

[§ 134. Regimen or the construct state (§ 332) often 
occasions the penult, or both the ultimate and penult 
vowels to fall away, if they are pure and mutable. 

Note 1. (a) Regimen in the singular usually causes the penult 
mutable vowel to fall away ; as "Q"? > m re g« ^Y^) ~^\> where the first 
vowel falls away and the last is shortened. The suffix state has the 
like effect on the penult vowel, e. g. "H^I . (b) The plural regimen 
causes both the ultimate and penult vowels to be dropped ; e. g. ^"?.^pT 
•"HiT.. In like manner grave suffixes affect both vowels ; e. g. ES'H^T. 
Comp. § 342. b. c. 

Note 2. Vowels must be pure, in order to fall away. Even when 
they are so, usage does not always treat them in the same manner ; 
e. g. Ett? is in reg. Ett? ? but ]5 in reg. makes 7? , the first retaining the 
long vowel, and the second shortening it. But in a suffix both drop it; 
e. g. ^Ptp, ^5. 

Note 3. In Segholate forms (Dec. VI. of nouns), the final vowel is 
merely furtive ; so that, those nouns being monosyllabic in theory, regi- 
men makes no change in their vowels. See paradigm of Dec. VI.] 

Falling away on account of Accession. 

[§ 135. (a) Where the ground-form of a word re- 
ceives an accession at the end beginning with a vowel, 
which requires its ultimate and penult consonants to be 

* The ground-form is the primary one, in number, gender, or tense, to which it belongs ; the 
original, from which the others are derived. 



70 §§ 135 — 138. RISE OF NEW VOWELS. 

united in the same syllable with such accession, then 
the final vowel of the ground-form falls away, if mu- 
table. 

This happens most frequently in verbs; e. g. ^ij, fern. fP^i^., 
Vt3,7!, p lur ; ^jT. ; Tns, fem. nTjg ; part. pres. ^£p, fern, nb^p, 
plur. QV^P; in Piel, *T$ba fem. rYw3D; so also in nouns of Dec. 
VII., as ^K plur. Q^>. 

(ft) Where only the final consonant is united with an 
accessory vowel, and the penult consonant must have 
a Sheva silent, the final vowel of the ground-form falls 
away. 

E. g. Imp. fem. ^p ( no t °?bj?), ground-form bbfl; ^p (not 
sibbf?), ground-form Vbp . 

Note 1. If only the final letter of the ground-form is to be united 
with the accessory vowel, and the penult letter must retain a vowel in- 
stead of having a Sheva, then such vowel cannot fall away ; e. g. "^-J^, 
with suffix Vm; a;*©, plur. D^D'IS. 

Note 2. Usage only will enable the student readily to distinguish 
the cases where the rule is to be applied. We can see no reason, a 
priori, why the Hebrews might not have said "i^^J as well as ^^T > 
(especially since they say "t^., etc.); except that in this way the 
suffix-forms are distinguished from those of simple declension which 
mark person and number.] 

Rise of New Vowels. 

§ 136. We have seen that two successive vowels may fall away 
(§ 133. b. § 134), on account of the tone being removed, or of regimen. 
In such cases an impossible syllable would arise, i. e. one with three 
consonants before a vowel, § 42 ; consequently a new vowel must be 
inserted in order to avoid this. 

E. g. ""^"t* constr « plur. "^^I dbhre. But this is inadmissible; see 
§ 42. So 0^3^ constr. ^^ (with one composite Sheva), which 
would be an impossible syllable. A vowel must therefore be supplied. 

§ 137. In case the vowels falling away leave two sim- 
ple Shevas, the usual supplied vowel is short Hhireq. 
E. g. *^^{, plur. constr. ^IH/l instead of ^^f . 

§ 138. But if one of the two letters that have been 



§§ 139 — 141. FURTIVE VOWELS, ETC. 71 

deprived of their vowels, is a Guttural, then Pattahh or 
Seghol must be the supplied vowel. 

E. g. D^S, constr. ^1& instead of ^?«.; D^Q, constr. ^n. 

[§ 139. If an accessory letter with a Sheva be pre- 
fixed to a Guttural having a composite Sheva, such ac- 
cessory letter takes a supplied short vowel which is ho- 
mogeneous with the composite Sheva. 
E. g . ias, but with prefix b, i:rob ; bag, bhvh ; ^n, ^bna &*_ 

M°£. But the Fiit. of the verbs ri;n and HTJ makes njrp it^T. ; 
and analogous to this is the pointing of the prefixes, as HVrp, con- 
trary to the analogy of other guttural forms.]] 

[§ 140. When in varying the forms of words it so 
happens, that analogically two Shevas would come under 
two successive letters, and the first of these would be a 
composite Sheva ; then the corresponding short vowel is 
substituted for such composite Sheva. 

E. g. rO^n?. instead of rD^n?. , which would make an impossible 
syllable. So fft>3?g pd-ol-khR instead of ^gg ; ^T. instead of 
^"TC??- . The ground of this is, that from their nature two Shevas 
cannot stand together unless the first be silent and the second vocal ; 
except at the end of a word. But in the case above, the first is vocal, 
i. e. it is a composite Sheva, § 46. a. ; of course the expedient of a new 
vowel must be adopted, in order to avoid an impossible syllable.] 

Rise of Furtive Vowels. 

§ 141. As the Hebrews rarely admit two consonants 
after a vowel in the same syllable (§ 42) ; so, in order 
to avoid this, they supply a furtive vowel in most cases 
where such a concurrence would otherwise take place. 
This vowel is commonly Seghol short ; but under words 
having a penult Guttural, it is Pattahh short; with a 
penult Yodh, it is short Hhireq. 

E. g. ybh instead of ?fta, ""^P for ")?D, 1V2 f or "#3, /Va for 
*T : S . See on Dec. VI. § 359, also § 283. 3. y. on Seghoiate forms of 
verbs. 



72 § 142. EUPHONIC CHANGES,, ETC. 

[Note 1. The 2nd pers. fern. sing. Prset. in verbs Lamedh Guttu- 
ral, takes Pattahh furtive ; e. g. J^Mtt? instead of ^foVJ , in order to 
ease the pronunciation ; § 69. 

Note 2. All words having a furtive vowel are Milel, i. e. accented 
on the penult. In this way they are distinguished from the few forms 
that resemble them in the final vowel, but are accented on the ulti- 
mate; e. g. bns, ^>Vfi, etc. Comp. § 100. a.] 

Euphonic changes of the Vowels. 

[^ 142. These are various, (a) A Guttural with Qamets seldom 
admits a Qamets or Pattahh immediately before it, but exchanges it 
for a Seghol ; e. g. ^irin instead of ^nil f vnM for VrjM ; ritlB for 

Tins 9 ^bij-np for s ?bw"n» 9 etc. 

Note. The rule is not uniform. Such cases occur as V^.^T, 
"inn 9 D^n 9 etc. The word *T??} is anomalous, being put for TJ3 or 
"TOJ . The practice required by the rule, is occasionally extended to 
cases where the Gutturals are not present ; as '•"P^? n^""T!7 1 where 
HE stands for HD • also to Gutturals not pointed with Qamets, as 
D^jnn for ta^TKJJ', hajfdha-shim. 

(b) In mixed syllables losing their tone, Seghol in some cases takes 
the place of Pattahh; e. g. 7$, d|t. for d|t_; ^??K for ^5« . 
The reason of this is, that Pattahh is better adapted to a mixed sylla- 
ble with the tone ; Seghol, to one without it. Consequently, 

(c) In a tone-syllable, we sometimes find Pattahh instead of Seghol ; 
> > > 

e. g. )PX > const. ]f2T and not ?P.T . See Dec. V. of nouns, Parad. 

(d) A furtive vowel at the end of words causes the preceding vowel, 
if mutable, to conform. E. g. Qamets, as nanirl instead of npnin ; 
Pattahh, as ^$ for ^bb ; Tseri, as iT^ for H^ . So in verbs ; 
e. g. bjjl for Vjl ■ pprT for ^H . In Gutturals, TO Yl» for TO Via , 
etc. 

(e) Anomalous changes of the vowels occasionally occur ; probably 
to mark the peculiar pronunciation of certain words. E, g. (1) Long 
vowels are put for short ones before the composite Shevas ; as ^7?^ 

for nbjfr, nb^n f or nbg£, an d perhaps ^bnn for rfim. (2) Short 

vowels for long ones; as ^D^ for ^Qtf , ^CT. for ^D.\ (3) Long 
vowels are put for short ones arising out of composite Shevas; as 

!Qns^ for ^"7^5 , ^nbpwn for -inbpwn .] 

N. B. All these cases under e are very unfrequent ; and it is difficult to decide whether they 
should be attributed to mere accidental euphony, to negligence in transcribing, or to a principle 
of the language. 



§§ 143 146. VOWELS CHANGED BV ACCENTS, 73 

Vowels changed by Accents. 

§ 143. Pause accents, and sometimes others (§ 149), not only oc- 
casion a shifting of the tone-syllable of words (§ 100. I), but very fre- 
quently occasion a change in the quantity of vowels ; usually lengthen- 
ing short vowels, but sometimes shortening long ones. 

§ 144. (1) They lengthen short vowels; changing Pat- 
tahh, and Seghol when used for Pattahh (§ 142. d), into 
Qamets, and Qamets Hhateph into Hholem, 

E. g. n)h, D>£ ; blDjJ, bg|J ; TTbp (for Tybk, § 142. d), tfjg. So 
where they shift the tone also; as H^H, nJJN ; TIHV s Tiny. So 
TOJJ vdy-ya-moth, ^^1 . 

Note. The prepositive and postpositive accents (§ 95) may affect 
vowels without standing on them, in the same manner as other accents 
which are placed on them ; e. g. "^btt (instead of M?ft) with Tiphha 
anterius, Ps. xcvii. 1 ; foStpl (instead of ^^tp?) with Seghol ta on the 
ultimate; see § 146. 

[§ 145. (2) They shorten the long vowels. Verbs in 
pause* frequently exchange Tseri ultimate for Pattahh. 

E. g. -«n , nan ; baj? , b»p r ; ba^ , bgy. ; tfe , ^ . So with 

verbs taking suffixes; as D^SB, 0^«; tfP»T., )&tV.. But the 
cases are numerous in which Tseri remains in such examples. The 
whole thing seems to be merely arbitrary euphony.] 

[§ 146. A pause-accent on a word, which by declen- 
sion has dropped the final vowel of the ground-form 
(§ 135), restores that final vowel, and also lengthens 
the same if it be short. 

This takes place, (a) When such accent falls on the restored vowel ; 
as nfrn;, nfcJJJ, ground-form «^; *!&}&, ^Jja, ground-form )hto ; 
!T%p., ^b'toJT!, ground-form %j?!; TO$tp\ ^S?'\ ground-form 
2?ntp^ . (6) When it falls on the succeeding syllable ; as, ^ ■lYD'] in- 
stead of FTjf^ , Joel ii. 5 ; flftfTp instead of 1TO7*! , Joel ii. 8 ; )^b> 
instead of ^'^. , Joel ii. 7.] 

N. B. Both of these usages are very often neglected, and the natural accentuation remains. 



A word or syllable is said to be in pause, when a pause-accent rests upon it. 

K 



74 §^ 147 150. VOWELS CHANGED BY ACCENTS,, ETC. 

[§ 147. Pause accents, when they fall on those per- 
sons of verbs ^b (properly ^, § 280) which drop a letter 
and a vowel, sometimes restore the letter as well as the 
vowel dropped, and affect the vowel as stated in § 146. 

E.g. =«aa, Vg?, ground-form m33 = ^3 ; TO2 , TO2, f rom H?S = 
•»» , § 280. Note.] 

[§ 148. Where no vowel has been dropped, a pause- 
accent sometimes occasions changes ; viz. 

(a) Falling on simple Sheva penult, it puts Seghol in 
its place ; e. g. QDtf , DDg ; *J3.to, "f3^D, 

(5) Falling on a composite Sheva penult, it substi- 
tutes the corresponding long vowel. 

E. g. "O^, "OS; ^n, ^n ; cases with Hhateph Seghol do not 
occur. But the practice is not entirely uniform ; e.g. "H?, "*7J; "^O, 

§ 149. General remarks. The effect of pause-accents is not 
uniform. In a great number of cases, no change is occasioned by 
them. On the other hand, most of the disjunctive accents, and even 
several of the conjunctive ones, not unfrequently produce the same 
effect in prolonging syllables as the pause-accents. For example ; (a) 
Disjunctives; *B62Q, %&}; ttfcg, lag!?; n»l£ HJfittf; ^2, -TO2; 
«??!, «P.^, Ps.V. 12, etc. (b) Conjunctives; as *bf\QPl 9 fySTJ^; 
^/^a/nnSlS^ ^n?n2; n;pri, liJDn, etc. The entire want 
of any regular system in regard to the influence of the accents over 
the vowels, shows very clearly that such influence belongs only to the 
occasional method of reading certain passages or words, and not to the 
essential mutations of the language itself. 

Vowels changed by accession and transposition. 

£§ 150. Forms of verbs ending in \ receiving an accessory pro- 
noun beginning with a consonant and not having the tone upon it, 
drop the first vowel of the ground-form if it be mutable, and restore 
the second which had been dropped by declension, and (if it be short) 
lengthen it. 

E.g. MJ, plur. SDR, with suffix ^JS; so *W„ ^«?P N . ; 



5>§ 151., 152. VOWELS CHANGED BY POSITION. 75 

Q§ 151. Transposition is only occasional and euphonic. It belongs 
not to the rules of the language. Instances of it are such as the fol- 
lowing, viz. ^rr for *pn% ruzwnz f or Titewnz, e tc] 



Vowels changed by position. 

[§ 152. The prefixes to words, consisting of one let- 
ter, vary their vowels according to their position and 
the nature of the words to which they are attached. 

(a) The article n (f or bn, § 16. 2) has, (1) Usually, Pattahh 
followed by Daghesh forte; e. g. trnan^ttfrjD bn. (2) Before the 
Gutturals S, V, and also n, it takes Qamets ; as K7^n } ^3717 3 WtinTl . 
(3) Before n and n, Pattahh long is the more usual vowel ; as ^bnn ; 
Tft^nn . (4) Before all the Gutturals, when they have a Qamets under 
them, the article usually takes Seghol ; see § 142. a. (5) The Daghesh 
after the article is not only omitted before the Gutturals and Resh 
(§ 111), but usually omitted, also, before words beginning with ^ and 
"l having a simple Sheva ; e. g. nCO^n for H^D^n , "iV^n for ~)N*n . 

Note. When the article is preceded by the particles, 5 , 3 , b , it 
usually suffers syncope (^ 108. b), and gives up its vowel to the parti- 
cles ; as D?»$2 for D^^n^ , UV3 for C^H3 , D^nb for Q^nnb . 
On the contrary, it sometimes resists syncope; as E^?, etc. 

(b) The Particles 4, 3 , ?, are appropriately pointed with Sheva 
simple. But, (1) Before the composite Shevas they take the corre- 
sponding short vowel; e.g. l^D?, rQ7 lo-hh°li, etc. (2) Before ac- 
cented syllables they usually take Qamets ; as ffiftb } ^Ittffb f D^b , 
But this is confined chiefly to forms of the Inf. mode not in regimen ; 
to pronouns ; and to tone-syllables at the end of a verse, or of a dis- 
junctive clause. In other cases, the usual punctuation is Sheva. (3) 
Before simple Sheva they take short Hhireq ; comp. § 137- 

(c) The Conjunction "] is appropriately pointed with a Sheva sim- 
ple. But, (1) Before Gutturals with a composite Sheva, it takes the 
corresponding short vowel; as *T^51. (2) Before N which would re- 
gularly have a composite Sheva, it sometimes takes a corresponding 
contracted vowel in which S quiesces, as D'^nvN'l for D^nvSJ ; comp. 
§ 119. c. 1. (3) Before a tone-syllable it frequentlv takes Qamets ; as 
^n?) , ""• '"TJ ^^ . The usual cases of this nature are before a dis* 
junctive accent ; before a conjunctive one, 1 retains Sheva. (4) Before 

Sheva vocal, either simple or composite, standing under a letter not a 



76 § 152. VOWELS CHANGED BY POSITION. 

Guttural, also before n, fc, Q it takes Shureq ; as Vabl- nnn, TO^, 

> i > 
n^l, 'FJvE-l, TOnS^. (5) Before Yodh which analogically would have 

a Sheva, it takes long Hhireq and makes the Yodh quiescent (comp. 
§ 53); as Tpl, ^1. (6) Before the verbs n;n a nd nTJ, it some- 
times takes short Hhireq or Seghol ; as D/TirjJ ^HJ n «n,l . 

(d) The Interrogative changes its usual punctuation ; (1) Be- 
fore Sheva simple, where it takes Pattahh : as H^T^n . (2) Before 
Gutturals with Qamets, it takes Seghol ; as E^^Tv > zs ^ e wlse * com P- 
§ 142. a. (3) Before Gutturals without Qamets, it takes Pattahh, and 
sometimes Qamets ; as "^.P^n shall I go? QJJ.Nn vosne ? (4) It some- 
times imitates the punctuation of the articles before a letter with a 
Sheva; e. g. n?ri?n an tunica? ^T 7 !*! vicene ?nece? And even be- 
fore a letter with a vowel it sometimes does the same^ although very 
rarely ; as ^^H an bonum erit ?] 



PART III. 

GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE AND FORMS OF 
WORDS. 



§ 153. Radical Words. The Hebrew and its cognate languages, 
in their present state, exhibit a surprising degree of regularity and 
uniformity in the construction and sound of the radical words. This 
circumstance forms a broad line of distinction between them and all 
the western languages. Almost all radical words, which with few ex- 
ceptions are verbs, consist of only three letters usually forming two 
syllables; as ^1® he reigned, Y"T!^ the earth. From such triliteral 
roots are derived the various forms of nouns and verbs, which are used 
to express case, number, gender, person, tense, etc., and the different 
forms of nouns, adjectives, particles, etc. From this general principle 
of derivation (which was commonly represented by the older gram- 
marians as universal), are to be excepted, perhaps, a few nouns which 
constitute the names of familiar objects; e. g. ^father, E*^ mother, 
TJ hand, etc. A few particles and primitive pronouns also appear to 
be biliteral in their root, and not derived from a triliteral word. 

§ 154. Conformity to the general principle. So extensively in 
Hebrew is the principle of inflection grounded on derivation from a 
triliteral root, that nouns which are primitive and biliteral, conform to 
the common laws in their declension ; i. e. they are treated as though 
they were derived from triliteral-roots. Thus ES by inflection be- 
comes ,, SS = ,, C>fc3N, as if derived from EftS; although EN seems to be 
a primitive. 

§ 155. Biliteral roots. From some appearances in the Hebrew 
language, it is probable that originally it contained a greater number 
of biliteral roots than at present ; and that its triliteral forms were, in 
many instances, constituted by doubling the second radical of the root, 
or adding to it one of the vowel letters, or the semi-vowel Nun : 

E. g. 2&J and nil: to be good, common root SID ; HD3 and H-IQ to 
blow, common root r?E; "H?^, 'W^\ ^S^, n ?' T J, to thrust down, com- 
mon root ~P . 

In like manner, there is a considerable number of triliteral words 
in the Hebrew and its cognate dialects, in which two of the radicals 



78 §§ 156 — 161. STRUCTURE OF WORDS. 

are the same, while the third is quite different, and yet the meaning of 
each word exhibiting the same two radicals, remains the same in all. 

E, g. the verb signifying to lick, is either 373?b , n^b, V>vb f Dvb 3 
*lPb ? yvb 3 or psb, the letters 27b being uniform in all. 

But if biliteral roots were originally more numerous than at present, 
they had conformed to the common laws of the language at least as 
early as any of the written Hebrew now extant; since the written 
language every where presents the triliteral forms, as principally con- 
stituting the radical words. 

§ 156. Qua&riliteral and quinqueliteral roots are very rare in the 
Hebrew; such as b^-lS a fruitful field, ECH.3 to devour, 1?q?^ to 
be quiet. Those which exist, are formed by the addition or inser- 
tion of a letter or letters, to lengthen the triliteral root ; in the same 
manner as triliterals are formed from biliterals, as described above in 
§ 155. 

§ 157. The parts of speech in Hebrew are,, the article, 

pronoun, verb (including the participle), noun, adjective, 

adverb, preposition, conjunction, and interjection ; which 

will be treated of in their order. 

§ 158. The proportional number of roots in the various parts of 
speech in the Hebrew, may be thus arranged, (a) The verb is alto- 
gether most frequently primitive, (b) Only a small number of nouns 
are primitive, (c) The original pronouns, personal, demonstrative, etc., 
are all primitive, (d) Particles are some of them primitive, and some 
are derived from other parts of speech. The Hebrew has very few 
particles. 

Grammatical structure of words. 

§ 159. There are two ways in which case, number, gender, per- 
son, tense, etc., may be expressed in any language : (1) By the inflec- 
tion of the general words or ground-forms. (2) By affixing other words, 
i. e. particles, which serve to express relation. The Hebrews, as the 
sequel will show, made use of both these methods. 

§ 160. Composite words, i. e. compound verbs, nouns, etc., which 
the Greek, Latin, and other western languages exhibit, are not usual 
in the Hebrew. Words properly composite are scarcely ever found in 
Hebrew, except in proper names ; where, however, they frequently 
occur. 

§ 161. The Hebrew also differs from the languages of the West, 
in the mode of writing many of its particles, and the oblique cases of 



§§ 162 164. ARTICLE PRONOUN. 79 

its personal pronouns. These, instead of standing by themselves, are 
commonly united with the verbs, nouns, etc., to which they belong, or 
on which they depend, so as to form with them but one word. 

THE ARTICLE. 

§ 162. The Hebrew has but one article, viz. bt} 9 com- 
monly written n with a Daghesh forte after it. It cor- 
responds in a good degree, but not universally, with the 
definite article the in English. 

§ 163. In writing, the Lamedh of the article *?<7 is al- 
ways assimilated to the first letter of the noun to which 
it is prefixed, and expressed by a Daghesh forte in that 
letter, or by some equivalent. 

E. g. ""lE^n the rain, instead of "UJB - '> C 7 i ?'7 ^ ie man > instead 
of E*TS bn ; etc. § 107. 1. b. § 112. For the various pointing of the 
article,, see § 152. a. 

Note. That the original form of the article was vH , seems pro- 
bable from the form of the Arabic article '&, whose b is frequently 
assimilated in the same manner as the Hebrew. The only difference 
is, that in the Hebrew the assimilation, or some equivalent for it, is 
universal ; in Arabic, it is usual only before the solar letters. 

PRONOUNS. 

I. Pronouns personaL 

§ 164. The Hebrew is rich in personal pronouns ; not only dis- 
tinguishing the masc. and fern, of the 2nd and 3rd persons, when they 
stand as the subjects of verbs, but possessing forms appropriate to the 
oblique cases which follow verbs, nouns, or particles. 

Nominative case, or Ground-form, of all the personal Pronouns. 



com. / 


Singular. 

. _. . T 


Plural. 

we, W]$& 




ttm 


mas. thou, 


rwn*t nx 

T - T - 


ye, D.HN 






fern, thou, 


^ \P)» 


ye, ]n* 


om) 


T " - 


mas. he (it), 


Rin 


they, on 




nan 


fern, she (it}. 


wrr airr (\ 


u) then, in 




ran 



80 §§ 165 — 368. pronouns. 

Notes. 

Q 165. (a) In pause, the pronouns assume the forms, ^fc}, HPIS, 
£]«, etc., §144. (o) The S in Wn, N>n (Sin hi), is paragogic, §125. a, 
and otiant, § 57- (c) The form ^rja occurs only six times; ! PS, only 
in Jer. xlii. 6. (d) In TO^N (in some Codd. na^lN), rWT, nan, the 
n- is paragogic, § 125. 6. (e) The forms HWM, ft*i, V^M (flf), DflN, 
?ig« (WIN), are probably for nfi?N, ^?M, ^N, b^NJflpH, § 107- 
1. a; for the full forms, i. e. those with 2, are found in Syriac and 
Arabic. (/) Win (hi) is anomalous, (the older form of the pronoun 
was M^n, which was both masc. and fern.); the marginal reading or 
Keri (§ 103) often supplying the form S s n (^H), as a correction. It 
is found only in the Pentateuch. 

N. B. The ground-forms of the pronouns above, though generally designating only the Nomi- 
native case, do sometimes stand in other cases, § 468.] 

§ 166. The oblique cases of personal pronouns in He- 
brew, are made by fragments of primitive pronouns suf- 
fixed to verbs, nouns, and particles, so as to constitute" 
one word instead of being written separately as in the 
western languages. 

N. B. For an account of these pronominal suffixes, as appended to 
the above mentioned classes of words respectively, see for verbs § 309, 
seq., for nouns § 336, for adverbs § 405, for prepositions § 408, and 
for interjections § 410 Note. 

II. Pronouns demonstrative. 

§ 167. Of these there are but few in the Hebrew, viz. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. r?T fern. Jltt? com. It this com. «"^N these 
n .^n ( n '^ hjl this ^N these 

The usual forms are those in the first line; those in the second, are 
unusual. For /"IST, the form ^n is once employed, Ezek. xxxvi. 35. 

Note. The pronouns of the 3rd pers., i. e. M-Vf, ^n^ DPI, }71 9 
are also frequently employed as demonstratives ; in which case they 
usually prefix the article, as N-VTn DTO on that day. 

III. Pronouns relative. 

§ 168. The only proper one is "^**, who, which, what, 
of every gender and number. 



§§ 169 173. PRONOUNS VERBS. 81 

[[Note. This pronoun is contracted, mostly in the later Hebrew, 
by dropping the N (§ 108. a), and assimilating the 1 (§ 107- c); as 
»vt£7 instead of 1' ' =1 ^^ : . The W (the apocopate form) has various 
vowels, according to the nature of the word which follows ; e. g. 8? as 
in Dn^ ; 27 followed by a Daghesh ; $, as in nnwt£7, J u dg. vi. 17; 
K7, as in c? 7.^p, Eccl. iii. 18. In this last case, there is no compensa- 
tion by a vowel for the 1 which is cast away. 

§ 169. The demonstratives nt and V, are occasionally 
employed as relatives. 

IV. Pronouns interrogative. 

§ 170. These are two; viz. % who, and HD (iiD 
HD) what. 

Note. Before a Daghesh euphonic the form <"Tft i s used, as Iy'SIE ; 
also before n, n, 17, not having Qamets, and usually before Maqqeph ; 
before a Guttural with Qamets, HQ , as ^N Hft § 142. a ; but some- 
times na also before such Gutturals, as in Ex. xii. 26, Pni337n na. 

VERBS. 

§ 171. Classification. They are distributed into (a) Primitive, 
i. e. underived from any other words; e. g. "^TQ io reign* -^J ^° s ^» 
and so of most of the Hebrew verbs, {b) Derivative, i. e. such as 
come from primitives by the accession of formative letters. Such are 
all the conjugations of verbs excepting the first or Kal. (c) De- 
nominative, i. e. those which are formed from nouns {de nomine) ; e. g. 
""TO to live in a tent, from 'HN a tent. 

Note. These divisions concern the origin of verbs, but not the mode of inflection. A great 
number of verbs is comprehended in the class b, while very few belong to the class c. 

§ 172. Inflection. In respect to inflection, verbs are divided into 
regular and irregular. Regular verbs are those which are analo- 
gous in their inflection, and preserve through all their changes their 
original triliteral root. Verbs irregular are either pluriliteral, or 
those which drop or assimilate one or more of their radical letters. 

§ 1 73. Conjugation, (a) The term conjugation, in grammars of 
the Greek, Latin, and some modern languages, is employed to denote 
different classes of verbs, which are distinguished from each other by 

* Literally, he reigned. The Infinitive in English is used in this work, merely for the sake of 
brevity, in preference to the third person of the past tense, which would exactly correspond to 
the Hebrew root. 



82 §§ 173 175. PECULIAR CONJUGATIONS. 

certain peculiar characteristics of form or inflection. Such verbs are 
therefore said to belong to the first, second, third, etc. conjugation. In 
this sense the Hebrew might be said to have several conjugations ; but 
this word is not so used by Hebrew grammarians. 

(b) In the Hebrew grammar, the word conjugation is applied to 
different forms of the same verb, and it corresponds in some degree 
with the word voice in Greek grammar, although it is employed in a 
much more extensive sense. The passive and middle voices in Greek 
exhibit the original idea of the verb under certain modifications, or 
with some additional shades of meaning. So the property of all the 
conjugations in Hebrew is, to vary the primary meaning of the verb, by 
uniting with it an accessory signification. The Hebrews were thus 
enabled to express, by means of their conjugations, all those various 
modifications and relations of verbs, which, in most other languages, 
are expressed either by composite verbs, or by several words. 

Note. The most convenient arrangement is, to make as many conjugations as there are forms 
of verbs, original and derived. These are presented to view in the following section. 

Usual Conjugations. 
ACTIVE. passive and reflexive. 

Name. Form. Name. Form. 

§ 174. 1. Kal te|j 2. Niphal 

3. Piel tep 4. Pual 

5. Hiphil toapn 6. Hophal 
7. Hithpael tepJTJ 

Peculiar Conjugations. 

§ 175. (a) 1 Poel 22iD, active. 2 Poal »to, pas- 
sive. 3 Hithpoel llinDii ; without a sibilant letter, as 
bbtinr\ (from bb*). 

These conjugations are found in the class of verbs named Ay in 
doubled (3737), and very rarely appear in any other. They take the 
place of Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, as these appear in regular verbs ; 
see § 262. 

(A) 1 Polel DErtp, active. 2 Polal Ditfp, passive. 
3 Hithpolel DDiprin. 




§§ 175 — 178. UNUSUAL CONJUGATIONS. 83 

In Verbs Ayin Vav (137 § 269) these forms are the common substi- 
tutes for the regular Piel, Pual, and Hithpael. 

Note. Although the appearance of these two classes [a and b) is 
the same, yet the mode of formation is very different ; e. g. ^51^, etc., 
comes from the root -2-?9» an( ^ is formed by inserting S between the two 
Jirst radicals ; while E^lp, etc., comes from Wp, and is formed by 
doubling the last radical. Most of the lexicons and grammars name 
the class b, Pilel, Pulal, etc., because, in regular verbs, the shape of 
these conjugations would be like '*?*?[?, V? *?!?., etc. But as these 
conjugations scarcely have an existence in regular verbs, (and have 
not even a similar corresponding one in the Arabic, excepting the very 
rare and peculiar conj. IX. and XI.), so it is much better, for the 
sake of perspicuity, to name them as I have done here. A potiori 
nomen ft, is a good rule in making out artificial denominations of this 
nature. 

Unusual Conjugations. 

\_% 176. Most of them are of very rare occurrence; and several of 
them occur not more than two or three times, in the whole Scriptures. 
They are as follows ; viz. 

(1) Hothpaal or Hut hpaal, vtap-On } btep/pn ^ both passive forms 
of Hithpael ; comp. Pual in § 174. They are of very rare occur- 
rence. 

(2) Pilel active and Pulal passive, V^P, V?^ (comp. § 175. b 
Note), occurring only in five or six cases, in regular verbs. 

(3) Pilpel active and Polpal passive, formed out of verbs 3737 and 
137, by repeating the first and last radicals ; e. g. from vba comes ^Sr?3 f 
'=>?? ; from v^3, vS^S and ^?V? . These are equivalent to the forms 

from the same verbs, described in § 175. a. b. 

(4) A form Tiphel seems to have been in existence ; e. g. '"Hrjtt 
from n *irj, '?n-fl a denominative (§ 171. c) from '$1. Once we have 
a P a oel form; e. g. in ISISrj, in all respects a a-rca^ Xeyopevov in He- 
brew. 

Note. Other conjugations are made by some grammarians ; but they are disputed ones, and it 
is of little or no importance to the student to insert them here, as his lexicon will give him the 
requisite information.] 

[§ 177« Pluriliteral verbs, i. e. verbs whose root consists otmore 
than three letters, take the following forms; viz. Ep"]3, fETiS, 7?^, 
active; ^^?, ^5^, "^TrQ, passive. 

§ 178. No one verb in Hebrew exhibits all the conjugations above 
mentioned; and very few exhibit even all the usual ones in § 174. 



84 §§ 179 182. SIGNIF. OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 

Neither is the active or passive meaning always attached to the forms 
under which it is ranged ; as will be seen in the sequel. Predominant 
usage directs the classification of the respective conjugations. 

§ 179. The names of all the derived conjugations are borrowed 
from the various forms of the verb '??, which the old grammarians 
used in constructing paradigms ; and are merely the modes of pro- 
nouncing those several forms. The first conjugation is called <Xl Qal, 
or (as it is usually written) Kal, i. e. light ; because it is not, like the 
derived forms, increased by the addition of any letter to the root. The 
other names are formed thus; ^3??3 Niph-'S&l ; >$Q Pi-yel Daghesh 
forte being excluded by the Guttural; V37S3 Pu-yfll, Daghesh being 
excluded; V^H ffiph-Vzl ; hy*$n Hdph-ydl ; bjBOn ffith-pd-yel 3 
Daghesh excluded; and so of the unusual conjugations. 

§ 180. The third person singular of the prseter tense in Kal, is re- 
garded as the root of all verbs ; one class (verbs ^) excepted, whose 
root is the triliteral Infinitive, e. g. D^p. 

Form and Signification of the usual Conjugations. 

§ 181. (a) Kal is generally active; but it may be 
either transitive or intransitive. 

(b) The root, which is the third person singular mas- 
culine,, has three different forms, distinguished by the 
final vowels, Pattahh, Tseri, and Hholem. 

E. g. "Tpf to visit, ]pT to be old, and *^ to fear. 

Note 1 . The form with final Pattalih is generally active and tran- 
sitive ; but sometimes it is intransitive, as J~l\ to be great. The other 
two forms are usually intransitive, but sometimes otherwise. 

Note 2. Some verbs in Kal have a passive meaning; e. g. ]^V2 to 
inhabit and to be inhabited ; ^4% to elevate and to be elevated. 

§ 182. (a) Form of Niphal. It is formed by prefix- 
ing Nun to the ground-form of the verb, and dropping 
the first vowel of the same. 

E.g. ^u^Bjja. 

Note. The real prefix seems to be ?H } (in Arabic it is ?W). In 
the Infinitive this developes itself; e. g. vtojjn =01^77 ^ Nun being 
assimilated in the first form, § 107, a - The appropriate pointing of the 
prefix Nun, in the Praster, would be Sheva (?) ; but short Hhireq is ne- 
cessarily substituted for it, inasmuch as the vowel under the first radical 



§^ 182 184. SIGNIF. OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 85 

falls away, § 137; or an equivalent vowel must be substituted, in case 
the first radical is a Guttural, § 138. 

(b) Significations of Niphal. (I) It is passive of Kal, when 
Kal is transitive. (2) Passive of Piel, or of Hiphil, when they are 
transitive and Kal is intransitive. (3) It is often a reflexive form, cor- 
responding to the middle voice of the Greeks ; as "iftt^n watch thyself, 
'NtpS he asked for himself. Such are the usual meanings ; but, 

(4) It also has an intransitive sense, and often expresses passion or 
affection; as *"VCP. he was sick, in Kal ^ ^"\ with the same sense; 
f^?. to sigh. (5) To show one's self as doing a thing, or as suffering 
it to be done ; e. g. "T22?? to shoiv ones self honourable, 3723 (=3733?) 
to exhibit one's self as smitten, ""'■H^??. to suffer one's self to be entreated. 
(6) To express reciprocal action ; as ?22tpD to contend, viz. with an- 
other; ^073 to fight, viz. with an enemy; 3ni3 to confer, viz. with 
another. (7) Sometimes simply as Kal ; e. g. 3?Stp3 juravii. 

Note. It is often used in such a connection that it must be translated by a corresponding 
verb having can, may, must, ought, could, would, should, etc., before it ; e. g. Genesis vi. 21 : 
xvi. 10 : xx. 9, etc. 

§ 183. (a) Form of Piel. This is characterized by 
a doubling of the middle radical ; as ^j?. 

Note. In case the middle radical is a Guttural, and cannot take a 
Daghesh forte, the preceding vowel is prolonged as a compensation 
(§ 111. § 112) ; e. g. "TO for T^ja, etc. 

(b) Significations of Piel. (1) It is causative of Kal; e. g. "T2N 
to perish, "T21N to cause to perish. This is the predominant meaning. 

(2) To let any thing or person be or do thus and so ; to regard or 
exhibit it or him as being or doing thus or so ; e. g. 71^1 to let one 
live ; Pfl? to show or pronounce one to be just ; ^^ to pronounce one 
unclean. (3) It is intensive of Kal : e. g. '*f^ to ask, '*?&? to beg ; 
""12&7 to break, ~WP to dash in pieces. (4) It has a privative sense ; 
e. g. ^5J to knoiv, 1?? to misapprehend ; Hiph. ttf'Htpn to take root, 
Piel, ^"?.&? to root out. (5) It often agrees in signification with Kal 
transitive ; seldom has it an intransitive meaning. (6) Sometimes it 
has a reflexive sense ; e. g. Gen. xli. 14, nv^p and he shaved himself. 

§ 184. Pual. This is simply the passive of Piel, 
and is characterized by a Daghesh in the middle radi- 
cal, (or a compensation for it when it is excluded), and 
by Qibbuts short or Qamets Hhateph in the first syl- 
lable. 



86 §§ 185 — 187- SIGNIF. OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 

E. g. bt3|7 or b^|J qdt-tal. 

§ 185. (a) Form of Hiphil. It prefixes He, and in- 
serts Yodh between the two last radicals. 

E.g. biajj, Hiph. Vtepn. 

(6) Significations of Hiphil. (1) It is causative of Kal; as 
Will to be holy, E^i?*"! to make holy. This is the usual meaning. 

(2) Not unfrequently is Hiphil used in the same sense (transitive 
and intransitive) as Kal ; e. g. fTntprj to corrupt, T£ > \)V?7] to be quiet, 
V% f H to be white. 

Note. Seldom are the Piel and Hiphil of the same verb both used 
in a causative sense. When both are employed, it is generally with 
some shade of difference in their signification ; e. g. "T223 to honour, 
""^-^H to render powerful. 

§ 186. Hophal. This is characterized by rr prefixed 
to the root, accompanied by the vowel Qamets Hhateph 
or short Qibbuts. 

E. g . bt^norbtspn. 

It is usually the passive of Hiphil ; but it occasionally has an in- 
transitive meaning, as Fut. Hoph. vOT he shall be able, from >DJ ; 
sometimes an active one, as E7Py j 7! " ' V e sna ^ not serve them, Exod. 
xx. 5 : Deut. v. 9 ; xiii. 3 ; which, however, is capable of being ren- 
dered, that ye may not be caused to serve, etc. 

§ 187. (a) FoRxM of Hithpael. It prefixes Ip. to the 
Inf. form of Piel. 
E. g. inf. Pi. b^g, Hith. bagnn. 

[(b) The characteristic OH undergoes several mutations, when it 
comes before the Sibilants, or the cognate letters. E. g. 

(1) Before a Sibilant, the n changes places with it; as in the fol- 
lowing examples, viz. 

D Kal baD Hithpa. banprr instead of baDfln 

in __ aab __ aantpn _ anwirj 
s — pni — P^^n _ P!F?rin 

In the latter case (^) the n is not only transposed, but changed into 
its cognate TO. This case, however, is very unfrequent in Hebrew, 
though common in the cognate languages. 



§§ 187 189. SIGNIF. OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 87 

(2) Before a cognate letter the n is more commonly assimilated; e. g. 



'" ) 5^ir T instead of 


^5UOn 


from 


- T 


nrmn — 


^rr&ryn 


— 


- T 


cann __ 


n®F\ryn 


, 


□an 



T 


as 


s©*n 


3 


as 


nD?n 


3 


as 


wsan 


1 


as 


□ai-is 


E7 


as 


niBi^ri 



(3) The same usage of assimilation is occasionally extended to some 
other letters ; e. g. 

instead of ^N^H from i"DT 

_ nssnn — nos 

•• - : • t t 

— «23nn sn3 

■• - : • tt 

_ Daring _ on (§ 112) 

(c) Significations of Hithpael. (1) It is reflexive of Piel ; as 
^.712 to sanctify, ^Hl^O^ ^ e sanctified himself. (2) It signifies to 
make one's self be or do, or to exhibit one's self as being or doing, that 
which the verb in its ground-form signifies ; e. g. ESn/Tin to show 
ones self cunning, from Q?n to be wise ; s?$tyT\ to behave one's self 
proudly, from ^"7| to be great ; nlpniin to represent one's self as sick, 
from n ^rj to be sick. Also with some slight modifications, as DSnriil 
to think one's self wise, from E?H to be wise ; ^Vt^fyH. to make ones 
self to be sought, i. e. to conceal one's self, from E??n to seek ; ]2nnn 
to ask favour for one's self properly to make one gracious, from ]?H 
to be gracious. These are the leading significations. 

(3) It is sometimes the passive of Piel; as *Tj?S to number, *T|?srin 
to be numbered. (4) It is also intransitive ; as ^3^0*7 to be angry. 
(5) It is not unfrequently active and transitive; as "H§Ji3tprT to keep or 
observe, viz. laws, statutes, etc. 

Signification of the unusual Conjugations. 

{_% 188. Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel, are merely substitutes for 

the daghesh'd conjugations (§ 175, a) ; as are also Polel, Polal, and 

Hithpolel (§ 175, b) ; and likewise Pilel and Pulal (§ 176, 2). 

(t v 

Note. When the regular Piel, Pual, etc., of verbs ^ and TO are 

employed, together with the forms just mentioned, there is generally 

some slight distinction of meaning between them, such as is described 

in § 185. b. Note]. 

{_% 189. Pilpal and Polpal are only another form for Piel and 
Pual, § 176. 3.] 



88 ^190 — 194. verbs; mode, tense, etc. 

£§ 190. Hothpaal and Hcjthpaal agree in meaning with Hith- 
pael, when it is used in a passive sense. 

Note. The other unfrequent conjugations have generally an intensive signification. The plu- 
riliteral verbs are few, and of various significations.] 



MODE, TENSE, etc. 

§ 191. The modes and tenses of verbs are very limited 
in Hebrew. The modes are the Indicative, the Impera- 
tive, and the Infinitive ; the tenses are the Prseter and 
Future. 

§ 192. The number, 'person and gender of verbs, are 
expressed with unusual fulness and accuracy. 

§ 193. The ground-forms of all verbs are (1) The 
Prceter, 3rd pers. sing. masc. ; which is the ground-form 
of the past tense and the present participle. (2) The 
Infinitive construct ; which is generally regarded as the 
ground-form of the Future and Imperative. 

Note. But in verbs with Future Pattahh, the Infinitive construct 
takes Hhole?n regularly ; which seems to be at variance with this prin- 
ciple ; at least it is an exception (a large one too) to the maxim just 
laid dcwn, see § 212. 2. § 230, respecting the Inf. const, as a ground- 
form. However, out of Kal the Inf. may well be taken as the ground- 
form of the Future and Imperative in all the conjugations; and even 
the Participles in Piel, Pual, Hiphil, Hophal, and Hithpael, are de- 
rived from the Infinitive form in the same conjugations. 

§ 194. The Prceter is declined by adding to the root 
(the 3rd pers. sing, masc.) fragments of pronouns, in 
order to designate person and gender ; e. g. 

Singular. 

3 mas. btoij ground-form. 

3 fern. H b laf? by adding H- . . . . fragment of N^H 

2 mas. n^fe|j ■ — n Tin _ . — nns 
2 fem. -Tibt^ — r} \n — __ ri« \n« 

1 com. s Ffchl} — "^ H prob. from obs. ^H 



§§ 195 — 197- INF. MODE FUT. TENSE. 89 

Plural. 
3 com. *-.tf T by adding -1 N^ derivation unknown 
2 mas. C^.^n " — QW fragment of C^S 

2 fem. izfctop. — 1Q narj — _ ]rnw 

1 com. tfjfejj — ft — _ ^ 

§ 195. 27^ /;{/! construct in Kal (the usual ground- 
form of the Fut. and Imp. mood) has, like the Praeter 
Kal (§ 181. b), three forms; viz. top, 2D*f, tftf. The 
Inf. in the derived conjugations, takes the vowels pecu- 
liar to such conjugations respectively. 

Note. Besides these endings, the Inf. of regular verbs, specially in 
Kal, sometimes takes the form of a fem. noun, § 212. 3; and in some 
irregular ones, the fem. form in Kal is almost the only one in use, e. g. 
in verbs Pe Yodh, etc. 

§ 196. The Infinitive absolute takes Qamets in the 
first syllable, and Hholem impure in the last. 



E.g. 



Vii 



'K 



Note. This form is preserved even in most of the irregular verbs. 
In verbs ^, however, we have Eip for Elj?. The derived conjuga- 
tions preserve, for the most part, the final Hholem impure in the Inf. 
absolute; e.g. Niph. ^iy7, Piel ^'^P_, Pual VtSlj?. Hiphil has Tseri; 
as v"*t3j?n or '*£)"?rJ. The variations will be noted under the respec- 
tive classes of verbs. 

§ 197. The Future tense is declined by prefixing frag- 
ments of pronouns to the ground-form, i. e. the Inf. con- 
struct ; and also by suffixing them, in some cases, in 
order to mark the gender, or number, or both. 

Compare the Praeter (k 194), which is declined by the aid of forma- 
tive suffixes only. The following table exhibits the probable derivation 
of most of the Fut. formative prefixes and suffixes. 

Singular- 

Inf. const. ;£[> ground-form. 

rprob. from S^n, i for *) 
Ito begin a word, 
deriv. uncertain. 

from nn« ; 

rpref. from JW; suff. from 
l>^<7 to mark the fem. 
from "»pM. 



3 masc. 


vt^ by prefixing 


^ 


3 fem. 
2 masc. 


bbpn 


— n 


2 fem. 


^i]^ by suff. andpref., 1 


-. — n 


1 com. 


'^F?^ by prefixing 


— w 



90 



§§ 198 — 201. verbs; formation of tenses. 



3 masc. 
3 fern. 

2 masc. 
2 fern. 



Plural. 
$>*$$ by suff. and pref., A — ■» 

njYt^n . . . . j n3 _ n 
nbfcpn 






1 H2 _ n 



deriv. of 51 uncertain, 
f deriv. of n uncertain ; 

^njfrom nzn. 

pref. from. EJHN . 
j-prefix from ]J!)N ; H3 
'-from ^2n . 
1 com. <-ttp3 by prefixing — 3 from^. 

[§ 198. The formative prefixes or praeformatives of the Fut. would 
appropriately have a Sheva for their vowel-pointing, (as in Piel and 
Pual they have) ; but the vowel here receives various modifications ac- 
cording to the pointing of the letter which follows ; §§ 136 — 139.] 

[§ 199. In the derived conjugations, Niphal, Hiphil, Hophal, and 
Hithpael, the prceformatives of the Fut. usually expel the characteris- 
tics of the conjugation, and transfer their vowel points to themselves, 
§118; e. g. 

Fut. Niphal b&jf. instead of bggrp. from Inf. bfc|jn 



— — in verbs 12? DIjT? 

— Hiphil b^i£ 

— — in verbs W Q^PJ 

— Hophal bap; 

— — in verbs W DR-V 

— Hithpael btopn^ 



mprr 
b^pn 

mil 

btapn 

-': t 

ap^in 
btopnn 



__ b^pn 



D>pn 
biapn 

np^n 



_ btepnn] 

§ 200. The final vowel of the Fut. may be (like that 
of the Praeter and Inf.) either Hholem, Pattahh, or 
Tseri. 

E. g. Hkolem ; which is by far the most usual form, as ^P' , . . Pat- 
tahh ; which is common in intransitive verbs having a Praeter with 
Tseri, and also in verbs with a Guttural in the final syllable, and some 
others, as "Ta3\ SEtt^, NStt^MSO*:, b^ = b»3^ etc. Tseri, as 
1$tf», SBfe, ^.=7^, etc' 

§ 201. The Imperative follows the same analogy as the 
Future, usually taking the same vowels in its final sylla- 
ble, and for the like reasons. It is declined by means of 
«?z/$z«r-fragments, like those in the Praeter and Future. 

Note. The Imp. has only the second persons. When an Imp. 
sense for the 1st and 3rd persons was needed, the Hebrews employed 
those persons respectively of the Fut. tense. 



§| 202 — 204. verbs ; subj. and opt. modes. 91 

§ 202. The participles in Kal are both active and pas- 
sive ; in the other conjugations there is but one form, 
which follows the respective conjugations with regard to 
its meaning. 

E. g. Kal 2ryi3 scribens, S^flS scriptnm. But in verbs with final 
Tseri and Hholem, the part, present retains the form of the Prseter, as 
Prset. ^, part. «^»; Prset. "foj, part. "fr; so in verbs 137, Praet. 
0|Jj part. QjJ. In Niphal the same principle prevails, with a slight 
variation; as Niph. ^P?, part. ^?l?3, i. e. with final Pattahh pro- 
longed. 

Note ] . Intransitive verbs usually have but one form of the parti- 
ciple in Kal ; which may have either an active or passive meaning, as 
the case requires. 

Note 2. Beyond Niphal, all the participles are derived from the 
Inf. form of their respective conjugations, by prefixing ft, and dropping 
the characteristic n where it occurs; e. g. Piel ^|2P, Pual '^i!jP, 
Hiphil V^iJO, Hophal ^l??> Hithpael VlS^E). In the passive 
forms, the final Pattahh of the ground-form is prolonged, i. e. it be- 
comes Qamets. Any departures from this principle will be noticed 
where they occur. 

Note 3. Participles are declined in the same manner as adjectives, 
having sing, and plur. forms of the masc. and fem. gender. 

Subjunctive and Optative Moods. 

§ 203. The Hebrew has neither of these in separate, 
regularly defined forms, as in Greek ; but it employs in 
the room of them, and to a certain extent, peculiar forms 
of the Fut. tense. 

Note. In the Arabic, the usage of the Fut. in this way, is far more defined and general than 
in the Hebrew. In Syriac and Chaldee, the usage does not at all appear. The Hebrew use is a 
kind of medium between the two, as it is somewhat frequent, and yet far from being general. 

§ 204. The Future is varied, for the purpose of ex- 
pressing an optative or conditional sense, by paragoge 
and apocope. 

(a) By paragoge, viz. of ft- and sometimes T-; e. g. Fat. ISHN, 
with paragoge FTJ^n^; so "^?^, with paragoge •"HX3TM; ]l£H1 parag. 

(b) By a hind of apocope ; which generally consists in rendering 
shorter the final long vowel; and in some cases, in casting away the 



92 §§ 205 — 206. verbs; parag. and apoc. future. 

final letter and vowel ; e.g. b^ftp^ apoc. bl£f£; ^ a J, apoc. ■Hbj with 
Hliolem pure, (which is shorter than i\) ; '~J>?^., apoc. bO^ . 

§ 205. The Paragogic Future is, for the most part, 
confined to the 1st person, singular and plural ; the 2nd 
and 3rd persons rarely exhibiting it.. It is employed in 
all the conjugations ; but it is very rare in the passive 
ones and in verbs n 1 ?. It is used, 

(a) As an Optative ; e. g. HiTl^S let me die. (b) To express ex- 
citement, urging, assurance, strong determination ; as nD /& J must go, 
TTn^N let me rise up, Pn^l^ I am resolved to speak, H3 y 3 let us go, 
etc. (c) After the particles ?.?^? , 1 (that), it expresses the latter 
part of conditional sentences; as '~J^?P^ : ?^V, so that I may de- 
clare ; rnDbWj that we may eat. id) In some cases, it is used in this 
last (conditional) sense, where the particle is omitted. 

Note 1 . Examples of paragoge in respect to the third and second 
persons of verbs, may be found in Is. v. 19 : Ezek. xxiii. 20 ; Ps. xx. 4. 

Note 2. Vav conversive (§ 208) frequently occasions the paragogic 
form of the verb in the first person to be adopted, particularly in the 
later Hebrew ; but not with any speciality of meaning, as iTn^NJ 
and I said, Gen. xli. 11, HB stlS) and we dreamed ; comp. § 206. 
Note 1 . 

§ 206. The apocopate Future, on the other hand, is 
mostly confined to the 2nd and 3rd persons, rarely 
making its appearance in the first ; e. g, 



Reg. verb Hiph. 


b^f?! apoc. b§i£ b^flfl apoc, 


b^n 


Verbs fa Kal 


T T T 


nbrn 

T 


Hiph. 


•T " T * T 


nan 

" T 


Verbs rh Kal 


nb^ — brr (ba>) nban __ 


ban (ban) 


Piel 


ribxi ~_ b^ (bji) nbon __ 


ban (ban) 


Hiph. 


nbrp — . ba> (ban) nban _ 


ban (ban) 


Hithp. 


nbarp __ bani nbonn _ 


bann 



This Future is employed, (a) To express command, wish, prohibi- 
tion ; e. g. ^TP! let him destroy ; ^R&F} b^ hide not. (b) After ) in 
a conditional sentence; as *"M!*! that he may tell, (c) After the par- 
ticles of negation, tfb, b^ ; a s ^n tfb thou shalt not add; ^ry\F\ bs 
thou shalt not be preferred. 

[[Note 1. Vav conversive (§ 208) connects itself very often with 



^206 — 208. verbs; vav conversive. 93 

such apocopate forms, but frequently without any speciality of meaning; 
8 . g. b^ and he divided. Comp. § 205. Note 2 ; also § 101. b. 

Note 2. The proper apoc. Future is confined to conjugations and 
forms, such as the table above exhibits. All Futures do by no means 
admit it, in all the conjugations ; nor do all classes of verbs admit it ; 
nor does any verb admit it in cases where it has a formative suffix. 

Note 3. The apocopate Futures, specially in poetry and in the later 
Hebrew, are not always of special signiticancy, but are often employed 
as the common ones.] 

N. B. The Fut. with retracted accent and final syllable shortened 
because of this retraction, does not always and of course belong to the 
Fut. apocopate; for not the apocopate forms only, but also others, oc- 
casionally suffer such retraction and shortening of the final syllable ; 
see § 101. b. d. 

§ 207. The Imperative, like the Future, has both pa- 
ragogic and apocopate forms, which give intensity to the 
meaning. 

E. g. Paragogic; as nbtf, J™}*; D-ip, Tl^p . ngD f TV^V , 
Apocopate; as ?*?|?n (for v^tDpH) ; so Hv^apoc. ?|; b^E, apoc. '&; 

\m0 apoc. of rrab# 9 jyiR ap oc. of njsnp . 

Future with Vav conversive. 

§ 208. Vav with Pattahh prefixed to the Future tense, 
and followed by a Daghesh forte, is called Vav conver- 
sive ; because its usual effect is to convert such Future 
into a Prseter, in respect to meaning. 

E. g. ~!£^ he said, also "T?W ! H he said or and he said. If the prce- 
formative letter of the Fut. be W, the Daghesh is omitted and the vowel 
is lengthened ; as /EjTbJ}, § 112. If the prseformative letter of the 
verb have a Sheva simple, Daghesh forte is usually omitted after the 
Vav; e. g. ^&|£1, § 73. Note 3. 

[[Note 1. Vav conversive is often connected with the paragogic first 
pers. Fut., § 205. Note 2; also with the apocopate 2nd and 3rd pers. 
Fut., § 206. Note 1 ; in many cases without giving an Optative or Sub- 
junctive meaning to them. 

Note 2. Vav conversive commonly (not always) makes the Future 
Milel, and consequently shortens the final vowel if it be long, § 101. b. 

Note 3. Vav conversive is probably a fragment of the verb Hjn to 
be. The first letter is dropped (as it commonly is in Syriac), and the 



94 §§208 — 211. verbs; occasional peculiarities. 

fragment HJ is united to the Future by assimilating the 71, (as in 
n$» = n$-nb) ; so that bt^n^bsrv; njn^ was [that] he killed, 
i. e. he killed. So the Arabians make their Imperfect, only they write 
out the verb of existence in fu'l ; and so the Syrians, except that they 
employ the participle of the verb of existence. 

Note 4. When Vav is not conversive, and is prefixed to the Fut., 
it has a different punctuation from the above; e. g. in Gen. i. 6, TPI, 
but with Vav conversive TTJJ ; so ^f?Y], but with Vav conversive 

b'fcjTn.] 

Pr aster with Vav. 

§ 209. Vav praefixed to the Praeter is merely a con- 
junction. But it often gives to the Praeter the sense of 
a Future,, because it connects it with a preceding Future 
or Imperative. 

Note. As Vav conversive prefixed to the Future, retracts the tone 
(§ 208. Note 2) ; so, on the contrary, Vav joined to the Praeter usually 
throws the tone forward, as ^^7, Wp^h, § 101 a. 

§ 210. General remark on the tenses. The tenses in Hebrew are 
real Aorists, capable of every variety of meaning as to designation of 
time. See this fully developed in the Syntax, § 503. § 504. 

Occasional peculiarities in the forms of Verbs, 
[k 211. The peculiarities now to be noted are not confined to any 
one conjugation or class of verbs, but apply more or less to all the dif- 
ferent conjugations and classes of them. 

(a) Paragogic letters are often suffixed to some of the 

forms ; e. g. 

< 

(1) Nun, to persons ending in ^ or \ ; as l^frT. instead of *l W? :9 
< < 

^piznri instead of ^^l?) > rarely to the Praeter, as "P^Hit i nstea( l o£ 
TO-& ; see § 109. c. § 146. b. (2) (a) 71-, usually to the Fut. and Imp. 
active, § 204. § 205. § 207; rarely in the Praeter, as nfTM for W-jfe ; 
Niph. Preet. fern. HN 1 ??? , with 71. parag. nnN^?3 ; Hiph. fern. 
nM^Snn, with parag. nnNp^rjn . (£) Sometimes 71. is used instead 
of 71. ; e. g. 1 Sam. xxviii. 15, nWlpMJ. (3) Aleph paragogic or otiant, 
rarely ; as ^ft, N^ft the same;' so «^|"! for *&&, § 125. a. (4) 
Participles sometimes take He or Yodh paragogic, especially the latter, 
when they are in regimen ; as rnN*T? V^QIpan . (5) Sometimes the 
Inf. mood takes it ; as ^tsnnb. (6) Also the Praeter 2nd pers. fern., 
as^bttp. 



§§ 211, 212. VERBS TRANSITIVE. 95 

(5) Forms with Quiescents are sometimes defectively 
written, § 63. 

E. g. im for TVft, mr for «p (comp. | 122. 1) ; but this usage 
is rare. Oftener J is written for H3 ; a s )&$& for n32?2n . Some- 
times J\l- for ^-j as W3TP for WT, ™9 f or V1MW7." So 2HN f or 
n^H, etc. 

(c) The prepositions 5, 5, ? a prefixed to the Inf. of Xiphal, often 
(not always) expel the n characteristic, and stand in its place ; as 
bfcp for b^n^ ; comp. § 199. 

(d) Mem -prce formative in participles is sometimes (rarely) omitted ; 
as ngb for nj£jp, Dtfipoa f or DBpJl»3, etc.] 



REGULAR VERBS TRANSITIVE.* 

NOTES ON PARADIGM I. 

The student is first of all to commit paradigm I. of the Verbs. The following notes will serve 
to explain variations and anomalies. The paradigms are, for convenience' sake, thrown together 
at the end of the Grammar. 

N. B. The learner will be careful to note, that the tone is on the ultimate in all cases where 
it is not marked with an accent over the penult. Particular care, at the outset, will enable him 
always to accent the verbs rightly, without any trouble. 

Kal. 

[§ 212. (1) Prceter. The unusual forms are 3 fern. sing, in H- 3 
e. g. rib|S from bttj ; also 2 pers. masc. ™™? for n"tta ( n parag.), 
§ 211. 2 ; Vjpbn for n?bn 2 pers. sing. fern'. (Yodh parag.), § 211. 6. 

(2) The example ^?"J exhibits the Fut. with Pattahh, (familiarly 
called Fut. A)\ but there are very few verbs with such a Future, un- 
less the last syllable has a Guttural in it, or the verb belongs to the 
classes with final Tseri or Hholem in the Prseter ; § 181. b. The Inf. 
of ^?"J is ^3""! ; and so in other cases of the like nature ; which seems 
not to agree with the idea of its being the ground-form of such Futures 
and Imperatives as take Pattahh ; § 193. 2. 

(3) Less usual forms of the Infinitive. Besides the usual forms in 
the paradigm, there are, (a) Inf. absolute, ^jj, Vav omitted; Inf. con- 
struct '"^k, Yav fulcrum only; also as 'Qp. (&) The Inf. has femi?iine 
forms also," though rarely; e". g. like ^^, n V^R, "^P; C^l? 2 ?, 
like the Chaldee, is doubtful). 

* Some of the verbs here treated of are intra?isitive also ; but in general it is otherwise ; and 
so, a potiori nomen fit. 



96 §§ 212, 213. verbs transitive. 

Note. The Hholem in the Inf. absolute is impure and immutable ; 
but in the Inf. const, it is pure and mutable. Hence it is shortened 
before Maqqeph ; as "^j? qeiol. Before suffixes it is shortened and 
transposed ; see the Inf. with suffixes in Par. XXII. 

(d) Less usual forms of the Future. These are vltD^. (Vav ful- 
crum), rarely as ^|T. except in verbs with a Guttural in the final syl- 
lable, or verbs intransitive having a Preeter with Tseri ; still more sel- 
dom as ^&J7\ First pers. parag. as nbtpj^ very rare. In pause 
?lbbj?% ^y', § 146; with "? parag. the latter form (2?*^) becomes 
1*03""^. Three times the 3rd plur. fern, has a prseformative *> instead 
of n; e. g. r\T(^_ instead of n;Y^?n, Dan. viii. 22, also the like 
forms in Gen. xxx, 38; 1 Sam. vi. 12. 

(5) Imperative; v*)t£J7 (Vav fulcrum), sometimes as ^P- Para- 
gogic, nbt^, nbtp|7 5 rarely as H^ttp, nbttp. Imp. 2nd pers. fern, 
sing, seldom as vPfJ, "^^ij, 1 Sam. xxviii. 8. Second pers. masc. 
plur. (seldom) ^'^ij; in pause, sometimes as *^^P, ^J?!?. The Hho- 
lem here is pure ; as it is also in the Inf. and Future. A kind of apo- 
copate form is not unfrequent of the 2 pers. fern, plural ; e. g. T^^lp 
with final furtive Pattahh, instead of rTOfttp. 

Note 1. As the Hholem in the Future, Inf., and Imper., is pure, 
whether written without a Vav or with one, it is of course shortened 
when the accent is thrown off; e. g. before Maqqeph, "" >^9P?^ yiq-tol, 
so before a suffix, EP^PI ; Inf. and Imp. "btjp qctol. 

Note 2. Some verbs have both Fut. and A ; e. g. such as f"^^, 
^T^, *"H?; VS*7, etc *? ( see Lex.) without any difference in their mean- 
ing. Others have Fut. and A, with a difference in their significa- 
tion; e. g. -)?jj, Enn, E^n, nta, etc. (see Lexicon). 

(6) Participles active. Frequently written ^P, although the Hho- 
lem is impure, § 63; very seldom as '^Ip, ^1p, or '^QP, which 
are doubtful forms. With Yodh parag., V^P, fem.^Obt^p (from the 
fern, form Tl^p). Participles are declined as adjectives, having masc. 
and fern, as well as sing, and plural forms; see parad. XXI. 

(7) Participles passive. Sometimes written vtajj (§ 4]) 5 seldom as 
^?ij. The sense is not uniformly passive, but sometimes active; often 
so in neuter and intransitive verbs ; as is the case also in Syriac] 

Niphal. 

[J 213. (1) The Pr aster has no variations from the paradigm. (2) 
Inf. abs. ®™ for ttf"ttn, Ezek. xiv. 3 ; *)*l?n for T^H, P s . Ixviii. 3. 

(3) The final Tseri, in the forms of the Inf. const., Fut., and Imp., 



^§ 213 — 216. VERBS TRANSITIVE. 9? 

is pure, and of course shortened when the accent is thrown off; e. g. 
")ftt#n T?9^, Inf. — "inS*"!. A disjunctive accent often changes the 
Tseri to Pattahh ; as 'g?*.l, § 129. d. % 145. The actually occurring 
plur. fern. 2nd and 3rd persons more usually have Pattahh, even with- 
out a disjunctive accent, or the presence of a Guttural ; as H3 v?^n , 
Jer. xxiv. 2; so that as to the forms with Tseri, as in the paradigm, 
it is somewhat doubtful whether they were the predominant ones in the 
language. 

(4) Future 1st pers. sing, often takes Hhireq under the prseforma- 
tive ; e. g. as ^jvS, t&^W, etc.] 

Piel. 

\k 214. (1) Prceter sometimes with Seghol, as "EM ; oftener with 
Pattahh, as TB?, specially before Maqqeph, as fcWTElba . (2) Infini- 
tive fern, forms rather frequent, as »TJ$Tj with suffix, as TFOlH^- 
(3) Imperative A, as ^?5 . (4) Participle sometimes without E? , as 
TW0 for r&WV, Eccl. iv. 2. § 108. a. 3. The plur. fern. Future has 
sometimes Pattahh instead of Tseri, e. g. nj^tajW instead of nafriajTf^ ; 
comp. § 213. 3. 

Note 1. The final Tseri throughout Piel is pure; and of course it 
should be shortened whenever it loses the accent; e. g. ^"WIQ , Nun 
parag. usually retains it, as J^bn 1 ] • 

Note 2. Daghesh forte in the middle radical is not unfrequently 
omitted in writing, when the middle radical has a Sheva ; as ^|?^. for 



*£> 



OT^55 , § 73. Note 3.] 

Pual. 

£§ 215. (1) Prceter very rarely, as ^^P, a mere orthographic varia- 
tion. Once ^HJjJ/ for T\TVff) . (2) Participle sometimes omits P; as 
npb for n,"^, to-jb for V-fi% , etc. § 108. a. 3.] 

Note. T)aghesh is sometimes omitted in writing here, as in Piel ; see Note 2 above. 

Hiphil. 

|[§ 216. (1) Procter sometimes with Seghol under the H, as •13tt?pn 
instead of Wtob^n ■ Rarely M is put for n, as ^^H (I s . lxiii. 3) ist 
pers. sing, for ^V^.H . 

(2) Infinitive absolute frequently as bftpn, (once 0^5^N Jer. xxv. 3, 
Chaldee form tf for n), or Vto^n . (3) I n f construct seldom as bSOpn, 
With preposition, as v>toj?*J? and '^if2 3 § 108. b. In a few instances 
the prseformative has Hhireq ; as *T"1H , like the Prseter. 

(4) Future apocopate ^{71, and specially with 1 as bttp*^ having 
a Tseri pure and mutable, § 206. This of course is shortened, when 
it loses the accent. A peculiar anomaly of the 3rd pers. plur. here, is 



98 §§216 218. VERBS TRANSITIVE. 

VTC3, «7*J?5, !n; ???-, 1 Sam. xiv. 22; xxxi. 2; Jer. ix. 2. This is 
after the manner of the Aramaean. 

(5) Imperative takes the apocopate form with Tseri, in the 2nd pers. 
sing. masc. and 2nd plur. fern. ; but it sometimes has the form v^t3j?r7 
here ; and with parag. H-, and with suffix pronouns, it always follows 

this model; e. g. nVt^n, sin^apn . 

(6) The apoc. form of the Part, ( btopB) i n the singular, is doubt- 
ful. But plural forms derived from such a singular, sometimes occur; 
e. g. D^rjtt as from ^hrytS, J er . xxix. 8; 0^!^ as from ->?.¥», 
2 Chron. xxviii. 23. 

Remarks. In the Prseter the "*- is generally held fast, not being 
exchanged, in the persons where it is used at all, for any other vowel; 
but in the Inf., Fut., and Imp., the apoc. forms, and those with "] pre- 
fixed, or preceded by vM } take Tseri instead of \, which Tseri is for 
the most part pure and mutable. Instead of this, Pattahh is employed 
when the final syllable of the verb has a Guttural in it, § 236. § 230.] 

Note. Respecting the tone-syllable in this conjugation, see § 100. 

Hophal. 

[J 217. Some verbs have both forms, i. e. as viapn and 'E?i?rj ; 
some the one exclusively , and some the other. No actual case of the 
Inf. construct occurs in this conjugation. 

In a very few cases, the n characteristic of the conjugation remains 
after the preeformative, e. g. riTOEpnp for /TO^D ; so in Hiph. H^in^ 
for nTV, verb nb. Instances of Hoph. Inf. abs. occur in Ezek. xvi. 4 
(bis); Josh. ix. 24.] 

Hithpael. 

Q§ 218. (1) The end syllable with Pattahh is frequent here, which 
of course makes Qamets in pause ; as EHpO""!, tt^JE^n . (2) I* 1 tne 
second and first person of the Prseter, (where the usual vowel between 
the second and third radical is Pattahh, as in the paradigm), if the 
tone is thrown off from this penult syllable, it occasionally takes Hhireq 
instead of Pattahh ; as ^ltpiEnrn , D^^^nni . (3) Maqqeph shortens 
the forms with Tseri, as this vowel is here pure and mutable ; e. g. 
n^Tjbnrjn . (4) Nun parag. usually retains and prolongs the Pat- 
tahh, when that vowel is used; as "p^vn/"^. (5) Daghesh forte in 
the middle radical is sometimes omitted here, as in Piel and Pual ; 
e. g. ^i?^? (for s njpSJ11), j u d gi XXt ]5 ? the Pattahh being prolonged 
as a compensation. 



§§ 219 222. VERBS INTRANSITIVE. 99 

(6) The passive of Hithpael, i. e. Hothpael, sometimes occurs ; 
e .g.rr,7gi71,Num.i.47; Deut.xxiv. 4; so MBfcn (for Nattr;n), D33q 
(for D23r?n) 3 with Qibbuts instead of Qamets Hhateph ; comp. §. 184.] 

Special Forms. 

Q 219. Besides the conjugations of the regular verbs here noted, 
Poel and Poal, also Pilel and Pulal, sometimes occur in them ; but 
such cases are exceedingly rare. E. g. of the former, are E?"nt£7 and 
EHfr', part. taStfito Job ix. 15, l#ib» (for so it should be pointed) Ps. 
ci. 5, \n^ 1 Sam. xxi. 3; of the latter, V??3, HH^J , bb^W .] 

REGULAR VERBS INTRANSITIVE, 

NOTES ON PARADIGM II. 

§ 220. The 3rd pers. sing. Praeter is the principal one which exhi- 
bits a departure from the forms of the regular transitive verb ; as will 
be seen by inspection of the paradigms. 

§ 221. Verbs final Hholem (of which there are not half a score), 
generally retain the Hholem in the derived forms; "'JTJ^, from "OJ f 
^b3; from bb; ; but not always, as **$?}$§ sha-kkal-ti from bb$ . 
As the Hholem in these verbs is pure, so it is shortened when it loses 
the accent ; as ■^l^l veyd-ghor-td. 

§ 222. In the same manner, those few verbs which retain Tseri in 
the derived forms, shorten it either into Hhireq or Seghol when the 
tone is removed; e. g. l"!?;, T^nV*.; ^?, *&%& . 

I^Note 1. All the futures are with Pattahh, unless the Preeter has 
two forms, A and E ; as ]?E? and 15^, Fut. only PHPI, as in the 
paradigm. 

Note 2. In pause the Tseri of verbs intransitive most frequently 
makes its appearance; e.g. ^P^"^, and so often. In a number of cases, 
a pause-accent makes the Tseri appear, which elsewhere does not ap- 
pear; as l?^ 7 , ]5*? on ly i n pause. 

Note 3. Out of Kal the intransitive verbs conform to the model of 
the transitive ones, and need not separate paradigms. The whole num- 
ber of them is very small ; and the cases of departure in inflection from 
the model of Par. I., are comparatively very few. 

Note 4. The verbs called intransitive, are in some cases transitive. 
As before, a potiori nomenfit7\ 



100 §§ 223—226. verbs with gutturals. 

VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. 

§ 223. We have seen (§ 179) that the verb ^3??, (the example for 
paradigms in the old grammars), is employed to give technical desig- 
nations to the various forms of verbs. Accordingly, as Q is the first 
letter in this verb, V the second, and b the third ; so verbs with Gut- 
turals may be denominated Q guttural, 27 guttural, b guttural, whose 
first, or second, or third radical letter is a Guttural. 

Verbs Pe Guttural; Par. III. IV. 

§ 224. Where other verbs would take a simple Sheva 
under the first radical, these more usually have a compo- 
site Sheva. This may be called the smooth enunciation. 

E. g . iE3?\ *p«j, prrjj, ins?, *pg, pirj, etc. 

Note 1. The prazformative letters must have the short vowel which 
corresponds with the composite Shevas, in such cases; see § 139. This 
extends to the letters formative of conjugation, as well as of tense ; e. g. 
Niph. T»$3, Hiph. T^rj ; Hoph. T»n, etc . 

Note 2. When the final vowel is Hholem, the preceding vowels 
are generally (_..); but when it is Pattahh, they are usually (.....) ; e. g. 
"f^?-* P!Oy. Yet such forms as ®^U) do sometimes occur. 

Note 3. As (.._) seems to be shorter than („...), so the first is some- 
times put for the second, where a more rapid enunciation is required ; 

e. g. ^T^rr, but with "I, ^^sn-j. 

§ 225. But not unfrequently the Guttural retains 
Sheva simple ; and then the vowel under the preeforma- 
tive, etc., is still the same as it would be in case a com- 
posite Sheva had been employed; i. e. verbs Pe Gut- 
tural do not employ the regular short Hhireq under 
prseformatives in the Fut, etc., but some other short 
vowel. This may be called the rough enunciation. 

E. g. -lbfcjj, ^it_, ijsna, mn), instead of nbg;, Ityi, Tjem, 

^5D V . Only the verbs rrn and ^J^. in Pe Guttural make such forms 

as rthj and njnj . 

§ 226. When, in the course of inflection, a simple 
Sheva comes immediately to follow a composite Sheva 
under the Guttural, the Guttural assumes the corre- 
sponding short vowel; see § 140. 



§§ 227, 228. VERBS PE GUTTURAL ; NOTES. 101 

E. g. VTtoy^ not ^P?^, which would make an impossible syllable, 
§ 42. § 140." So topW^ not -IQpw; ; ^^n , not *WQ%n . 

§ 227. Where the first radical would regularly be 
doubled, (as in the Inf. Fut. and Imp. of Niphal), but 
this is prevented by its being a Guttural (§ 111), the 
preceding vowel is lengthened (§ 112), as the paradigms 
shows. 

Note. In this respect verbs Pe Resh agree with verbs Pe Guttural^ 

§ 111 ; e. g. DO73 instead of DD^Pl . 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

{_% 228. (a) KAL. (1) Inf. construct, receiving prefix-prepositions 
with a Sheva, causes them to be pointed as the prozformatives in the 
Future are; e. g. "Tbgb, bb«b, also bb^b. i„f. f em . like nBtt?H, 
^ipj?., ""Vpn, which last form is very unusual. 

(2) The Future has two forms; as will be seen in the paradigm. 
Aleph here, whether a radical, or a prceformative of the first pers. 
sing., takes the Seghol vowels in preference to the others. The two 
forms -r. r. and -7 - are not unfrequently interchanged in the Fut. of 
the same verbs; and sometimes the singular has one form, and the 
plural another, just as adjunct words may require the pronunciation to 
be more or less rapid ; e. g. *P.N*| , plur. ^p^O . The reason of their 
exchange for each other, in many cases, is not apparent to us. It de- 
pended, probably, on the niceties of viva voce enunciation. 

The Futures with the rough enunciation, i. e. with Sheva simple, 
are as *"^H!! , ^HC! , usually having Pattahh in the first syllable when 
the last is 0, and Seghol when the last is A ; which last is probably 
an expedient in order to avoid the repetition of two Pattahhs. The 
declension of these forms is otherwise regular, as in Par. I. ; excepting 
that where the final Pattahh falls away, the praeformative may take, 
and sometimes does take, Pattahh ; as *"!pHC! , while the plural is ^PH! . 

(3) Imperative with S, as *pS , tnM. . With n parag., as n ?P^ • 
Imp. fem. sing. ^^H, ^TQg Ruth iii. 15, a peculiar form. 

(6) NIPHAL. The common vowel of the first syllable is of the 
Seghol class; e. g. ^3??., or (according to the rough enunciation) 
Stt7n?.. But in the Inf. absolute with Hholem final, it is Pattahh 
(comp. a. 2. above), as TpSrj?, Tin ^3 ; very seldom with Pattahh in 
other cases, yet sometimes so, as ™^*7- Gen. xxxi. 27. Vav prefixed 
commonly occasions Pattahh ; comp. § 224. Note 3. The increased 



102 §§ 228—232. verbs ayin guttural. 

forms of the Part, also receive it; as E ^?, HEb^a, D^b3?3. In 
Esth. viii. 8, we find DIAI"]?, a Part, sai generis. 

(c) HIPHIL. (1) Sometimes with the rough enunciation, as 

Tpqn. Peculiar is nbl?rT, § 142. e . 1. Vav prefixed changes the 

< 
composite Sheva to the A class; e. g. ^KHrjiTl, i. e. it hastens the 

pronunciation of the first part of the word, because the tone is thrown 
forward; comp. § 224. Note 3. (2) Inf. abs. and constr. are some- 
times interchanged in their usage ; e. g. "I^^n (Josh. vii. 7) for Inf. ab- 
solute T^Sn ; ^mb, Inf. abs. (Deut. xxvi.'l2) for Inf. const, ^bvb . 

(3) Future with rough enunciation "^PH^ ; and so the Part. "^PHQ . 

(4) VIP is for V1$$, § H9. c. 1 ; for the omission of the N, see § 118. 
Note 3. 

(4) HOPHAL. With rough enunciation, ^©nrj. ; also (rarely) 
71 {¥p, § 142. e. 1 ; vJJl nn, Inf. abs. sui generis, Ezek. xvi. 4. 

Note. The Daghesh'd conjugations (i. e. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael) 
are regular, because they can never have a Sheva under their first 
radical. - ] 

Verbs Ayin Guttural ; Par. V. 

§ 229. Where other verbs have Sheva simple under 
the middle radical, these take a composite Sheva, § 49. 

§ 230. Final syllables in the ground-forms of any of 
the conjugations, having Hholem or Tseri in them, may 
exchange these for Pattahh. In Kal this is usual; in 
the other conjugations, less common. But still, the Inf. 
const, in Kal takes Hholem ; comp. § 244. b. Note 2. 

E. g. Fut. PVV, rarely as nhf\ ; Piel 5H3, DHD ( see § 33); Hiphil 
Imp. PHHPT } etc. Verbs Ayin Resh sometimes imitate this. 

§ 231. As the conjugations Piel, Pual, Hithpael, can- 
not admit a Daghesh in the middle radical, they prolong 
the preceding vowel as a compensation, in cases where 
analogy would require such a Daghesh. Verbs Ayin 
Resh imitate them in this ; § 111. § 112. 

Notes on Paradigm V. 

Ik 232. (a) KAL. (1 ) Inf. fern, as Httqa?, nblltf ; also as TlJTn , 
(2) Future anomalous P*1T., § 142. e. 1. 



§§ 233 — 236. verbs lamedh guttural. 103 

(b) PI EL. Prseter with middle M, takes either Tseri or Hhireq 
impure before it ; as ]WQ 9 \f N3 . Middle n prefixes impure Hhireq ; 
as ?n3 . Middle n and 17, Hhireq impure and rarely Tseri ; as 2?n3, 
^n« f -iV2 , nyi . Resh demands Tseri ; as 1p.3 ■ 

Future, Inf., Imp., and Part, with middle S and "l, usually require 
Qamets before them; as "1$?% T?.?, TQ*?- Butn, n, V, most 
commonly prefix Pattahh ; as ^T\T. EITT], ^V.T., etc. Yet Qamets is 
sometimes used here ; and even in the same verb, the Inf. may have 
one of these vowels, and the Fut. another; e.g. Inf. ^V.^, Fut. "'^5 > ., 
etc. 

(c) PUAL. Here compensation is usually made for Daghesh ex- 
cluded, by Hholem, e. g. '*!?2, "Hl^; but sometimes by Qibbuts im- 
pure, as YTH. , 2r T7. ; see § 33. 

(d) HITHPAEL. Here the vowel before the Guttural is varied, 
just as in the fut. Piel ; see above under b. The accent affects Pat- 
tahh here in a peculiar way; e. g. ^^QSHH, instead of ^pn^rin t 
which is explained by § 142^ a, and 144." V$>» = ?$"?» (§ 187. b. 3) 
is an instance of Hithpoel.~\ 

Verbs Lamedh Guttural; Par. VI. 

§ 233. Where by analogy the Guttural must have a 
Sheva, the vowel-points are regular. 

Note. The 2nd pers. sing. fern, takes a furtive Pattahh under the 
Guttural; e.g. QVnti instead of ^V^W , §52.2. If the Pattahh under 
37 here was a proper vowel, the pointing would be n^Dtp 9 j. e . with n 
Raphe. Punctuation like *p3]?5? i s very rare. 

§ 234. Where the Guttural is preceded by i, •*), *- 
immutable, it takes a Pattahh furtive, § 69. 

E. g. in the Inf. absolute and in the Part. pass, of Kal; in Hiph. 
throughout, where V is usually retained. The Inf. const, in Kal com- 
monly follows the same usage, as 3?Etp; compare (§ 230) a similar 
punctuation as it respects the Hholem. 

§ 235. In Kal, the Fut. and Imp. nearly always take 
Pattahh > also the fern. Part. Segholate ; as TOW. 

Note. The Imp. appears to have Hholem sometimes; e. g. HPto, 
Gen. xliii. 16. 

§ 236. All the forms with pure final Tseri may retain 



104 §§ 236—240. irregular verbs. 

it, and put a Pattahh furtive under the Guttural ; or 
they may substitute a real Pattahh instead of these 
vowels. 

E. g. 3?9ttf«r ^E\ 

Note 1. Prolonged forms, i. e. such as the Inf. abs., the forms 
with a pause-accent, etc., retain Tseri. The apocopate forms take 
Pattahh. 

Note 2. Verbs *"! ' frequently imitate this class of guttural verbs, 
by taking Pattahh as their final vowel. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 237. Under this class are included all those in 
which any of the radical letters are dropped, or assimi- 
lated, or in which they become quiescent. 

§ 238. These may be most conveniently distributed 
into (a) Those which are irregular %, i. e. in the first 
radical (§ 223). (£) Those which are irregular V, i. e. 
in their second radical. (6) Those which are irre- 
gular s, i. e. in their third radical, (d) Those which 
are irregular H) and ?, i. e. in their first and third ra- 
dical. 

I. CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 239. These consist of verbs MS, ^, and 13, i. e. 
whose first radical is either 8, \ or 2 . 

VERBS PE ALEPH ; Par. VII. 

§ 240. In most cases, verbs with K for their first ra- 
dical belong to the class Pe Guttural, above described, 
K being treated as a Guttural. The verbs which really 
belong to the class now in question, are those in which 
K as first radical is quiescent. 

[Note. Of these there are only five, viz. T?*?, nnN, b^tf, 1»N, 
HSS . Three more, viz. ^H^, ^0*$, HP^, sometimes exhibit a quies- 
cent N, and sometimes a guttural one; e. g. fnN^ N"l$.\ For other 
explanations, see under paradigm VII.] 



§§ 241 243. VERBS PE ALEPH PE YODIJ. 105 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

\\ 241. (a) Kal. (1) The Future drops b$ quiescent of the root in 
the 1st pers. sing., and retains only the S prseformative which desig- 
nates the first person ; e. g. "ION instead of "lE^S t thus avoiding the 
occurrence of two Alephs. (2) In a very few cases, the first syllable 
takes a Tseri instead of a Hholem ; as nnw (not 71Q&) ; in 5J1M the 
Fut. has both forms, e. g. 1st pers. sing. HH^ and 2nN . The last syl- 
lable in these verbs usually exhibits Tseri, specially when it has a dis- 
junctive accent ; e. g. ^^ ; with a conjunctive one, Pattahh is very 
common in the same syllable, e. g. '2W . 

Note. Quiescent M here is not unfrequently omitted in writing; 
as *\& for *13**\ tntp for s n^\ etc. ; see § 63. 

(3) Inf. construct from ")E«, ^»«b for "lbgb, | H9. c . 1. Impera- 
tive once ^M for ^g, see § 119. d. 2. 

(b) Derived conjugations. (1) Niphal once as *n^D . (2) Pjel 
admits contraction; as rf?£ for ffiWQ , "^ for ">:?^ ; see § 118. Note 
3. (3) Hiphil also admits contraction, in a little different manner ; 
e. g. b*gn for b^S;n .—Future, ^?«J3 (with accent retracted § 129) 
instead of ^*f.l, TO for H$9; see § 119. c. 1. Fut. once with 
Hholem, as nYO*N 3 Jer. xlvi. 8.— Imperative, ^Vjn for ^™n, § 119. 
c. 1. (4) Hophal, ftpV (i for H § 122. 2) for ^QHJ, like' the* con- 
tractions in § 119. c. 1.] 

VERBS PE YODH; Par. VIII— X. 

§ 242. These may be divided into three classes ; viz. 
(1) Such as have (originally) a Vav for the first radical ; 
e. g. T7J=T7J- (2) Those whose first radical is pro- 
perly Yodh ; as 2,W. (3) Such as follow the analogy 
of verbs Pe Nun, in assimilating the first radical in the 
Future, etc. 

FIRST CLASS OF VERBS PE YODH; Par. VIII. 

§ 243. (a) In Inf., Fut., and Imp. of Kal, the Yodh 
is for the most part dropped; the Praeter and Part, are 
regular. 

(b) In Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal, the original 1 ap- 



106 ^ 243 — 247. VERBS PE YODH, I. CLASS. 

pears ; but it is quiescent, except in the Inf., Fut., and 
Imp. of Niphal, where it is moveable. 

§ 244. The Inf., Fut., and Imp. of Kal exhibit two 
forms ; viz. one with final Tseri, and another with final 
Pattahh. 

(a) The forms with final Tseri take Tseri in the first syllable also, 
and more generally omit the Yodh; as ^ffl?., etc., as in Par. VIII. 

£Mote. The Fut. sometimes (rarely) retains the Yodh in the writ- 
ing of these verbs ; as 1st pers. sing. Fut. parag. H^T^ (from ?T?}), 
^llV. (from ^1), with final Pattahh because of the Resh. With a 
Guttural in the final syllable, Pattahh of course usually takes the place 
of Tseri; as SH.?, not 27T. In the Inf. const, and Imp. of Kal, Yodh 
disappears almost throughout, in the forms with final Tseri.] 

(b) But the forms with final Pattahh more usually retain the Yodh 
in Inf., Imp., and Fut. of Kal ; and the Fut. takes Hhireq magnum 
in the first syllable; as jk'% tth^ , Bhvj. see in Par. VIII. 

fj Note 1 . Yodh quiescent is sometimes omitted here in writing ; as 
Hfo* for ttbv;, Ps> cii# 5 § 63> So .•jnhJ for ^*?\ 

Note 2. The Inf. construct of the masc. form, is not analogical 
here with that of the forms with final Tseri in the Future. It takes 
Hholem ; as ®^\, ]*&). One would naturally expect Pattahh.] 

§ 245. The derived conjugations of both these classes 
of verbs are alike ; the model is exhibited in the para- 
digms of Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. 

ff 

[§ 246. Some verbs *5) take both the forms above 

noted. 

E. g. pSV l mp . ps and [fcr» ; "1|2J, Fut. 1fc\ also i?5 or ^K. 
The lexicons note such.] 

Notes on the Paradigm, 

[§ 247. KAL. (a) The Inf. of the class. Fut. Tseri has more usually 
the fern. Segholate ending, as in the paradigm. With a Guttural, 
Pattahh of course is used ; e. g. H3n (not FRfS) from 3H;, § 113. But 
sometimes the apocopate masc. form is used ; as 3H from 37TJ, Another 
fern, form of the Inf. is as *TJ" fro m ><£• The suffix Inf. fern, is as 
n3t£, *F\^$ (Vptt?) from a^J; so nfl, *nj\ from TTf, etc. 

(b) The Inf. of the class Fut. Pattahh is regular; see § 244. b. 



§§ 247 249. VERBS PE YODH, II. CLASS. 107 

Note 2. The feminine forms are as ^"2^., from '^; f^JT. from 
NT] J. Forms with Vav fulcrum, as P^*! . 

(c) The Future, which has Tseri final, is pure, so that it may be 
shortened; as it is in ^J?*l, with tone retracted, § 129. With n pa- 
rag., as 2?T., *"*?T.. Altogether anomalous is the Fut. 37T^. . 

(d) The Imperative ; (1) Where the Future is Tseri, commonly 
takes a paragogic letter; as ^T"!, n ?7 (*1<)> from T!), W?. masc. 
forms; so with H- parag., as J"^ 1 !, masc. ?:!, § 125. b. (2) The Imp. 
of the verbs Fut. Pattahh regularly retains its Yodh radical. 

(e) NIPHAL. (1) Future sometimes retains the Yodh, instead of 
exchanging it for the original 1; e. g. TH**, '05 with retracted tone, 
§ 129. 

Note. It is peculiar also, that the first pers. sing, here (like the 
other persons) retains Hhireq in its first syllable, as ^W^. , ^^ , 
"^J^, etc - 5 not ^^5vj e ^ c -^ as m most other analogous cases. 

(2) Part. plur. const. ^3 (instead of '•jfP) from n£ ; a l so tt?P>3 with 
Tseri, instead of ^3, from tift . 

(f) PIEL. The Fut. here, preceded by Vav conversive, drops the 
first of its Yodhs, and writes it by a Daghesh in the second ; e. g. E?5*l 
instead of Bfc&wi, W;i for ^1, etc. 

(g) HIPHIL. (1) The Future with retracted tone, as ^^1. 
Sometimes the characteristic n is retained in the Future, as 3ptp*irP : 
for T®v ; so rrjirr; , r\r>w\, from ni; , ^ ; C omp. § 199. (2) The 
Imperative sometimes retains its Vav moveable ; as N2pn f r N2pn 9 
Gen. viii. 17; so ^Ti for 1tt?in, P s . v. 9. 

(h) HITHPAEL sometimes retains the original Vav, and uses it as 
moveable, e. g. SH^H, n^njl, TXS^p. .] 

SECOND CLASS OF VERBS PE YODH ; Par. IX. 

§ 248. These are such as have a Yodh originally 
for their first radical ; which they retain in Hiphil, and 
thus distinguish themselves from the other class de- 
scribed. 

See remarks in Paradigm IX. 

Note. Only seven verbs belong to this class; viz. 2fc) , V?J } "lgj, 

pa;, iD^na^r^nHipli. 

§ 249. The Future Kal here is sometimes with Pat= 



108 §§ 249 — 252. verbs pe yodh — pe nun. 

tahh, and sometimes with Tseri ; mostly written fully, 
but sometimes defectively. 

E. g. 2®"., as in the paradigm; but also, 1S^ , n^V V7T! , 
< 
Vr?.' 1 ^ • Of course this class of verbs agrees with the preceding one as 

to the final vowel in the Fut. of Kal, i. e. it has both Tseri and Pat- 

tahh. No Infin. form occurs here. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

[§ 250. Hiphil, as the paradigm shows, may be written either plene 
or defective. (1) The Future sometimes exhibits moveable Yodh, in- 
stead of Yodh quiescent; ! H#'£, Prov. iv. 25; DTP^, Hos. vii. 12. 
Com p. § 247- g- 2, and h. 

Note. Two Futures are altogether anomalous; e. g. ^^^., Job 
xxiv. 21 ; also ^b.V. . The like to this is 3H.V; , in Kal Future, Ps. 
cxxxviii. 6 : § 247- c. 

(2) Imperative once retains a moveable Yodh in the Qeri, ^WVl , 
Ps. v. 9. So the Part, of Hiphil, as D^^O 1 Chron. xii. 2.] 

THIRD CLASS OF VERBS PE YODH ; Par. X. 

§ 251. The peculiarity here is, that Yodh is assimi- 
lated in the Fut. of Kal, in Miph., Hiph., and Hophal. 

£Note 1. Only four verbs belong wholly here; viz. ^T T , ^%\, '^'J, 
3?^} . Five others partake partly of the peculiarities of these verbs, 
and partly of the other classes, viz. TO}, TOJ , p?J, "12V "^}. 

Note 2. Simonis and Eichhorn derive all the peculiar forms of this 
class of verbs, from roots ]S. The question is one of etymology. It 
matters not for the student, which way it is decided. I follow the 
Lexicon of Gesenius, for convenience' sake rather than from conviction. 
The fulness of the paradigm supersedes the necessity of additional 
notes.] 

VERBS PE NUN; Par. XL 

§ 252. The peculiarities of these verbs are, (a) That 
whenever 3 (their first radical) would analogically take a 
Sheva, in the course of declension, etc., it more usually 
becomes assimilated to the letter which follows, and is 
expressed by a Daghesh forte. 



§§252—254. VERBS PE NUN. 109 

(b) That in the Inf. and Imp. of Kal, the Nun is 
sometimes dropped, in the manner of verbs Pe Yodh. 

£Note. In this case, the Imper. more commonly takes the parag. 
form, as tt^l, HE??; )&, njJ 1 } . The Inf. commonly has a Segholate 
form, in cases of aphseresis, i. e. where the first radical is dropped; as 
j*"lt£>3 in the paradigm. But abridged forms in these verbs either of the 
Inf. or Imp., are not frequent at all. These Inf. and Imp. modes 
more generally preserve the radical D, even when the Fut. assimi- 
lates it ; e. g. Inf. and Imp. Dp?, Fut. Dpi; Inf. and Imp. V™, Fut. 

§ 253. Verbs whose second radical is a proper Quies- 

cent or a Guttural, exclude the peculiarities of verbs 13. 

Note. The reason is, that the Daghesh (compensative of Nun) can- 
not be inserted in either of these classes of letters ; and therefore usage 
commonly preserved the Nun before them. But in Niphal Prseter, 
where a Guttural is the second radical, and Nun would be repeated if 
it were preserved, it is dropped, as DPO 9 not ^n^D f the vowel in the 
first syllable being prolonged as usual, § 112. Note. § 33. The verb 
rim more usually drops 3 in the Fut. of Kal ; as nrY; } but also nrp/n 
3rd person, Ps. lxxviii. 3. In other respects, the verbs just named are 
regular in respect to Nun. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

.< 
[§ 254. (a) KAL. (1) Inf. const, like ^^3> occurs only in six 

verbs. Once Inf. N1CP, from ^^, Ps. lxxxix. 10. The reg. form 
*" 123 , Dp?, 3p5 , is most frequent. Some verbs have both forms; as 
3?^3 anc [ n3H£. I find no example of reg. Inf. with final Pattahh. 
Fern, form with suffix, as n$|, 'vntp'2 . 

(2) Future Hholem is more frequent than Fut. Pattahh in these 
verbs. Fut. Tseri only in ]na • Some verbs have both Fut. and A ; 
as ""H? , "nj . Some at one time retain D, and at another omit it, in 
different examples of the Fut.; as ^"IJ , ""^J, etc. 

(3) Imperative, like the Inf., seldom drops the radical D, § 252. b. 
The abridged forms are like E?3, m (before Maqqeph '&$), *&*, WZ ; 
jE! from ]0? . 

(b) NIPHAL. (1) Preeter appears like Piel, because it drops the 3 
of the root, and inserts a Daghesh or prolongs the vowel ; as Ntp3 , Piel 
and Niph. Nf3 ; DTO, Pi. and Nipli. EH3 ; § 253. Once with Hho- 



110 §§254 — 257- VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. 

lem, as VlEM . (2) Infinitive abs, sometimes as *V^3 , ^¥7 Ps. lxviii. 
3, Jinan Jer. xxxii. 4. (3) Participle once as *FCTi!3 , with suffix *[. 

(c) HIPHIL very rarely retains the 2; as T^H, ^^? . So in 
Hophal, ^P^l^n . The usual vowel in Hophal is short Qibbuts, as in 
the paradigm. 

Note. The verb njTj? imitates J3 in Kal ; see Lexicon. The verb 
"?n3 assimilates its final ] also, before suffixes beginning with n or 2 ; 

as nh: 9 instead of nan; 3 siana , etc. The Inf. is run f or nik (§ 157. 

2), with sufF. Vnn , Tseri being shortened, § 129. a.~\ 

Remark. The great variety of usage in verbs of this class, shows 
that the sound of 2 was quite variable, and the letter less prominent 
and distinct than most of the consonants. The predominant usage in 
Kal, is regular ; in Niph., Hiph., Hophal, irregular. Gesenius states 
the contrary of this, as to Kal, but a minute examination of all these 
verbs, will show that he is mistaken. The daghesh'd conjugations are 
regular throughout ; so that no paradigm is needed. 

II. CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

( Verbs irregular 37.) 

§ 255. These comprehend such as are defective in respect to their 
middle radical ; i. e. such whose middle radical either falls out, or be- 
comes quiescent. 

VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ($2) ; Par. XII. 

§ 256. This class comprises all those whose second 
and third radicals are the same letter, and which often 
(not always) drop the second radical in the course of 
inflection ; as 220, Praet. 20 9 Inf. 20. 

These verbs might well be named contracted verbs, (not very unlike 
the Greek Ti/xaw, t//a£, tpiXea, <piXS, etc.) ; for a great part of their ir- 
regularity arises from contraction. But dispute about names would 
not be important. 

First law of contraction. 

§ 257. This is, that the second radical is dropped, 
and with it the point or vowel of the preceding letter 
(whether a proper vowel or a Sheva), and the vowel 



§§ 257 — 260. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. Ill 

belonging to the second radical is then transferred to 
the first radical. 

E. g. nnD DO; ±2D dD; nk?^ nb;, etc. The alterations occa- 
sioned in the formative prefixes, etc., by this, will be considered in the 
sequel. 

N. B. All the forms, which have an impure vowel in them, or a 
Daghesh forte in the middle radical, are incapable of contraction ; e. g. 

rniD, md, rnno, nsp, etc. 

§ 258. Any accession to the end of a contracted form, 
(by declension or in any other manner), causes the se- 
cond radical to reappear by a Daghesh forte, but does 

not restore to the first radical its original vowel. 

< 

E. g. 2DD t contr. ^P, with accession *"^p sab-bu (not ! D2p) > 
VTHSD, ^20, m^IDJj etc. In all such cases, the middle radical, having 
lost its vowel, is written by a Daghesh in the last radical, and joined in 
a syllable with the preceding vowel. 

§ 259. In order to render more audible the doubling 
of the final letter of the root, the epenthetic syllables i 
and \ (with the tone) are inserted before suffixes be- 
ginning with a consonant, 

E. g. in the Praeter \ as *f&D 3 sia'lSD; hi the Fut. and Imp. s -, 
as rn^Di^ t nyaiD . The Arabian, while he writes the words fully 
regular in these cases, pronounces them like the Hebrew. 

§ 260. The prseformatives of tense and conjugation, 
instead of the short vowel of regular verbs, in their con- 
tracted forms usually assume \ong pure vowels, § 130. 

Hophal only has an impure vowel following its characteristic ; e. g. 
2D*\n instead of ^pn . 

Note. In most cases the original ground-forms, from which the 
contracted forms seem evidently to be derived, are somewhat different 
from those of regular verbs ; e. g. Kal Fut. — ^ appears to come from 
a full Fut. ^2p^ (like the Arabic Future) ; so that when D is thrown, 
by contraction, into the second syllable, and Pattahh under the Yodh 
praeformative comes to stand in a simple syllable, it of course becomes 
long, i. e. it goes into Qamets, § 130. So in Niph., where we have 
^P? apparently for 22p3 , and in the Fut. 2D> for 339"!; in Hiph., 



112 §§ 261 — 264. verbs ayin doubled. 

^PH from ^Spri , etc. But in some few cases, the contracted forms 
appear to come from regular original ones; as Fut. "^.1, apparently 
from T^.; so Niph. ^H? as from bbrj:! ; I n f. bnn, a s from bbnn, 
etc. 

Second law of Contraction. 

§ 261. This is, to insert a Daghesh in the first radi- 
cal after prseformatives, to give those praeformatives the 
regular short vowel, and then to omit the doubling of 
the last radical when the word receives an accession at 
the end. The epenthetic i and \ are also omitted in 
this case. 

E. g. Kal Fut, db'], etc. ; Hiph. niV (from E^n) instead of Dn; ; 
Hoph. r\3> % (from nr\3) instead of n?V . 

Note. In Kal Fut. this is not uncommon ; in other conjugations it is rare. In Chaldee, this is 
the reigning method of contraction. 

§ 262. The conjugations Poel, Poal, Hithpoel, usually 
take the place of the regular daghesh'd conjugations 
here, but not always ; and sometimes both exist toge- 
ther, either as synonymous, or with some shades of dif- 
ference, § 188. § 175. a. 

§ 263. Verbs VV with the second and third radicals 
guttural, lengthen the preceding vowel in cases where 
Daghesh forte should be inserted but is excluded by the 
Guttural, § 112. 

E. g. r\r\W } contracted TV& s 3rd pers. fern. T^TW , 1st pers. Vlinstf . 

Note 1. The tone syllables in the usual contracted forms are pecu- 
liar. See an account of them in § 100./*. 

Note 2. The student must not fail to note, that in Kal verbs ^ 
often retain the regular form ; specially in the Praeter, and sometimes 
in the Infinitive. In most other cases, they generally follow the models 
in the paradigm ; with more anomalies, however, than most other 
classes of verbs, as the sequel will show. An instance of conformity 
to both models in the Fut. is l?n 3 Fut. l"nj and TIDJ; so ??"}, Hiph. 
V3"]n regular. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

[§ 264. (a) KAL. (1) The Prater of verbs final Hholem conforms 
to the law of contraction in § 257; e. g. Ob"J, 3 plur. ^"V- and so 
$*% etc. Once, ^n = «isn, Ps. lxiv. 7; comp. § 266. 



§ 264. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. 113 

(2) Infinitive const, sometimes with Pattalih ; as "H^, '!■ Inf. fern. 
n^H from 37 3H. The Inf., in a considerable number of cases, is writ-* 
ten with a Vav fulcrum, § 64; e. g. Via, dVt, *V|^. So Imp., even 
when it has a Daghesh, as ^YT, t£?ip. Rarely has the Inf. a Shureq, 
as "flS, Ecc. ix. 1. 

In the suffix state, or before Maqqeph, the Inf. having a pure Hho- 
lem shortens it, as V^, IpH; Ch, "Din torn. 

(3) (a) ZVie Future usually has Hholem pure; but sometimes it ap- 
pears with Vav fulcrum (§ 64) ; as *W for tiP . This Hholem is 

< > 

shortened by losing the tone: as 1HJ, ^2rP Ps. lxvii. 2, or ^3n ,, : 

Is. xxvii. 11; SDjl. 

(6) TAe Fw^. w;a7/i Pattahh also occurs., which usually gives a Tseri 
to the praefonnative ; as "TO."!, ^iTo DI T., E H^ 1st pers. with Yodh 
fulcrum (§ 64) from Ett-fr; but 'V. in Amos v. 24 seems also to be 
Fut. Kal." 

(c) The Fut. also has Shureq in a few cases ; as pHJ ; V^J • So 
the second kind of contracted Future; as EJ-IW (== DVlfn) instead of 
E™, from D»n . 

(4) Imperative also has Pattahh sometimes, as '? ; with n parag. as 
n ?? ; with Resh, as rHM . It also has Vav fulcrum, as C'l^ Josh. x. 
12, (No. 3 above.) The Imp. with Hholem pure of course shortens 
this vowel when the tone is removed ; as ^^ rpbD , 

Niphal. 

\\b) (1) Pr&ter sometimes with Tseri, as 'PJ3 ; also with Hholem, 
as ^^J, Is. xxxiv. 4. The prseformative has sometimes other vowels 
besides Qamets ; e.g. IH?. from ]|TT; bTOfrombbrj; nn3 from nnn ; 
where the vowel under 2 is long, because the Daghesh forte is omitted 
in the second radical. This conforms to the second mode of con- 
traction described above, § 261 ; comp. 260. Note, at the end ; also 
§ 111. § 112. According to these forms, we find wbn? (from V?rj), 
Ezek. xxii. 16; Vttrn (from fan), J er . xxii. 23. 

(2) Infinitive abs. with Hholem; as P^H, FISH. Inf. const, with 
Tseri; as D^n, bnn, § 261. § 112. 

(3) Future with Hholem as ET; with Resh, V'TUZ 2nd pers., ^X 
3rd pers. plur., from EftH . 

(4) Imp. with Hholem; as ^H . (5) Tart, with Tseri, as DM.] 

Hiphil. 
E(c) This conj . has a pure Tseri throughout, in both syllables ; 



114 §^ 264 — 266. verbs ayin doubled. 

which is therefore liable to change, as is usual with all pure vowels ; 
e. g. 2Dn Hiph., 2nd pers. JJiapq , etc. 

(1) It should be noted here, that Hiphil not only takes a Pattahh 
Jinal, in case it has a Guttural or a Resh in the last syllable, as ntETT f 

*"!^n ; and in pause, as ^QU , § 145 ; but also (not unfrequently) with- 
out either of these reasons ; as P*I<1 , ^PHT, Part. b^tt . 

(2) Procter once b^*n — b^H, § 261. Sui generis is Fpti&Tl for 
JTtfnsn , Prov. xxiv. 28', unless it may come from ^"J? , which is more 
probable. (3) Future with tone retracted, ^P*^, etc - 

(d) HOPHAL has no special anomalies except the manner in which 
the preeform. is pointed, 2D^n for ^?PH .] 

§ 265. Resemblance between verbs VV and W. This is 
great. Hophal is the same in both ; and the praeforma- 
tives take, in the same way, a long pure vowel. Besides 
these general resemblances, there are many particular 
instances, in which verbs VV exhibit the same appear- 
ance as verbs W. 

E. g. Inf. "M from "HS, iffln^ (instead of 1ptJ3) from PPJ1. Fut. 

I'nj, \T ! n; J ^J , etc. Hiph. Inf. ^pnq (for wq) f rom apn . 

Fut. tMtfj, from E^7 ; ?rVTT; (for ?£JT : ) from nnn. It may be 
justly doubted, however, whether the root is not ^ in all such cases ; 
see § 298. § 299. I merely conform to the lexicons, in this arrange- 
ment. 

[§ 266. Peculiar Anomaly. Verbs W, with thejirst 
form of contraction (§§ 257 — 260), sometimes omit the 
usual Daghesh forte in the increased forms (§ 258), and 
also the vowel which precedes it. 

E. g. Fut. nbgj for nbrfl, s»jjj for %sh; I n f. UZrh for Ban 1 ?; 
Niph. njj^g for fTjjIna , I s . xix. 3 ; Fut. rwp for nB?2 , Jer. viii. 14; 
Ezek. xli. 7; Job x. 1. But these anomalies are by no means frequent. 

Note. The conjs. Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel, with their substitutes, 
Pilpel, Pulpal, and Hithpalpal, are declined regularly ; the final Tseri 
etc. in them being pure, are subject to changes as usual. 

Remark 1. Of the whole number of verbs Ayin doubled (124), 26 have only Piel etc. forms ; 
20 have only Poel etc. forms ; 10 have only Pilpel etc. forms ; 11 have both Piel etc., and Poel 
etc.; 2 have Piel etc. with Pilpal etc. ; and 3, Poel etc. with Pilpel etc. The other 52 supply no 
examples of any of these conjugations. It appears, therefore, that the regular form in Piel, is as 
frequent as any other. 

Remark 2. The lexicons are very irregular in designating the conjugations Poel, Poal, etc. 



§§ 267, 268. VERBS AYIN VAV. 115 

The student must accommodate the designation to the actual form. The Vav usually accompany- 
ing the Hholem in these conjugations is sometimes omitted in writing, § 63. 

Remark 3. Almost all the anomalies perplexing to the student, arising from the peculiarities 
noted in § 261 and § 266. But those in § 261 are altogether of the most frequent occurrence. If 
the student thoroughly possesses himself of the second mode of contraction there exhibited, he will 
meet with but few cases which will trouble him. 

VERBS AYIN VAV ; Par. XIII. 

§ 267. This class comprises all those whose second 
radical is Vav, and whose root throughout becomes mo- 
nosyllabic by contraction. 

Note. This species of verbs might also be justly called contracted, 
so that verbs 3737 may be named the Jirst class of contracts, and verbs ^S 
the second. 

§ 268. The laws of contraction are essentially the same here as in 
verbs 3717; the principal differences are occasioned merely by the nature 
of Vav as a Quiescent. 

(a) The last vowel of the full form is transferred to 
the first radical, and takes the place of its appropriate 
punctuation which falls out ; comp. § 257. 

E. g. Uncontracted C]|J, contracted c i4 = D ^; the original 1 con- 
forms to the heterogeneous vowel (§ 117- 2), i. e. 1 becomes S in order 
to conform to the Pattahh of the root, which Pattahh then coalesces 
with the substituted N and therefore becomes Qamets. So Preeter E 
and O ; e. g. ^""0.?, contr. DE^iTD, Vav conforming to the final 
vowel Tseri (§ 117. 2); Eh? ba~vosk, contr. W^ bosh. In Hiph. Fut. 
Q ^i?!, contr. E^J, the Vav, after conforming to the vowel, i. e. after 
becoming Yodh, falling out as superfluous before another Yodh in 
Hiphil, and the Pattahh under the prseformative being of course length- 
ened by coming to be placed in a simple syllable, § 130. In Hoph. 
Oj"^n ? there seems to be a transposition of the Vav to the first syllable, 
as if Ef^n were put for DDI/H.* But see and comp. Hoph. of verbs 3737, 
§ 260. Note. § 264. d. 

N. B. All the forms where Vav takes a Daghesh forte, and also 
where it is immediately followed by n as a third radical, are incapable 
of contraction ; e. g. T137, HJp, etc. 

(b) The prseformatives all take long pure vowels, in 
the contracted forms ; the kind of vowel being deter- 
mined by the original uncontracted forms, which appear 



116 §^ 268, 269. verbs ayin vav. 

to have differed from the common regular forms ; like 
those in verbs fo, § 260 with the Note. 

E. g. Kal Fut. D^p; , as if from D^p> (comp. the Arabic Fut VtDpy ; 
Part. DfJ, as if from Dlf? s an old Part, form ; Imp. and Inf. D^p, as if 
from D?rj- So in Niph. Dip?, as if from Dip? ; Hiph. S'pH , a s from 
D^pn/etc. 

(c) In like manner as verbs W (§ 259), these verbs in 
some cases insert i and \ (with the tone) in the Prsgter 
and Future, before suffixes beginning with a consonant. 

E.g. Niph. Prater, ni&lp?, Dntap:?; Hiph. ni&SpH; Kal Fut. 
nj^fi^prj . So far as the principle extends, it is developed in the same 

if <r 

manner as in verbs 27^. But in verbs W it extends only to the Prseter 

of Niph. and Hiphil as to the epenthetic \ and only to the Fut. of Kal 
u 

as to \ ; while in verbs 2727 it extends throughout the four contracted 
conj ligations, Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. 

(r/) The tone-syllable in these verbs is throughout 
analogous to that in verbs VV ; see § 100. g. 

§ 269. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, are here very rare ; 
instead of them, Polel, Polal, and Hithpolel are em- 
ployed, § 175. b. § 188. 

Examples of Piel are ""©, HJp. Most instances of Piel assume 
Yodh; as 13*!?, ^H, for D-lp, ^H, etc. In regard to the difference 
between 231D in verbs 2737 and Dttlp here, see § 175. b. Note. 

Remark 1. The 2nd and 1st persons in Kal Prater are peculiar, 
inasmuch as they take a short vowel in their contraction. So it is also, 
in the corresponding Arabic and Syriac. Hophal also takes a short 
vowel in the contracted root. Both these cases conform, indeed, to the 
general principle § 268. a ; but they differ from the manner of contrac- 
tion in Kal Prat. 3rd persons, and in Niphal throughout. 

Remark 2. The anomalous vowels in different tenses and conjuga- 
tions, may be easily accounted for on the principles developed in § 117: 
E. g. in the Fut. WpJ (instead of ElpJ which we might expect), the 
vowel conforms to the Vav with the U sound. It might indeed take 
the sound equally well, for aught that we can see ; but its present 
form distinguishes it more clearly from the Fut. of verbs 2737. So in 
Niph. Prat., 01p3 (instead of Sp3) the vowel having conformed- to the 



§ 270. VERBS AY IN VAV. 117 

Vav, § 117. 1. So also in the Inf., Fut., etc. of Niph. ; the Hholem 
arises from the conformity just described. In Hiphil the Vav of the 
root conforms to the vowel (Hhireq), i. e. the vowel becomes Yodh, and 
then falls out before the Yodh characteristic of the conjugation. 

Notes on the Paradigm, 

£§ 270. (a) Kal. (1) Procter rarely as CN|J, Hosea x. 14. Fem. 
3rd pers. once with n, as ^^W (like the Chald., Syr., and Arab.) for 
nnt£ 9 Ezek. xlvi. 17. In Mai. iii. 20, m&V comes from m = W^B y 
comp. § 181. b. Very seldom is the 3rd person with Pattahh; e. g. "»5, 

na,asiffromns, nnxz. 

The parad. exhibits a verb final Tseri. The final n of riB, (and 
of other verbs ending with n), before a suffix beginning with n, is- 
designated by a Daghesh in the suffix letter, instead of being fully 
written, § 293. 

Verbs final Hholem are also found among the class ^. They re- 
tain the 1 in the 3rd pers. Prseter, because it is homogeneous, and the 
third person is protracted; e. g. lZ?i2, ~)iW. But in the other persons 
(which are commonly shorter), they usually omit the Vav ; e. g. a?'l2 , 

riw'ik, nty-k, n&% >ny>zi—s\w% cm% J^.tp, -"otpa . inf., imp., 

Part, also EJia. The Hholem must be short in the unaccented syl- 
lables. 

(2) Infinitive const, sometimes with Hholem instead of Shureq ; as 
fTO, N"l2, 2'lD, etc. The Vav is sometimes omitted, as ^4, etc. 
§63. 

(3) Future sometimes with instead of U; as ^OJ, fifel, Din;, 
^1p!j. Forms defectively written are c py> ^Rt> etc - Fem. plur. 
sometimes without the epenthetic \, as n2£tt7l-}, r I^^J, instead of 

t v ••. : 

> 

Fut. apoc. as Ef?J, with Hholem pure and mutable; e.g. ^14*-- 
vay-yd-qom, frO'^t^.n td-shobh-nd, w T here the Hholem has been short- 
ened. It is sometimes written as NIpJ (Y^v fulcrum) ; sometimes it 
appears with Qibbuts, as ^P.t- With a Guttural or Resh, the apoc. 
Fut. usually takes Pattahh; as naj!, TO}!.. 

(4) Imperative also is sometimes defectively written, as Ej?.* ^VQa 
etc.; § 63. Paragogic forms; »"Mp, n ?^, etc. Imp. apoc. as bb; 
like the Fut. with pure. 

(5) Participle with 0, as D^ia ; with E, as H£, B^b, § 202, 
With s retained, as BHttf, D*t3Nttf = cnari.] 



118 § 270. VERBS A YIN VAV, 

Niphal, 

£(b) (I) Prater rarely with Tseri penult, as "TO: . Out of the 3rd 
pers. Hholem is usually exchanged for Shureq (§ 127- Exc. 1), as being 
equally homogeneous with the Vav and somewhat shorter ; and to be 
shorter is required, because the accent is thrown forward upon the 
epenth. \ Hholem rarely remains ; as EiTnb2 . 

(2) Infinitive const, rarely with U ; as BOTH. (3) Participle also 
has rarely U; D^ f or D^O? == ffg'-Q? .] 

Hiphil. 
C(c) (1) Prceter written defectively is rare ; *T3?n = T3?n . Some- 
times the epenthetic H is omitted; as WS?5TT = n , iQan s inb^rp.— 
v^iam ; nhn ; ^hn } instead of rffrqrf, vtffrcsq . So also, not 
unfrequently in the 2nd and 1st pers., the forms are contracted; e. g. 
\nfcq for VTiJTpq, D^.ttq for nn^nrj, etc. Sometimes Tseri is 
used instead of Hhireq ; as nfe^D , nln^q , ttifepn, etc. Hhateph 
Seghol sometimes stands under the prseform. instead of Hhateph Pat- 

tahh ; as Hilton . 

it 
Peculiar is 3?*?.n, ^ir!, and "15*71, as if from roots ^; see Lexicon. 

Once rTDn (from iTlD), like verbs ^27 in the second form of contrac- 
tion, § 261. The preeform. n (in the derivatives of T137 and "W37) takes 
Pattahh instead of a comp. Sheva; e. g. rtfr*37\ y ^W^ s ^'^n, 
and thus in respect to the other verb. 

(2) Infinitive fern, once nSSq^ apoc. form of masc. *P?rj s Infini- 
tive abs. once ^q because of the Guttural. (3) Future ^v!; comp. 
forms in § 261, which this imitates. The plur. fem. is njp^tt (in- 
stead of ^J^i"?-^), because a mixed syllable with Yodh and Hhireq 
magnum cannot be penultimate, even if an accent supports it. Fu- 
ture apoc. shortens the Tseri whenever it loses the tone ; e. g. ^1?.^!, 
}bn-b« . With a Guttural or Resh : as **$!, HdJS . 

(4) Imperative once with Tseri ; as ^Wq , 2 Kings viii. 6. (5) 
Participle rarely as rPDB, )^a (f or iTP», r*?$), imitating verbs 
VV; see §261.] 

Other Conjugations. 

[(d) HOPHAL is sometimes written with Qibbuts vicarious; as 
VT^,, ^H, instead of VllJ-V, "lEWl, § 41. 

(c) POLEL, POLAL, and HITHPOLEL, are declined in all re- 
spects like Poel etc. iu verbs ^737, i. e. like Piel, Pual, etc. in regular 



§§270 — 274. VERBS AYIN YODH. 119 

verbs, as the former stand in the place of the latter. Polal occurs in 
only four verbs. 

(/) HITHPOLEL, like Hithp. in reg. verbs (§ 218), often takes 
Pattahh in the final syllable ; which in pause becomes Qamets, as 
^DiStfjrj. Once the Q of the prseform. is omitted in the Part., as 

DJDipiya for Daipfjw, p s . cxxxix. 21. 

(g) PILPEL etc. are declined like Polel etc. Pilpel is found in 
only five verbs ; Polpal only in b-13 ; Hithpalpal only in Vin .] 

§ 271. General remarks on verbs W. (a) The great similarity of 
them to verbs 3737 is very manifest, from § 263. a. b. c. d; and indeed 
from many of the forms produced under § 270, specially under §270. c. 
1. It might, however, be doubted whether more or less of these forms, 
so much like 3737, have not a root belonging to that species of verbs. 
The resemblances in the general principles of contraction, are too mani- 
fest to escape notice. 

[_(b) The number of verbs 137 i s about 141. Of these 13 are nb, 
and incapable of contraction, § 268. a. N. B. ; 6 resist contraction, viz. 
3na , nyj, rro, m|, rtn, and 371*27; the rest are contracted. Five 
only have the conj. PieL] 

VERBS AYIN YODH; Par. XIV. 

§ 272. These are such as have a Yodh originally for 
their middle radical, and which retain it in more or less 
of the forms in Kal. 

§ 273. Out of Kal, verbs ^ in all respects are like 
those V. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

\_\ 274. Kal. (1) Prater retains the Yodh only in three verbs, viz. 
X% , ^H , ^ ; and where this is retained in declining, the epenth. 'i 
is inserted before the formative suffixes beginning with a consonant, 
as the paradigm shows. All the other cases of the Prseter conform to 
that of verbs 137. 

(2) The Future in all respects resembles Hiphil, in regard to form. 
So the apoc. form also; e. g. PJ, 15*1; B&J, D^. (3) Participle 
in one case is regular, viz. ^?.1M, from ^!*J. 

ff o 

Note. Very few verbs are exclusively ^37 • most being also 137 in 
Kal. The older grammarians and lexicographers admitted no class ^37; 
but ranked such forms as *&% under Hiphil, with an aph.ceresis of the 



120 § 275 — 278. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH. 

n. But as this is without other example, and as the kindred languages 
exhibit verbs ^ , this class is now generally admitted.] 

TIT. CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 275. This comprehends those, whose third radical becomes quies- 
cent, or disappears. 

VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH ; Par. XV. 

§ 276. Aleph at the end of words is usually quiescent, 
§ 119. b. Throughout verbs tib, Aleph is either quies- 
cent or otiant, when it ends a word or a syllable. 

§ 277. The general laws of quiescence are, (a) In the 
Prseter of all the derived conjugations, before formative 
suffixes beginning with a consonant, tf quiesces in Tseri. 
(b) In the Fut. and Imp. of all the conjugations, before 
formative suffixes beginning with a consonant, ** quiesces 
in Seghol. (c) In all other cases, it quiesces (when at 
the end of a word or syllable) in the regular vowel ; ex- 
cepting that whenever it meets with Pattahh, it length- 
ens it into Qamets. 

E. g. nmn, ttHKD, naMjHjfl, naNspn, etc. In Kal the Fut. 
tf?*?1 with Pattahh becomes NSQ^ by reason of S quiescent ; in Niph. 
we have «?»? instead of «¥»?; Pual, HStt instead of «?» , etc., 
§115. 

Note. But the vowels made long by sack quiescence, do not remain 
immutable. The laws of declension supersede the laws of quiescence ; 
and Qamets, etc., (made by quiescence) fall away like any mutable 
pure vowels; e. g. N2B, f em . n»Sg; Fut. «2Q^ 2nd fern. ^*F) , 
etc. See § 127- Exc. 4. So Piel «§», fem. HHSl}, etc. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

Q§ 278. (a) KAL, (1) Prater of verbs final Tseri usually retains 

the Tseri here ; as «!£ , riNnj , EfJ**^ , etc. The 3rd pers. sing. fem. 

sometimes takes n (like the Aramaean) ; as fWJIJ, ^ s - vn - ^- Some- 

< > 

times these verbs are written defectively ; as ^O^J for V1HXO, § 63. 

(2) Infinitive fem. TV*y\, n&m ; also with n, as nrib$=n0$, 



$§ 278, 279. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH. 121 

nSsnp (with 1 fulcrum merely) =n*pfi; see § 119. c. 3; or this may 
be considered as mere conformity to the forms of the Inf. in verbs nb. 
Infinitive masc. sometimes as Tt3rj = ^^D, § 63. 

(3) Imperative *^\ yer5 = Wp., see § 118. In plur. fern., )$pfl. 
apoc, for naN'nf? ; ^J^^f for n ?^^ (from N2J) is sui generis, Cant. iii. 
U ; comp. § 118. Or is the root HNS? 

(4) Participle fern. riNSb for HN&b, m'V for ns^1\ § 119. c. 3. 
With suff. BWpl, for DN^a, § 118. ' 

(6) NIPHAL. (1) Prater f em. ritfbspa ; see under a, 1. above. 
Forms defective, DOW? for DHNB^a . (2) Infinitive abs. rf"l|?3 . 
(3) Participle sometimes as D^N^pa ? seemingly from N^£>3 . 

(c) PIEL. Inf. sometimes as nwba, rnN?B ; comp. a. 2. above. 

(d)HIPHIL. Praeter^/ec^^;as^qn = «^qn ; Inf. also ^0^ 
Jer. xxxii. 35.] 

Interchange of forms between verbs ^b and nb. 

§ 279. In the Chaldee and Syriac, these two species of verbs fall 
under one and the same category, and have the same forms throughout. 
In Hebrew, there is plainly an incipient tendency toward this idiom, 
which developes itself in the frequent interchanges of these verbs for 
each other, in regard to vowels, or consonants, or both. E. g. verbs 
Nv imitate verbs nb ; 





(1) As to vowels. 




(2) As to consonants. 




[KAL 


VINba for 


>nsbs 

T T 


KAL Imp. nan for 


t : 


Part. 


NSb for 


wsb 


HO? for 


ND3 

t : 


PIEL 


«vfi for 


^b^ 


Fut. nO^Vw for 


naNsnn 

t v : • 




\nK21 for 


•»n«|n 


NIPH. nana for 


t : v 


Fut. 


NB£ for 


n§?/! 


fjvg? for 


nsaa 


Inf. 


ni«bfi for 


«bD 


Inf. const. ns^n for 


N*nn 
.. T .. 


NIPH. 


n^Tl for 


•'T * 


PIEL nb^ : for 


vb^. 



(3) As to both vowels and consonants. Kal HQ2 for ^??, ^bft 
for W^p, see § 118. Part. act. Tt& for HM!f», § 118. rp?** for 
»J»^3>, § 118. Pass. "» ! ltoa for M T , Ps. xxxii. 1. 

Niph. ^ptaa for ^asp^a, nrij-na for nssna. Fut. *&f\ for 

:ft^^,§ 118. ' 

Piel. ^for^T!, § 118. 

Hiph. rfn^n for T?5«OTn . Part. na|?Q for WOflB . 

Hith. rpaann for n«iann . niaiann for N?an : n . 

Q 



122 §§ 280 — 282. verbs lamedh he. 

Compare with these resemblances to verbs ^', the similarities of 
those verbs to Nv, in § 290. See on the general principle of such in- 
terchanges, § 122.] 

VERBS LAMEDH HE ; Par. XVI. 

§ 280. These comprise verbs originally with a final 
Yodh or a final Vav ; both of which coming at the end 
of a word after a heterogeneous vowel (Pattahh), con- 
form to the vowel, i. e. become n and quiesce in it, 
§ 117. 2. 

Note. Verbs originally V? are few; e. g. as nbE7 for ^btt? , 1st pers. 
Prset. ^fr^p; most verbs nb are originally **'. Only the derivate 
forms develope the original root; e. g. "*i?3 from nj73 = ^|23; 12J7 from 
nsp==12jj. Verbs with n Mappiq, i. e. n moveable, are verbs which 
originally have a final n, and belong to the class of b Gutturals. 

§ 281. The final radical in these verbs either quiesces, 
or becomes otiant and falls out, both in conjugation and 
declension, every where with only two exceptions. 

These are, (1) Prceter 3rd pers. fern., where the final radical is ex- 
changed for n; as nrn^, nfTO?, etc. (2) Participle pass. ; as ^ba 
ga-luy ; where the Yodh remains a proper consonant. 

§ 282. The rules of quiescence, and the form of the quiescent letter, 
differ in different persons and tenses. They are as follows : 

(a) The Prceter 3rd masc. sing, in all the conjuga- 
tions, requires n quiescent in Qamets ; see paradigm. 

(b) The other forms without accession at the end, 
take i"L throughout ; excepting the Imp. 2 masc. sing, 
which has »"T~, and the Inf. abs. which has rL. 

(c) Before sufformatives beginning with a consonant, 
(1) The Prceter of Kal has \ . (2) The Prceter of all 
the derived conjugations, has *-. (3) The Fut. and 
Imp. throughout have \. ; see paradigm. 

(d) Before sufFormatives beginning with a vowel, the 
Quiescent falls away. 



§ 283. VERBS LAMEDH HE. 123 

E. g. ^2 instead of ^b?, ^ for "}?$, etc. ; § 118. But a pause- 
accent restores the Quiescent and prolongs the original vowel which 
precedes it; e. g. ^Jjf! instead of ^ or ^^ § 147. 

-Vote. The falling away of the Quiescent here, throughout, depends on the principle stated in 
§ US with the Note. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 
\\ 283. (a) KAL. (1) Prceter sometimes has the Chaldee form, as 
n by for nni?y , CO mp. § 278. a. 1 . With Vav moveable once, ^f2& , 
Job iii. 26. Forms written defectively are rather unusual ; as ^O?? 
for VTQ3 . 

(2) Infinitive abs. sometimes drops the T\, and takes the form ibj 
for nhba, etc. Twice it takes n; as JIVU^ iiM^n, Infinitive constr. 
(rarely) as nap, H2?5. Fern. form. HW ( n S^) } retaining the Vav, 
Ezek. xxviii. 17- Once ni^ in Ezek. xxi. 15. 

Note. The usual Inf. constr., as ni ^ is a fern, Segholate form, and 
is merely a contraction of rir?| ; see § 120. c. Comp. fern. Infinitives, 
§212.3*. 

(3) Jtawre. («) n^n , Hinfcl, ^, (instead of rPTJJ?, n^n, 
■"t-Jt^J), are mere imitations of the Chaldee pointing in the Fut. of these 
verbs, and are probably errors of transcribers. 

(/3) The Yodh quiescent of the root is sometimes omitted before suf- 
fixes, as nj^?!^ for njpJpr.Jn ; an d sometimes it becomes otiant by 
reason of a Dagh. euphonic, as nj'WJJ^, an d even falls out here also, 
as rtzton .] 

Apocopate Future of KaL 

£(y) This is common to all the conjugations of this verb. It is formed 
by dropping the final n with the preceding vowel. It then appears, 
(1) Usually with a furtive vowel under the first radical. (2) Without 
one. E. g. 

(1) Forms with a furtive vowel. 

full form. apoc. usual form. 

Sing. 3 nbfi (bt^) bA a 



(2) Third pers. without a furt. vowel. 
full form. apoc. nude form. 



— 2 n^rn 

— 1 nbas 

(Plural) 1 n^3 

v g utt 3 njaft 

__ 2 rvsnn 

igutt. 3 nto;_ 

3 rniT. 



^&1 b 

^b T c 
im d 

Vwh e 

^nki f 

wvh g 

^nb. h 






TO, OTM) i 

"TO ( W ith Pattahh furt.) I 
IWH Job xxxi. 27. m 

M "]?l, M in oft'o (§ 57 «) w 
Tl*!, TTilPs.lxxii.8. o 



124 § 283. VERBS LAMEDH HE. 

Note 1. The Segholate forms in verbs differ in one respect from 
those of nouns, etc. ; inasmuch as verbs take Hhireq short and pure 
for a penult vowel; whereas nouns, etc., allow only of Seghol, Tseri,, 
Pattahh,, Qamets (in a few cases), and Hholem, all pure. In the above 
table, a, e, and h have short Hhireq for a penult vowel. 

Note 2. In the apoc. forms of the 2nd and 1st persons sing, and plu- 
ral, the Hhireq is prolonged into Tseri, so b, c, d; not '^.F\1, '?!*?J> 
etc. On the other hand, the third person very rarely has a Tseri in 
the penult, like s&. from ?T?tt?, under a. 

Note 3. When the second radical is a Guttural, the apoc. forms 
assume the usual Pattahh in the final syllable; as in e and/, § 113. 
When the first radical is a Guttural, both vowels more usually are 
Pattahh, as in g ; but n and n may take Hhireq, as in h. 

Note 4. The nude apoc. forms in No. 2, without furtive vowels, are 
not frequent ; yet they occur sufficiently often to be distinctly acknow- 
ledged. In form they resemble such nouns as ^^P, T?2, etc. The 
learner will observe, that the Hhireq under the praeform. is occasion- 
ally prolonged, and so becomes Tseri ; e. g. in i. In Z, the Pattahh in 
"7T. (yi-hhad?) is only furtive, as the Daghesh lene in T shows. 

Note 5. In the forms under j, k, the Segholate shape accom- 
modates itself to the words, which have a final Yodh ; e. g. ^T, instead 
of ^. or ^rft, etc. See the ground of this, in § 120. b. So also ^ 
(written once N'ln'J § 125. a.), from Hjn. 

Note 6. All the apoc. forms of the Future more usually have a 1 
conversive before them ; but some occur without it ; and 1 does not 
always occasion apocope, e. g. n32*l 2 K. i. 10, »"HP*- 2 K. vi. 23. 

Remark. The student will observe, that none of the Segholates 
in Kal have the common form of two Seghols, like ^Tv.§. In this 
respect the forms of Kal are distinct from those of Hiphil, which adopts 
the double Seghol wherever the nature of the word permits. 

(4) Imperative. For the forms of ^7%, ^>% } instead of ^5, ^1%, 
see § 118 with Notes 1. 2. 3. 

(5) The active Part. fern, is nVft (for fT^Ha § 118). Sometimes 
it assumes the form njbh, p] ur . n'vVsi, as if from ^7*2, of the form 
TFQft, % 212. 6. 

(6) The passive Part, rarely as *WV for ^V? , -"ISS for ^SE . In 
Kethibh, n'VTCM mtu-voth, Qeri nY*IB3 .] 



§§ 284 — 288. verbs lamedh he. 125 

Restoration of the Yodh Radical. 

{_% 284. In the forms where Yodh radical is dropped, it is occasion- 
ally restored, either by a pause-accent, by Nun parag., or by the em- 
phasis required upon the word. See § 147 for pause-accent. With 
Nun, ^T. , ?^?T and F^ . Emphasis Tl>pri p s . l v ii. 2. Imp. 
TO:?, Is xxi. 12. With n parag. also, Fut. T$n«. 

Note. From these cases of restored and prolonged vowels, it is 
clear, that the Fut. and Imp. of verbs H7 have, in the real ground- 
form, a final Pattahh, since the restored vowel goes into Qamets; 
§ 146.] 

Niphal. 

\_ § 285. (1) Prceter sometimes with Hhireq before > ; as '"J s, i?? from 
njp T , W% . In pause ^£3 from HES . 

(2) Infinitive abs. rarely as Hlv^? . Infinitive const, very rarely as 

ris-in, judg. xiii. 21. 

(3) The Future apoc. merely drops the final n with the preceding 
vowel.] 

Piel. 

£§ 286. (1) Prceter sometimes with Hhireq before >, as ft* v? . 
(2) The apoc. forms in this conj. not only drop their final n with its 
vowel, but also the Daghesh forte from the middle radical (see par.), 
because this letter now becomes a final one, § 72. The preceding 
vowel is sometimes prolonged, as Vy.!=»T3nj3. 

When the middle radical is an (as in n; "5V, ' 1 'tt)j tne apocopate 
forms require a Mappiq to be inserted, in order to make the He muta- 
ble when it comes to be final; e. g. ^7^11, ^5^5 . 

(3) With Yodh restored ; Imp. ^1 (for ^V? , § 73. Note 3). Fut. 

with suff. wkin .] 

Hiphil. 

[§ 287. (1) Prceter sometimes with Hhireq; as VFTjn scnln . 
Sing. fern. 3rd pers. sometimes as ^V^H ; comp. § 283. a. 1. In some 
cases the n prefix takes Seghol ; as Hv^H, HS'in. Also the Chaldee, 
^qn for nbnrj • C omp. § 283. 3. a. 

(2) Infinitive abs. once as n ?7^ • Infinitive const, once J"n25|?'7 
for n'l^pn, Lev. xiv. 43. (3) Prceter 3rd pers. plur. once VD$n 
him-siv, like the Chaldee "PQ"), etc. Fut. once ^H^ri f or nripn, Jer. 
xviii. 23.] 

[§ 288. Future Apocopate, Like those in Kal, they are divided 



126 §§ 288 — 293. verbs lamedh he — lamedh tav. 

into two kinds. (1) With a furtive vowel; e. g. bajl, EfVn, b?»n. 
Here the penult vowel is Seghol, or Pattahh when the first radical is 
a Guttural. The usual forms of noun-Segholates are here prevalent, 
in distinction from those in Kal; Remark, p. 124. 

(2) With nude apocope; as nf£, T}1', HJ^, JW, etc. 

Note. The Imp. follows the analogy of No. 1 ; e. g. with a furtive 
vowel, always as ^7)H, ^.H, instead of HS^n, ns^n, etc. With a 
Guttural, as bph for nhvr\ , etc.] 

[§ 289. Peculiar anomalies. Such are the endings in (..) in 
the Infin., and Future; e. g. Inf. Kal, i"Pn to be; Piel H237 oppri- 
mendo; Hoph. H-T^H . I n Kal Fut. rnrjfj , Nrifcl for rotel ; Piel 
H v^ . In Syriac and Chaldee, the Fut. ends in N s or \- in these 
verbs.] 

[§ 290. Imitations of verbs ^b ; comp. § 279. (a) Imitation in 
respect to consonants ; e. g. '•riMS'J for VT 1 ^ ; ^^? Inf. abs. for HIM, 

Imp. Min. So mj^i, ^bn.^, f or njt^, nbrn ; S2tp f or nsw Piel; 

S^ for n?.^, Ecc. viii. 1.' (b) As to vowels"; ' e. g. nbo« for H^Sn , 
TOt^Mfor TOtt^M; Piel. Inf. H?.? for JTl3p, Fut. n&h for nbin ; 

Pa'rt. Niph. nbr}3 fo r nbq? .] 

§ 291. General remark on the usage described in § 279, § 290. The 
number of these anomalies will be increased or diminished very much, 
according to the principles assumed by the lexicographer. If he con* 
stitute roots both in ^b an d in nb^ with the same meaning, then the 
anomalies are reduced to a very small number. If he make but one 
root, then they are multiplied. I observe that Gesenius, (very rightly 
in my apprehension), in his latest works, increases the number of the 
roots and thus dimishes the anomalies. 

[§ 292. Pilel appears only twice, viz. in ni&3 (contract. njW2 § 119. 
c. 1) from HKJ; an d in "0.0^ Part, const, plur., from n ™, Pilel 

rnrpa. 

Hithpalel appears only in <7nw , Hith. rnqntpn, Fut. apoc. mhvpl 
instead of inntp., § 120. b. Inf. with n parag. n^nfittfrr , 2 Kings 
v. 18.] 

VERBS LAMEDH TAV. 

[§ 293. These are not strictly irregular ; but in all the persons 
which receive a suffix beginning with iH, the n final of the root is in- 
serted by a Daghesh forte in the suffix letter ; e. g. i T)|, ^J1? ha-rat- 
ta, "tf-n?, D ^5, etc. So also, HE he died, FVt? mat-la, ^^, etc., as 
in the paradigm.] 



|| 294 — 296. verbs doubly anomalous. 127 

VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 

§ 294. These are such as have two radicals (usually 
the first and third) which may be dropped, or assimi- 
lated, or may become quiescent ; as «"*/}**, HW } PTT, N'tttt, 
HIM, etc. 

tt' 

Note. Very few cases occur like NISI, where two irregular letters 

(t ft 

come together. Two cases only occur of verbs irregular 2 and 2757 ; 
e. g. TJJ, and DD2 • for which see Lexicon. The verbs TO and V^O ? 
are regular as to the JV«w, § 253. 

§ 295. In regard to the first radical, these verbs exhibit all the va- 
rious phases of verbs irregular ; and in regard to the third radical all 
the phases of verbs irregular v ; see Par. XVII — XX. 

|~§ 296. The following examples and notes on the paradigms just 
mentioned, exhibit all the forms of these verbs in which the student is 
likely to meet with any difficulty. 

0) Verbs »S and fb. 

nbs, Hiph. fut. apoc. ^*f! 1 Sam. xiv. 24, for rt^Ft. 
nSS, Imp. ^M Ex. xvi. 23, by Syriasm for TON (119. d. 2); Fut. 
with suff. ^HQhn 1 Sam. xxviii. 24, for 'instfrn, § 241. Note. 

nnw, Prset. in Pause, VQ* Jer. iii. 22; Imp. in pause, ^^JS for 

^CSS (§ 119 - d > 2 - § 14 7); Fut. mh Deut. xxxiii. 21, for rHJKn, a 
change being made in both the final vowel and consonant ; § 290. a. h ; 
n«!l Is. xli. 25, for Tinx^ • see § 118. Note 2. Hiph. Imp, in pause, 
VQn for VQ$fi, § 119. c. 1. § 147. 

(b) Verbs '3 and &. 

«?; , Inf. fern. riMg for n«f , § 119. c. 1 . Imp. «S , § 243. a. 

(c) Verbs f 3 and A, Par. XVII. 

ni^; not found in Kal ; Piel Fut. W Lam. iii. 53, for ^1, 
§ 247. 2. f. Hiph. Fut. with n retained, nYirr; Neh. xi. 17, § 247. 
</. 1. 1st pers. with suffix fT"^ ^ s * xxx v. 18, and in pause JtJW Ps. 
xxx. 13. 

H3;, Fut. 1st pers. plur. with suffi, 03/?, p s . Ixxiv. 8. 

n ?T> Fut. apoc. ^P*l, Ezek. xxxi. 7, nude apoc. form; Popaal, 

0^3?;, p s . xiv. 3. 



128 §§ 296 — 299. irregular verbs, etc. 

nn^ f Fut. 1st pers. with suff. en" 1 ? , Num. xxi. 30. Hiph. Fut. with 
suff. n\ 2 K. xvii. 27; Tftfl Ps. xlv. 5, etc. 

(7/) Verbs p and &, Par. XVIII. 

The paradigm exhibits in Kal and Niphal the forms of ^^?; in 
Hiphil those of ^7-J, because the former does not occur in Hiphil. 

Infinitive construct, ™W for ft$& f § 119. c. 1. Fut. TO^i? Ruth 
i. 14, Aleph omitted in writing. Hiph. Fut., ^!, Ps. lv. 16, Kethibh 
forN^T.. 

(e) Verbs ]5> and fb 9 Par. XIX. 

The three verbs HT3, ntM, n33, are all of this form. Kal Fut, 
apoc. with Vav, »?.! and "»J1; »»} 2 K. ix. 33. Niphal of nttj p rset . 
3rd pers. plur. in pause, ^?, Num. xxiv. 6; Fut. 3rd pers., n ??1 , 
Zech. i. 16; 3rd pers. plur. -^2\ J er . vi. 4.— <"D3, Praet. Niphal 
H23 2 Sam. xi. 15 ; W?3, Job xxx. 8 (with « for n § 290), or perhaps 
the root is ^2? • 

Hiph. Fut. with suff. 132, 2 Sam. xiv. 6; JJ^, Job xxxvi. 18, etc. 
Fut. apoc. with Vav, ^11, ^il, etc. The Imp. also suffers apocope, 
and takes the forms ^H , "HH , which are of frequent occurrence.] 

[§ 297- The verb S*13 has all the common inflections exhibited in 
paradigm XX. But it has many forms sui generis besides these ; e. g. 
with suff., *T^3, rD^i-2 ; Fut. hnjl for Mha^l . Fern. 3rd plur. n^Sp^, 
with epenth. \. . Also n/lKSn Dent, xxxiii. 16, for &3W ; an d ^nfcOtt 
1 Sam. xxv. 34, for ''frptt. Hiphil sometimes takes epenth. 'i; as 

^rp^nq , vrnwoq , Dniw^q . Defectively ^n f or s^nn . 

Note. The verbs bWa and N^p are used only in Hiphil ; where they 
are declined like H13 .~] 

RELATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS TO EACH OTHER. 

§ 298. In the irregular verbs in general, only two of the radicals 
appear to be permanent and immutable. The other radical may be, 
and often actually is, supplied in different ways, according to the forms 
adopted by the different classes of irreg. verbs. E. g. from the biliteral 
~P, have been formed ^T^J, "H^, ^5t> ^?t> a ^ of the same meaning. 
So also, »} and 2&; 1SJ, ^3, and "H* ; N^i? and mjj; SI to 
and StoJ > anc * so > m ore or less, of a large proportion of the irregular 
verbs, much larger than has yet been generally noticed. This prin- 
ciple reigns extensively, also, in the kindred Shemitish languages. 

§ 299. In consequence of different forms having the same mean- 






§§ 299—302. participles. 129 

ing, it happens in many cases that one form is employed only in some 
particular tense or conjugation, while another is employed exclusively 
in another. E. g. from ^d^l ivit, is derived the Praet. and Part.; while 
its equivalent *T?J furnishes the Inf., Fut., and Imp. So Plirj, as a 
verb 2737 in Kal; but Pual ^H, and Hith. njjnrjn , come from n,"TT. 

Compare in Latin, fero, tuli, latum; Greek, <pspa>, o'icrto, rjveyica. It were to be wished 
that lexicographers would make a more extensive use of this obvious and widely extended prin- 
ciple in Hebrew etymology. It would greatly diminish the so called anomalies of the language. 

PLURILATERAL VERBS. 

[§ 300. These are properly very few ; and they are declined like 
the conjs. Pilel and Pulal. The following list comprises the whole 
number that actually appear ; viz. 

(1) MgHBj 1st pers. with suff. nVWfcNtD, Is. xiv. 23. (2) bs.^3, 
participle ^?"??P, 1 Chron. xv. 27. (3) Epn3 , Fut. with suffix, 
nm?l?), Ps. lxxx. 14. (4) tan?, Job xxvi. 9. (5) nfo^j, Job 
xxxiii. 25. (6) H^jnn t 2nd pers. fut. nnqn^ f J er . xii. 5 ; participle 
»"nOn*?, Jer. xxii. 15. (7) A few other forms are noted in some 
of the lexicons, but in others they are more properly referred to the 
Pilel form, derived from a triliteral root; as Pilel 3rd pers. fern, in 
pause naj^n, Job xv. 32; Cant. i. 16, from )¥i G 

PARTICIPLES. 

§ 301. Participles are treated as adjectives, and there- 
fore they are declined as nouns ; which is common in 
other languages. Participles in regard to case, tone- 
syllable, etc., follow the usages of nouns. Par. XXI. 
exhibits the various phases and declensions of their ab- 
solute state. 

§ 302. All of them in the fern, may form Segholates, except the 
ground-form has an immutable penult vowel; e. g. n 9l"J> ^?P^ , 
HO^pE?, etc -> are incapable of a Segholate form, because the penult 
vowels cannot be so changed as to conform to the laws of Segholates ; 
see § 142. d. But in Hiphil the fern. Segholates seem to be derived 
from an apocopate fern, form like nbtapft^ which resembles the apoc. 
Fut, sQftl, and has a Tseri pure and mutable. 



130 §^ 303 — 306. verbs with suffix pronouns. 



VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 

§ 303. Pronouns following verbs and being governed 
by them, are attached to them and united in the same 
word. This is effected by taking the fragments or parts 
of the pronoun, with an appropriate vowel of union 
(where one is needed), and adjusting the form of the 
verb, when necessary, so as to receive it. 

E. g. ^B,7 instead of "0*3 ^P r , he killed me; DJ^i? instead of 
EC! £} <^IJ> thou didst hill them. Coinp. Latin eccum for ecce eum, etc. 

§ 304. Most of the suffix pronouns influence the 
tones of the verb, i. e. they move it forward or toward 
the left ; and consequently they occasion more or less 
changes in the mutable vow T els of verbs, usually (not 
always) according to the general principles of the vowel 
changes, § 126 seq. In some few cases, the consonants 
of the verb suffer a change in order to receive a suffix ; 
see § 311. 

§ 305. As all the conjugations of verbs terminate in 
the same manner, they all receive suffixes in the like 
manner with Kal, with very little variation. But neuter 
verbs, and those which are passive or reflexive, do not 
from the nature of the case admit of suffixes, as they do 
not, when neuter, govern words after them. 

Note. Verbs of the first and second persons do not receive suffixes 
of the same persons, because the reflexive forms of the verbs are em- 
ployed to express the sense which would be thus conveyed. 

§ 306. The Inf. mode and participles receive suffixes 
either in the manner of verbs or of nouns. 

But not with the same meaning, as it respects the Inf. mode ; for a 
noun-suffix appended to it, denotes the subject or agent of the verb ; 
but a verbal suffix, the object of the action implied by the verb. E. g, 



§§ 307 — 309. VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 131 

Inf. ^P?, with noun suffix "HP? my punishment, viz. that which I in- 
flict; with a verbal suffix s 93pB7, to punish me. 

§ 307- Different forms of pronouns suffixes. Most of the verbal- 
suffixes or fragments of primitive pronouns, have at least three different 
forms, adapted to the different ending or tense of the verb to which 
they are appended. 

(a) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in 
which they begin with a consonant. In this shape they 
are appended,, through all the tenses and modes, to 
forms of verbs which end with a vowel; see Note 
below. 

(b) To the simple form of the suffixes, i. e. to suffixes 
beginning with a consonant, is prefixed a vowel of the A 
class, viz. Qamets or Pattahh. In this shape they are 
appended to forms of verbs which end with a consonant 
usually in the Prseter only. 

(c) To the same forms are 'prefixed a vowel of the E 
class, viz. Tseri or Seghol. In this shape they are ap- 
pended to forms of verbs in the Fut. and Imp. which 
end with a consonant. 

Note. The vowel which is thus prefixed to the suffixes, serves to 
connect them more readily with the verb, and is therefore called the 
union-vowel. When the verb ends in a vowel, this same vowel of 
course serves as a union- vowel. 

§ 308. Between the suffix and the union-vowel there is sometimes 
inserted an epenthetic Nun, % 109. b, which is usually assimilated to 
the first letter of the suffix and expressed in it by a Daghesh forte. In 
poetry, the Nun is sometimes fully written. This class of suffixes is 
limited principally to the sing, number of the pronouns, and to the Fut. 
tense of verbs. 

f_§ 309. The following table exhibits the suffixes as appended, (a) 
To verbs ending with a vowel, in all the modes and tenses. (6) To 
those ending with a consonant, in the Praeter. (c) To those ending 
with a consonant, in the Fut. and Imperative, id) It exhibits alsa- 
those suffixes which receive an epenthetic Nun. 



132 


§§ 309 


,310 


VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 




(a) 




(*) 


(«) 


Sing. 


"jommon. 




Prceter. 


.Fw£. awe? Imper. 


i. 






> 

^- in pause ^, 


> 


2 m. 


T-n?. 




T in pause ^- *f- 


1 etc. no- 

T,SV 


2f. 


tj o 




^> Or,) (^) 


"*= ^ '?- 


3 m. 


ml i 




irrl i 

T 


inl i 


3f. 


> 

T 




T T 


> 

TV 


PI. 1 


, to. 




> 

to- 

T 


•IX. 


2 m. 


DO 




05 


D ? 


2f. 


£ 




'? 


9 


3 m. 


D poet. 


id! 


D, D- poet, to- 


> 

D- D- poet. IS 


3f. 


1 W 




> 


fe 



Future with epenthetic Nim. 
(d) 

Sing. 1. •£ % for ^i etc. 

— 2 m. ;£ nil for ^ etc. 

— 3 m. ^ for ^ also ta 

— 3 f. H|l for n^ 
1st Plur. -13- for %] 

Notes on the table of suffixes. Unusual forms. 

[_\ 310. (1) In a very few instances, the Future has the suffixes ^1 
D- like the Praeter ; and vice versa the Prseter very rarely takes suf- 
fixes like the Future, viz. "*?-, and a few times ?-. 

(2) The original union-vowels would seem to be Qamets and Tseri; 
which shorten into Pattahh and Seghol when the tone is removed. Be- 
fore the epenthetic Nun, the two latter only are found. So also in ^z, 
which in pause becomes N^- . 

(3) The 2nd pers. sing. fern. ?f- in b, occurs but seldom ; the more 
common form in the Praeter is ^\r. (without tone "%), as in the Future. 
The form with paragogic Yodh 0?-) occurs often in the later Psalms. 






§^ 310 — 311. VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 133 

(4) The suffixes O?, ]?, never take a union-vowel ; nor does the 
suffix *J or HD, except in pause. The 3rd pers. sing. fern, of the Pree- 
ter also takes suffixes either with or without a union-vowel ; see below 
§ 312. 2. 

(5) The forms IB- IE- IB- with a parag. 1, are common in poetry. 
The form 'ID is found as a suffix once, Ex. xv. 5 ; so in Ethiopic. The 
form DH- occurs in Deut. xxxii. 26. 

(6) Instead of the fern, suffix 1 of the 3rd pers. plural fern., the masc. 
form E appears, specially after the suiformatives si and V; perhaps in 
order that the fern, suffix may not be confounded with the parag. ]; 
as WBfrSa Ex. ii. 17, for W&1&1; nmpM^, 1 Sam. vi. 10; Gen. 
xxvi. 15 ; Numb. xvii. 3, 4; Josh. iv. 8; Hos. ii. 14; Prov. vi. 21. 
But 1 is used in Is. xlviii. 7- 

(7) The suffixes with epenth. Nun are occasionally found in the 
Imp., but rarely in the Preeter ; see No. 1. above. In Chaldee, an 
epenth. Nun is always found before the suff. of the Fut., Imp., and 
Infinitive. 

(8) Wherever there is a union-vowel, it always takes the tone. 
The suffixes ED and "?? always draw down the tone upon themselves, 
removing it two places if necessary ; and are on that account denomi- 
nated grave suffixes. The others never move the tone more than one 
syllable, and are called light suffixes. 

The suffix ^7 or HD when appended to verbs ending in a consonant, 
usually takes the tone. The 3rd pers. sing. fern, of the Prseter is ex- 
cepted ; see paradigm. 

(9) Some of these suffix-forms of pronouns are derived from primi- 
tive forms which are still in use; as □, ], from CH, |il, etc. Others 
would seem to come from forms which are now obsolete in Hebrew ; 
as *F from n2K.= n3aN thou, like ^ /; D?, from E2H etc. The 
form ^7 still appears in Ethiopic, as a regular sufform. in the flexion of 
verbs.] 

Note. Verbal suffixes are also united, in all their forms, with certain adverbs and interjec- 
tions ; in which condition they are in the Nominative case. 

§ 311. Changes made by suffixes, in the vowels and consonants of 
the Heb. verb. The changes of the vowels are seen in the paradigm. 
In respect to the consonants, the following changes take place; viz. 
Preet. 3rd fern. H- becomes n. (A.) ; the fern. Q (^) becomes ^ ; 
2nd plur. masc. EJ?) becomes ^n ; as the paradigm shows. The forms 
ending with H3- receive *\ in its room. 



134 § 312. VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 

Notes on the Paradigm. 

£§ 312. KAL, Procter third person masc. singular. In vptjp, as 
the tone is moved forward, the first vowel falls away, § 133 ; the second 
vowel of the original word being thrown into a simple syllable, be- 
comes long, § 130 ; but where the syllable remains mixed, Pattahh con- 
tinues, as D^ :^l? • I n sucn a wa 7' tne student will easily account for 
most of the changes made in the original vowels of the verb. Verbs 
final Tseri retain it, when a long vowel is required in the last syllable 
of the verb ; as ^^ . 

(2) PrceterSrdfe?n. substitutes n for the final n, unites this (for the 
most part) in a syllable with the last radical of the verb, and always puts 
the tone upon the same syllable. It is only when a suffix begins with a 
vowel, (which for the fern. sing, occurs only in "H- O- ]-) that the final 
r\ is taken away from this syllable (§ 90. 1), which of course, as it then 
becomes simple, prolongs the Pattahh, § 130. E. g. with sufif. Ut, 
'sKH^Pj where the Tseri of the suffix is shortened, in consequence of 
falling into a mixed syllable without the tone, § 129. a. So D- ]- 
make, by the same rules, Bnbtop } in^i? . 

Note. The suffix *in- and H- sometimes assimilate their n to the 
final n of the verb; e. g. VT%|=Hntf?»? 1 Sam. i. 24; nnTnS : = 
HOI™, Jer. xlix. 24. 

(3) Procter 2nd fern, exhibits the form \Fpt3p before a suffix, (as 
stated in § 311); and in this way it appears in the same manner as 
the 1st pers. sing, when it takes the suffix of the 3rd pers. sing, and 
plural. The student will remark that here, and in the 2nd pers. plural, 
a union-vowel is provided for the verb by adopting such forms as 

(4) The Infinitive most usually takes suffixes in the manner of Se- 
gholate nouns, in Dec. VI. ; i. e. the final vowel is thrown back upon 
the first radical and shortened. If the verb be 37 Guttural, then the 
points are regulated by the usual principles, in § 114. § 128. See the 
examples in the paradigm. The variety of punctuation with the suf- 
fixes 1, c ?, 1?, may also there be seen. 

The Infinitive of a verb Fut. Pattahh usually takes Hhireq under 
the first radical before suffixes ; as c ^l7^ in the paradigm ; but some- 
times Pattahh, as ^i?"?, '^?? 3 etc. Verbs Pe Guttural sometimes 
take a Seghol in the first syllable ; as n ??CJ , Ps. cii. 14. 

The Infinitive fern-. Segholate takes suffixes like nous of Dec. XIII. 



§§ 312 — 315. VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS — NOUNS. 135 

>> • 

Hhireq is the usual vowel in the first syllable, e. g. ^??7?, \PIEH ; hut 
sometimes Pattahh, as ™?$, ^^. 

(5) Future suffixes are provided with a union-vowel in most cases, 
where the verb ends with a consonant; in which cases the final Hho- 
lem or Tseri of the verb is dropped. But with suff. ^J, E^, 1? > these 
vowels are retained, and shortened because they lose the tone. On the 
other hand, verbs Future Pattahh retain this vowel, and prolong it be- 
fore a union- vowel; as Et£?2 7^ from ^5?1 . 

(6) The Imperative follows the analogy of the Future throughout ; 
and this in regard to verbs final Pattahh, as well as others. 

(7) Participles follow the manner of the nouns to whose declension 
they belong, in receiving suffixes. 

(8) PIEL usually drops its final Tseri before a union-vowel, as in 
the paradigm ; but before "^T, E2, ??> ^ commonly shortens it into Se- 
ghol or short Hhireq, as *J?5|? , E?^*?? ; rarely into Pattahh, as ^P"^ , 
Deut. ii. 7* Pattahh final here remains, as ^VTI . 

(9) POEL, POLEL, etc., imitate Piel in their suffixes. 

(10) HIPHIL appends suffixes to its full forms, not to the apoco- 
pate ones. Very rarely is the final vowel of the verb dropped ; as in 

Verbs Lamedh He with suffixes. 

Q§ 313. Suffixes here cause the final letter and vowel to fall away. 
The union-vowel is then supplied, or omitted, as the nature of the case 
requires. 

Note 1. Prceter 3rd sing. fern, rejects the final H-, and then fok 
lows the analogy in regular verbs as to the n before the suffix. 

Note 2, Suffixes beginning with a consonant sometimes cause the 
original Yodh to be restored; as ^n, i^D3% nrj^M, etc.] 



NOUNS. 

§ 314. Derivation. Most nouns in Hebrew are derived from verbs ; 
and in general they have for their ground-forms the Inf. mode or par- 
ticiples. A comparatively small number of nouns are probably primi- 
tive ; but these conform, in their inflection, to the usual laws which 
regulate those derived from verbs. 

§ 315. Declension in Hebrew nouns differs much from declension 



136 §§ 315, 316. nouns; general classification, etc. 

in Greek and Latin. The plural and dual numbers are, indeed, distin- 
guished by appropriate endings added to the ground-forms ; but case, 
properly considered, is not marked by any peculiarity of inflection in 
the noun itself. For the most part, it is designated by prepositions and 
the construct state of the preceding noun, § 332. But the plural and 
dual endings, the suffixes, and whatever increases the original ground- 
forms of the noun and shifts the place of its tone, occasions a variety of 
changes in the vowel-points and in the forms of nouns, which may not 
unaptly be called declensions. 

§ 316. Classes of nouns in respect to origin. Nouns, 
like verbs, are either primitive or derivative. Those of 
the latter class are divided into verbals or those derived 
from verbs, and denominatives or those derived from nouns. 
Three classes of nouns may therefore be reckoned. 

(a) Nouns primitive ; which are principally those that designate 
animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the human and animal 
body, and some of the great objects of the natural world. But among 
the names of all these, are some of verbal derivation. 

Note. The form of primitive nouns is not distinguished from that of derived ones. They are 
treated, in their inflections, in the same manner as if they were derived. Only a knowledge of 
etymology, therefore, can enable the student to determine whether a noun is primitive or deriva- 
tive ; and in some cases it may be doubtful to the best etymologist, whether a noun belongs to 
the first, second, or third class above specified. 

(b) Nouns derivative; which are altogether the most numerous class. 
Very many of them appear to be derived either from participles, or from 
the Inf. mood. The former more commonly denote the subject or 
object of action or passion, (nomen agentis vel patientisj ; the latter 
denote action or passion, (nomen actionis vel passionis). The first class 
are named concretes, being used to designate some being or thing; the 
second abstracts, denoting simple action or passion. But to this prin- 
ciple there are very many exceptions. 

(c) Nouns denominative ; which are nouns derived from other nouns, 
either primitive or verbal. E. g. E7]3 a vine dresser, from the primi- 
tive °"ll a vineyard ; V^lp. eastern, from the verbal Gift the east. 
The forms of these resemble those of the other classes. 

QNote. Denominatives are usually formed, (1) By adding to verbals 
the masc. derivation \, or the fern. H\. ; e . g. &$ six, *¥$ [sixth ; 
•ON'ID a Moabite, from nw'lB ; tyhfy an Israelite, from ?&$¥*', etc. 
Several adjectives also are formed in this manner; as v ?5!}, fern. 
Hp:?2 strange, from ^*$ a stranger; ^Kljlflrst, from f*B*!i2, etc. 



§§316 — 319. nouns; gender. 137 

(2) By adding n\, which is usually of the fern, gender. E. g. tPN'n 
princeps, SVH&VQ principium. Words of this form are sometimes de- 
fectively written, as ri^S f or rPSp^, etc. 

(3) Rarely by adding the terminations H- PT- "»- or Tf-. E. g. 
«Tn*3 « /iora, from "HS; ^ r ^^. f re-offering, from t#N ; "^S a deceiver, 
from ^2 ; ?f!^? # treasury, from t2| .] 

|[§ 317- Nouns composite and proper. Composite nouns are very 
rarely found in Hebrew, except in proper names. A few however 
occur, which are made up of two nouns, or of a noun and a particle ; 
e. g. n^hb^ = n^h b-$ shade of death; by*b2 worthless, from ^ 
not and ''Si profit. 

Note 1. Proper names, in their formation, follow the general 
analogy of verbals as given in § 316. b. Very many of them are com- 
posite, and consist usually of two nouns, or a noun and a verb. E. g. 
PQJ52 Benjamin, i. e. son of my right hand; E^|?^f"H Jehoiahim, i.e. 
Jehovah will exalt. 

Note 2. To the first word in composite proper names a Yodh is 
usually added, as •N"H55 Gabriel or man of God, from "GH and ?& ; 
sometimes a Vav, as vN-IDtp Samuel or name of God, from &$? and 'W . 
The name of God (vN or nj/T. abridged) forms the beginning or the 
termination of a great multitude of Hebrew proper names.] 

Gender of Nouns. 

§ 318. The Hebrew has only two genders, viz. the 
masculine and feminine. These are distinguished some- 
times by the form, and sometimes by the signification, 
of words. 

§ 319. I. Gender distinguished by form, (a) In ge- 
neral, nouns are masculine which end in one of the ori- 
ginal radical letters of the word. 

(b) The feminine is distinguished by adding to the 
masculine, either »"L, T), n.^ or ft-. 

E. g. TfVb a king, HS 1 ?^ a queen ; H&n a sinner; HSIsn sin, ^V 
a Hebrew man, nn^ a Hebrew woman ; "l^|"J , fern. POPft incense; 
STJIE, fem. nsrf\Q acquaintance. The fern. H- is appropriate to 
words with Gutturals at the end, § 141. 

Note 1 . Besides these, the following terminations of the feminine 

s 



138 §§319—322. nouns; gender. 

actually occur, although they are rare; viz. (1) **-; as N3B7, for H3G? t 
§ 122. 1. (2) ru ; as rrat, poetic for nTOT. (3) n. with the 
proper vowel Pattahh, and with the tone on the ultimate ; as ^12""? § 
emerald, J"INf? pelican, Ps. cii. 6. 

Note 2. The endings fi s - and rfi are also feminine. They are 
contracted forms, and stand for the full fern, flj- and nj- a neither of 
which the language permits, § 120. c] 

§ 320. II. Gender distinguished by signification, (a) 
Nouns which designate objects such as the following, are 
masculine, although they have a feminine termination. 

(1) Names of men ; as PTTIH^ Judah. (2) Offices of men ; as n Q§ 
a governor. (3) Nations; as PTTirp the nation of Judah. (4) Rivers; 
as *"f??*?. Amana. 

(b) Nouns which designate objects such as the follow- 
ing, axe feminine, although they have a masc. termination. 

(1) Names of women ; as ^n*n Rachel. (2) Offices or relations of 
women ; as ES mother. (3) Countries ; as ~)^W Assyria. (4) Towns; 
as "^2 Tyre. (5) Female beasts; as ]V"IN a she-ass. (6) Members 
of the body by nature double ; as ]?.W the ear. 

Note 1. The same word may be masc. in one meaning, and fern, 
in another; as rn-IPP Judah or the Jews, masc. ; HTUT 1 ., the country 
of Judea, fern. 

Note 2. There are some nouns which are feminine, although desti- 
tute of any distinctive sign of this gender either in form or significa- 
tion; as ""^ a well; 133 a talent, etc. These can be learned only 
from practice. 

§ 321. Nouns of common gender. A considerable 
number of nouns are of common gender. Such are 
generally the names of beasts, birds, metals, etc. 

Note 1. These nouns are mostly masculine as to form. Some of 
them are more commonly employed as masc. nouns ; others more fre- 
quently as feminine. These can be learned only by practice. What 
is of the neuter gender in the present western languages, is generally 
designated in the Hebrew by the feminine ; as "WS H3 daughter of 
Tyre, i. e. city of Tyre. 

Note 2. Nouns of the dual number are universally of the common 
gender. 

§ 322. Gender of the plural In the plural, the 
appearance of nouns as to gender is in many cases 



§§ 322, 323. nouns ; formation of the fem., etc. 139 

dubious. A considerable number of masc. nouns form 
their plural as if they were feminine ; while many femi- 
nine nouns have plurals of the masculine form, § 327. 1. 

E.g. masc. ^ a father, plur. ninM . Fem. Ht^n wheat, plur. 
&®n, etc. 

Note. The gender of the plural, let the form be as it may, is, 
with few exceptions, regulated by that of the singular. Some words 
exhibit both the masc. and fem. forms of the plural, but the gender of 
both forms is the same, viz. it is the same as that of the singular. 

Formation of fem. nouns from masc. ones. 
[_\ 323. The addition of fem. terminations (§ 319. b) to the masc. 
forms, usually occasions some change in the vowels of the masculine, 
because these terminations affect the tone-syllable of the ground-form. 
E. g. (a) (1) The ending H- draws down the accent, and consequently 
causes the penult vowel of the masc. form, if mutable, to be dropped ; 
§ 133. (2) In nouns, etc., of the form of Dec. VII., the final vowel 
is dropped. (3) Such nouns as Dec. VIII., in case they have a long 
vowel, exchange it for a short one with Dagh. forte, or in case this is 
excluded, substitute an equivalent for it, § 111. § 112. (4) Masc. Se- 
gholates receiving H- fem. assume the suffix-form in order to take it ; 
see par. Dec. VI. (5) Nouns of Declension IX. drop their final n and 
its preceding vowel, in order to receive the fem. H- . All these prin- 
ciples are apparent in the following table of formations, in which those 
nouns not accompanied by a common numeral mark, form the fem. by 
the mere addition of the fem. H- to the masculine; those marked 1, 
2, 3, 4, 5, correspond in their formation to the rules given in 1 , 2, etc. 
above. The Roman numerals mark the declensions to which the masc. 
nouns respectively belong. 



Dec. Masc. 


Fem. 


Dec. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Dec. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


I. CfiD 


T 


VI. 


Tfbp 


ns^a (4) 




V* 


T •' 


]innn 


rravinn 

t : - 




2?| 


n ?^ (4) 


VIII 


T 


nan (3) 


II. «$*m 


T T 




IBM 


rvy2X (4) 




V?. 


ns; (3 ) 


ill. Vna 


nVTT| (i) 




bafr 


nb^ (4) 




12 


n?? (3) 


pins 


npnp(i) 




b?ft 


nbps (4) 




ph 


n 5n (3) 


T 


nE^s (i) 




VF 


"BW (4) 




♦? 


n« (3) 


• T 


nH'na (i) 




V T 


<ib)V (4) 




ji 


naa (3) 


E'TO 


TO"J?» (1) 




T¥ 


«T3 (4) 




-ib 


rrw ( 3 ) 


IV D$ 


n W? (D 


VII 


.nn'w 


nmk (2) 


IX. 


V T 


n ?I (5) 


V. WX 


"33! 0) 




"T|?1B 


rnplQ (2) 


H^™ 


n«-in (5) 


. »; 


™£ (irreg.) 


yy 


T •■ 









140 §§ 323, 326. nouns; formation of the plural. 

Note. As nouns of Dec. V. not unfrequently imitate those of Dec. 
VI. in their const, form (see par.) so among the feminines derived from 
ground- forms belonging here, are some that imitate the fern, of Dec. 
VI. ; e. g. Tfn; fem. ny£ , b^ f em . nb^ . For the form \ftnn, fern. 
n,WT9, under Dec. III., comp. § 127. Except. 1. § 270. b. 1. 

(J>) The ending n makes no change in the original word ; e. g. 

K&n, nntsn; "nny, W}3$ 3 etc. 

(c) The Segholate endings H- H- } (1) Affect the penult vowel in 
the like manner with H-; see above, a. They change the ultimate 
mutable vowel, according to the rule in § 142. d. (3) If the final 
vowel be impure, they substitute a pure one in its room ; e. g. E^N , 

nH&; w*hw 3 n0w ; rmftra, n#m, Taa, nnna, etc.; § 127, 

Exceptions. 

Note. The Fem. Segholate form is usually chosen for the construct 
state; while *7- is more common in the absolute state. In the fem. 
Inf. and Part., the Segholate ending is the usual one. Nouns in Decs. 
VI. and IX. are not susceptible of fem. Segholate endings. Nouns in 
Dec. VIII. omit the Daghesh in the double letter and lengthen the 
preceding vowel, when they assume the Segholate form ; e. g. T^WW , 

Formation of the Plural. 

§ 324. The Hebrew, like the Greek, has three num- 
bers, the singula!', dual, and plural. The plurals of 
masc. and fem. nouns are usually, but not always, dis- 
tinguished by appropriate forms. 

§ 325. Plural masculine. The plural of masc. nouns 
is formed, (a). Usually by annexing to the singular, (1) 
0% . (2) D simply, in some words ending in *- . 

E. g. (1) D-ID plur. Q^psiD. (2) ^J, D^P?; also as $2, orf?. 
But the plural ending, as might be expected, is sometimes written de- 
fectively ; as E^?n, a i so UTZft, § 63. 

(b) The unusual forms of the plural, are (1) )\; e. g. W?J2 9 plur. 
r?^?, Prov. xxxi. 3. (2) \; e. g. V^n, 'oftn, Jer. xxii. 14 : ^ 
Nah. iii. 17- (3) Perhaps \; e. g. ]$, ^», Ps. xlv. 9. The forms 
1 and 2 coincide with the Chald, and Syriac plurals. 

§ 326. Plural feminine. The plural of fem. nouns 



§§ 326, 327* nouns ; heteroclites, etc. 141 

is formed, (a) By changing the terminations H- A. J"L 
of the fern. sing, into JT), and by corresponding vowel 
changes. 
e. g . rnHn, plur. nVrta. rrj|M, p i U r. nViW; roi&, plur. 

fTOStO . The n of the fern, ending sing, is, in a few cases, retained 
in the plural as if it were a radical; e. g. masc. >?, fern. ir?^ fern, 
plur. nHrffj . 

(5) By annexing TV\ simply to those feminines which 
in the singular have a masc. form ; as "^2, plur. JTHN^ 
§ 320. Note 2. 

(c) By changing JTL into J")Vl, as -H^y plural ^1^?; 
and Di into JlVL, as fTD^? plur. JlV^fe . 

Note 1. The plurals under c appear to be derived from obsolete 
forms of the sing, in «"P- and HJ- . Nouns of these classes sometimes 
also form their plural after the usual manner; as ^n 5 plur. E^T^n 

and nirrgq ; ™? p iur. nvrq . 

Note 2. The plural ending of the fern, form is not unfrequently 
written defectively ; as fi ^p for j "T^P, etc. 

HETEROCLITES. 

[§ 327. Thus we may, in the manner of the gram- 
marians, name those nouns which specially depart from 
usual analogy. They are of Jive classes. These are, 

(1) Such as have a masc. singular, and yet have a plural of the fern, 
form and masc. gender, e. g. 2N, HttN, § 322 and the Note; also 
such as have a fern, singular, and a plur. of the masc. form and fern, 
gender, e. g. ^J**?* D> ?57- (2) Such as have two forms of the plural, 
while the gender of both follows that of the singular, e. g. H3t£? fem. a 
year, plur. D^K? and iTpffi? fem., § 322. Note. (3) Some nouns have 
only a plur. form; e. g. a> ??, the face. (4) Some are found only in 
the singular; e. g. fflVjowl, *]& children, etc. These have a collec- 
tive and plur. sense, as well as a sing. one. (5) Some words exhibit 
(like many in the Arabic) a pluralis pluralium, i. e. a plural formed by 
a second plural in addition to the first one ; e. g. n ^J? a high place, 
plur. HIM , pluralis pluralium D^iTlM .] 



142 §§ 328 — 331. nouns; formation, etc., op the dual. 
Formation, use, etc., of the Dual. 

§ 328. The dual is usually formed by adding the ter- 
mination D?- (V-) to the forms of the singular ; e. g. (a) 
To masculines without change, (b) To feminines in 
H-, after changing the final n into n. 

E. g. (a) Cn\ D?feY». (b) rt3T_, DyiS^. I n nouns of Dec. VI. 
the dual ending is appended to the suff. form, as '3D, E;?}*3; see 
paradigm. 

Note. The dual endings appear, in some few cases, to suffer con- 
traction ; e. g. jq*r for )W, nrpn: for Dtfo-p. TJ for ttfr}. 
These contracted forms are limited mostly to proper names. 

§ 329. Use of the dual. It is used principally to de- 
signate such objects as are double either by nature or 
by custom. 

[E.g. d ?!t the two hands ; Q;?5?3 a pair of shoes, etc. The names 
of members of the human bod)' which by nature are double, have also 
a plural as well as a dual form ; but the dual is generally taken in a 
literal, and the plural in a figurative sense ; as 0?S? hands, ri*lS3 
handles. 

Note 1. In a few instances the dual form stands, instead of the 
plural, for a greater number than two ; e. g. E^M? WW six wings ; 
U]2® tPvttf three teeth. It hardly needs to be remarked, that the dual 
is of course essentially plural, requiring a plural verb, adjective, etc. 
In some cases it is difficult to show the reason of the dual form; as 
D^nn^ mid-day, etc. Perhaps it is intensive. 

Note 2. The words E^DtZ? heavens and ETB waters, though appa- 
rently dual, are used as plurals.] 

§ 330. Gender of the dual. It is of common gender ; 
and it is found only among nouns, and not among ad- 
jectives or participles. 

§ 331. The dual ending is sometimes annexed to the plural; e. g. 
nirrin walls, dual D^.nbh two walls, etc. Comp. § 327- 5. 



§§ 332, 333. nouns; changes by declension. 143 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

Construct state. 

§ 332. The Hebrew has no cases, in the sense in 
which we speak of cases in Latin and Greek. But when 
two nouns come together, the second of which is to be 
translated as a Genitive, this relation is indicated, con- 
trary to the usual custom of other languages, by some 
change in the first noun (if it be susceptible of change) 
instead of the second. The first noun so situated, is 
said to be in regimen or in the construct state ; while 
any noun not thus placed before a Genitive, is said to 
be in the absolute state. 

Two nouns in such a relation are supposed to be uttered nearly as if they were one word ; for 
which reason the first noun is usually contracted in the utterance, (if it be capable of contrac- 
tion), so that the stress of voice may be transferred so the second. 

Changes of Consonants in declension of Nouns. 

§ 333. The consonants of the ground-form or abso- 
lute state, are modified in regimen or the construct state 
as follows ; viz. 

(a) In all cases of masc. nouns sing, (not having a 
fern, form, § 320), the const, is like the abs. form as to 
its consonants. 

(b) Feminines singular in fT- change this ending into 

J1-; as n *H% const. -H^V, Other feminines singular 

suffer no change of their consonants. 

< 

(c) The plur. ending D* T and the dual D?- become *- ; 

as DW, const. WD; 0H% const. H\ 

(d) Plurals in DS suffer no change in their conso- 
nants, in the construct state. 

Remark. The vowels of words are also affected by regimen or con- 
struct state ; see § 341 seq. 



144 §§ 334 — 336. nouns ; suffix state. 

Suffix state. 

§ 334. This is that form of nouns to which are ap- 
pended or suffixed fragments of pronouns equivalent in 
signification to our pronominal adjectives in English. 

E. g. D" 5 © a horse, with suffix, Sd^D his horse, etc. So Vlp voice, 
"wp vox ejus. 

Note. Pronouns or fragments of pronouns thus suffixed, may be 
considered as equivalent in general to nouns in the Gen. case, and as 
putting the noun to which they are suffixed into a kind of regimen 
or const, state. Frequently the suff. state requires the same vowel- 
changes as to the const, state, but not always ; as may be seen by the 
paradigm of nouns, where both states are exhibited. 

§ 335. Most of these suffixes (like those of verbs, 
§ 304 seq.), cause the tone of the word to which they 
are appended to be moved forward, and of course pro- 
duce a change in the vowel-points; see § 129 seq. 

§ 336. Noun-suffixes (like those of verbs, § 307 seq.) 
have generally three different forms, adapted to the 
ending or number of the word to which they are ap- 
pended. 

(a) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they begin 
with a consonant, and are appended to nouns singular ending with a 
vowel. 

(b) The second form of suffixes prefixes a union-vowel, in which 
shape they are appended to nouns singular ending with a consonant. 

(c) The third form of the suffixes is peculiar to nouns plural. Here 
all the suffixes take a union- vowel; and all of them, except that of 
the 1st person sing., insert a Yodh between the union-vowel and the 
suffix. 

[The following table exhibits the suffixes as appended to the various forms of nouns ; the first 
column, (a) Containing those which are attached to nouns singular ending with a vowel j the se- 
cond, (b) Those which are attached to nouns singular ending with a consonant ; the third, (c) Ex- 
hibiting the suffixes as they are attached to nouns plural. Several unusual forms of suffixes are 
subjoined. 



§ 336. nouns; suffix state. 



145 



(a) 


(*) 


(o) 


Sing. 


Simple form. 


With un. vowel, etc. 


Suff. to nouns plural. 


1. my 


■>_ 


>_ 


'-. GO 


2 m. thy 


l.fft 


ITs 


*? Cfe) 


2f. thy 


1 


Is *?= 


l£ vl T- 


3 m. his 


1 1PL 


i n inJ 


v- 1- poet, irrl 


3 f. her 


< 

T 


T TV 


ml 

T V 


Fhl.our 


< 


< 


tfl 


2 m. your 


D ? 


0? 


ny. 


2 f. your 


'? 


1? 


'?'- 


3 m. their 


DH 


D- poet. i&- 


DJT- poet. to^ 


3 f. their n ]H 


1- ml 7TL 

T T T TV 


*JV| 



Note*) 

[Note J . Unusual suffixes to nouns singular. Sing. Suff. 2 masc. 
«"D-, P s . cxxxix. 5, n ?-.., Ps. x. 14. — 2 fern. sing. sT-, Ezek. v. 12, 
% Ezek. xxiii. 28, HD- (for Tfc) with H- parag. Nah. ii. 14, ^-, Ps. 
ciii. 3. — 3 fern. H- without Mappiq, Numb. xv. 28, N-, Ezek. xxxvi. 5 
for PT- . Plural ; 1 pers. ^ Ruth iii. 2 ; Job xxii. 20.— 2 fern. HJ3, 
Ezek. xxiii. 48, 49.-3 masc. Bru, 2 Sam. xxiii. 6.-3 fern. njrj-, 
1 K. vii. 37. 

Note 2. Unusual suffixes to nouns plural. Sing. Suff. 3 masc. 
TP, p s . cxvi. 12, Chaldaic— 3 fern. HTT^, Ezek. xli. 15, for rrO. 
Plural ; 2 fern. n35\., Ezek. xiii. 20.— 3 masc. nian\. Ezek. xl. 16. 
— 3 fern. n3£T\-, Ezek. i. 11 ; all with H- paragogic. 

Note 3. The suff. \ joined to a noun ending with >, usually co- 
alesces with it ; e. g. ^3 a nation, V& igoyi) my nation ; but sometimes 
as T]? my fruit. 

Note 4. The sing, forms 3 pers., 'Iff- H- are appended to nouns of 
Dec. IX. ; ^- is parag. for D-, § 125. c. 

Note 5. ANOMALIES. (1) Yodh in the plur. suff. is sometimes 
omitted in writing; as ^I^FTR for T?"^, Trj^O for JiT^rj, Gen.iv.4. 
"H^T for ^^1 , etc. (2) Sometimes a sing. suff. is attached to a 

T 



146 §§ 336 — 340. nouns ; suffix state. 

plur. noun; V}*T2 for VfT£, Ps. cxxxii. 12; ^nbfc for T™», Deut. 
xxviii. 59; DiTDN. for ErT\TpS 5 etc. (3) Vice versa, plur. suffixes 
are sometimes appended to the singular; e. g. T 1 "]'^^ for ^Kl^H^, 
TpiTOS, fay building, for ?KT^, Inf. noun from H2S Ezek. xvi. 31. 
Nos. 2 and 3 are doubtless oversights of transcribers. 

Remark. The suffixes E5? ??> DJ 7 » ?*v j are called grave, because 
they always bring down the tone upon them ; while other suffixes are 
called light, because they do not affect the tone uniformly in this 
manner. With nouns singular, the grave suffixes take no union-vowel. 
With nouns plural, they have one, but do not allow it to take the tone. 
In all other cases, without exception, the union- vowel takes the tone 
upon itself. The sing. tJ takes the tone when preceded by a conso- 
nant ; and loses it when preceded by a vowel.] 

§ 337. Feminines in H-, in order to receive suffixes, 
change the final n_ into n~ . 

§ 338. Nouns dual take the suffixes of nouns plural. 

§ 339. The plural and dual, in order to receive suf- 
fixes, drop the appropriate endings of the abs. state, 
and take the suffixes in their place. 

E. g. "IS?, P lur - ^^I* witn suff - ^v?^ where the ending D\ is 
dropped, and the suffix »P- taken in its room. So ^1? ; dual D?Q3 , 
with suff. ^S?, dropping D?- and taking 'O' 1 -. 

Notes on nouns with suffixes, Par. XXIV. 

[]§ 340. This paradigm shows the manner in which the suffixes are 
attached to masc. and fem. nouns. No. I. exhibits the usual suffixes, 
in connection with a masc. noun ending with a consonant. A fem. 
noun terminating in a consonant, receives suffixes in the same way. 
No. II. exhibits the manner in which suffixes are attached to nouns 
ending with a vowel or quiescent letter. The noun 2*J in its abs. state 
ends, indeed, in a consonant, but it is in this respect irregular. The 
const, and suff. state has a Yodh, as if from a form ^^J ending with a 

' TO 

Quiescent. The suffixes are of course of the simple form, i. e. without 
a union-vowel. The plur. of 2Ni s m2N; which takes suffixes like 
the plural of nTin . 

No. III. exhibits suffixes in connection with a fem. noun. For femi- 
nines in n- and ^z with suffixes, see § 390 and Dec. XIII. in the 
paradigm of nouns. For anomalies as to suffixes appended to fem. 



§§ 341, 342. NOUNS ; VOWEL CHANGES. 147 

nouns, see Rosenm. Comm. in Zach. iv. 2, where is a large list of 
them. 

Changes of vowels in the declension of Nouns. 

§ 341. As regimen and the suffix state usually either 
change the tone of words, or occasion contraction in the 
method of uttering them, it follows of course that the 
vowels must be affected by them. But in almost every 
case of this nature, only the ultimate and penult vowels 
are affected. 

For the changes in the consonants, see § 333. 

§ 342. Vowel changes, (a) When any accession be- 
ginning with a vowel, by means of declension or suffixes, 
moves the tone forward one place, the penult mutable 
vowel of the ground-form falls away; but in nouns, 
etc., of the form of Dec. VII., the ultimate vowel falls 
away. 

E. g. "*$*, plur. Q'n^; with suff. HR, ^ERl and so with a11 
the suffixes which are either monosyllabic, or being dissyllabic have 
the tone on the penult. Examples of Dec. VII., where the final vowel 
falls away, are ^M, Q^N, ^>, -mflK, etc. See paradigm of 
nouns, Dec. VII. 

Note 1. Nouns of Dec. VI., i. e. Segholates, inasmuch as their abs. 
form is an artificial one (§ 141), assume their original ground- form in 
order to receive suffixes, or to make the dual; e. g. abs. %(Q f with 
suff. ^^, dual n^a. 

(b) When the tone is moved forward one place, by a 
syllabic accession beginning with a consonant, and when 
the word is in the const, state, the penult vowel is 
dropped, and the ultimate one is usually shortened. 

E. g. (1) By syllabic accession, viz. the grave suffixes (§ 336. Rem.), 
as "l^T, E^^l • ( 2 ) In tne const - state; as D^nbN -Q^ , the word 
of God. But in Dec. VI. the const, state remains unchanged, on ac- 
count of the artificial form of the word (supra Note ] ). In Dec. VII., 
words in the const, state for the most part (but not always) remain un- 
changed ; see par. of Dec. VII. 

Note 2. The suff. 7J allows of two different forms in the noun to 



148 §§342 — 345. nouns; dec. i. 

which it is appended; e. g. (1) It shortens the ultimate vowel; as EE7 
name, "^T^tp thy name. (2) It places it in a simple syllable by com- 
bining the final letter of the root in a syllable with itself, and of course 
it then requires the previous vowel to be long ; as T?!?^ thy word. 

(c) When the tone is moved forward two places,, and 
in the const, state of plur. nouns, both the ultimate and 
penult mutable vowels fall away. 

E. g. (1) By plur. grave suffixes ; as DS^^T . (2) By const, state ; 
as E3?ri "H^ the words of the people. For the mode of supplying new 
vowels, see § 137 seq. 

§ 343. All fern, nouns having forms like masc. ones, 
are declined in the same manner. Besides the usual 
changes in the penult vowel (as in masc. nouns), femi- 
nines in H-. (1) Before a suffix beginning with sl vowel, 
merely change n into n. (2) Before a suffix beginning 
with a consonant they not only change the n into n, but 
also shorten the vowel immediately preceding the d, 

E. g. (1) 711W, with suff. 'V^tf. (2) CqnatjF. Fern, plurals and 
Segholates follow the analogy of masculine nouns, as to their vowel 
changes. 

General rule respecting plural suffixes. 

§ 344. (1) In masc. nouns plural, light suffixes are 
attached to the absolute state abridged ; grave suffixes 
(§ 336. Remark) to the construct state. (2) In fern, 
nouns plural, all the suffixes are attached to the con- 
struct state. 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS MASCULINE. 

First declension. 

§ 345. This comprehends all nouns, whether mono- 
syllabic or polysyllabic, whose vowels are all immutable. 

E. g. TO, CJJ, "»3, 3TC9, frt3M, ffifytS, etc. The single circum- 
stance that the vowels are immutable, marks this declension ; not the 
kind of vowels, nor the number of syllables. Of course not a few nouns 



§^345—349. nouns; dec. ii. 149 

that are feminine belong here also; e. g. those ending in ^-, Fft, etc., 
and many others. Whether a noun is rnasc. or fern., it belongs here if 
the vowels are immutable. In many cases it is easy to decide whether 
the vowels are immutable, in others not. Thus in ^P, ^^7, etc., 
the vowels are obviously immutable ; but the vowels in ^^ , ^"3?* etc, > 
can be known to be immutable only from a lexicon, or from a know- 
ledge of etymology. 

\_% 346. Notes on the paradigm. (1) As the vuwels are immutable 
here, additions to the ground-form of course occasion no change. (2) 
Some few nouns are treated sometimes as belonging here, and at other 
times as being of Dec. II. ; e. g. ^"jrj, const. ^Hrj, Dec. II. ; but plur. 
const, ^"jrj, Dec. I. The lexicons note such. (3) Some few nouns 
having i in the abs. state, exchange it for !| in some of the derived 
forms; see Par. Dec. I. c, also § 127- Except. 1. § 270. ft, 1. In the 
Par., d presents the manner in which nouns with a final Guttural and 
Pattahh furtive are declined.] 

Second declension. 

§ 347. This includes nouns with final Qamets or Pat- 
tahh pure and mutable, whether monosyllables, or poly- 
syllables with preceding vowels immutable. 

§ 348. Changes. In the const, state singular, before 
the grave suffixes, and sometimes before ^, final Qamets 
goes into Pattahh, § 342. b. In the plural, the final 
vowel falls away in the const, state, and before the grave 
suffixes, § 342. c. 

Remarks, (a) The penult vowel in nouns of this Dec. being im- 
mutable, of course it is not affected by either regimen or suffixes, (b) 
Final Qamets is also immutable in many words, although it cannot be 
distinguished by the mere appearance ; e. g. ETJ^, plur. const. ^STJlB , 
etc., of Dec. I. Etymology and the lexicons determine such cases, 
(c) Some nouns with final Qamets mutable belong to Dec. VIII. ; 
e. g. OJ plur. &*W1 3 etc. The mode of declension, or of appending 
suffixes, etc., enables the student easily to distinguish cases of this 
nature. 

[§ 349. Notes on the paradigm. (1) Under a, ^7^1 (for C?P"!I) is 
sui generis. So from 7} hand, we have both C ?T and EPT. . (2) 
Cases like c and d (with final Pattahh) are rare. Only the forms of the 



150 §§ 350 — 353. nouns; dec. hi. iv. 

plural determine the declension, to which they belong. (3) Some par- 
ticiples in Niphal from verbs «/» seem at first view to belong here ; 
but they drop their Qamets in the plural, e. g. n^Hpt?? instead of 
D^MDl^ ; and such forms of participles as E^P^?? probably have a 
ground-form like NEtp? of Dec. VII.] 

Third declension. 

§ 350. This comprises all nouns which have an im- 
mutable vowel in the final syllable, and Qamets or Tseri 
pure and mutable in the penult. 

§ 351. Changes. Out of the abs. state, the mutable 
vowel of the penult falls away. 

Remarks, (a) Polysyllabic nouns, like P 4??, etc., belong here, as 
well as dissyllabic ones. (6) In many cases, the penult vowel is ap~ 
parently mutable, but really immutable; e. g. n v ")3==:n v 'l3, Dec. I. 
The lexicons, etymology, and declension, determine cases of this nature. 
Sometimes they are quite unexpected; as in f^'J, ^^rj* etc., with 
Qamets impure, and so belonging to Dec. I. 

\_\ 352. Notes on the paradigm. (1) Such nouns as the examples 
in d and e, more generally omit the Daghesh forte in the const, state, 
etc., as in the Par. ; but they sometimes retain it, as the nouns in smaller 
print show. (2) The Seghol under n in const. "P^TH, is occasioned 
by the Guttural; so D^ltp^, etc. But V also takes Hhireq short, as 
const. "P^fV. (3) As to exchanging Hholem for Shureq in f, see 
§ 346. 3. § 127. 1. (4) In g, the Tseri under s in the sing, is immu- 
table, only because it is a supposititious euphonic vowel, § 119, d. 2 ; 
the plur. is regular. The word, however, can scarcely be considered 
as really belonging to Dec. III. (5) In h, the short form in the const, 
state ( 'T^ gedhol) is rare, § 127- 3. It is used only before a Maqqeph. 
(6) In such rare cases as I'lTE plur. D^HQ ; it is probable that the 
ground-form of the plural is I^IP '» on ^Y tne singular properly belongs 
to Dec. III. (7) A very few nouns fluctuate between Dec. I. and III. ; 
e. g. D'H? const. D'PP, as of Dec. III.; but plur. DV" 1 ?, as of 
Dec I.] 

Fourth declension. 

§ 353. This includes all dissyllabic nouns with Qamets 
pure in the ultimate, and Qamets or Tseri pure in the 
penult. 



§§354—358. nouns; dec. iv. v. 151 

§ 354. Changes, (a) Out of the ground-form the 
penult vowel always falls away, (b) In the const, sing., 
before the grave suffixes, and sometimes before *[, the 
final Qamets shortens into Pattahh, § 342. b. (c) In 
the plur. const, and before the plur. grave suffixes, both 
the vowels of the ground-form fall away (§ 342 c), and 
then a new vowel, viz. Hhireq or Pattahh, is inserted, 
§ 137. § 138. 

[[§ 355. Notes on the paradigm. (1) The vowels here, as in other 
cases, often present an ambiguous appearance. The lexicons will de- 
termine their nature. (2) The examples c, d, e, conform to the prin- 
ciples of pointing Gutturals, § 138. § 139. In e, however, the const, 
and suff. plur. conform to the analogy of other consonants, in the first 
vowel ; as the vowels under Gutturals sometimes do. (3) So, on the 
contrary, other letters sometimes conform to the usage of Gutturals ; 
e. g, const, and suff. plur. of ^33 in/, with a Pattahh for the first vowel. 
(4) Nouns of the form g, derivates of N' , belong in general to Dec. 
III., having the final N- immutable. But in some few cases, like ^?^, 
the final Qamets is dropped in the const, and suff. plural ; in which 
case they are of Dec. IV. (5) Cases like h and i, with a const. Se- 
gholate form, are not frequent in this declension; yet they occur often 
enough to demand a distinct recognition.] 

Fifth declension. 

§ 356. This comprehends dissyllabic nouns, with 
Tseri pure in the ultimate and Qamets pure in the penult. 

§ 357. Changes. The vowel-changes follow the ana- 
logy of Dec. IV., except that the singular const., and 
the form before the grave suffixes, differ more sensibly 
from the sing, absolute ; see § 358. 3. 

[§ 358. Notes on the paradigm. (1) This declension might have 
been ranked with Dec. IV. ; but I conform to the present usage. (2) 
The Segholate forms of the sing, const, in c and d, are like those in 
h, i, of Dec, IV. (3) The assumption of Pattahh in the const, sing., 
and before the grave suffixes, etc., is peculiar to this declension ; but 
it may be accounted for by the near relation of the vowels Pattahh and 
Seghol, and from the fact, that Seghol is very rarely employed as the 
final vowel of nouns, except in cases of Dec. VI., where it is merely 



152 §§358 — 361. nouns ; dec. v. vi. 

furtive. We should naturally expect short Hhireq before the grave 
suffixes; but the regimen form is adopted. Comp. Dec. VII., where 
the endings are in Tseri likewise. (4) Derivates of N' (like Wbtt) 
which apparently belong here, have a Tseri immutable and belong to 
Dec. III. The same is the case with a considerable number of other 
nouns and participials ; e. g. )? r , r©}, fltfj, V??n, bns, PD^ TOtp, 
etc., all of Dec. III., having their Tseri immutable. (5) A few words 
fluctuate between Dec. III. and Dec. V. ; e. g. ^)T?, const. ^|?.?, Dec. 
III. ; but plur. const. ^V , Dec. V.] 

Sixth declension. 

§ 359. This comprises dissyllabic nouns, which have 
the tone on the penult and a furtive vowel in the final syl- 
lable. 

In other words, this declension includes all Segholate nouns of two 
syllables; excepting a few nouns and Infinitives with the fern. Segho- 
late endings f\- H Z) which belong to Dec. XII. The furtive vowel of 
the final syllable is Seghol, Pattahh, or short Hhireq, § 141 . 

Note. All Segholate forms are factitious and merely euphonic. 
They appear only in the abs. and const, states of the singular; for all 
nouns of this species, when they receive an accession, neglect the fur- 
tive vowel and develope their original state, which is a monosyllable 
ending with two consonants; as W?.Q, original form "H?^, with sufF. 
vs^etc. 

§ 360. Changes, (a) The const, sing, is generally 
the same as the absolute, (b) The suffixes of the sin- 
gular are usually appended to the original form of the 
noun, (c) The plur. absolute assumes a form like that 
of nouns belonging to Dec. IV. (d) In the plur. const., 
and before the grave suffixes, the penult vowel of the 
plur. abs. is dropped, and the original vowel of the 
ground-form in the first syllable is restored. 

Note. The plur. abs. of this declension is quite anomalous, and 
cannot be derived from either the original or factitious form of the sin- 
gular, by any of the usual laws of declension. 

§ 361. The original vowel of the monosyllabic ground- 
form is pure in all cases, and mostly short. It is either of 
the A, E, or O class ; as (1) irq. (2) "$?, y®, &n. 



§§361—365. nouns; dec. vi. 153 

(3) ^75, ^JR, #Tp. I* 1 tne factitious forms, the origi- 
nal vowel (if not of the O class) is mostly changed into 
Seghol by the influence of the furtive vowel, § 142. d. 

§ 362. Segholate nouns may be divided into three 
classes, according to the original-vowels of their ground- 
forms ; and may be called Segholates of the A, E, or O 
class. 

[]§ 363. Notes on the paradigm of the A class. (1) All these 
having Pattahh under their first radical for their original vowel, assume 
it in the suff. state, § 360. 6. (2) The examples b, c, show the manner 
in which the Gutturals influence the form of these Segholates, § 141. 

(4) A few words belonging here, retain the original ground-form; 
e. g. »£, «*]$, T]H (not TJ&), etc.] 

Q 364. Notes on the E class. (1 ) In such cases as d, f, h, we 
might naturally expect that the Tseri would be changed into Seghol, 
§ J 42. d; but Tseri often appears in the first syllable. (2) The ex- 
amples f, g, exhibit the influence of 3 Guttural ; the example h, that 
of & final Guttural. Sometimes, however, Hhireq short is used in the 

const, and suff". plural of words Pe Guttural, like >- !i?H from "IpO. (3) 

< 
The student must not fail to note, that although such nouns as "" , ?|7., 

"f^ri, etc., exhibit in the abs. state the same appearance as those of 

the A class, viz. "H/^, yet in the suff. state the difference in the 

< -l < 

original vowels is at once discerned; e.g. " 1 5l7 , ^^f?, but ^I.<?, 

^?E, etc. 

(4) Original forms are sometimes found here; as ^n, Tl-> etc * 
Remark. Some nouns, by usage, are treated as belonging both to 

the A and E classes; e. g. ""HH, ^2.% etc., see Lex.] 

£§ 365. Notes on the O class. (1) The examples i,j, exhibit Qa- 
mets Hhateph (in the suff. state), which corresponds to the Hholem 
of the abs. state. This Hholem, long and pure, is probably the vowel 
of the original form; as in Qtyp qosht. (2) In k, the influence of ^ 
Guttural is seen. 'For the form of the suff. state E^ :?§ po-ol-kkem, 
see § 140. Sometimes this form appears without a Guttural ; e. g. 
1-?*?lJ> from 2ftpj etc. (3) In I, a comp. Sheva is assumed under the 
first radical, in the plur. abs. and plur. light suff. state ; an occurrence 
very rare among nouns of this class. 

Anomalies. The nouns VOP } EHP, 'H^, exhibit some anomalies 

u 



154 §§366 — 368. nouns; dec. vi. 

in regard to their vowels ; plur. D^ttHE? sho-ra-shlm, E^EHp qo-dha- 

■i • .> .> .> 

shim, U > {TTA ) etc. Also IH^, ^IP, H33,, Lave anomalous plurals; 

see the Lex. on these words. 

An original form here is *?*PP.] 

ft (t * 

£§ 366. Segholates of verbs 137 and ^ . («) Those of the A class 

have two forms, viz. with middle 1 (as in m, n), which out of the abs. 

state quiesces in Shureq or Hholern, as in the examples ; or with 

middle i (as in o, p), which out of the abs. state quiesces in Tseri or 

Hhireq. The forms like f"0E>, ^TJ^?j with Qamets for a penult vowel 

without the influence of an accent, are sui generis, and belong only to 

Segholates with middle 1 in proper Hebrew nouns. Some of the forms, 

like ~^3? , have a regular plural. 

(b) Those of the E class all belong to Dec. I., and quiesce in Tseri 
or Hhireq; as Vrl> VI , etc., the Segholate form not being admissible 
here. 

(c) Those of the class all quiesce in Hholem or Shureq in the 
singular, which belongs to Dec. I. ; as q, r. But the plur. is occa- 
sionally regular; as in these examples. The form TFT is equivalent to 
Tp, and "1^ = ^32?. The same words sometimes have regular and 
irregular forms in the plural ; e. g. TH , E^"!!)^ and D'H'n .] 

Q§ 367- Segholates derived from verbs H7, imitate the Inf. Segho- 
lates. The root of verbs H; i s properly *s or 1 ', § 280. Hence, as 
neither > nor 1 at the end of a word will bear a furtive vowel before 
them (§ 120 b), so that we cannot write ^"J??, "irj2l s the form of the 
word is changed so as to accommodate the nature of the final ^ or *) , 
i. e. the Inf. Segholate form is chosen, and the final vowel becomes 
homogeneous with the Quiescent, § 117. 1. The examples s — w ex- 
hibit the modes of declining these peculiar nouns. They appear all of 
them to belong to the E or class of Segholates. The paradigm exhi- 
bits the change which a pause-accent produces upon them. The exam- 
ples u, v, zv, exhibit the regular plurals which they occasionally form. 

Note. The final quiescent 1 and 1 here, do not make their vowel 

immutable. The general law of the vowel yields here to the law which 

respects the form of the noun in the suff. and plur^state. Forms like 

.< .> 

! inS=1i73 J are not found in the suff. or plur. state, in our present 

Hebrew.] 

[§ 368. Infinitive Segholates. So I would choose to call such as 
are monosyllabic in their ground- form, with the vowel after the second 
radical ; which is the established form of the Inf. construct, so often 



^368 — 373. nouns; dec. vii. 155 

employed as a mere noun. The class of simple nouns with such forms 
as Efc?7, D ?^f, n ^?> is not large; but the Inf. forms of this kind are 
very numerous, and the majority of them take a Hholem, as 'top . The 
examples x, y, z, exhibit the modes of declining nouns of this sort ; yy 
and zz, the method of declining the const. Infinitives. See also in Par. 
XXII. the Inf. with suffixes,, etc. 

Note. The reason of classing these nouns and Inf. forms among 
the Segholates, is, that in the suff. state, etc., they conform altogether 
to the model of Segholates.] 

[§ 369. Anomalous plurals of Segholates. Of these there are a num- 
ber, which in the plur. absolute take in the first syllable the vowel ap- 
propriate to the plur. construct ; e. g. ^V. , O^fe? instead of Q^OT; 
so3nfe, D\PnK7 ; ibb, n^hb; vV^fbrVV^. Forms like D^i?^ 
for D^jTO?; D^^n for C ^5Q> etc -> sometimes occur. 

Note. In the plur. construct, Daghesh forte euphonic is not unfre- 
quent ; as ^H for M^H , H'lntpV for rtefi&V , § 77. Some other sin- 
gularities of particular words are noticed in the Lexicons.] 

(3 370. Segholates with a paragogic H-. This is appended, like 
the light suffixes, to the original form of the word; e. g. V*?.^, *"^""|*3; 
ffjj?., nm,7. ; bh 3 nV^ ; D^tp, nDpf , etc., the tone uniformly re- 
maining on the penult.] 

Seventh declension. 

§ 371. This comprises nouns with Tseri pure in the 
ultimate, (in a few cases with Hholem pure), which are 
either monosyllabic, or have the preceding vowels immu- 
table, 

§ 372. Changes, {a) The const, singular is generally 
like the absolute ; in a few cases it exchanges final Tseri 
for Pattahh. (b) In case of accession, the final Tseri 
(and the Hholem also) generally falls away ; except in 
the plur. abs. of monosyllabic words, (c) Before suf- 
fixes beginning with a consonant and taking the tone, 
the final Tseri is shortened into Hhireq, Pattahh, or 
Seghol, according to the nature of the word, 

Q§ 373. Notes on the paradigm. (1) This declension includes 
most of the active participles in their masc. forms, which are declined 



156 §§373—375. nouns ; dec. vin. 

like b, c. The Part, of verbs b Gutt., are declined like d. (2) The 
forms like d, e, with Pattahh final (instead of Tseri) in the const, state, 
are not confined to nouns b Guttural, but appear in several other nouns; 
e. g. "T^pp t const. "T?pE> . It is peculiar here, that a number of nouns 
which take a final Pattahh in regimen, throw away the preceding Pat- 
tahh in such a case, and take a Hhireq ; e. g. Hi-lSpE, nn?E) ; yTT^ 
V^HP, etc. Probably this is in order to avoid two Pattahhs in mixed 
syllables and in immediate succession, neither of which is furtive. (3) 
The example e presents Seghol before the consonant-suffix ED > etc -» as 
in some few cases is the usage. (4) The final Tseri in this Dec. is not 
unfrequently retained, in the plur. absolute, as though it were immu- 
table. Usually it is retained in monosyllabic words ; as in the exam- 
ples a and g. Comp. § 358. 4. 

(5) Some nouns, as *"J3, )\, Hti (obs. root), lose their vowel in the 
suff. state and when they receive an accession, as if they belonged to 
this declension; e. g. "H^, E^St, Q H OD. 

(6) But few nouns which have final Hholem pure, are inflected in 
the manner of this declension; e. g. bStpN, p] U r. fiS ylpljftjj; T\H\} 9 
suff. ^JJ7't * Peculiar is plur. H1D2 f plur. pluralium D^nEJ3 .] 

Eighth declension. 

§ 374. This includes all nouns, which insert Daghesh 
forte in the final letter of the ground-forms when they re- 
ceive an accession. 

§ 375. Changes, (a) The construct state is gene- 
rally the same as the absolute; but before Maqqeph, 
ultimate long vowels are shortened, (b) Any accession 
causes the Daghesh forte of the final letter to appear ; 
and if such accession takes the accent, the final long 
vowel (when pure) of the ground-form is shortened. 
(c) Penultimate vowels, if mutable, conform to the rules 
in § 132 seq. 

The following classes of words fall under this declension. 

(a) Nouns derived from verbs 373? ; as V'n , ?27 ? v^T, )f] } etc.; and 
also the participles of these verbs in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. 
(b) Other words in which the penult letter is dropped, or assimilated 
to the final one ; as ^b f or 22b • Inf. H^l for np.JH , etc. (c) Some 



§§ 376 — 379. nouns ; dec. ix. 157 

words which are primitive or are derived from a Pilel form of verbs ; 
asb)?2, 7533, etc. 

E§ 376. Notes on the paradigm. (1) In a, b, c, the const, state is 
generally with Pattahh. In a few cases where the ground-form is as 
EJ, Qamets is retained. (2) In c the exchange of Pattahh for Hhireq 
in the sufF. state, e. g. "TO , ^E t i s peculiar, and is found in but few 
cases. (3) In d the Tseri sometimes goes into Pattahh, as ]? , 123 • 
fly. with suffix pronoun makes ^V , but with H- parag. H.PJ3? . In like 
manner Segliol final goes into Hhireq short : as '£"]?, ^Pl? . (4) In 
e,f, the short vowels may be either u or 0, % 128. b. (5) Polysyllabic 
nouns regulate their ultimate and penult syllables in conformity with 
the laws of other declensions ; as in the cases g, h, the former with a 
pure penult vowel, the latter with an impure one. (6) Nouns of the 
form in i, make the const, in \-, except in the phrase f^fT ^H . 
Nouns in \ double the Yodh when accession is made ; as ^1?. , B^V? . 

Note 1. When the final letter is a Resh or a Guttural and cannot 
be doubled, the compensation for Daghesh excluded is as usual ; see 
§ 112. This brings the words in question within other declensions; 
e. g. "to, const, ""to with light suff. ^ (for ^W § 112), plur. Onto, 
const. ^W etc. with Qamets immutable, i. e. the sing, belongs to Dec. 
II. c, d, and the plur. to Dec. I. But nouns like nb, const, nb, with 
suff. Tib pl ur . D>nb (for D^nb § 112), belong to Dec. I., inasmuch as 
the vowel throughout is immutable. 

Note 2. A few nouns belong to this declension in some of their 
forms, and to other declensions in others; e. g. f"IN, U^IVJ^^ etc «5 f° r 
which, see the Lexicons.] 

General Remark. Nouns of various declensions as to their vowels, belong to this declension. 
It is only the doubling of the final consonant, -which makes the peculiarity of it. The vowel- 
changes are all governed by laws belonging to the general principles adopted respectively in 
other declensions. 

Ninth declension. 

§ 377. This comprises all those words ending in »"T- 
which are derived from verbs n? . 

§ 378. Changes, (a) In the const, singular, final 
Seghol is changed to Tseri. (b) With suffixes, etc., 
the ending !"L is dropped, (c) Penultimate vowels, if 
mutable, conform to the usual rules respecting the 
vowel-changes. 

§ 379. Notes on the paradigm. (1) It is only the final ending H- 



158 §§379 — 385. nouns; dec. x. xi. 

which characterises this declension. The penult vowel may be zw- 
mutable, as in a; or mutable, as in b. It is treated according to the 
general laws of the vowel changes. (2) With suffixes, these nouns 
imitate the verbs from which they are derived, and throw away their 
final consonant and vowel, as in a, b. (3) The const, vowel Tseri, 
{longer than the Seghol of the ground-form), is altogether a pecu- 
liarity in the phenomena of declension. 



NOUNS FEMININE. 

Tenth declension. 

§ 380. This includes all nouns with the feminine end- 
ing iT. and the preceding vowels immutable. 

§ 381. Changes. In the const, state n. becomes -H-; 
before suffixes it becomes -H- or -H- . The plural is 
usually J"n . 

\_% 382. Notes on the paradigm. (1) In regard to the fern, ending 
H- in the abs. state ; although its vowel coalesces with a Quiescent, 
and on general grounds would be immutable, yet in this case the law 
of the vowels yields to the demands of case or relation, i. e. a change of 
the vowel is effected by a more imperious law, which requires a change 
in order to designate the relation in which the noun in question may 
stand to other parts of the sentence connected with it. (2) The reader 
will see that Qamets is retained under the penult letter, whenever it 
stands in a simple syllable ; according to § 130. 

Eleventh declension. 

§ 383. This comprehends all nouns with the fern, end- 
ing H- and a mutable Qamets or Tseri in the penult syl- 
lable. 

§ 384. Changes. These are the same as in Dec. X. ; 
except that here the vowel of the penult, being mutable, 
falls away in the const, state and before suffixes. 

\X 385. Notes on the paradigm. (1) The cases a, b, simply follow 
the analogy of Dec. X., with the exception, that the penult vowel un- 
dergoes the mutations which the general laws of declension demand. 



§§385 — 390. nouns; dec, xii. xiii. 159 

(2) In c, d, e, after the penult vowel falls away, there would remain 
two Shevas at the beginning of a syllable ; which being impossible, a 
new vowel arises, agreeably to § 137, § 138. (3) Many nouns of Dec. 
XI. as to the absolute state, out of this state conform altogether to Dec. 
XIII.; so that only the abs. state belongs to Dec. XI., and all the rest 
to Dec. XIII. Such are f, g ; and such are many words which are 
noted in the lexicons.] 

[]§ 386. Remarks. (1) Many fern, nouns apparently belong here, 
but in reality to Dec. X., because the penult vowel is immutable; e.g. 
H?W^ nS^f^ '"V^, if?^, etc. ; all such a good lexicon notes. 

(2) A few nouns (by usage) are employed as belonging both to 
Dec. X. and XI. ; e. g. H£; const. HZ), with suff. V19;, Dec. X. ; so 
»TvQ2, ^h su ff, s ri_/5^ , Dec. X., but commonly the const, is as HvSJj 
with suff. VrJ!?3 3 etc., of Dec. XI. The lexicons should designate 
such.] 

Twelfth declension. 

§ 387. This includes all those fern, nouns in »"T- which 
are derived from Segholates of Dec. VI. 

Note. The feminine ending is attached to the original masc. form 
of the Segholate, as *T??j original form :|?E a fern. ns^ft ; so that 
these nouns have the appearance of belonging to Dec. X 

§ 388. Changes. Nouns belonging here are declined 
exactly like those of Dec. X. in the singular ; but the 
plural conforms to the model of the plurals in Dec. VI. 

§ 389. Xotes on the paradigm. (1) The example a is a derivative 
of the A class of Segholates ; b, c, of the E class ; d, of the class. 
(2) The form in e exhibits the effects of Ayin Guttural upon the 
vowel-points of a word. 

Remark. There is a number of nouns which in appearance belong 
to this declension, e. g. n }^, '"^H^, etc., but which in reality belong 
to Dec. X. The plural at once distinguishes them ; e. g. plur. nil^D, 
not ni"»Sfc? 3 etc., as it would be in Dec. XII.] 

Thirteenth declension. 

< 

§ 390. This includes all fern. Segholates in J"L and 
< 
ri- ; i. e. all those which have the tone on the penult and 

a furtive vowel in the final syllable. 



160 §§391- — 395. nouns; dual number, etc. 

Note. The furtive vowel here is Seghol or Pattahh; and as it is 
factitious it appears only in the abs. and const, state. The original 
vowel reappears, as in Dec. VI., whenever the word receives any ac- 
cession. All fern. Infinitives and participles in H- or H- fall under 
this declension. 

§ 391. Changes, The sing, number is declined as in 
Dec. VI. The plur. absolute is quite anomalous, some- 
times dropping the original final vowel of the ground- 
form, and sometimes retaining it. 

£§ 392. Notes on the paradigm. (1) The example a exhibits the 
manner of Segholates belonging to the A class ; b> c, those of the E 
class ; d, e, those of the class, whose short vowel may be short o or 
u. (2) The fern. Inf. const, forms are declined as in/, g, k. 

Remark. Some nouns of the E class take Pattahh in the syllable 
which precedes a suffix ; e.g. n \/?V , ^i^V ; Inf. form, ro^f f H W^, 
Ps. xxiii. 6.] 

NOUNS OF THE DUAL NUMBER. 

Q 393. These are exhibited in Par. XXVII. (a) From the para- 
digm it appears, that the construct state of the dual is the same as 
that of the plur. masc. in B\ . To this form the grave suffixes are at- 
tached, as in the plural ; see § 344. (b) The dual in general causes the 
same contraction of the vowels of the sing, ground-form, as the plural ; 
but in Dec. VI., the contraction is still greater; e. g. T?.5, dual 
□>|nS ; .the plur. would be OV?? . 

Note. There are but a few nouns of the dual form. Dec. IX. ex- 
hibits none. Of those that actually occur, some have no singular; 
others have no construct form. The nouns D^tp and Q?tt are of the 
dual form, but are used as plurals. ,] 

ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 

[§ 394. Such are »}, ITM TITO, ffriM, tt^S, HEN, n^W, H)%, 
75, na, on, tfi\ '■b?, Djfe, "TO, HQ, E7NH; the peculiar derivate 

forms of which the lexicon exhibits.] 

NUMBERS. 

§ 395. Cardinal numbers, (a) From 1 to 10 the form of cardinal 
numbers have the distinction of gender, and generally also that of the 



§§ 395, 396. ON CARDINAL NUMBERS, ETC. 161 

abs. and const, states. From 3 to 10 however, the primitive forms are 
of the fern, gender ; while the derivative forms (in H- and JT- ) are of 
the masc. gender. 

(b) From 11 to 19, the cardinal numbers are of the compound form, 
i. e. they are made up by joining the word "1^ in the masc, and 
•T^ip? in the fern., to the units. These numerals thus formed have no 
const, state, but are put in apposition with other nouns, or are used 
adverbially. 

Note. The words ^l? and i"ntp$ are found only in the above 
connections, and are evidently derived from "^3? ten ; somewhat like 
the termination -teen for ten in the English thirteen, fourteen, etc. 

(c) From 20 to 90, the cardinal numbers are the plural forms of the 
corresponding units ; except that the form for 20, is the plural of the 
form for ] 0. All these are of common gender, and have no construct 
state. 

Note. When intermediate units are to be expressed, they may 
either precede or follow the tens; as D^ttft V^W = Vnw-). U>V^W= 

77- 

{d) Hundreds are expressed by the plural of the word HSQ preceded 
by the nine units ; thousands, by the plural of n?$. with the same 
units ; ten thousands in a similar manner by the forms of ^51 > *^^ 
or N122""!; see in the Par. under D. E. 

Note. In expressing a sum of hundreds, with intervening tens and 
units, the smaller numbers may either precede or follow the hundreds ; 
as njttf m?l n;ttf uyfrfi} D^^^lGa years, Gen. v. 18; or ttfbtp' 

D?3tp D^B* rhKtt = 372, Ezra ii. 4. The latter mode prevails in 
the later Hebrew. 

In expressing thousands with intervening smaller numbers, the for- 
mer are placed first; as D^bfifa niN» WKTl^ D^by rDbt£* = 8580, 
Num. iv. 48.] 

[§ 396. Ordinal numbers. The ordinal numbers ex- 
tend only from two to ten. Beyond this last number, 
and sometimes also below it, the cardinal numbers are 
used as ordinals. 

The ordinals are derived from the cardinals by annexing to them 
the termination \ . Most of them likewise insert \ before the final 
letter of the ground-form. 

Note. The ordinals sometimes have a fern, form in n%. a and some- 

x 



162 §§ 397 — 399. numerals — adjectives. 

times in HJ- . In this shape, they are commonly employed to denote 
a numeral part ; as ■f^TtP'?? , the tenth part. ~\ 

\_% 397- Notes on the paradigm. (1) The class A exhibits the usual 

< 
forms of the cardinals from one to ten. The fern. -HPTS j s f or iTTrriy . 

The form VW$ is dual, as if from W; the fern. U^hfi (for U^kffi) is 
also dual, as from an obsolete root H3t&. The Daghesh in D^tp is re- 
garded as Daghesh lene, or rather as a Daghesh compensative for the 2 
which is dropped. (2) There is a dual form of masc. cardinals, which 
is used adverbially ; as D?n3?5^ sevenfold, Gen. iv. 15, 24, etc. ; 
n)hy2n& fourfold, 2 Sam. xii. 6. (3) The plurals of some of these 
forms likewise appear; as D'Hny, Gen. xxvii. 44; in) 103? tens, Ex. 
xviii. 21, 25, etc. (4) A few of these cardinals are also found with suf- 
fixes; as ^?.$, both of us ; D3^t£r?t^, ye three, quasi trias vestrum. 
(5) The class B presents the forms of cardinals from eleven to nine- 
teen. Those for eleven and twelve have two forms ; and EPJttp and E^^ 
coincide with the Aramaean dual. The form "^37 riSDtp, eighteen, 
occurs once, Judg. xx. 25.] 

\_% 398. Method of notation. The Hebrews made use of the letters 
of the alphabet, in order to denote numbers. Like the Greeks, they 
divided the letters (including the final ones) into three classes ; of 
which the first denotes units, the second tens, the third hundreds. 
After 400 the final letters were sometimes employed, as in the para- 
digm. To express thousands and higher numbers, they began the al- 
phabet anew, placing two dots over each letter. When more than one 
letter was employed, the accent called Garshayim or double Geresh 
was sometimes used to mark them as numerals. In designating com- 
posite numbers, the letters which represent the larger numbers are 
placed/rrf; as^H = 429; ns*p=4898; nb?]«=1835. 

Note. Fifteen is denoted by 113 = 9 + 6=15; never by H" 1 , be- 
cause this last is the contraction for the word njrP. .] 

ADJECTIVES. 

§ 399. Hebrew adjectives have no peculiar and ap- 
propriate forms, but only such as are common to nouns. 
The fern, form of the adjective is derived from the mas- 
culine, in the same manner as the fern, nouns, § 323. 
The dual number does not occur here. 

Whatever has been said of the forms of nouns, in the preceding sections, applies also to adjec- 
tives ; so that the latter do not need to be treated of separately. 



§§ 400 — 403. PARTICLES ADVERBS. 163 

Note. Comparison in adjectives is formed by periphrasis, for which 
see § 454 seq. The const, state of adjectives appears most frequently 
when they are used as nouns, or with a noun understood ; as ^""HIp^ 
the upright of heart, Ps. vii. 11. 

PARTICLES. 

§ 400. Under the general appellation of particles, are 
comprehended adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and in- 
terjections, 

§ 401. Like nouns, some of these are primitive, but 

most of them derivative. Of the derivates some have 

an ending appropriated solely to the form of particles, 

. > 
as D ^N truly, IBM truth ; while most retain the form of 

verbs, nouns, or pronouns. 

Note 1. Compound words are more frequent among particles, than 
among the leading parts of speech. Apocope is also more common ; all 
the prepositions, etc., which consist of only one letter, being doubtless 
apocopated words; as \ for '**, 'E for "JP, etc. 

Note 2. The older grammarians have, for the most part, considered 
all the particles as derivative nouns ; but this is hardly probable, as 
primitives are found in all other parts of speech. It is, however, very 
difficult to draw the exact line between the primitive and derivative 
forms, as the etymology is often much obscured by the changes which 
the particles have undergone. 

ADVERBS. 

[§ 402. Some derivative adverbs have appropriate endings ; e. g. (a) 
In D-; as °2^S truly, from ?$« truth, (b) In D-; as dVV}«3 sud- 
denly, from 37Hf the wink of an eye. (c) In n»-. as J"P3t2?, a second 
time, (d) In \; 1$, from TS then.'] 

[§ 403. Many derivative adverbs have the forms of other parts of 
speech; e.g. (a) Of nouns with a preposition ; as D ^?f b e f ore > v?^ 
upwards, etc. (b) Of nouns in the Accusative, either sing, or plural ; 
as sing. ntfi^ securely, plur. D'HOTE? uprightly. Some of these forms 
are no longer used as nouns ; as )*H not. (c) Of adjectives ; as masc. 
aitfi well, fern. rT ? ! ~!P quickly, plur. mwiia fearfully, in the const. 



164 §§ 404 — 407. prepositions. 

state f12n much. These are used in a neuter sense, like multum, Tc&Kha, 
etc. (d) Of the Inf. absolute, especially in Hiphil ; as *TO again, 
literally redeundo ; HS^n much, literally midtiplicando ; Q-?^n early. 
Sometimes with a preposition ; as ^TO. abundantly, (e) Of pronouns ; 
as HT here; Htt how, etc.] 

Q§ 404. Some adverbs are compounded of other words, (a) Of pre- 
positions and adverbs; as l?"^ 5 ^ wherefore, 712^T1V how long? (6) 
Of two adverbs ; as HS-'S where, from ^ and 712 , etc.] 

\_% 405. Several adverbs receive after them verbal suffixes ; in which 
connection the suffixes are generally in the Nom. case ; e. g. ^T^ I 
[am] yet, SlatfTO he [is] yet; ^S he [is] rco£; i*H where [is] Ae ? 
Gen. iii. 9, HS^.S (f or ;T£H) w£ere [art] thou f The suffixes are 
usually those with an epenthetic Nun, which belong to the Fut. 
tense.] 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Q§ 406. Four prepositions, ^ m , ?, \ 3 £ ('*?), consisting of only one 
letter, are united with the words which they govern. Probably they 
are all derivates of roots which were of a more complete form. This 
is certain as to £ (which comes from ]P ), and probable as to the others ; 
see the articles in the Lexicon. For the various vowel pointing of these 
prepositions, see § 152. b. 

[% 407- Derivative prepositions making words by themselves, (and 
most of them are of this kind), have the forms of other parts of speech ; 

viz. (a) Of nouns sing, in the Ace. case, or const, state ; as )^1 causd, 

< > 

on account of, "TJ?. before, ^nw under, etc. (b) Of nouns plural in 

the const, or suff. state ; as vH , to, for, v$ poetic ; ?£? , **PP. , etc. Se- 
veral prepositions take suffixes of such a form as are usually attached 
to the plural, as well as such as are attached to the singular ; as flHJn , 
\nrjri, vnnn } but also with sing. suff. cnq^i ; so v^i, to him, etc. 
In like manner '3? upon, plur. const. V? poetic, with suff. "* ?3? , ^P/P-p, 
E^ -? • ( c ) Of nouns in the const, state with prefix-prepositions; as 
T5 by, ^7 before, etc. (d) Of adverbs with prefix-prepositions; as 
V^ } ^^l^l without, fND since, etc. (e) Of adverbs followed by a 

..'" ."U l* w 

preposition, so as to denote but one idea ; as < ^5? around, ? '¥& 
above, ?E y^tl without, etc. (f) Of a double preposition; as E2?£ 
from with, T5^ between, ^H-Tw^ under ; like the French d'aupres, 
de chez. (g) Of a paragogic letter or suffix, viz. H- towards, to; as 
H^ip towards Sodom, n ?l^ to the ground, etc. So also Ps and ^.7,, 



§ 408. PREPOSITIONS. 



165 



in a few cases ; as na.l.p to Syene, Ezek. xxix. 10 ; nia to Nob, 1 Sam. 
xxi. 2. 

Note. Prepositions take noun-suffixes, in the manner of both sing, 
and plur. nouns ; very seldom are verbal-suffixes appended to them, 

like^nnn, nan.qn, ^"Jja, etc.] 

[J 408. Several prepositions and particles are united with the pro- 
nouns in a peculiar way. The following table exhibits a view of these 
peculiarities. 



2 


"? 


(1S3) ? 


IS 


va 


ft 


T 


5-j*> 


0») *R 

is 


aft) ^ 
ft 


T 




T 


T 


ni^3 

T T 


na&E 

T V ' 


•nasi 

T 


T 


naibs 

T 


stanza 




D3b 
1* 


(□pizas) ops 




02 

T 


tab onb 

T J V T 


nn3 ens cntas 

" T V T 


(anato) ens: 


an?) in? 


1* 


.... 


?rjD 



n« of the Ace. 


™ 


with. 


\nis, ^n'H 


sian« 


\ns 


•tans 

T * 


PKft ** 


oprjfcj, opn'H 


(TTnw) t^h 


DPW 


irnfc 




Tjns 


.... 


ins 


□n« nnns 

t ? v : v 


ins 


ans 

T ' 


T 


ink, ?rj™ 


T ' 


.... 



Notes on the paradigm. (1) The suff. 1 sometimes takes the parag. 
H-; e. g. rD^ = ?J^, rob^Tp^ etc. (2) Before suffixes, 5 requires 
the parag. in as a union-syllable ; as in the table. (3) ]P becomes 1^3 
(= IPap i. e . IP doubled) before most of the pronouns ; not before all, 
e. g. D2tt = D P?^ 3 etc - (4) HM the sign of the Accus., (also standing 
sometimes before other cases, § 427- Note 2), in union with pronouns, 
always assumes the form riS, or (as it is often written plene) niw . 
(5) nw (with) appears to be derived from ri3M } which is a derivate of 



166 §§ 408 — 410. CONJUNCTIONS — INTERJECTIONS. 

H3M to approach ; see Ges. Lex. It is imitated throughout, in its Da- 

ghesh and its mode of taking suffixes, by DV with ; as ^V } *P?V, etc. 

> 
Note. The parag. forms, ™U, '"f?'}, take prepositions without 
> < > 

change; as nan2 ; 712112, Hftnn, etc.] 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

[§ 409. Of primitive conjunctions there are only a few; and most 
of these are monosyllabic. Derived conjunctions have the forms, (a) 
Of pronouns; as ~WQ ('W) because, that, like on, quod, etc. (b) Of 
pronouns preceded by prepositions ; as ""^^T??! because, ^^^"T? 
until, etc. (c) Of a double conjunction ; as ^ 02 although ; EN "*? 
but, unless.'] 

INTERJECTIONS. 

[§ 410. Interjections being exclamations expressive of joy or sorrow, 
are for the most part primitive. 

Derived interjections have the forms, (a) Of verbs in the Impera- 
tive, both of the sing, and plur. forms ; as '"^•"J age ! plur. ^rj, from 
^n; ; DH hush, be still ! plur. =©n i n Pi e l, from HDH • HST $«,', ecce! 

(b) Of nouns; as ^^ the blessedness of! nVbnybir be it from, 
God forbid ! s 2 hear ; 2"] enough, hold ! 

Note. The interjection ^P. takes after it verbal suffixes in the 
Nom. case; as ^H, ^PXl ecce ego! ^?n eC ce tu ! etc.] 



PART IV 



SYNTAX. 

In the syntax etymological arrangement is not followed, but that 
which is most convenient and simple in the natural order of sentences, 

ARTICLE, 

The article in Hebrew, like that in Greek, seems ori- 
ginally to have been a demonstrative pronoun, this, that; 
and sometimes to have been used also as a relative pro- 
noun ; in both which senses it is occasionally employed 
in our present Hebrew Scriptures; see § 412. Note 1. 

Insertion of the Article. 

§ 411. In general the Hebrew article (§ 162), like 
the in English, is used in speaking of a definite, before- 
mentioned, well known, or monadic object. 

E. g. ^7^X1 the king ; Gen.ii. 7> E^n the man before mentioned; 
WftWTl the sun; V^'l, etc. But in poetry, definite objects are often 
designated without the article ; as Ps. xlviii. 3, ' the city ^1 "TJft °f 
the great king ; Ps. lxxii. 1. In a similar manner the earlier Greek 
poets omit the article where the Attic prose writers insert it. 

§ 412. The article is commonly (but not always) used in cases such 
as the following, viz. 

(a) Before a noun in the Genitive, when the first 
noun requires the article. 

E. g. r?«rj *&& the kings of the land; mrh®n i^M the men 
of war, i. e. the warriors. 

(b) Before a noun of multitude in the singular. 

E. g. 2t2nn the wicked, P^%*1 the righteous, ^l???n the Ca- 
naanite. 

(c) Before generic nouns, when used with a parti- 
cular, individual signification. 



168 §§412,413. syntax; article. 

E. g. ~TJ?n the river, i. e. the Euphrates; 12']Sn the desert, i. e. 
the Arabian desert; l^t^n the adversary, i. e, Satan, o §idpo\o$. 

(d) Often before the Vocative. 

E. g. D^yn O heavens! E*n sea J Frequently omitted in 
poetry. 

Note 1 . The article is sometimes used as a pronoun, either demon- 
strative or relative ; e, g. DVn this day, HTjbn this night, Q37SH this 
time. So also Josh. x. 24, ' the warriors u^N ^^?Vjn w ^ l ° accom- 
panied him ;' Judg. xiii. 8, c the child *T v«Vn which is born ;' etc. 

Note 2. The Hebrews sometimes joined the article with a noun 
which we should use in an indefinite signification (prefixing the article 
a or an); e. g. 1 Sam. xvii. 34, *H^rj a lion ; Numb. xi. 27, "^H a 
youth ; Ex. ii. 15, ">W^n a well, etc. So in Is. vii. 14, n^7^n may, in 
conformity with such usage, be rendered a virgin and not the maiden, 
as Gesenius and others have translated it. It should be remarked, 
however, that we can hardly believe the Hebrew article to have been 
employed, in eases where to the mind of the writer the object was 
wholly indefinite. E. g. Gen. xix. 11, c he smote them D'HIJJSS (for 
O^JDDnS) with blindness ; not a blindness (as we might say), but the 
blindness, i. e. the disease of blindness; just as we say, the pestilence, 
the plague, etc. So in those cases where we employ the indefinite 
article a, in translating Hebrew words with the article H 5 it seems 
quite probable that circumstances rendered the object definite in the 
mind of the writer. Such may have been the case in regard to the 
prophet's mind, in Is. vii. 14. 

Where a properly indefinite sense is designed to be expressed, the 
article is omitted ; as Job i. 1, f there was E^S a man.' 

Note 3. The indefinite article a or an, is sometimes expressed by 
inM one ; as 1 Sam. i. 1, c there was ^rj^. E^N a man,' etc. ; 1 Sam. 
xvi. 18 : xxv. 14; Job ii. 10 ; Ex. xxix. 3 ; 1 Kings xix. 4. This con- 
struction is usual in Chaldee and Syriac. So in Greek, Matt. xxi. 19, 
o-vKrj pla, a fig-tree ; Mark xiv. 51, uq nq vaavla-Koq, a certain young 
man, etc. 

Omission of the article. 

§ 413. (1) Proper names, especially those of persons, 
countries, rivers, mountains, and places, frequently omit 
it, although they might have it. 

There are so many exceptions to the omission, that it can by no 



§§ 413, 414. syntax; article. 169 

means be regarded as a general principle of the language. Thus HIS 
the Euphrates, always omits the article, but IT?*'! the Jordan, almost 
always has it. So ^p Sinai, fV? Sion, etc., are always without it ; 
but p3^?n Lebanon, v^?n Carmel, etc., usually with it. 

(2) It is omitted before a noun in the const, state fol- 
lowed by a Genitive. 

E. g. nirn -o^ ^ e wor ^ of Jehovah, instead of nim. nn^n. But 

there are some exceptions here, which show that the usage is variable. 
Thus (a) When the following Gen. is a proper name which excludes 
the article, the first noun may take it ; as Gen. xxxi. 13, /SWSl 7$H, 
the God of Bethel; Gen. xxiv. 67, f™ n *?n M? 7> * the tent of Sarah, 
(b) So where two Genitives come together; as Ezek. xlv. 16, E^PT 73 
V^^Tj all the people of the land, (c) In some other cases also, it is 
used without any such reasons ; e. g. W® ^?.^?1, the coat of fine linen, 
Ex. xxviii. 39; nwn$7i n3|$n, the altar' of brass, 2 K. xvi. 14: 
Jer. xxxii. 12 (comp. ver. 11 : Ps. cxxiii. 4. In most cases, of such 
nature, the Genitive relation that follows is designated by ?, § 421. d. 

(3) Before a noun which has a suffix pronoun. 

But here also the article is sometimes used, especially before a word 
in the Genitive, or for the sake of emphasis, etc.; as Josh. vii. 21, 
^Qgn Sfin^, in the midst of my tent, Mic. ii. 12; Lev. xxvii. 23. 
Before participles with a suff. pronoun, the article is very common ; 
Deut. xiii. 6. 11 ; viii. 14 — 16; xx. 1, etc. 

Note. Before the predicate of a sentence, it is more usually omitted ; but still, it is often in- 
serted when definiteness is required. 

General Remark. In all the cases where the article is omitted, and in which the object still 
is definite, either the nature of the thing itself, or of its adjuncts, marks that definiteness. E. g. 
in No. 1. above, a proper name makes the noun definite ; in No. 2, the following Gen. makes it 
definite ; in No. 3, the pronoun does this ; and so in other cases of omission which from their na- 
ture are definite. The reader will see, moreover, that there are scarcely any cases in which the 
omission of the article is uniformly a matter of necessity. 



Article before adjectives. 

§ 414. (1) In general where a noun has the article, 
the adjective or pronoun-adjective agreeing with it, must 
also have the article. 

E. g. Gen. x. 12, nVrqin n^n the great city ; Numb. xi. 34, 
S-^nn Dlpzan, this place. But this principle is not uniform; for 
sometimes the noun has an article, and the adjective omits it; as 

Y 



170 §§414 — 41G. syntax; nouns. 

Gen. xxix. 2, nbVr| ^NH, the great stone; 2 Sam. vi. 3, rfeOT 
ntp"Tn ? ^/ze wew wagon. 

(2) The article is usually omitted before adjectives, 
(a) When the noun to which the adjective belongs, 
omits the article ; i. e. ^K "£Q3 9 a tame lamb, etc. 

Note. But when the noun omits an article required by the sense, 
merely through the influence of a suffix pronoun, or of a Gen. which 
follows it, the adjective which belongs to it may still take the article ; 
as 2 Chr. vi. 32, VTOn ^W } thy great name; Deut. xi. 7, T1WV72 
;MZ71 n)H), the great work of' Jehovah. 

(b) When the adjective is the predicate of a sentence, 
the article is usually omitted. 

E. g. a^nbsn niia, God is good, nirr uwtj ij-na, the name of 

Jehovah be blessed. Compare § 413. 3. Note. 

N. B. Practice is not uniform in regard to the article, in any of the 
cases under § 414. Instances are not rare, where the noun omits the 
article (without any of the reasons for it assigned in § 413 above), and 
the adjective still has it; e. g. 1 Sam. xix. 22, v1*T|n "lia, the great 
cistern; Jer. xxxviii. 14 ; xlvi. 16; 1. 16, etc. In some cases apparently 
of this nature, the article is to be rendered as a pronoun ; e. g. "H? 
n^rpjn f [like] ' a wall which is tottering.' 



NOUNS. 
Case absolute. 

§ 415. By this is meant, the case of a noun or pro- 
noun which stands in the beginning of a sentence, with- 
out any verb or predicate directly belonging to it. The 
case absolute is more commonly, but not always, of the 
form of the Nominative. 

§ 416. Modes of construction, (a) When the noun in the case ab- 
solute is the real subject of the sentence which follows, a Vav copulative 
succeeds it; as Job xxxvi. 26, T.C] *&} V2W "ISPB, < as to the num- 
ber of his years, surely there is no computation/ i. e. his years cannot 
be computed, (b) The case absolute is sometimes used where the 
sense requires an oblique case, and then the oblique case is most com- 



§§416 — 419. syntax; cases relative, etc. 171 

inonly made by a pronoun ; e. g. Ps. xviii. 31, "^Hl! D^P^J ^?n, e as 
to God, perfect is the way of him,' i. e. the way of God is perfect, 
where as to the sense the Gen. of '*?n is required ; for the Accusative, 
Ps.lxxiv. 17, D *?"3? , l n ™ ^TTJ TO, c as to summer and winter 3 thou 
hast made them. 9 So Jer. vi. 19, Hin siDMb*] VTTtfn, < as to my law, 
they have abhorred it. 9 (c) Sometimes a participle is joined with the 
Norn., like the English case absolute ; as 1 Sam. ii. 13, t^S'73 PD? 
f??o f #fty ?w«w offering a sacrifice, the servant of the priest came,' etc. 
1 Sam. ix. 11 ; Gen. iv. 15. 

A T ote. Pronouns are often found in the case absolute, as well as nouns. 

§ 417. The case absolute is sometimes made, (a) By the Ace. ; as 
Gen. xlvii. 21, Q^HTiy , c as to the people, he led them from one town 
to another.' So in Ezek. x, 22, DHIM"] DTTfcntt, as to their appearance 
and themselves, (b) By the Dat. ; as Ps. xvi. 3, D^UJilf/?, ' as to the 
saints who are in the land, all my delight is in them.' See the same, 
or at least the like sense to { before nouns, in Ezek. x. 13 ; Gen. xxxi. 
43 ; 1 Sam. ix. 20, (c) By the Abl. ; as Gen. ii. 12, SIB TO^n fVP 
3TJJ, 'in respect to the tree of knowledge of good and evil, thou shalt 
not eat of it/ etc. 

CASES RELATIVE. 

§ 418. Declension in the Latin or Greek sense of 
the word, the Hebrew has not. The case of a noun is 
marked therefore, as in English, either by the relation 
which it sustains to the sentence, as subject, object, etc.; 
or by its relation to some specific part of it, as regimen 
or const, state ; or by prepositions connected with it, 
either expressed or understood, 

Nominative case. 

§ 419. This is generally known by its being the sub- 
ject of a sentence. 

Such a subject may be either one noun or several, either sing, or 
plural ; and the nouns may be of the ground-form, or in the state of 
regimen which belongs also to all cases, § 434. See also § 426. Note 1 . 
§ 427- Note 2. 



172 §§ 420 ? 421. syntax; genitive case. 

Genitive case. 

§ 420. This is most commonly made by a noun or 
adjective preceding it in the const, state, § 332 seq. 
The noun itself which is in the Genitive, undergoes no 
change of form. 

Note. The Gen. is nearly always placed immediately after its ante- 
cedent, i. e. the noun, etc., which causes it to be put in the Genitive; 
but in a few cases, some word closely connected with the clause is in- 
serted between the Gen. and its antecedent. Thus Gen. vii. 6, ^SD 
E?.E> f^rt, a flood of waters was, [Heb. a flood was of waters]; Hos. 
xiv. 3, J137 St^rn*7!3 ? thou wilt forgive all transgression, [Heb. all 
thou-wilt-forgive transgression]; Is. xl. 12; Job xv. 10; Is. xix. 8. 
One can scarcely refrain from believing that such cases, so contrary to 
the common usage of the Hebrews, must have originated from error in 
transcribing. 

§ 421. Besides the usual method of expressing the 
Genitive, as designated in § 420, it is often marked by 
the particle >., to, belonging to, of. 

In many cases the expression of a Gen. is needed, where no noun 
preceding it in regimen is employed, or where the usual form of re- 
gimen would mark a closer connection than the writer designed, or 
where the preceding noun is so conditioned as to render the usual form 
of regimen undesirable or inexpedient. In all such cases, the He- 
brews usually expressed the Genitive by the use of ?• E. g. 

(a) Where the preceding noun is omitted; as ^\?, [a psalm] of 
David, (this is called < auctoris) ; so where ]5 (son) is omitted, as 
nb^ 1 ? D?>T., Ithream, [the son] of Eglah. 

(b) Where the first noun is an indefinite one, the second a definite 
one; as "^Y? ]5 a so?i of Jesse, C^?"]? would be, the son of Jesse). 

2 Sam. ix. 3; 1 K. ii. 39; 2 Sam. ii. 8 h^wh ~\b } a leader of 

Saul's. Is. xxxvii. 13; Numb. i. 4. 

(c) When several nouns follow each other in succession, where the 
sense of the Gen. is required, it is usual to put ? before the second 
Gen. case ; e. g. *^7 H^t^n riJ2 bri , a field-portion of Boaz, (in 
the const, state it would mean, a portion of the field of Boaz), Ruth 
ii. 3. 

Note. In such cases, however, "1«£*5 is very often inserted before 
the ', e. g. Ruth iv. 3; Genesis xli. 43; Canticles i. 1 ; Ezra i. 5; 



§§421. syntax; genitive case. 173 

Judg. iii. 28 : xii. 5 ; 1 Kings xv. 20 : xxii. 31, et seepe. See General 
Remark below. 

(d) As the article is usually omitted before the first of two nouns in 
regimen (§ 413. 2), so where it is inserted because the sense impe- 
riously demands it, the following Genitive is usually made by ?, in 
order that the form of regimen may be dispensed with in respect to the 

' first noun. E. g. 1 K. iv. 2, ft "lltfbj DVl»n n v>S, these are the princes 
which were his (Solomon's); 1 Chron. xi. 10,Vyft ")#$ ^T^H, 
the heroes who were David's. 1 Chron. xi. 11 : xxvii. 31 ; Ruth ii. 21 ; 
2 Sam. xiv, 31 ; Gen. xxiv. 9; xlvii. 4, et alibi ssepe. 

Note. In nearly all cases of this nature, the article is expressed before the preceding noun. 
In poetry there are a few exceptions, by virtue of poetic license. 

(e) When a Genitive by anticipation precedes its natural place, it is 
made by V ; e. g. Jer. xxii. 4, INp? 737 TIT?, lit. of David on his 
throne, i. e. on the throne of David. 

if) When an adjective intervenes between the first and second 
noun; e. g. "jp^nyb "^Q^ 15, a son of Ahimelek ; especially after 
a numeral, as Hag. i. 1, tt^J"^ : D V3*? ^2*p5, in the second year of 
Darius, Gen. vii. 11 ; IK. iii. 18. 

(g) In designating time, after a numeral when D*V etc. is omitted; 
Deut. i. 3, ttn'nb TTTS^, on the first [day] of the month, Ezek. i. 2. 

(h) In describing the materials of which a thing consists ; e. g. 
Ezek. i. 11, ^n-tb Dfts, vessels of gold, Lev. xiii. 48. 

General Remark. It will be seen by a careful inspection of the 
above examples, that the Hebrew very often admits a Gen. relation to 
be expressed, without the form of regimen. Strictly speaking, however, 
there is no case of this sort which does not admit of another solution, 
viz. one which resembles the Greek, Latin, and French methods of ex- 
pressing possession or property ; e. g. ia-ri poi, est mihi, c'est a moi. 
The later Hebrew, which frequently employs ? ""^^ to express a Gen. 
relation, proffers the solution in question. Thus TIT? is an elliptical 
expression for T}*ft ">$j T)b|»; ^*fr ?S i s used instead of ^ ]5 
>W^ ; b^NttJ 1 ? D^SVsn the watchers which belonged to Saul, is used 
for b^«tpb vh n^y D^Qhsn , etc. The very frequent cases where 
*"lt£N is actually employed in this way, point us of course to such an 
obvious solution. 

As to the b auctoris (a above), however, Gesenius solves it by ren- 
dering ? by, through, thus designating the efficient cause; which seems 
to be well supported by analogies. See his Lex. art. <. 



174 §§422 — 424. syntax; genitive case. 

§ 422. In Hebrew, the Gen. frequently stands where 
we might naturally expect apposition. 

E. g. ^TJ^ ^r??, the river of Euphrates, i. e. the river Euphrates; 
1 Kings x. 15, C^^n ^?S, the men of the merchants, i. e. the mer- 
chantmen. 

§ 423. The Gen. frequently follows such adjectives 
or participles, as express qualities belonging to the sub- 
ject designated by such Genitive. 

E. g. 2 Sam. iv. 4, D^f] Hp? lame of feet, i. e. in his feet ; Ps. xxiv. 
4, D?5? "7?? j pure of hands, i. e, of pure hands ; Prov. vi. 32, ^7T"lprj 
deficient o/"Qn] understanding. So in Latin, integer vitae scelerisque 
purus, etc. 

§ 424. Significations of the Genitive. This case marks 
a great variety of relations and dependencies in He- 
brew ; which are generally comprehended in the ex- 
pressions, Gen. of the subject, and Gen. of the object. 

Note. These two designations, viz. the Gen. of the subject and the 
object, do not by any means convey an adequate idea of all the various 
relations which the Gen. sustains or expresses. These may be better 
distributed thus : viz. (1) Genitive of the subject ; e. g. ^)j~l\ f^P! , the 
anger of Jehovah, i. e. the anger which he feels, or of which he is the 
subject. This is frequent. (2) Genitive of the object ; e. g. Prov. i. 7> 
nirP. nbT^ the fear of Jehovah, i. e. the fear of which Jehovah is the 
object; Prov. xx. 2, TJt?^ nt^M, the terror of the king, i. e. the ter- 
ror of which the king is the object, (this may be ranked under No. 5) ; 
^HPT, the memory of thee, i. e. of which thou art the object. This 
class of meanings is of wide extent. (3) The Genitive of possession, 
not merely as property, but as quality, attribute, etc. etc. ; e. g. 71 
nVT?, the hand of Jehovah, i. e. which belongs to him ; TVJ E????, ine 
soul of David. (4) The Genitive of material ; e.g. ^9? «•?» vessels 
of silver, i. e. made of silver, Ex. xi. 2. (5) The Genitive of cause 
(Genativus auctoris); \ Sam. xiv. 15, D^iivg '"THO., the terror of God, 
i. e. which God inspires, or of which he is the author; Ezek. xii. 19, 
D'Otpn DttQ ? the injury of the inhabitants, the injury of which 
the inhabitants were the cause or authors. There is a great variety of 
shades under this head of meaning. (6) The Genitive of consequence ; 
e. g. Ezek. xxxv. 5, V£ TO, the sin of the end, i. e. the sin which is 



§§ 424 — 427. syntax ; DATIVE and accusative cases. 175 

followed by consummation or destruction. (7) The Genitive of special 
relation* ; e. g. Is. liv. 9, H 3 ^, the waters of Noah, i. e. to which 
Noah stood related, viz. as described in the history of the flood, or 
waters in the time of Noah; 1 Sam. xvi. 20, DH2 ""^Qj the ass of 
bread, i. e. the ass, which carries bread. There is a great variety here. 
(8) The Genitive of quality ; i.e. ^2$. ^Q^, words of truth, i. e. true 
words. This is a widely extended usage ; see § 445. Other divisions 
of meaning conveyed by the Gen., might be added ; but these are the 
leading ones. The attentive reader of the Scriptures will soon find, 
that the Genitivus subjecti et objecti is very far from expressing all re- 
lations designated by this case ; and indeed, that no formal divisions 
can reach all the niceties of the examples which now and then occur. 
In fact, almost every and any kind of relation of one thing to another, 
is expressed by the Genitive case. 

§ 425. Sometimes the Genitive following an adjec- 
tive, is used as a noun of multitude, and the adjective 
then denotes a part of this multitude. 

E. g. Prov. xv. 20: xxi. 20, CIS Vp^>, the foolish of men, i. e. 
foolish men; 1 Sam. xvii. 40, ' five E* 1 ??- ^V.xjl , smooth of stones* 
i. e. smooth stones ; Job xli. 7, Q ^ft ^iT?^, the strong of shields, i. e, 
strong shields. 

Dative case. 

§ 426. This case is marked by ? signifying to or for. 

Note. In a few cases ? stands before a Nom. ; as J Chron. iii. 2, 
' the third was Divtp^N^, Absalom.' Sometimes before the Ace. ; as 
Ezra viii. 16, < I sent '"^bh?b, Eliezer.' Lam. iv. 5 ; 2 Sam. iii. 30 ; 
Job v. 2. The latter usage is common in Syriac. 

Note 2. The Dative case is very common after the verb <"^rj, 
either implied or expressed, when it signifies possession, belonging to; 
like sum put for habeo in Latin. 

Accusative case. 

§ 427. This is sometimes designated by n$, °nK ; 
otherwise it is without any distinctive sign. 

Note 1. The use of HN with the Ace. is limited, (a) To nouns 

* All Genitives express relation, and this name might therefore be given to all. But as more 
specific names are here assigned to other Genitives, I have used special relation to designate a 
sni generis connection which I can find no other word satisfactorily to express. 



176 §§ 427, 428. SYNTAX of nouns; accusative case. 

with the article, (b) To nouns having a Gen. or suffix after them. 
(c) To proper names. Consequently it is used only in cases where a 
definite idea is conveyed by the noun. But in poetry, this usage is not 
observed with any strictness. 

Note 2, Sometimes ns i s used before the Nom. ; as 2 Kings vi. 5, 
<T]5"^^n, c and the iron fell into the water.' Especially before the 
Nom. of passive verbs ; as Gen. xvii. 5, ^p^ttrHNj ' thy name shall no 
more be called Abram.' Sometimes before the Nom. of neuter verbs ; 
as 2 Sam. xi. 25, FT-TH ""Q^TrrnW t ' this matter, may it not displease 
thee;' Ezek. xxxv. 10, E?isn •OtpVIN, 'the two nations are mine.' 
See ns in the Lex. All these, however, may be solved by the case 
absolute. 

§ 428. Use of the Accusative case. This commonly, 
as in other languages, denotes, (1) The object of a tran- 
sitive verb. (2) In a great number of cases, it forms 
adverbial designations of time, place, measure, etc. (3) 
It is also used in all those cases where the Greeks un- 
derstand Kara, and the Latins, secundum, quoad, etc. E. g. 

(a) Place whither; as 2 Chr. xx. 36, B^tth.n ™V?* to go to Tar- 
shish. (b) Place where; as Gen. xviii. 1, bnNHTfri§,a$ the door of 
the tent, (c) Time when and how long; as ^.V. , in the evening; 
"ljJU 9 in the morning. So Gen. xxvii. 44, O'HnH D^BJ, during certain 
days, (d) Measure ; as Gen. vii. 20, ( the waters rose fifteen naH 
cubits.'' (e) The material, from which any thing is made ; as Gen. ii. 7, 
' God formed man "">??, of dust from the earth ;' § 511. Note, (f) 
Cases where Kara is said to be implied in Greek ; as 1 Kings xv. 23, 
' lame I^T^ as to his feet ; Ps. iii. 8, ' thou hast smitten all thine 
enemies T^., as to Con] the cheek bone. 7 (g) Cases where a noun is 
taken in an adverbial signification; as Deut. xxiii. 24, J " f ?^> volun- 
tarily ; Ezek. xi. 19, TH^ ^h y unanimously ; Ex. xxiv. 3, "THS Vip, 
unanimously, etc. 

N. B. It will be very convenient to name these various cases, the Ace. of place ; of time ; of 
quantity; of material ; of manner. The student has only to recollect that all these are desig- 
nated by the Ace, and this without its bearing a special relation to any active verb. 

(4) The Accusative is sometimes put after participles, 
or verbals with an active signification, and is governed 
by them. 

E. g. 2 Kings iv. 1, nin^TIM &T r , fearing Jehovah ; Is. xi. 9, H1H 
nin^TI^ the knowledge of Jehovah ; lit. to cognoscere Jehovam. 



§§429 — 432. syntax; construct state. 177 

Vocative and Ablative. 

§ 429. The Vocative sometimes has the article to 
designate it ; but not always. It can be distinguished 
only by the sense of the passage. 

§ 430. The Ablative case takes V^, from, out of; 2 in, 
by; W with, etc. In many cases, the preposition is 
merely implied. 

Construct state. 

§ 431. A noun is said to be in this state, when it- 
precedes another noun in the Genitive. This rarely 
admits of any intervening word, § 420. Note. 

As to the changes in the form of the noun in the const, state ; see 
§ 333, seq. 

§ 432. The form of the const, state, however, is not 
limited to nouns before a Gen. case ; it often appears. 
(a) Before nouns in other cases governed by preposi- 
tions, (b) Before verbs and parts of sentences which 
express the same sense as nouns might express, (c) 
Before adjectives, (d) Before ")#K. (<?) Before ) co- 
pulative. 

(a) Before nouns governed by prepositions ; e. g. (1) Nouns with 
5; Is. ix. 2, "f'Sjja nnptP, the joy in [of] harvest; Is. v. -11, 
1J7.215 "^StpDj who rise early in the morning. (2) With 1; as Is.lvi. 
10, D«b vaqfc, lovers of slumber. (3) With btf ; as I s . xiv. 19, THV, 
li^'^pHS"?^, going down to the stones of the pit. (4) With HN; as 
Jer. xxxiii. 22, the Levites Y?"« "W^E; lv ho served me. (5) With V$ ; 
as Jer. xxiii. 23, 3hg?$ "»FJbg|, a God near at hand. (6) With by ; 
as Judg. v. 10, T~!"v" - ^b^ , who go on the may. 

(b) Before verbs and parts of sentences expressing ideas that might 
be designated by nouns; as 1 Sam. xxv. 15, cnw ^^bnorT ^"bs, 
all the days of our walking with them, where ^*! is in the const, state 
before the verb that follows. Job xviii. 21, b>N 3H; «b Dipp, the 
place of him who knows not God. Is. xxix. 1, TJ*J n ?T ^-7^> ^ e 
city of David's dwelling* The like in Lev. xiv. 46 ; Is. xxx. 29 ; Hos. 
i. 2; also in Ex. vi. 28; Lev. vii. 35 ; Numb. iii. 1 ; Zech. viii. 9; 
Jer. xxxi. 2: xlviii. 3(>. ; Lam. i. 14; Ps. lxxxi. 6; Jer. 1. 31. 



178 §432 — 434. syntax; construct state. 

(c) Before adjectives ; as 2 Kings xii. 10, "TH^ yn$, one coffer 
(comp. § 440. a); Is. xvii. 10, D^5?5 ^^, pleasant plants ; see 
§ 445. § 440. 

(d) Before *">$$ ; as Lev. iv. 24, *"!$$ t$pQ, the place which. Gen. 
xl. 3. See also 1 Sam. iii. 13. 

(<?) Before ) copulative; as Is. xxxiii. 6, H3HJ ™^rj 3 wisdom and 
knowledge. So also^ Is. xxxv. 2; Is. li. 21. 

§ 433. In a few cases, the const, form seems to 
be employed where we might naturally expect the ab- 
solute. 

But most of these are cases of such a nature, as to show that some 
noun in the Gen. after such const, form is implied, although not ex- 
pressed. E. g. 2 Kings ix. 17, e I see HEQtp, a multitude,' i. e. the 
multitude of Jehu, as the preceding part of the verse shows. Ps. lxxiv. 
19, ' give not ^Tl?» to the beasts,' i. e. to the beasts of the forests 
0?!n) or to the wild beast. Both of these cases, however, may be 
mere examples of the unusual fern, in fl-; se e § 319. Note 1. No. 3. 
So in Ps. xvi. 3, T^S is probably for VTl^T V^N, which may easily 
be supplied from the preceding part of the verse. 

For the supposed use of the abs. instead of the const., see § 435. 

§ 434. Const, state or regimen has reference solely to 
the relation of the two nouns, etc., connected together 
in this state ; but not to the relation these may sustain 
in regard to the rest of the sentence. 

Hence the const, state is found in all the cases of nouns ; e. g. (a) 
In the Norn. ; as 1 K. xii. 22, D^nbgn "in^ < the word of God came 
to Shemaiah.' (b) In the Gen.; as Job xii. 24, Y^WVXSS ^N"? nb, 
the heart of the princes of the people of the land ; where ^ttWJ is in 
the Gen. in regard to ^b f and in the const, as it respects D37 ; while 037 
is in the Gen. with regard to ^W^, an{ l m tne const, as it respects 
V~j$p T . (c) In the Dat. ; as Job iii. 20, #§??. "H^ a to those who are 
grieved in spirit, where the former word is in the const, state and Da- 
tive, (d) In the Ace. ; as 1 Sam. ix. 27, c that I may show thee "l^pJVIH , 
O^nbH the word of God' where ^^I is in the const, state Accusative, 
(e) In' the Vac.; as 2 Kings i. 13,'ovfb^n t^N., O man of God. 
If) In the Abl. ; as Ps. xvii. 4, T-O?^ ^TF^, by the word of thy 
lips, where the first noun is the const, state Ablative. 



§§435,436. syntax; AProsiTioN — gender. 179 

Apposition. 

§ 435. In Hebrew, two nouns designating the same 
thing, are not only placed in apposition (as is usual in 
other languages), but apposition is frequently employed 
where the Gen. might be used and would naturally be 
expected. 

E. g. Prov. xxii. 21, H^H E^tt^, words [which are] truth, i. e. 
words of truth; Zech. i. 13, E^rp Cn2^ words [which are] conso- 
lations, i. e. words of consolation ; Ex. xxiv. 5, E^ft^tp c>, n51 > offerings 
[[which are] peace offerings. 

Note. Of two nouns thus placed, one is frequently used as an adjective ; as in the examples 
above we may render true ivords, consolotary words, etc. See j 440 seq. 

§ 435 a. Nouns are apparently but not really in ap- 
position, which designate weight, measures, time, etc. 

E. g. 2 Kings vii. 1, nbb HSD, a seah \_oi~\Jine meal; 2 Kings v. 
23, *)03 DTTO3, two talents [of] silver; Gen. xli. 1, ENDJ DVTjtf, 
two years [of] time; 1 Kings vii. 42, D^EH D^E '0$, ^ roz^s 
[of] pomegranates ; Ezek. xxii. 18, *)??? E> ?9 , c?ro*s [of] silver. 
Comp. § 463. 

N. B. In these instances the second nouns are all in the Ace. of measure, material, time, man- 
ner, etc. ; comp. j 42S. N. B. 

Note 1. Sometimes nouns are put in apposition, where the latter 
noun designates a whole or genus, of which the former designates only 
a part or species; e. g. Judg, v. 13, E? ^"^^j the nobles [of, 
among] the people. 

Note 2. Some examples occur of apparent apposition, in which the 
latter noun is probably to be considered as in the Gen., by reason of a 
word implied ; e. g. niNE2£ pnb.M] nliTJ, Jehovah [God of] hosts. 
So probably, Is. xxx. 20, VTj? [**£] c ?^, water [water of] trouble ; 
IBS [iH^H] nisn ? ^ e <^o? y [the glow of] his anger. 

Gender of Nouns and Adjectives. 

§ 436. The Hebrew, having no neuter gender, com- 
monly employs the fern, to express it ; but sometimes 
the masculine, § 321. Note 1. 

E. g. Ps. xxvii. 4, ' I have asked nnM, one thing ; Ps. xii. 4, niTB., 
great things ; Gen.xlii. 30, mt&Qj h ar d things, etc. Less often is the 
masculine employed; as Prov. viii. 6, E^T^Q, noble things. 



180 §§ 436 — 438. syntax; number of nouns, etc. 

Note. The fern, is sometimes used also in a collective sense, for 
objects which are properly masculine; as Mic. i. 11, 12, n!2tj?V , in- 
habitress, i. e. inhabitants; Mic. vii, 8, 10, ^5?.^, enemies. So Vr? a 
tree, H^3? a grove of trees, etc. So in Arabic, the pluralis fractus, 
which is used as a collective, very often has a fern. form. 



Number of Nouns. 

§ 437. (1) The Hebrews often employed nouns sing, 
in a collective sense, especially national denominations. 

E. g. ]N2 small cattle, Srtt gold, "*3F3?n the Canaanite, i. e. the 
inhabitants of Canaan, etc. 

(2) For the sake of emphasis, the Hebrews commonly 
employed most of the words which signify, Lord, God, 
etc., in the plur. form, but with the sense of the singu- 
lar. This is called pluralis excellentice. 

Examples* (a) "P"^ lord, is so used in all the forms of the plural, 
except ^"^ my 771 asters. The form s 5"^ (with Qamets) is always used 
in the sense of the singular, for God. (b) ^H^N God, in all the forms 
of the plural, (c) >^? lord, in all its forms, (d) D^TjJ, the most 
Holy 07ie, Hos. xii. 1 ; Prov. ix. 10: xxx. 3; Jos. xxiv. 19. (e) *TO 
the Almighty, is probably of the plural form, § 325. b. (f) O^T*? 
household god, as sing. 1 Sam. xix. 13, 16. (g) Occasionally a few 
other words are used in the like way ; as Job xxxv. 10, ' God ^^ , my 
Maker ;' Ecc. xii. 1, T^T32l, thy Creator. See also Isaiah xxii. 11 : 
xlii. 5 ; Ps. cxlix. 2. Comp. § 484. 

(3) The plural, especially in poetry, is not unfre- 
quently used where we might expect the singular. 

E. g. Job vi. 3, ' the sand P^l, of the seas' i. e. of the sea. Even 
where only 07ie can possibly be meant, is this the case; as Judges 
xii. 7j f be was buried V)?^, in the towns of Gilead/ i. e. in a town; 
Gen. viii. 4, ' the ark rested v 3?t ?57 3 n the mountains of Ararat/ i. e. 
on a mountain ; Job xxi. 32, nvn^pj? , the graves, i. e. the grave, Ps. 
xlvi. 5. 

Peculiar significancy attached to nouns in certain cases. 

Repetition of nouns. 

§ 438. The Hebrews frequently repeated nouns 



§ 438 — 440. syntax; peculiar signification, etc. 181 

without the copula ) between them, for various pur- 
poses ; viz. 

(a) To denote multitude; e. g. Gen. xiv. 10, 1?CJ n '^? nvi £?; 
pits pits of bitumen, i. e. many pits, etc. ; see d below, (b) To denote 
distribution; e.g. Gen. xxxii. 17, ^5? ^7— ^7— flock flock by itself, 
i. e. each flock by itself, (c) To denote all, every ; e. g. Deut. xiv. 22, 
njtp nDtt^ year year, i. e. every year. Sometimes also with a copula ; 
as Deut. xxxii. *], *"^3 ""^ > generation and generation, i. e. all genera- 
tions, (of) To denote intensity ; e. g. Ecc. vii. 24, pE37 p^37 ? deep 
deep, i. e. very deep ; comp. a above. So earnestness in warning or 
threatening, in grief, joy, etc., is usually expressed by repetition. 

Note. In order to designate intensity, it is not always necessary 
that the same word should be repeated ; but a synonymous word, or a 
word of similar sound and signification, is often substituted with the 
same effect ; as Ps. xl. 3, )TJ] 1^12), clay of mire, i. e. the miry clay; 
Job xxx. 3, nMttfE^ nSlttf 9 wasting and destruction, i. e. great wast- 
ing, etc. 

§ 439. Repetition with the copula •) between the 
words, usually denotes diversity. 

E. g. Deut. xxv. 13, 1?^J ??*v* stone and stone, i. e. different stones 
or weights; Ps. xii. 3, ^~?J ^7.^, with a heart and a heart, i. e. with 
different hearts, with deceit. 

Nouns as Adjectives. 

§ 440. Of tw r o nouns in regimen, one is frequently 
employed as an adjective, in order to qualify the other. 

The principle is regulated thus : (a) The second or Gen. noun com- 
monly qualifies the first; e. g. *!?? ^ .<? , vessels of silver, i. e. silver 
vessels; Q^137 H-trW, possession of eternity, i. e. everlasting posses- 
sion; Is. xxiv. 10, ^nPTiT^pj city of desolation, i. e. desolate city; 
Gen. xxxiv. 30, ~l^PP ^O^, men of number, i. e. which can be num- 
bered, few men. 

(b) Sometimes the first noun qualifies the second ; e. g. riSIp 
ITJ^a the tallness of his cedars, i. e. his tall cedars; ^H?? "J^P, 
the fatness of his flesh, his fat flesh; E"J*jr["^2 , the whole of men } 
i. e. all men, Ex. xiii. 3. But this construction is less frequent than 
the other. 

Note. This principle is more or less common to all languages, spe- 



182 §§ 440 — 444. syntax ; peculiar signification, etc. 

dally the one designated under a ; but the Hebrew having only a few 
adjectives, resorts to it more frequently than almost any other language. 
In particular, the Hebrew is almost entirely wanting in adjectives de- 
signating the material of which any thing is made. Hence *19v -"?* 
vessels of silver, and other expressions of the like nature, are a matter 
of necessity. But this form of expression is sometimes used where 
there is no necessity, i. e. where adjectives might be employed ; e. g. 
EHpn ^1^, garments of holiness; tPfcnn ]n3, priest of the head, 
i. e. high priest, instead of vi"7|n ]nbrT. 

§ 441. When two or more nouns are connected by 
the verb of existence (^VJ) expressed or understood,, 
such nouns as designate quality are usually employed 
as adjectives. 

E. g. Gen. i. 2, ' the earth ^n^J ^Hi"! rfiTH, was desolation and 
emptiness,' i. e. desolate and empty; Ps. x. 5, *P^SE7Ki DVlEj, high- 
ness [are] thy statutes, i. e. they are high, out of sight ; Job viii. 9, vIDijl 
^H5^, yesterday [are] we, i. e. of yesterday, hesterni sumus, Levit. 
xxi. 6. 

§ 442. Nouns with prepositions prefixed, are some- 
times used as adjectives. 

E. g. Ps. lxxvii. 14, ^^ ^7P-? , in holiness [is] thy way, i. e. thy 
way is holy ; 1 Chr. xxvi. 14, '?v^ V^\ ci counsellor ivith wisdom, 
i. e. a wise counsellor; Ps. xvii. 9, ^??v^ ^ w > m V enemies in respect 
to life, i. e. my deadly enemies. 

§ 443. When two nouns are connected by a con- 
junction, one of them is occasionally employed as an 
adjective. 

E. g. Gen. iv. 4, jn^CJSfi *b«2 nttfojB, of the firstlings of his 
flock and of the fat of them, i. e. of the fat firstlings, etc. ; Gen. iii. 16, 
TJJirn TJD'OSy, thy pain and thy conception, i. e. thy painful con- 
ception. Perhaps Ps. cxix. 168. The construction may be called 
Hendiadys, %v tia, Zvcav. 

§ 444. To express qualities which in other languages 
are usually designated by adjectives, the Hebrews em- 
ployed the words tC^K, byiL, ]2 } D2, followed by a noun 
expressive of quality. 



§§ 444 — 446. syntax • adjectives. 183 

Examples, (a) E^N man ; as E'Hyj ET^ a man of words, i. e. an 
eloquent man ; ^PH E^N, a man of piety, i. e. a pious man. (6) E\*lp 
men ; as ^3H ^*? » wlcw ^ hunger, i. e. hungry men, (c) ^3721 /ore?, 
possessor; as "TOE* '3721 , possessor of hair, i. e. hairy ; n v Hl? ^r.V.^ , pos- 
sessors of a covenant, i. e. bound together by a covenant, (d) 15 son, 
and riS daughter ; as TH"]?, *ow o/* strength, i. e. a hero; njJJ"]S 
sow o^ death, i. e. condemned, worthy of death; ^?^ "??, scm q/* « 
?/<?<2r, i. e. a yearling. So T^n rilDj?, the daughters of song, i. e. 
singing women, Eccl. xii. 4; see Lexicon. The student will see 
that these cases are only a peculiar modification of the principle in 
§ 440. a. 

Note. The first noun in constructions of this kind is sometimes 
omitted, and can be supplied only from the sense of the passage ; as 
Job xxxi. 32, rnW way, for HHK ]5 , son of the way, i. e. a traveller ; 
Prov. xvii. 4, ^1/.^ falsehood, for a man of falsehood, i. e. a liar. So 
Gen. xv. 2, pQ?^, for son of Damascus, i. e. a native of Damascus. 
Job xxxiv. 18. 

ADJECTIVES. 

§ 445. The Hebrew, like other languages, often sup- 
plies the place of nouns by adjectives taken in an ab- 
stract or neuter sense. 

E. g. Jos. xxiv. 14, D^fp , integrity, lit. upright, innocent ; Job xx. 
22, bay, trouble, lit. troublesome, etc., Ps. x. 10. So 2T) n$«, a 
woman of evil, i. e. an evil woman, where 3FH is constructed as a noun 
in the Gen. ; b*?.^ ^ , waters of fulness, i. e. full streams, instead of 
t3>Q Q^NxXJ. Comp. in Greek, to kocXov, to crofoy, etc. 

Note. In this way some adjectives are constantly used as epithets 
of persons or things; as "^^l? strong, for ' God;' "I^M strong, for 
' bull, horse, hero ; ' *~JEn hot, for ' the sun ;' H J^ { white, for ' the 
moon/ etc. So for God, we say (in English) the Almighty, the Om- 
nipotent, etc. ; in French, VEternel, etc. This is called epitheton or- 
nans. 

Adjectives as predicates of a sentence. 

§ 446. {a) When an adjective is the predicate of a 
sentence, and the verb of existence (*"W"J) is omitted, 
the adjective stands regularly before the noun, and is 
usually without the article. 



184 §§446 — 448. syntax; adjectives. 

E. g. Gen. iv. 13, ^3? 'VT2, great [is] my iniquity. In a very- 
few cases the adjective seems to stand after the noun ; as in Gen. xix. 
20 ; 1 Sam. xii. 17- But in the first of these cases p?W ^H], the 
word "^^P? is originally and properly a noun ; in the second, H2~] i s 
probably a verb. In Hab. i. 16, ^^r 1 seems to be properly a noun, 
meaning pecus pingue ; comp. Zech. xi. 16; Ezek. xxxiv. 3. 

(b) Such adjective generally agrees in number and 
gender with the noun to which it relates ; but there are 
many apparent exceptions. 

Note. These exceptions may be explained on the principle, that 
when adjectives are used as predicates, they are often to be taken in 
an abstract sense as nouns of the neuter gender; § 445. Thus Ps. 
lxxiii. 28, 2te V 1 ? D^nb^ rqnp approach to God [is] to me delight- 
ful, lit. a pleasant or delightful thing, the noun being in the fern., and 
the adj. in the masc. and used as a neuter noun, § 436. So Gen. 
xxvii. 29, '"! r HN T3«^» the cursers of thee [are] cursed, lit. an ac- 
cursed thing; Ps. cxix. 137, T^??^? ""^J? upright [quoddam rectum] 
are thy statutes, Ps. lxvi. 3. So Virgil, Mn. iv. 569, varium et mu- 
tabile semper femina; Statius, Theb. n. 399, blandum potestas ; 
Achill. Tat. vwqfiv [acv <yvv'f\. So to itav, ra icuvra, the universe, rational 
or material. 

§ 447. Article before an adjective used as a predicate. 
When this occurs, the verb of existence nvr, or its 
equivalent the pronoun 1$fn, is usually inserted. 

E. g. 1 Sam. xvii. 14, }£>i?n W^n TH David was the smallest, or 
as to David, he etc., i. e. the youngest. In cases of this kind, the ad- 
jective is placed after the noun to which it relates. 

Note. In like manner, participles when used for the Pres. tense 
of verbs, sometimes stand as predicates after the noun, and take the 
article; e.g. Deut. iii. 21, Pfafcitl ^TV y thine eyes see, lit. thine 
eyes are the beholders or they which see. 

Adjectives qualifying nouns. 

§ 448. Adjectives used as epithets, i. e. as simply 
qualifying nouns, (so also participial and pronominal ad- 
jectives), generally agree with the noun in gender and 
number. 



§§ 449 — 453. syntax ; adjectives. 185 

§ 449. Exceptions, (a) The pluralis excellentia?, commonly but 
not always, takes an adjective singular, § 437- 2; e. g. Is, xix.4, O^*?. 
^^i? a hard master. On the contrary, Jos. xxiv. 19, O^Enf? Q^H s& } a 
holy God, falling in with the general analogy, (b) Nouns of multitude 
in the singular, commonly but not always require a plural adjective * ; 
e. g. Jer. 1. 6, fTn^H fH^ a wandering flock. 

§ 450. Dual nouns take plural adjectives ; e. g. 0?T 
JTisn, weak hands. 

§ 451. Nouns of common gender, having more than 
one adjective, of course admit either a masc. or fern, 
adjective ; or they may have both at the same time. 

E. g t 1 Kings xix. 11, PJJT) 'V' 1 *^ n^" 1 , a great and strong wind. 
Position of Adjectives. 

§ 452. When they qualify nouns, they are usually 
put after them. 

The number of apparent exceptions to this rule is so very small, and 
some of them so equivocal, that it appears dubious whether real excep- 
tions are to be admitted. See however, Ps. lxxxix. 51, 0^37 □* , S~r?3 
all the numerous people , or rather all the multitudes 3 the nations. See 
also Is. liii. 11 ; Jer. iii. 7> 10 ' x vi. 16, all which I take to be cases of 
explicative apposition ; and so of the like cases elsewhere. 

Note. The pronominal adjective nj this, not unfrequently precedes 
the noun with which it agrees. 

§ 453. When an adjective serves to qualify two or 
more nouns, it is usually put after them ; and the gen- 
der of it may -be either masc. as the more worthy, or 
the same as the gender of the last noun. 

E. g. Neh. ix. 13, D'OTO ny$B*\ D^rj., good laws and statutes; 
Ezek. i. 11, niTl^ DiT^D"! a! T?.?, their faces and wings were se- 
parated. Here f""H/f , a part, adjective, is fern. ; as is the noun also 
which next precedes it. 

* When the concord is directed by the sense, as in a, b, rather tban by the grammatical form 
of the noun, we may call it construct™ ad sensiim. 



186 §§453 — 455. syntax; adjectives. 

Construct state of adjectives. 

§ 453 a. They are often put in this state, even when 
they qualify the noun with which they stand in regi- 
men. 

E.g. Q^D ^, clean of hands; ^^7 ")2 , pure of heart ; "1MTI m) 
beautiful of form, etc. This construction is of wide extent in Hebrew, 
and is often used in respect to participles partaking of the nature of 
adjectives; e. g. Ps. xix. 8, 9; Jer. ii. 8. 

Comparison of adjectives. 

Comparative degree. 

§ 454. (a) The comparative degree in adjectives, is 
made by using V? (prce, in comparison of) after the ad- 
jective, and before the noun with which the comparison 
is made. 

E. g. Judg. xiv. 18, E^P P"^?, sweeter than honey ; Ps. xix. 11. 

Note. In the same manner also ]£> is used, to make a comparison 
after nouns or verbs signifying condition or quality. E. g. Is. lii. 14, 
' his visage E^MD ^nt^ft, was marred more than any man's; Gen. 
xli. 40, JJ*v^ -?*?> I W M 1 )e greater than thou. 

(b) But IP before the Inf. mood, implies a negative. 

In this case it may be translated so that not, or than that, according 
as the sentence is constructed; e. g. Gen. iv. 13, N1E??ft *y)y ;i"72, 
my iniquity is great so that it cannot be pardoned, or greater than that 
it can be pardoned. 

(c) Sometimes the adjective necessary to make out fully the com- 
parison, is omitted; as Is. x. 10, 'their gods, p^ttflTE^ Qwere more 
powerful]] than those of Jerusalem/ 

Note. In the Rabbinic comparison is made by ^O^j more. In 
the N. Test, the positive degree of adjectives is not unfrequently used 
for both the other degrees ; an imitation of the Hebrew, which does 
not vary the form of adjectives for the sake of comparison. 

Superlative degree. 

§ 455. The Hebrew has no appropriate form to mark 
this, but expresses it by various circumlocutions. 

E. g. (a) By the article prefixed to an adjective of the positive 



§§455 — 457. syntax; adjectives — numerals. 187 

degree; as 1 Sam. xvi. 11, ' David was I^H, the smallest.' The 
Arabian makes his superlative, by prefixing the article to the com- 
parative form, (b) By a Gen. or suffix following the adjective; as 
2 Chr. xxi. 17, ^J? P&l?, the smallest of his sons; Mic. vii. 4, OniD, 
the best of them, (c) A superlative of intensity is formed, when a word 
is repeated and put in the Gen. plural; as E^ttnjjn ®7.P, holy of 
holies, i. e. the most holy place; Ecc. i. 1, Q^vDn '5l?, vanity of 
vanities, i. e. exceedingly vain. So 1 Kings viii. 27, heaven of hea- 
vens, i. e. the highest heaven ; Gen. ix. 25, servant of servants, i. e. a 
most abject servant; Deut. x. 17, God of Gods, i. e. the supreme God, 
etc. (d) The comparative degree sometimes necessarily expresses 
the sense of the superlative; as Gen. iii. 1, ' now the serpent was 
rnttfn n*Tl bbft U^1V 3 cunning above all the beasts of the field, i. e. 
the most cunning of all. (e) Some nouns necessarily imply a superla- 
tive in themselves ; viz. (1) ttfN") head, as Ps. cxxxvii. 6, Vinptp END f 
the head of my joy, i. e. my highest joy, (2) ^^ , first born, as Is. 
xiv. 30, Q^vT ^"P^ first born of the wretched, i. e. most wretched; 
Job xviii. 13, HJK5 TO^, the first born of death, i.e. the most terrible 
death. 

§ 456. Besides the above modes of expressing a su- 
perlative, the Hebrew exhibits a variety of methods by 
which intensity of meaning is denoted. 

E. g. (a) *TNp very, or "TWE? TSp very very ; as Gen. vii. 19, ' the 
waters increased 1^ TMp , very exceedingly/ etc. (b) By repeating 
the same word; see § 438. d. (c) By two synonymous words; see 
§ 438. Note, {d) By repeating the same word and putting it in the 
Gen. when repeated; as Hos. x. 15, EpfJSH ™"J, the evil of your 
evil, i. e. your base wickedness. Sometimes a synonyme is used in the 
Gen., instead of the same word being repeated; see § 438. Note, (e) 
The name of God placed after a noun sometimes makes it specially in- 
tensive ; as Jonah iii. 3, ' a great city D^rpiO before God,' i. e. really 
or truly very great; Gen. x. 9, ' Nimrod was a mighty hunter ^Py 
njn^ before Jehovah,' i. e. exceedingly expert in hunting. So Acts 
vii. 20, ' Moses was ao-reToq t$ @e$,fair to God,' i. e. very fair; Luke 
i. 6, c righteous evuitiov rov &eov, before God,' i. e. really or eminently 
pious. The ground of this seems to be, that nothing can, in the sight 
of God, appear to be different from what it really is. 

NUMERALS. 

§ 457- The cardinal numbers 2—10, are commonly joined with 



188 §§ 457 — 463. syntax ; numerals. 

plural nouns, and follow the same gender. They may be put, (a) In 
the const, state with nouns to which they relate; e. g. O^J f" 1 ^*?, 
three days, lit. a threeness of days, (b) In apposition (or perhaps used 
adverbially) with the nouns to which they relate, and either before or 
after them ; e. g. B^S iiwbv? three sons, W'^bw n"l3a three daugh- 
ters ; see and comp. § 435 and § 535 a. The position of the cardinal 
number after the noun, is less common and belongs rather to the later 
Hebrew. 

§ 458. The cardinal numbers 11 — 19, are put in apposition, or 
rather used adverbially , with nouns plural or singular, and commonly 
stand before the noun, but sometimes after it. The gender is usually 
the same as that of the noun. E. g. Numb. i. 44, ttf>N 1TO 0\2$, 
twelve men; 2 Sam. ix. 10, 0^3 1WV TlW^n I , fifteen sons; T1WW D^a 
"^V , sixteen sons, 

§ 459. The tens (20 — 90) are of common gender ; are put in ap- 
position with nouns either sing, or plural ; and may stand either before 
or after the noun. E. g. Judg. xi. 33, ""^V CHtp^ twenty cities; Gen. 
xxxii. 15, D^tpy E^^, twenty rams. 

§ 460, Numbers composed of tens and units (e. g. 26, 34, 48, etc.), 
when standing before a noun, require it to be in the singular ; but 
when the noun precedes, it is in the plural. In both cases the gender 
of the smaller numeral is usually the same as that of the noun ; e. g. 
Deut. ii. 14, rt2W naTfitffa D>wbp, thirty and eight years; Ezek. 
viii. 35, TIV^W) D^K? bfca?, seventy and seven lambs. 

§ 461 . The numerals HNft a hundred and rf?.^. a thousand, may be 
put in either the abs. or const state with nouns either sing, or plural, 
and may stand either before or after the noun. E. g. Gen. xvii. 17* 
n3^-nN», a hundred years; xxv. 7, 17, ™? n ^?> a hundred of 
years ; 2 Chr. iii. 16, ntfft Q^han, 100 pomegranates; Is. vii. 23, ^7M 
15|, a thousand of vines; Ezra viii. 27, ^M D^i-r™, 1000 Da- 
rics. 

§ 462. Numbers composed of thousands and smaller numbers, fol- 
low the same rule as composite numerals in § 460. 

§ 463. In many cases the numerals are used alone to designate 
weights, measures in common use, and time, the noun being omitted. 
E. g. Gen. xx. 16, ^9? *??*$> a thousand [shekels] of silver ; Ruth iii. 
15, D^tp tt?#, six [measures] of barley; 1 Sam. x. 4, QrnVviK?, 
two [loaves] of bread. The word nfcH, cubit, commonly takes the pre- 
position 2 after the numeral ; as Ex. xxvii. 18, HENa nNE f one hun- 



§§ 464 — 468. syntax ; pronouns. 189 

dred in cubits, i. e. 100 cubits. Gen. viii. 5, KH - ^Tv^j on tne 
first [day] of the month. Comp. § 551. 

§ 464. The cardinal numbers beyond ten are also 
used as ordinals; and they are either put before the 
noun and in apposition with it, or are put in the Gen. 
after the noun. 

E. g. Gen. vii. 11, D^ ">TO TO^ttJa, on the seventeenth day; 
1 Kings xvi. 10, 3n#J ^iW% n^i , in the year of 27, i. e. the 
27th year. 

For the ordinal numbers below 10, see § 396. 

§ 465. The cardinal numbers below ten are also 
used as ordinals, in designating years, and days of the 
month. 

E. g. 2 Kings xviii. 10, ^ n T^ , the sixth year, lit. the year of 
six; Gen. viii. 5, E77.rn "1^*3^ on the first [day] of the month; Lev. 
xxiii. 32, ^H - TOt^n^, on the ninth of the month, etc., as in Eng- 
lish. For the { here, comp. § 421. g. 

§ 466. The cardinal numbers are used distributively, 
when repeated without a copula. 

E. g. Gen. vii. 8, S?3tp 0?5*p, two and two, or two by two ; Gen. 
vii. 3, HP^S? HV^W 3 seven and seven, or by sevens. 

PRONOUNS. 

Primitive pronouns. 

§ 467. These are more usually omitted before verbs ; 
but when employed,, they seem intended to give more 
energy to the expression. 

Such pronouns are commonly found only in the Nominative; but 
occasionally they occupy the oblique cases as the following section 
shows. 

§ 468. When a pronoun of any form is to be repeated 
for the sake of emphasis, it is done by using the primi- 
tive form ; and this form thus repeated, is in any case 
required by the nature of the sentence. E. g. 

(a) In the Noin. ; which is frequent in the way of apposition to the 



190 §§469 — 470. syntax; pronouns. 

subject of a sentence, (b) In the Gen., as Ps. ix. J, Hftn Clpt ~T2^, 
the memory of them of them has perished, i. e. the very memory of them, 
etc. 1 Kings xxi. 19, ' the dogs shall lick HIHS ES Tf^^TlS, the blood 
of thee even of thee.' (c) In the Dat. ; as Hag. i. 4, EJ-JN cob TOH, is 
it a time for you yourselves f (d) In the Ace. ; as Gen. xxvii. 34, "^^t? 
\]S D3j bless me even me. (e) In the Abl. ; as 1 Sam. xxv. 24, ^^ ^3 
P?H, with me even me p)e] this evil. 

Note 1. The primitive pronoun is sometimes placed first; as Gen. 
xlix. 8, ' Judah T™ f-TTP HFIN f thee thee shall thy brethren 
praise. 

Note 2. The primitive pronoun appears sometimes to be used by 
way of emphasis, instead of repeating a noun ; e. g. Gen. iv. 27, ^V?<^ 
T,t\ ^^ ^-j an d t° Seth even to him was born a son. 

§ 469. Primitive pronouns used for the verb of exist- 
ence. When a personal pronoun is the subject of a sen- 
tence, it implies the verb of existence (JTJX) along with 
or after it ; the verb itself being usually omitted. 

E. g. Gen. xlii. 11, ^rjSN E^23, we Qire] righteous; Gen. xxix. 4, 
Om VM®, whence [are] ye? Gen. iii. 10, "Q&H D'-f% J [ am ] naked. 

Note. Personal pronouns of the third person, sometimes stand sim- 
ply in the place of the verb of existence ; e. g. Gen. ix. 3, ' every thing 
which moves ^n fcfln 1®$, which is alive ;' Zech. i. 9, H^S 7VZT\ HE, 
what are these ? Plainer still is the principle in such cases as follow ; 
viz. Zeph. ii. 12, c ye Cushites, victims of my sword HEi! C^IS are ye;' 
2 Sam. vii. 28, ^nb^n HJirrTTflN thou art God;' Ezra v. 11, ' the 
servants of God 1E>n S3PJDS. (Chaldaic), are we* answering to the Heb. 
71^71 ^HSN . In Syriac and Arabic, this use of the personal pronoun 
is very common. Still, in all these cases, the pronoun must be con- 
sidered simply as the emphatic self selves, and the verb of existence 
be supplied as usual. 

§ 469 a. Primitive pronouns of the third person, viz. 
M7l } WT} } DH, ]7l 9 are very frequently employed as de- 
monstrative pronouns. 

E. g. S^nn DV^, in that day ; tt}?\ D^i-JH those nations. Com- 
pare § 167- Note. 

Suffix Pronouns. 

§ 470. In general the pronouns suffixed to verbs are 



§§ 471 — 473. SYNTAX ; PRONOUNS. 191 

in the Ace. case ; those suffixed to nouns are in the Gen. 
case. 

§ 471. Exceptions as to verbal suffixes, (a) These sometimes ex- 
press the sense of the Dative; as Jos. xv. 19, ^.Tjn^j thou hast given 
to me ; Zech. vii. 5, "^M \3JjjQ2n, have ye fasted for me for me, i. e. 
on my account; Job x. 14, ' if I sin "OJ^Qtp'l then thou watchest it 
for me, i. e. on my account ; Prov. xiii.20, "ID^D 1"ir|tp j he seeks for 
him correction ; Ps. xciv. 20, Tl^H^ is it bound to thee ? (b) They 
sometimes denote relations which are usually expressed by particles ; 
as Is. lxv. 5, Tj^lpl)?, I am more holy than thou; 1 Kings xxi. 10., 
•I/Tlip'l, and caused them to testify against him; Ps. xlii. 5, D^N, 
I moved along with them, etc. This usage is more frequent in 
Arabic. 

§ 472. Exceptions as to the suffixes of nouns, (a) These sometimes 
express the sense of the Dative; as Ps. cxv. 7, D rPT. — a; T/?T], they 
have hands — they have feet, for c rj7 ^?T, hands are to them, etc. 
(b) They express the sense of the preposition 73? ; as Ex. xv. 7, TJJiJj 
those who rise up against thee, instead of the T^? D ^rj. So Ps. 
liii. 6, ^T A ^j him who encampeth against thee. 

Note. The suffixes of nouns may have either an active or a passive 
sense; e. g. (a) Active ; as ^P^H, my violence, i. e. that which I do; 
"H5P, my booh, i. e. that which I possess. This sense of the suffixes 
is the common one. (b) Passive; as Jer. li. 35, "^P^O, my violence, 
i. e. that which is done upon me; Ex. xx. 20, VUyp his fear, i. e. 
which he inspires; Is. lvi. 7, ^l??-^, my prayer, i. e. the prayer of- 
fered to me ; Ps, lvi. 13, "^TJ? , thy vows, i. e. vows made to thee ; 
Is. xxi. 2, nrinpN, her sighing, i. e. the sighing over her, or on her ac- 
count. Comp. § 424. 

N. B. For the pleonasm and ellipsis of personal pronouns, see § 543 
seq. and § 552 seq. 

Position of pronouns. 

§ 473. (a) When a noun in the Gen. is used merely 
to qualify a preceding noun, the suffix pronoun (which 
as to sense belongs to the first noun) is usually placed 
after the second. 

E. g, Dan. ix. 24, tF#7R ^V , thy holy city, lit. the city of thy 
holiness; Is. ii. 20, *i5p? \?*r8-, his silver idols, lit. the idols of his 
silver; Zeph. iii. 11, "HOJ^? Tv^, thy proud exulters, lit. the ex- 
ulters of thy pride, etc. 



192 §§473—475, syntax ; substitutes for pronouns. 

(b) In a very few cases, the suffix is apparently at- 
tached to the Jirst noun. 

E. g. Ps. lxxi. 7, t^Ptp?, my strong refuge, lit. my refuge of 
strength. Ezek. xvi.27; Lev. vi.3. But this construction is not alto- 
gether certain, as it admits of another solution, viz. by the ellipsis of 
the first noun mentally repeated before the second, or (more obviously 
still) by apposition. 

§ 474. Pronouns usually stand after the noun to which 
they relate. 

But sometimes this noun is not mentioned until after the pronoun, 
either immediately, or perhaps at the distance of several sentences ; 
and sometimes it is to be supplied only from the general sense of the 
passage, e. g. Ps. lxxxvii. 1, ttHp ''Tjn^ ^T^l* * ts foundation [is] 
in the holy mountain, i. e. Zion's, as appears from ver. 2; *Is. viii. 21, 
HS "15?, he passes through it, i. e. the land, see ver. 22; Ps. ix. 13, 
' when he taketh vengeance for blood ~>2T DJTiN y he remembereth them, 
i, e. the afflicted, as in the second part of the parallelism ; Ps. lxv. 10 : 
lxviii. 15 : xviii, 15, comp. ver. 18; Job xxxvii. 4. 

Note. Sometimes, although the pronoun is immediately preceded 
by a noun, it does not refer to that noun, but to one which must be 
supplied from the sense ; as Ps. xliv. 3, ' by thy hand thou didst drive 
out the nations, E2?^J\n and didst plant them/ i. e. the Israelites, as 
appears from ver. 2. So Ps. lxxxi. 16, comp. ver. 14: cv. 37; Gen. 
x. 12, where Win probably refers to Nineveh in ver. 11. 

Nouns used for pronouns. 

§ 475. (1) In addressing a superior, the Hebrews commonly em- 
ployed words descriptive of the relation which the speaker, or the per- 
son addressed, sustained, instead of using pronouns ; e. g. Gen. xliv. 16, 
c what shall we say to my lord T i.e. to thee ; ' \o, we are servants to 
my lord,' i. e. to thee. Verse 19, c my lord asked Ms servants' etc., 
i. e. thou didst inquire of us. 

(2) The place of the personal pronouns, especially 
in a reflexive sense, is often supplied by the most distin- 
guished and essential parts of either the external or in- 
ternal man. 

E.g, (a) By ttfe?. soul, most frequently; as Job ix. 21, ^D? 3HH rib, 



§§475 — 477- syntax; anomalies op pronouns, etc. 193 

/ know not myself; Ps. vii. 3, 'lest like a lion ^M H"^?o he rend me; 
Ps. iii. 3, ^?^, to me; Ps. xi. 1: xvi. 10: xxxv. 3; Amos i. 8, 
' Jehovah hath sworn WS?5 , by himself, (b) By O^S person ; as 
Prov. vii. 15, T3? i™V, to seek theej Ezek. vi. 9, UTV^ siafa, 
they abhor themselves, etc. (c) By 2-7. heart; as Ex. ix. 14, '^V, 
thyself; Ps. xvi. 9, "^ V , / myself, etc. (rf) Occasionally by several 
other words; as Ps. vii. 6 : xvi. 9, Q^n life, and T03 heart or *ow// 
Is. xxvi. 9, Tin spinV; Ps. vi. 8, V.V eye; Ps. xvi. 9, "^? flesh; 
Ps. xvii. 14, 1^5 fo%; Ps. vi. 3, B?2 bone ; 1 Sam. xx. 17, ^ hand, 
etc. The same usage prevails very extensively in Aramaean and Ara- 
bic; and, I may add, in our own language, i. e. How many hands does 
he employ ? 

Anomalies of pronouns. 

§ 476. Departures from concord in respect to gender, number, etc., 
are called anomalies here. These are somewhat frequent, and may be 
ranked under several heads ; eomp. §§ 484 — 496. 

E. g. (a) In regard to number ; for a pronoun sing, not unfre- 
quently relates to a noun plural, i. e. it is used in a collective sense, 
like a noun of multitude; as Deut. xxi. 10, ' when thou goest against 
T.?:^* thine enemies, and God "^iH^ gives him (sing.) into thine hand,' 
etc. Josh. ii. 4, c and the woman took the two spies, i3Ep$J^ and hid 
him? So Deut. xxviii. 48 ; Ps. v. 10 ; Mai. ii. 2 ; Jer. xxxi. 15 ; Ecc. 
x. 15; Is. v. 23, et saepe passim. 

Note. Pronouus singular being often employed in a generic or col- 
lective sense, in the same way as nouns of multitude, exhibit the like 
appearances in regard to concord with verbs, adjectives, etc. 

(b) In regard to gender. (1) The masc. is used for the feminine; 
as D^« for tfjN, Ezek. xiii. 20. TlftTl f Qr 71271, Ruth i. 22 ; Cant. vi. 
8 ; Zach. v. 10. So the suff. D? for ]3, Ruth i. 8, 11, 13. DH f or ]U, 
Ruth i. 19; Ex. i. 21 ; Is. iii. 16; Dan. viii. 9, 2; Ezek. i. 6, 7, 8 saepe. 
D- for 1-, Judg. xix. 24. '0- for ]-, 2 Kings xviii. 16; 2 Chr. xxix. 3. 
(2) The fern, for the masculine ; as 71271 instead of nan, 2 Sam. iv. 6; 
Jer. 1. 5. JW for TlftX, Deut. v. 24; Ezek. xxviii. 14. In Arabic 
and Rabbinic such anomalies are very frequent. 

(c) In respect both to number and gender ; e. g. Job xiv. 19, n^BD, 
where the antecedent of 71- is U)ft plur. masc. Is. xxxv. 7* ^iR"! [in] 
the laier of her, i. e. of the Q^Jn ? plur. masc. 

Relative pronouns. 

§ 477. The relative ItfK (also m and It when used 

Bb 



]94 §§478 — 481. syntax; verbs. 

as relatives, § 169) is used in respect to antecedents of 
all persons, numbers, and genders, § 168. 

§ 478. The relative WN is often joined in sense with 
other words, merely to give them a relative meaning ; 
e. g. 

(a) With nouns and pronouns ; as Gen. xiii. 16, "iSynM . . . "I??^, 
which dust; i? ^^ : , to whom; "MIN "l^ , whom; Deut. xxviii. 49, 
•foffirb -)^N 3 whose language ; Ps. i. 4, rrri *&ttF\ ^$$, which ike 
wind scatters, etc. (b) With adverbs; as D ^ "HP9* where; ~>^ 
Ew#P, whence, etc. 

Note. The word " , ^^? : is commonly, but not always, separated 
from the word which it qualifies, by another intervening word. The 
word qualified, moreover, is often omitted; as Ezek. xxi. 35, c in the 
place ['12] HMn^a I^N, where thou wast created; Ex. xxxii. 34, "^ 
[D'ptt] TO, to wAa* [place]: Is. xliii. 4, [TO] ^^ , from what 
[time], etc. For the ellipsis of this pronoun, see § 553. 

Note 2. """!?y not only designates a relative sense, but often in- 
cludes with it the sense of these or those ; e. g. *1N£1 "^^ those 
w ii 03i thou shalt curse, Numb. xxii. 6; ""K??q2, to those which, etc. 

VERBS. 

Usual principles of concord. 

§ 479. In general a verb agrees with its Nom. case 
in number, gender, and person. 

§ 480. Nouns of multitude in the singular often take 
a verb in the plural. 

E. g. Gen. xxxiii. ]3, J&Srrba !»n£J then all the flock will die ; 
compare § 449. b. Sometimes verbs in the singular only are em- 
ployed after nouns of multitude ; in other cases, a sentence begins 
with a verb sing, and proceeds with plur. verbs ; e. g. Ex. i. 20 : 
xxxiii. 4; Is. ii. 20; Ps. xiv. 1, etc. See further on nouns of multi- 
tude, § 500. 

§ 481. Several connected Nominatives, either all mas- 
culine, or of different genders, usually take a verb in the 
plur. masculine. 

E. g. Ex. xvii. 10, ' and Moses and Aaron and Hur ^^ ascended;' 



§§482—487- syntax; verbs. 195 

Ps. lxxxv. 11, '^? 5? ^?^!)"^Dn, mercy and truth are met together ; 
Gen. viii. 22, etc. 

Note. Exceptions. Cases occur rarely, where a verb sing, is used 
after several Nominatives ; e. g. Ex. xxi. 4, ^TTJO rj^T?^ i" 1 ^ 5 ! , 
the woman and her children shall be, (verb sing.) 

§ 482. When the subject and predicate of a sentence 
are connected by the verb of existence (^rj), this verb 
often agrees with the latter. 

E. g. Gen. xxvii. 39, *fi$fo TVyy\ Y^fl W^P, rich countries 
shall be thine abode ; Gen. xxxi. 8 ; Lev, xxv. 33 ; Ezek. xxxv. 15, etc. 

§ 483. Dual nouns take verbs like nouns plural. 

Anomalies in the concord of verbs. 

I. As to number. 

§ 484. The pluralis excellentice commonly, but not 
always, takes a verb in the singular, § 437. 2. 

E.g.Gen.i.l,^nbN bra, God created; Ex. xxi. 29, HW vbM, 
his owner shall be put to death. But in a few cases the pluralis ex- 
cellentice takes a verb in the plural; e. g. Gen. xx. 13: xxxi. 53: 
xxxv. 7; Ex. xxxii. 4, 8; 2 Sam. vii. 23. 

§ 485. Plural Nominatives of the fern, gender, which 
relate to beasts or things and not to persons, frequently 
take a verb singular whether it precede or follow them*. 

E. g. Ezek. xxvi. 2, TyMT}"! n^S^J3 broken is [are] the gates ; 
Joeli. 20;^n^ nhftn;? the beasts cry [cries]; Gen. xlix. 22; Jer. 
iv. 14: xlviii. 41 : li. 29, 56 ; Ps. cxix. 98: lxxxvii. 3; Job xxvii. 20, etc. 

§ 486. Vice versa, the plur. fern, of verbs is some- 
times used, where the usual concord would demand the 
singular. 

E.g. Ex.i. 10, Tlftrfcft njNnprns, lv hen there shall happen war; 
Judg. v. 26; Job xvii. 16; Is. xxviii. 3; Obad. xiii. 

§ 487. When a Noin. plural is used in a distributive 
sense, viz. to denote each or every one of the subjects in 
question, it often takes a verb in the singular. 

* Note. This construction of the feminine plural with a verb singular, is technically called the 
pluralis inhumanus. Compare the Greek neuter plurals, as joined with verbs singular. 



196 §§ 489 — 491. syntax; verbs. 

E. g. Ex. xxxi. 14, HW TV s^Jl^, they who prof ane it, i. e. every 
one who profanes it [the Sabbath], shall be put to death ; Prov. xxvii. 
16: iii. 18: xxviii. 1 ; Gen. xlvii. 3; Ex. xxxi. 14. 

§ 489. When the verb 'precedes a plural Nominative, 
it is not unfrequently put in the singular ; and some- 
times when it follows one. 

E. g. 1 Sam. i. 2, EThV n23^b TT^, and there was to Peninnah 
children, i. e. Peninnah had children ; Is. xiii. 22, C^S 71237 j the jack- 
als shall howl ; Dent. v. 7; Judg. xiii. 12 ; 2 Sam. xxi. 6 : Ps. cxxiv. 5. 
In all such cases, the verb is used in a kind of impersonal way, like the 
French il vient des homines, there comes some men. So occasionally even 
when the verb follows a plur. Norn. ; as Ecc. ii. 7, ** HJH ff$2 ^ , 
there were slaves to me, i. e. I had slaves; Gen. xlvi. 22, ' these were 
the sons of Rachel *Ty,J "ilj?y which were Qit. was] born to Jacob;* 
Gen. xxxv. 26; Dan. ix. 24; Is. lxiv. 10. 

Note. Sentences not unfrequently begin with a verb singular, and 
then proceed with a verb plural ; as Gen. i. 14, nY")Sp VP , let there 
be lights, . . . ^H*] and let them be for signs/ etc. Numb. ix. 6; Ezek. 
xiv. 1 ; Esth. ix. 23. 

II. As to gender. 

§ 490. Feminine Nominatives, either sing, or plural, 
sometimes take a verb masc. whether it precedes or fol- 
lows them. 

E. g. 1 Sam. xxv. 27, ^n^5?tt7 N^fT, thine handmaid brought; 1 Chr. 
ii.48, ^ E^S, the concubine bore; Judg. xxi. 21, nl32 *t£ DM, 

if the daughters go out ; Ruth i. 8, 'even as ye [Ruth and Orpah] 
DJTHft? have done to the dead;' Is. lvii. 8, ^Tnpni and thou hast 
made a covenant for thyself, where the subject of the verb is fern. So 
Lev. ii. 8: xi. 32; 1 Kings xxii. 36; Ecc. vii. 7"- x ii- 5; Jer. iii. 5; 
Cant. iii. 5: v. 8: viii. 4; 2 Kings iii. 26; Gen. xv. 17- 

Note. In a very few cases, a masc. Nominative singular is united 
to a verb fern.; e. g. Ecc. vii. 27, j "?nP T?^ saith the Preacher, 
where the verb follows the grammatical for in of the Nom. rather than 
the sense of it; Judg. xi.39, pTTVTTn, and it became a custom, where 
the verb is employed in an impersonal manner. 

§ 491. Nouns of common gender take either a masc. 
or fern, verb ; and sometimes both, in the same con- 
struction. 



§§ 492—494. syntax ; verbs. 197 

E. g. Is. xxxiii. 9, V"?8 •"* t :?*? -*?> the land 771021ms and is wi- 
thered ; xiv. 9; Job xx. 26; Lev. iii. 1 : v. 1, etc. 

Note. There are more nouns of the common gender in Hebrew, than has been generally sup- 
posed, (Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 472); which accounts for many supposed anomalies of gender. 

§ 492. Nouns of multitude, (among which the names 
of nations may be ranked), frequently take a verb femi- 
nine ; and in some cases they admit no other ; comp. 
§480. 

E. g. Ex. v. 16, *F£37 nw^n ? thy people have sinned. So the name 
of a nation, as Ps. cxiv. 2. This construction resembles that of the 
plur alls fr actus in Arabic, which often takes a verb feminine, whatever 
the sense of the noun may be. 

Note. The names of nations, countries, and towns, are of the masc. gender, when they are 
used to denote the inhabitants ; but they are fern., when they only designate place ; comp. § 320. 
Note 1. 

§ 493. When several Nominatives of different genders 
are connected, the verb sometimes agrees with a masc. 
noun as the most worthy ; and sometimes it conforms 
to the noun which stands nearest ; e. g. 

(a) With a masc. noun ; as Prov. xxvii. 9, J? n»b> nnbf?l )teW ? 
ointment and perfume make [makes] glad the heart ; Hos. ix. 2, etc. 

(b) With the nearest noun; as Numb. xii. 1, fnrj**1 B£?9 ^SHi^ 
then spake Miriam and Aaron ; Numb. xx. 11, B"^^ n "P?T W^, 
and the multitude and their cattle drank ; Gen. vii. 7 J 1 Kings xvii. 
15 ; Esth. ix. 29; 2 Sam. iii. 22. Comp. § 481. 

For the general rule respecting the composite Nominatives, see § 481. 

Note. Where there are several Nominatives connected, and the 
sentence begins with a verb singular, it commonly proceeds with a verb 
plural; as Gen. xxi. 32: xxiv. 61; xxxi. 14; xxxiii. 7- Comp. §489. 
Note; §430. 

III. Number and gender. 

§ 494. Feminine nouns of multitude in the singular, 
often take a verb in the plur. masculine, 

E. g. 1 Sam. ii. 33, c all rP3n» the increase of thy house Wi»J, 
shall die ;' Jer. xliv. 12, iTH^tp ' the remainder of Judah who ^*p set 
their faces;' Zeph. ii. 9; Gen. xlyiii. 6. This is constructio ad sen- 
sum, § 449. b. Note *. 



198 §§ 495—498. syntax ; verbs. 

§ 495. (a) Plural Nominatives of the fern, gender 
sometimes take a verb in the sing, masc., whether they 
precede or follow the verb, (b) Vice versa, nouns plur. 
masculine (specially a pluralis inhumanus), sometimes 
take a verb sing, feminine. 

E. g. (a) Job xlii. 15, iTlD; D^3 N2$2 «b, there were [was] not 
found women so beautiful; Jer. xlviii. 15, <"Oy rTHS her towns as- 
cended in the flames; Ex. xiii. 7; 1 Kings xi. 3; Is. xvii. 6; Mic. 
ii. 6 ; Hab. iii. 17; Ps. lvii. 2 : Ixxxvii. 3 ; Job xxii. 9. Comp. § 489. 
§ 490. (b) v 1^ : "T^PO ^, his steps totter [totters] not; Job xiv. 
19, rprTtpP J^btpfl 9 it s floods overflow [overflows] ; also when the 
verb follows, as Jer. xlix. 24, HFITnN. D^bnq, distresses take [takes] 
hold on her. 

§ 496. Peculiar Anomaly. When the subject of a 
verb is a noun in the const, state followed by a Geni- 
tive, the verb sometimes agrees in number, or in num- 
ber and gender, with the noun in the Genitive. 

E. g. 2 Sam. xix. 9, ' and Joab saw that «"fDnba s 3? n ^vJ, the 
front of the battle was against him ;' where the verb agrees with 
TlVrhh. Is. xxii. 7, -Wbg TT?|2»5 TpD, the choice part of thy 
v allies, i. e. thy choice vallies, shall be filed ; where the verb agrees 
with Ti2?§ . So Job xxix. 10 : xxxviii. 21 ; Is. ii. 11 ; Jer. x. 21, etc. 

Note. The solution of this seems to be the intimate connection or 
oneness of two nouns in regimen ; § 332. 

§ 497- Anomalies as to the Dual. We have seen that the dual 
takes a verb in the same manner as the plural, there being no dual 
number of verbs, § 483. Like the plural too (§ 489), it can take a verb 
in the singular, whether it follows or precedes the verb ; e. g. Ex. 
xvii. 12, VJt >! T-> Aw hands [was] were, Josh. viii. 20; Mic. iv. 11. 
So 1 Sam. iv. 15, HEp V!jP3?'l j and his eyes [was] were dim; Deut. 
xxvii. 7, Kethibh. 

Note. For anomalies of the like character with these in §§ 484 — 
496, in regard to pronouns, see § 476. 

Impersonal verbs. 

§ 498. These are made in Hebrew by the 3rd pers. 
masc. or fern. sing, of either the Praet. or Fut. tense ; 
and sometimes by the Inf. mood. 



§§498—500. syntax; verbs. 199 

E. g. *H?5, and it happened; V *"^, it is bitter to me; ^ D^, / 
aw quiet, lit. it is quiet to me; *' *">? or 1/ *^?»1j ^ was grievous to 
him; 1 Sam. xxx. 6, "Hj? ^?^-, anrf *< was grievous to David; 
Job iv. 5, ' but now Iv^ ^^^}, ** comes upon thee ; Ps. xviii. 7> 
Inf. V ^??, wta ^ »w zZZ wn£/i we. In Gen. iv. 26, ^Tl^Tl (pass.) 
it was begun. 

§ 499. Impersonal verbs commonly take after them 
a Dative case with the preposition \ 

E. g. ^ *1? it is grievous to me, i. e. I am grieved ; v *")^5 ' f when 
it was ill to or with me. 

§ 500. Verbs with Indefinite Nominatives. These are 
frequent,, e. g. 

(a) The third pers. sing, or plur. of the verb is used in this way ; 
as Gen. xi. 9, M^fJ [one] called ; Gen. xlviii. 1, *)£^*1 and [one] told ; 
1 Sam. xxvi. 20, H^T. [one] pursues; xvi. 23 ; Is. ix. 5 : lxiv. 3, 'from 
everlasting ^pgj S s b [they] have not heard; xlvii. 1, TyV-IW-lp^ sb 
[they] shall not call thee ; etc. Dan. i. 12 ; Hosea ii. 9. This con- 
struction answers to the use of on, tout le monde, etc., in French, or to 
the Greek Xeyovo-i, etc. It is quite common in Hebrew. 

Note 1, Sometimes the Nom. is expressed by E^N, E'TN^ e t c . ; and 
sometimes the act. Part, of the verb is employed as the Nom., as Is. xvi. 
10, T^H ^PHo the treader shall tread, i. e. one shall tread; Is. xxviii. 
4, '"J^Prj ^Hl, the seer sees, i. e. one sees; 2 Sam. xvii. 9; Deut. 
xxii. 8. So plur., Jer. xxxi. 5, D1Sl$n W^? r , the planters shall 
plant ; i. e. one shall plant; Nah. ii. 3. 

Note 2. The 3rd pers. plural, or a Part, plural used as a verb, is 
often to be rendered passively in such cases ; as Job xxxiv. 20, ^PJ 
TSM, the mighty one is removed, lit. they remove the mighty one ; 
Prov. ix. 11, f for by me ^ST]? are increased [lit. they increase] thy 
days, and years ^PV are added [lit. they add] to thee ;■ Gen. xxxix. 
22, f all which 2^ ^^^ was done there,' lit. they did or were doing 
there. Job iv. 19 : vii. 3 : xvii. 12 : xix. 26 : xxxii. 15. Comp. Luke 
xii. 20, ryv ^ v X /f l v °" oy airaiTova-i, thy soul do they require, i. e. thy soul 
shall be required; xvi. 9, that when ye die tiedccvrai, ye may be re- 
ceived, lit. they may receive you. 

(b) Occasionally the second person of the verb is employed in a simi- 
lar way; e. g. Is. vii. 24, HEE? S'lSH VO 9 one shall not come there, 



200 §§501 — 503. syntax; tenses. 

lit. thou shalt not come ; Job xviii. 4 ; Lev. ii. 4. Also in the com- 
mon phrase with the Inf., ^tp^ 1 "T? until thou comest, i. e. till one 
comes. 

TENSES. 

§ 501. As the Hebrew has but two distinct forms of tense, it is ob- 
vious that these must have had a diverse, various, and extended use. 

§ 502. The Praeter and Future forms can be used indifferently, in 
a great many cases, to express the same idea. Both of them may be 
made Aorists by prefixing Vav, § 208, § 209, and by some other par- 
ticles placed before them ; but the predominant use of the Praeter is 
to express past time of some shade or other ; and the predominant use 
of the Future is to designate some shade of future time. 

§ 503. The Procter tense of verbs is used to designate 
the meaning of various tenses. 

(a) For the Perfect tense, which is its appropriate use ; e. g. Gen, 
iii. 13, ' what is this which rvfov , thou hast done ?' iii. 11, ' who T^H 
has told thee?' iii. 14, 17, 22. 

(b) For the Pluperfect tense ; e. g. Gen. ii. 2, ' God finished the 
work n ^, he had made ; ii. 5, ' Jehovah "l^^n "?, had not caused 
it to rain.' 

(c) For the past tense of narration or historic tense ; e. g. Gen. i. 
1, < God M"J3 created;' i. 2, ' the earth nrv^ was/ xxix. 17, ' Rachel 
*nsn~r© ,, : n/rn, wa s beautiful in appearance.' 

The Fut. with Vav conversive commonly follows the Praeter, in the 
same sentence or in a succeeding one, in order to avoid repeating the 
Praeter. This exchange of forms of tenses is common, where a subse- 
quent narration is connected with a preceding one. Comp. Gen. iv. 
2—5; ISam. vii. 15, 16. 

(d) For the present tense ; (1) In verbs signifying quality or condi- 
tion ; as b*72 he is great, E?H he is wise, etc. (2) When the object of 
the verb is to express a state of acting ; as Ps. cxix. 28, ' my soul ^$73 
weeps for trouble;' cxix. 30, ' the way of truth VH^na I choose ; Is. 
i. 15, ' your hands ^fryE are full of blood/ (3) In general propositions 
designating action at any time; as Ps. i. 1, c blessed is the man who 
Tfbn ^b walketh not— TH*T sb treadeth not—2$* «b sitteth not; 
and often so. The Fut. is employed in the same way. 

(e) For the Fut. tense; (1) In prophecies, protestations, and assur- 



§§ 503, 504. syntax ; prater tense. 201 

ances ; as Is. ix. 1, f the people who have walked in darkness ^"J (see) 
shall see a great light ;' Is. ii. 2, '"T^J") and it shall come to pass ; ii. 3, 
4, 11, 17, 19, et saepe. (2) When a fut. form (with a future meaning) 
precedes the Prseter in the same construction; as Is. i. 30, 31, ^H^ 
ye shall be as an oak — "PPJPI '"^'71 an d the mighty man shall be, etc. ; 
iii. 25, 28, ' thy men ^5?1 shall fall by the sword — and her gates ^1 
^ '5^1 shall mourn and lament ; and so often. 

Note 1. The conjunction Vav in such cases may precede the verb 
itself, as in e. 2 ; or precede the Norn, when this stands before the 
verb, e. g. Job xix. 27, f I shall see ^"J ^^l and my eyes shall be- 
hold? where WPJ is made Fut. in sense by the Vav before its Nomina- 
tive. In some cases Vav is omitted, particularly by poetic license, and 
the Praeter still designates the sense of a Future. 

Note 2. Any word expressive of Future time and standing in con- 
nection with any construction, requires the Praeter that follows (with a 
Vav prefixed) to be rendered as a Future , e. g. 1 Sam. ii. 31, { behold 
the days E^NS are coming, , \F)3? , Tp : when I will cut off,' etc. So with 
an Inf. ; as Deut. iv. 30, ^V "1^1 when thou shalt be troubled, TpSSp^ 
and [these things] shall overtake thee ; Gen. ii. 5. So also, Ex. xvii. 
4, tt^p TO yet a little time, "^rJP^ and they will stone me; Ex. 
xvi. 1, ' at evening Di^TO ye shall know.' 

(/) For the Imp. mood; (1) When an Imp. precedes, and the 
Prset. is connected with it by Vav; as Gen. vi. 21, T? np take for 
thyself, i^pfcj'] and collect ; comp. above in e. 2. (2) Sometimes when 
Vav is prefixed without a preceding Imp.; as Gen. xxxiii. 10, ' if I 
have found favour in thine eyes, ^HP^I then take, etc. Ruth iii. 9 ; 
Gen. xlvii. 23 ; Deut. xxix. 7, 8. 

(g) For the Subj. mood in all its tenses, especially when a Fut. 
with a Subj. meaning precedes in the same construction, § 504. h; 
e. g. (1) For the Present ; as Gen. iii. 22, nbt^-fS lest he put forth 
his hand, ^\iX\ and (lest he] take, '2*5"] and Qest he] eat, etc. (2) 
For the Imperf. ; as Is. i. 9, ^ S T\ l we should be as Sodom, Wtt we 
should be like Gomorrha:' Gen. xiii. 13, V^J — ^P?^, should one 
hurry them — then they would die ; Ruth i. 12; Judg. viii. 19. (3) 
For the Pluperf. ; as Is. i. 9, ' unless Jehovah WJVT had left us a 
remnant,' etc. 2 Kings xiii. 19, ' then H^H thou wouldest have smit- 
ten the Syrians.' Job x. 19; Numb. xxii. 33. (4) For the Futurum 
exactum or Fut. perfect, as it is named; as Ruth ii. 21, ^vS'DM IV s 
until they shall have finished; iii. 18; Is. iv. 4; Gen. xxiv. 19. 

§ 504. The Future tense of verbs is used with a variety 
of meaning; viz. 

c c 



202 § 504. syntax ; future tense. 

(a) To indicate future time ; which is its appropriate use. 

(b) For the present tense ; e. g. 3HM S/^J know not ; vD^tf N7, / 
cannot; H*DW ^Nft ? whence comest thou? ^^^fTl^ , what seekest 
thou ? Also in general propositions ; as ' a wise son nE2fi?' , : makes glad 
his father.' Such a case of the Fut. is very common, and agrees with 
the common use in Arabic. 

(c) To designate past time; e. g. (1) Often when preceded by 
particles that indicate past time, (a) By TS then ; as Jos. x. 12, *M 
n 5T, then spake he. (b) By D^ 3 wo£ yet; as Gen.ii.5, <"PrT. Dnt£ 
was not yet, or before it was. But sometimes the sense is future after 
these particles; as Ex. xii. 48; Job x. 21. (2) Sometimes (not very 
frequently) it indicates the past time of narration, i. e. it is employed 
as the historic tense ; e. g. Gen. ii. 6, e and a mist n <??- wen* «p/ etc.; 
ii. 10, 'and thence T3&1 z* was divided; etc.; ii. 25, StttfljMarp «bl : 
««cZ f/?.e?/ were wof ashamed. \I$> this occasioned by the Vav which 
precedes?] Comp. § 503. e. 2. Note 1. 

(d) With Vav conversive the Fut. forms a common historic tense. 

Note. Vav does not always stand before the verb itself in such 
cases, but may stand before some word intimately connected with it ; 
e. g. Gen. ii. 10, TlQI EEJD^ and thence it was divided. 

(e) Without such Vav it is sometimes employed to denote habitual 
or continued action ; 1 Kings v. 25, ' thus much Solomon, W. gave to 
Hiram yearly ;' Job i. 5, e thus ntWT did Job continually ;' 2 Sam. xii. 
31 ; 2 Chr. xxv. 14. 

(f) For the Imp. ; viz. (1) Always where the first or third person 
of the Imp. is needed; as Gen. i. 26, E1W HLP3J3 let us make man; 
i. 3, "nN"" , i7 s : let there be light, etc. Where excitement, urging, en- 
treaty, etc., is to be expressed, the parag. Fut. is usually employed ; as 
H^^, let me rejoice now ; n^pN, let me arise now. (3) In prohi- 
bitions; because the Hebrew Imp. is not used with negatives; e. g. 
Ex. xx. 15, ^n W7 5 steal not, lit. thou shalt not steal. 

(g) For the Optative ; especially when the particle ^3 ^ s subjoined ; 
e. g. Ps. vii. 10, N3""1D^ O that it might come to an end ! Cant. vii. 9, 
sr^rp. O may they be ! 1 Kings xvii. 21 ; Is. xix. 12 : xlvii. 13. For 
the Optative use of the parag. and apoc. Fut., see 203, seq. 

(h) For the Subjunctive; especially after particles signifying that, 
so that, in order that, etc. E. g. after ^$N that, "fl^n that, "! that, 
^ that, *? that, "lfifcg ^^ in order that, ^S that not, ^2 that not, 



§§ 504, 505. syntax ; imper. mood. 203 

7r? that not. Yet the Fut. often follows particles such as the above, 
when a Subj. sense is not required but a Future one. 

(t) The Fut. designates all those shades of meaning, which we ex- 
press in English by the auxiliaries may, can, must, might, could, should, 
would, etc. E. g. Gen. iii. 2, b^S3 , we may eat ; xxx. 31 , TjbfigfcrPTE , 
what must [shall] I give thee? Judg. xiv. 16, T»|!i$ ^Y$\% and should 
I tell thee f Prov. xx. 9, la^B, who can [will] say? So Job x. 
18, 37^, / should have died; Gen. xxxi. 37, Tnbtth., that 7 might 
take my leave of thee ; xxviii. 8, c until that all ^P^. shall have been 
gathered ; comp. § 503. g. 4. 

(j) The Fut. with Vav conversive (which commonly indicates past 
time), is sometimes used as a proper Future, the Vav being rendered 
merely as a conjunction; e. g. Is. ix. 5, ' to us a son shall be given, 
and the government ^H-Hl shall be upon his shoulder/ etc. Is. ix. 10, 
13,15,17: li. 12, 13. 

(k) The Fut. with Vav is sometimes also used, (1) For the Present 
Indie. ; as 2 Sam. xix. 2, ( behold the king weeps '?Nrj*^ and mourns; 
Ps. cii. 5, ' B??f*lj and is dried up. (2) For the present Subj.; as Jos. 
ix. 21, ' let them live, W]!!, and let them be or may they be,' etc. 
Job xiv. 10. But such uses of the Fut. with Vav conversive, are not 
frequent. 

Note. In respect to the forms, etc., of the Fut., comp. § 203, seq. 
Imperative mood. 

§ 505. The Imp. mood and the Fut. tense are nearly 
related to each other, and often they are used almost 
indiscriminately ; comp. § 504./. § 201. The Imp., be- 
sides its proper sense, is employed for the Future ; viz. 

{a) When two Imperatives immediately succeed each other ; in 
which case the latter often has a Fut. sense, and the former a condi- 
tional one; e. g. Gen. xlii. 18, ^Hl ^¥ , do this and live, i. e. do this 
and ye shall live ; Prov. iii. 3, 4, 7 : iv. 4 : vii. 2 : ix. 6 ; Is. viii. 9 : 
xxxvi. 16 : xiv. 22 : lv. 2. 

(b) When an Imp. is connected with a Fut. in the same construc- 
tion, it often has a Fut. meaning ; e. g. (1) Sometimes when it stands 
before the Fut.; as Is. xiv. 11, ^vNtp will ye inquire of me — and 
^*}?^ will ye prescribe to me ? vi. 9. (2) When it stands after the 
Fut. ; as Gen. xiv. 18, rHP]**'] and I will give you . . . ^5*?'! and ye 
shall eat, lit, eat ve. Gen. xx. 7 ; Is. liv. 14 ; Ruth i. 9. 



204 §§ 506 — 508. syntax ; composite verbs, etc. 

Use of composite verbs. 

§ 506. The Hebrew does not form composite verbs, 
like the Greek and Latin, by prefixing prepositions to 
them ; but it inserts a preposition between them and the 
noun or pronoun which follows them. 

Note. Different prepositions are used in order to vary the shades of meaning; and in this 
way a great variety of forms of verbs are made in Hebrew, Aramaean, and Arabic, which may 
be called composite ; like our English, put, put by, put up, put in, put down, put aside, put 
away, put on, put off, put out, etc. 

E.g. ^53 to fall; "^27 bS3 to fall over to, to fall away ; IP ^5? to 
leave, to depart from ; "OS?? ^?5 to fall down before any one. NHj? 
to call; 2J S*n|? to call to, to invoke; *? WjjJ to name. ^NE7 to ask 
with an Ace. of the person ; ^K7 to demand, with an Ace. of the thing 
demanded ; 3 vSE7 to consult any one. 

§ 507. No definite rules can be made out for the very various 
usage of prepositions in these cases. The lexicons and practice only 
can give the requisite information. The following distinctions may aid 
the learner, in a few cases ; viz. 

(a) The preposition ? is often put after verbs signifying to be angry, 
to trust, to hold, to sin against, to reprove, etc. ; also to pray to, to in- 
voke, to worship, to testify against, to look upon, to hear or listen to, 
to smell, to touch, etc. 

(Ii) The preposition 5 is often put after verbs signifying to make, to 
attain to, to become any thing; as 2 Sam. vii. 14, f I will be to him 
"^?:* f or a f a th er C a father], and he shall be to me )^n,for a son 
[a son]; 1 Sam. iv. 9, D^Sjfafcjfe D/T^H, be ye for men, i. e. be men, 
act courageously; Gen. ii. 22, ' and Jehovah made the rib nttJN?, 
for a woman? i. e. a woman. The later Hebrew makes more fre- 
quent use of '. in this way, than the early; e. g. Jon. iv. 6, comp. Ex. 
xii. 27. 

Note. This is the habitual construction after the verb rPH signify- 
ing to become; e. g. Gen. ii. J, ^^1 ^5? : **TT1 an d he became an 
animated being. 

(c) The particles 3, W, V*, f»3, TO?, TnqM, ^b, e tc, are often 
put after verbs ; and they modify, in various ways, the simple meaning 
of them. 

Cases governed by Verbs. 

§ 508. Active transitive verbs govern the Accusative 

case. 



§§509 — 512. SYNTAX j CASES GOV. BY VERBS, ETC. 205 

Note. Many verbs have both a trans, and intrans. sense; conse- 
quently they are sometimes with, and sometimes without an Ace. after 
them : e. g. n ?$ to weep, and to bemoan ; "H j?n to go, and to pass 
through. Gen. ii. 14: SH7J to dwell, and to inhabit; Ps. xxii. 4, "IET 
to sing, and to celebrate with praise ; so ]?/"], " I>t ?', etc. 

§ 509. Many verbs in Hebrew govern an Ace. di- 
rectly without any intervening preposition,, which we 
can translate only by inserting a preposition before the 
noun. 

E. g. ")E?2 to bring good tidings to any one, H^O to be refractory 
against any one, ^*]^ to give a pledge for any one, etc. Among 
these are, verbs of putting off and on, of ornamenting ; of plenty and 
want ; of dwelling in or among ; of going out, coming in, coming upon, 
happening to, etc. Verbs of overflowing , overspreading, etc. take the 
Ace. of the thing with which they overflow, etc. ; as Ex. iii. 8, e a land 
which tEO""p ^7H ^"^1 overflows with milk and honey ; Joel iv. 18; 
Jer. ix. 17; Lam. iii. 48. 

§ 510. Neuter verbs sometimes take an Ace. case. 

E. g. 3H ;on ; to celebrate a feast; HTn Tin, to propose an enig- 
ma, etc. Comp. the English, to run a race, to fight a fight, etc. 
Gen. xxvii. 34; Neh. ii. 10; Ps. xxv. 19, etc. 

§ 511. Verbs governing two Accusatives. All verbs 
which have a causative meaning, (of course the conj. 
Piel and Hiphil generally), may govern two Accusatives ; 
the one usually of a person, and the other of a thing. 

E. g. Ezek. viii. 16, OBn r?PTT^ **ty&> they filled [caused to 
be full] the earth with violence; Gen. xli. 42, ##-vt& Vlfo tf^fel , 
and he clothed him with [caused him to put on] garments of fine linen, 
etc. 

Note. Many verbs in Kal have a kind of causative meaning, or one 
kindred to it, and may therefore govern two Accusatives ; e. g. such 
as signify to anoint, to sow, to plant, to stone, i. e. cover with stones, 
to nourish, to furnish, to rob, to do good or evil to any one, to call or 
name, to command, to convert any thing into another, as Job xxviii. 2, 
n^nD p*)2Tj 1^., stone he fuses into brass ; Gen, ii. 7, ' God made 
man n^"TMn )fo "151? with dust [out of dust] from the earth, where 
*">5? is the Ace. of the material, as grammarians speak. 

§ 512. But the insertion of appropriate prepositions, such as 5, V, 



206 ^512 — 514. syntax; passive — inf. absolute. 

?P, '37 ? etc. before the latter noun in cases like the above, is not un- 
frequent ; so that the Hebrews practised both methods of constructing 
a sentence. 

Many of the cases above may be regarded as having a preposition implied before the second 
noun in the Accusative, if the reader chooses this ancient method of construction. 

Passive Verbs. 

§ 513. The passive forms of verbs which govern two 
Accusatives, retain but one of them; the other being 
usually made a Nominative. 

E.g. Ps. lxxx. 11, TVy^ D'Hil s©3 f the mountains were covered 
with the shadow of it. Ex. xxv. 40: xxviii. 11. 

Note. Sometimes verbs of a passive form have an active sense ; and 
in this case they may govern an Ace, like active verbs ; e. g. Job vii, 3, 
N")tt? ^rTTj ^705/"^ / 1 mve inherited months of vanity, where the verb 
is in Hophal ; Ex. xx. 5 ; Deut. xiii. 3. 

Infinitive absolute. 

§ 514. (1) This is usually put before a finite tense of 
the same verb, and in this position serves to qualify its 
meaning in various ways ; viz. 

(a) It marks intensity of various degrees ; as 1 Sam. xxiii. 22, D"^ 
S^H Dny>, very subtil'ely will he deal; xx. 6, ^StpD Vstp^ he has 
urgently requested; Amos ix. 8, "PEpN TZDtgJn Nv, / will not ut- 
terly destroy. Gen. xxxi. 30: xliii. 3, 7, 3H3 ^"IJO, could we in- 
deed know? xxxvii. 8, JpP-fl m?EO, shalt thou indeed reign? 

(6) It denotes assurance, certainty; asGen.ii. 17, J"fiE£J rV!ft f thou 
shalt surely die ; iii. 4 : xxxvii. 33, *1!^ *V^ , he is surely torn in 
pieces ; Judg. xv. 2, M?"?^*? "'EN surely I thought, or said. 

(c) In general it gives intensity, energy, animation, vivacity, or 
some colouring of this nature, to the expression ; although it is difficult 
always to express it in an English version. 

So the intensive particles of the Greek, German, etc., cannot be well expressed in a trans- 
lation. 

(2) Put after a finite tense, it marks continued action. 

E. g. 2 Sam. xv. 30, rD^l nv27 ^Oli, they went up continually 
weeping ; Gen. viii. 7> ^"^J N12TJ M2J1 a and it continued going and 
returning; Gen. xix. 9, f he is continually acting the part of a judge.' 



§§515 — 517- syntax; inf. absolute. 207 

Is. vi. 9 ; Jer. xxiii. 17; 1 Sam. vi. 12 ; 1 Kings xx. 37 ; 2 Sam. iii. 24 : 
xxvi. 5. In such cases a participle is sometimes used as a second Inf., 
2 Sam. xvi. 5 : or a noun, Is. xxix. 14. 

N. B. Although continued action, etc., is usually designated by the 
Inf. abs. placed after the finite verb, yet there are examples of this po- 
sition which do not appear to differ from the cases under No. 1 ; e. g. 
Is. xxii. 17; Jer. xxii. 10; Gen. xxxi. 15; Dan. xi. 10, 13. 

Note 1. The Inf. abs. is commonly of the same conjugation as the 
finite verb with which it is joined, but sometimes of a different one ; 
as Job vi. 1, 7f7.t^1 y^KD t with Inf. abs. in Kal and finite verb in Ni- 
phal ; Ezek. xvi. 4, FJiftH ^b ^Hrj, Inf. in Hophal and finite verb 
in Pual. 

Note 2. The Inf. abs. is sometimes taken from a kindred synony- 
mous verb; as Is. xxviii. 28, 'SOpH} ^"^Jj he will thoroughly thresh 
him, roots ^"3*$ and ttJspT , both signifying to thresh. 

§ 515. The Inf. abs. is sometimes used adverbially. 

E. g. n^il bene faciendo, for bene ; 1 Sam. iii. 12, rhy] bnn, 
incipiendo etJi?iiendo, i. e. utterly. 

§ 516. In a few cases, the Inf. const, is used as the 
Inf. absolute. 

(a) Adverbially; as Is. lx. 14, TTMIU? incurvando, for n'inE?; Hab. 
ii. 10, niEjp for rf2j7. (b) With a finite verb ; as Num. xxiii. 25, Sp 
to^gn Sb/ thou shalt not curse at all, for 3h|7: Ruth ii. 16, "bw 
Jlbb'in, for b'lbt£ ; p s . 1. 21, n>rjS-nvq for Ti^71 } etc. Instances of 
this nature are so rare, that one hardly knows whether to rank them 
under the head of established usage. 

§ 517. The Inf. abs. is sometimes used instead of a 
finite verb ; and this for any mood, tense, or person. 

E. g. Deut. v. 12, TOtf simply, instead of )rK$0F\ ^'^ , as it is 
in Deut. vi. 17 ; Ex. xx. 8, "foj for -&\n "6| 3 as in Deut. vii. 18 ; 
Job xl. 2, ^bn an contendendo ? for ^"J STJJ , as in Judg. xi. 25. So 
Dan. ix. 5, TlD] ^7*^? > we have rebelled and apostatized ; Est. ix. 6; 
Jer. xiv. 5 ; Gen. xli. 43 ; Judg. vii. 19 ; Ecc. viii. 9 : ix. 11 ; Ezek. 
i. 14, c the living creatures yW^. W1^"J ran and returned ; Ecc. iv. 2 ; 
Jer. xxxii. 44, ' fields shall they buy, -^""9*1 and they shall write bills 
of sale, T3?rp. — D'VVT) and they shall seal them — and take witnesses.' 
Numb. xv. 36 ; Deut, xiv. 21 ; Is. v. 5 ; Ezek. xi. 7, ' you H^H will 
I bring out,' etc. 1 Kings xxii. 30 ; 2 Chr. xviii. 29. 



208 §§517 — 520. syntax; inf. construct. 

For the Imper. ; Deut. v. 12, "taj? keep; i. 16; Jer. ii. 2, S|V??J 
go ; xiii. 1, etc ; Numb. xxv. 17- See the first examples above. 

Note. The Inf. abs. is in some cases to be translated in a passive 
sense : as Prov. xii. J, c the wicked ^P-^, are to be destroyed. 7 This 
is elliptical; the full phrase would be ^^vP. "T^n. So ^^\, Prov. 
xv. 22. 

§ 518. The Inf. abs. is also employed in an energic 
sense, as a kind of nomen actionis, or to denote the prac- 
tice of doing any thing. 

E.g. ^SQB nbr] n*!H1 ttfrjDI. ?h&, cursing, and dissembling, and 
murdering, and stealing, break out, Hos. iv. 2 ; Is. xxi. 5 : lix. 4; Jer. 
vii. 9 : xxiii. 14 : viii. 15 ; 2 Kings iv. 43 : Prov. xii. 7 ; Ps. xxii. 9. 

Note. As the Inf. abs. has generally an intensive sense, whether employed with a finite 
verb or standing alone, it may be called the energic form of verbs. The usage adverted to 
in § 517, 5 518, shows that the Heb. language possesses a most striking power of brevity and 
energy. 

§ 518 a. The Inf. abs. is sometimes employed simply 
as a verbal noun in the Ace. after an active verb. 

E : g. Is. xlii. 24, Tlbn JQM «b, they would not go. Is. vii. 15, 
DiSft in3?*T7 , until he know how to refuse. Jer. ix. 4. 

Infinitive construct. 

§ 519. The Inf. const., being a sort of verbal noun, 
is used like one in respect to construction, position, go- 
vernment, and even form; the plural forms excepted, 
which it has not. 

§ 520. Like nouns, the Inf. const, is used in the va- 
rious cases ; viz. 

(a) In the Norn, case; e. g. Gen. ii. 18, D *p$n *"^9* c tne being of 
the man alone is not good;' xxix. 19, ^00 (Inf. of 10?) ' my giving is 
good ;' xi. 6 : xxx. 15. {b) In the Gen. ; e. g. Gen. xxix. 7, *)D*$n HV, 
the time of collecting ; ii. 4, nitt?5 EV5, in the day of making, Num. 
ix.15; Ps.cxxviii. 2, et passim, (c) IntheDat. ; e.g. Num. vii, 5, ^ 7T\ 
iy$7 } and let them be for serving, i. e. let them serve, viii. 11 ; Ezek. 
xxx. 16, 3?f/3rp 'T.OO, it shall be for being pierced through, i. e. it 
shall be pierced through ; comp. § 523. d. (d) In the Ace. ; e.g. 1 Kings 
iii. 7> ' I knew not ^?5 ^^, the going out or coming in; Jer. v. 3; 



§§ 521 — 523. syntax ; inf. construct. 209 

Gen. xxi. 6. The Ace. here commonly has 7 before it ; as Gen. xi. 8 ; 
Ex. ii. 15. Comp. § 522. § 523. (e) In the Abl.; e. g. Ps. xxxix. 2, 
'I will guard my way W&T172 from sinning.' 

§ 521. Like nouns, it takes prepositions before it, 
and suffixes after it. 

In translating such Infinitives we must generally give them a finite 
sense ; e. g. (a) With ^; as Gen. ii. 4, CN"l]an^ a when they were 
created, Jit. in the being created of them ; Ex. xvi. 7* TOptE 1 ^ be- 
cause he heard ; Is. i. 15. (b) With ? ; as Gen. xliv. 30, "**P5, when 
I come ; xxxix. 18, ^"]l!?, when I lifted up. (c) With \; Gen. 
ii. 3, nht&Sr, when he made it; Is. vii. 15, \n^T?, until he know; 
1 Kings xvi. 7> ' to provoke him by his doings, riVT"] ? in that he was, 
or in respect to his being. In like manner, with IP, TO, ;*$ , 7?^57» 

J"inn, ins, e tc. 

Note. The preposition ?E has often a negative sense in such cases; 
e. g. Gen. xxvii. 1, ' his eyes were dim HWITD, so that he could not 
see? lit. from seeing; xvi. 2; Ex. xiv. 5. For ]E before the Inf. in 
comparisons, see § 454. b. . 

N. B. For the use of the Inf. const, instead of the Inf. abs., see 
§516. 

§ 522. The Inf. const, with ?, in many cases, answers 
to the English Inf. preceded by the particle to. 

E. g. Gen. ii. 5, ( and there was no man "T257 9 to till the ground;' 
ver. 10, ' and a river went out from Eden n'lptprTO 9 to water the 
ground;' xi. 6, ' all which they may purpose ^^?? to do/ etc. When 
^ fS {not) comes before an Inf., the < is put before it ; as Gen. iii. 11, 
' which I commanded thee '?$ " l ^v?"^? not to eai » *■ e - tne ^ n ^* * s 
used as a noun in regimen with ^ f 3 . 

§ 523. The Inf. const, with ?, and with the verb of 
existence (J^JX) expressed or implied, constitutes a peri- 
phrasis expressing the meaning of several forms of the 
finite verb, viz. 

(a) Of the Prseter; as 2 Chr. xxvi. 5, D^nbg ahf? "»rp.l, and he 
sought God, lit. and he was for seeking God ; Gen. xv. 12, ' the sun 
S'l^b "»rrp was about to go down,' lit. was for going down ; 2 Chr. xi. 
22; Ezra iii. 12. 

(6) Of the Present; as Is. xliv. 14, frrrpb [rT/T], he hews down 

Dd 



210 §§523 — 526. syntax; inf. construct. 

for himself, lit. [he is] for hewing down. Prov. xix. 8, { he that is 
wise, ^Ita N2ft57 QnjrT], findeth prosperity' lit. is for finding; Is. 
xxi. 1. 

(c) Of the Future; as Is. xxxviii. 20, 'W^n 1 ? pi^TT] nHm., /e- 
hovah will deliver me, lit. will be for the delivering of me ; Ps. xxv. 
14, f Jehovah D^-pH 1 ? {p^P[ will teach them, 9 lit. will be for the 
teaching of them ; xlix. 15 : lxii. 10; Ecc. iii. 14. So Ps, ci. 8, ' soon 
rp»?S w iU I destroy the wicked of the land, H'Hpn 1 ? I will cut off' 
etc. 

(g?) Of the Passive ; as Jos. ii. 5, c and it came to pass ^p"? 1VWT1 
when the gate was to be shut,' lit. at the shutting of the gate ; Deut. 
xxxi. 17, 'Sfcfj? n xT!> an d ine y sna ^ be devoured, lit. and it shall be 
for devouring ; Is. vi. 13. 

(e) Of the Latin participle in -dus, or the English auxiliaries shall, 
can, must, etc.; as 2 Kings iv. 13, rhfBVb [p^~\ H» , what [is] to 
be done for thee? 2 Chron. xix. 2, "lV^S QTJTJ] StfSbq, */ IOM /d owc 
/*eZp *Ae wicked f Judg. i. 19, H^nVprrj] tfb, fo C ow/d ?20i dis- 
possess them; Hos. ix. 13; Amos vi. 10; 2 Chr. xx, 6. 

§ 524. The Inf. const, (sometimes also the Inf. abs.) 
governs nouns in the oblique cases, like finite verbs. 

Note. The Inf. const, sometimes takes verbal suffixes, i. e. it go- 
verns pronouns in the Ace. The Inf. abs. also, in a very few cases, 
takes an Ace. after it; as Is. xxii. 13, "ifr? bbS*) Jfcfe &HjJ] nj» flTl, 
caidendo boves, etjugulando oves, et edendo camera, etc. 

§ 525. The subject of the Inf. const, (corresponding 
to the Nom. of finite verbs), is usually put in the Gen. 
after the verb. 

E. g. Judg. xiii. 20, — r?^H ^"23721, ln ^ ie moun ^ n 9 U P of the 
flame, i. e. when the flame mounted up ; 1 Sam. xxiii. 6, "VT^^ rT")2S ^ 
in the flying of Abiathar, i. e. when Abiathar fled ; Ps. lxvi. 10. Here 
also belong those cases in which the Inf. const, takes noun-suffixes, i. e. 
suffixes in the Genitive. 

§ 526. Besides the subject in the Gen. after the Inf. 
construct, it also takes the object, i. e. an Ace. case, and 
even two Accusatives. 

E. g. Gen. ii. 4, D'JBIp*') \n« TTp) ri*)by DV»a, in the day ofjeho- 



§§526 — 529. syntax; participles. 211 

vaKs making the earth and the heavens, i. e. in the day when Jehovah 
made, etc. 1 Kings xiii. 4, t^N "nTHM Tf^n Vhyz, when the king 
heard the word of the man, etc. Is. lviii. 5, ' a day it£??2 DIN ni23? f 
when a man will afflict his soul, 7 etc. So with the subject and two Ac- 
cusatives ; as Gen. xli. 39, ntfrbs-n^ fjrviN D^nbH s-nhn •nqtf, 

since God's showing you all this, i. e. since God hath shown, etc. 

Note. The Gen. or subject usually stands next to the verb; but in a 
very few cases the Ace. is put first; as Is. v. 24, 2?N ]1&?7 Wp_ b2N3, 
as the flame of fire devours the stubble ; xx. 1 ; Gen. iv, 15. 

PARTICIPLES. 

§ 527. Active Participles are often used in the place 
of finite verbs ; viz. 

(a) For the present tense ; e. g. Ecc. i. 4, ' one generation Tfbh 
passeih away, and another generation N3 cometh ;' i. 7j> 8; Ps. i. 6 : 
iii. 2 : iv. 7 ; Is. i. 7- In this manner participles are used with pronouns 
of any person instead of verbs, in order to express the present tense ; as 
■03M *n;, I fear; TON Mnj, thou fear est ; ^rm D^, we fear ; 
etc. In intrans. verbs this use is very common. 

(6) For the past tense in all its gradations; e. g. Gen. ii. 10, c and 
a river ^^P issued from Eden;' Deut. iv. 3, ' your eyes have ri'lNin 
have seen;' Gen. xxxi. 17, 18, 19. 

(c) For the Fut. in all its varieties; e. g. Gen. xvii. 19, ' Sarah 
^jT shall bear a son/ etc. xix. 13, DVVntpE), ' we are about to de- 
stroy the city;' vi. 17, ' behold I ^3*5 will cause to come a flood;' 
xlviii. 4 ; Ex. ix. 18 ; 1 Kings xi. 31 : xiv. 10. 

§ 528. Participles, when used as verbs, are subject 

to all the anomalies of concord which are found in 

verbs. 

E. g. Gen. iv. 10, ^i??^ T™ ^ ^V, the voice of thy bro- 
ther's blood cries []cry^. 

§ 529. The two Hebrew participles, active and pas- 
sive, often have the sense of the Latin participles in -rus 
and -dus. 

E. g. Gen. xix. 14, n>?n mrp. /Tntfa, Jehovah is about to de- 
stroy the city ; Ps. lxxvi. 8, N"T1D 9 metuendus ; Ps. xviii. 4, 'Y™> 
laudandus, etc. 



212 §^ 530 — 532. syntax ; participles. 

§ 530. The verb of existence ( n 73) added to the 
participle, makes an Imperf. tense descriptive of con- 
tinued action or condition. 

E. g. Job i. 14, 'the cattle nittJ^h VfJ, wer e ploughing;' Neh. 
i. 4, vbsrjlQ 1 ! DS ^$i> I was fasting and praying;' ii. 13, 15; 
2 Chr. xxiv. 14 : xxxvi. 16 ; Gen. iv. 17 ; Dent. ix. 22, 24. 

Note. In like manner t#1 there is, and ??N there is not, either with 
or without suffixes, are often connected with participles, and form a 
periphrasis for the Pres. tense of the finite verb ; e. g. Judg. vi. 36, ' if 
SPHfiB fpjJj thou savest;' Gen. xxiv. 49: xliii. 5, ' if nbtt?p ^?$,thou 
dost not send away / Ex. v. J6, ' straw ]^J? T^ is not given ; Lev. 
xxvi. 6. 

§ 531. Active participles may govern the same cases 
as their verbs ; but it is a more common construction to 
put them in regimen with the noun that follows. 

E. g. Ps. Ixxxiv. 5, fJJ ,| 3 " , 3^» > , inhabiters of thy house; Ps. 
xxviii. 1, T12 ^T^, the descenders of, [i, e. those who go into] the 
pit ; v. 12, *T£^p ^O*^ the lovers of thy name; xix. 8; Prov. ii. 19. 
Such a Gen. is capable of all the varieties of rendering which belong 
to the Gen. after nouns, § 424. It also admits intervening preposi- 
tions, like nouns, § 432. 

§ 532. Passive participles are constructed with cases 
in various ways ; viz. 

(a) With an Ace; as Ezek. ix. 2, D^3 ate"!?, clothed [with] linen 
garments ; 1 Sam. ii. 18, *"^2S "l^HJ, girded [with] an ephod. So in 
Greek availelyv ivieipevos, II a. 149. (b) With the Gen.; as Ezek. ix. 
XI, D^pan ate 1 ?, clothed [of] linen garments; Joel i. 8, p&Tnyj 
girded [of] sackcloth ; Ps. xxxii. 1, ytPST^tt^ , pardoned [of] sin, 
etc. 

Note. When there is but one form of the participle, as ^72 (from 
nfilQ to die), this is capable of all the meanings and constructions of 
both the act. and pass, participles. 

§ 532 a. Active participles are very often employed 
as mere nomina agentis vel patientis, i. e. are mere nouns 
in the sense of agents actively or passively considered. 



§§ 533 — 536. syntax ; adverbs. 213 

Verbs used as adverbs. 

§ 533. When two verbs immediately follow each other, 
either with or without the copula between them, the 
first of them may serve merely to qualify the second, 
and must then be rendered adverbially. 

E. g. 1 Sam. ii. 3, ^IH ^n bM, do not make much [and] 
speak, i. e. do not say much; Job xix. 3, v^^H^D ^tESn N7 ; ye 
are not ashamed ye stun me, i. e. in a shameless manner ye stun me ; 
Gen. xxvi. 18, *lSn^ ^?J1> an d ^ ie returned and dug, i. e. he again 
dug; xix. 22: xxvii. 20: xxx. 31: xxxi. 28; Hos. i. 6; Ps. Ii. 4: 
lxxi. 20. So Sn^H is used for well, skilfully, Ps. xxxiii. 3, fpDin 
for again, once more, Gen. iv. 2: viii. J 2. H^2 for adfinem, entirely, 
Gen. xxiv. 15. "'HP for hastily, quickly, Gen. xxvii. 20; Ex. ii. 18. 
nS" - ]!! for much, often, 2 Kings xxi. 6 ; Ps. Ii. 4. ^\W for again, 
1 Kings xix. 6; Job vii. 7. The same is true of some other verbs. In 
some cases the second verb is in the Inf. mode ; as Gen. xxvii. 20; Ex. 
ii. 18, etc. 

ADVERBS. 

§ 534. Adverbs in Hebrew are often used in the place 

of nouns. 

(a) In apposition with the nouns which they qualify : as Gen. xviii. 
4, n^-^p, a little water; Neh. ii. 12, tTOO D^M, few persons; 
Is. xxx. 33, nS1 ; n E^??, much wood, etc. (b) In the Gen. after 
nouns; as 1 Kings ii. 31, E2n ''CT, innocent blood; Ezek. xxx. 16, 
DOT "H^, daily persecutors ; Deut. xxvi. 5, E)^ *ER» f ew men, 
etc. 

§ 535. Adverbs standing in the place of nouns, some- 
times take prepositions before them in the manner of 
nouns. 

E. g. Ezek. vi. 10, E?n b«, gratis; 2 Chr. xix. 30, DHO^i sud- 
denly; 1 Kings xxii. 20, ^^3, so, [lit. in the so]; Esth. iv. 16, 1?^, 
so; Neh. ix. 19, 0»V^, daily. 

§ 536. The repetition of adverbs marks intensity. 

E. g. Gen. vii. 19, iNX? ibft?, ver y much; Deut. xxviii. 43, nb^ft 
n 7?i? j higher and higher, nt3$ nt£B ? deeper and deeper ; 1 Kings 



214 §§536 — 539. syntax; prepositions. 

xx. 40, ^irtj ^?n, hither and hither, i. e. here and there, all 
around. 

§ 537. Two negatives in Hebrew strengthen the ne- 
gation. 

E. g. 1 Kings x. 21, ^H3 wb Vp^ )^ } s U ver was no t at all re- 
garded. In the parallel verse, 2 Chron. ix. 20, ^b is omitted. Ex. 
xiv. 11, E* 1 " 1 ?!? ) N S "^b^Ll , because there was no graves at all. 
Zeph. ii. 2, etc. 

§ 538. A negative particle is often joined with nouns 
and adjectives, to qualify the sense of them. 

E. g. Deut. xxxii. 6, E3!"J > not w i> se > i- e. foolish; Ps. xliii. 1, 
"PQn sb, unmerciful; Job xxx. 8, EE7 v5, disgraced; Deut. xxxii. 
21, bS"Wb^ no God ; E3TfcO, n ot a nation, i. e. not worthy of this ap- 
pellation; Is. xxxi. 8, tt^N""', no t a m0 rtal ; x. 15, VF"?, no wood 
at all, etc. This mode of expression is called Xiror^ 

Note. A negative is frequently implied in an interrogative sen- 
tence ; e. g. 2 Sam. vii. 5, nnsn ? w iU thou build me an house? i. e. 
thou shalt not ; as in the parallel verse, 1 Chr. xvii. 4. So Is. xxvii. 
7; Prov. xxiv. 28; Ezek. xviii. 23, comp. ver. 32; 1 Kings, viii. 27; 
Gen. xxx. 20; Job xvi. G, ' if I keep silence ^jb^ *»33"n)3, what de- 
parts from me? i. e. I am not relieved; Cant. viii. 4; Prov. xx. 24; 
Dan. i. 10. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

§ 539. Prepositions both simple and composite go- 
vern the oblique cases of nouns, pronouns, etc. 

For the pleonasm and ellipsis of them, see § 547. § 559. 

Note. The Hebrew language sometimes compounds two or more 
prepositions together, and employs them at one time in the sense of one 
part of this composite word, and 'at another in the sense that each of 
the prepositions separately used would convey; e. g. ^?:0*!$B== , HriN > 
'??*? = b57, ]^7 = ]P^ etc. Yet in most of such cases, the first pre- 
position seems to indicate some relation which could not be expressed 
without it ; e. g. "?£> V means from [something] to [something], an idea 
different from that conveyed by 1^5 simply. 



^540 — 544. syntax; conjunctions — interjections. 215 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ 540. As the Hebrew language possesses but very 
few conjunctions, some of them are necessarily em- 
ployed in a great variety of significations. This is par- 
ticularly the case with the copulative }. But the vari- 
ous uses of this and others, are best learned from the 
lexicons and from practice. 

For some peculiar uses of Vav, see § 558. Note. For the ellipsis of 
conjunctions, see § 561. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 541. Interjections simply expressive of calamity or 
imprecation, often take a Dative after them. 

E. g. 1 Sam. iv. 8, ^b vfc^ wo to us? Ezek. xxx. 2, Ci*b nn ? w0 
for the day ! 

§ 542. Interjections which have the forms of other 
parts of speech, take after them the cases required by 
those forms. 

E. g. Ps. i. 1, VW*i with a Gen. after it; xxix. ], 2, ton, with an 
Ace, etc. 

PLEONASM. 

§ 543. Personal Pronouns. Verbal suffixes are not 
unfrequently pleonastic, being immediately followed by 
the noun to which they have relation. 

E. g. Ex. ii. 6, ^?n-riH -inN^ni, she saw him the child; 1 Sam. 
xxi. 14, lOTtSVIM "tflttjp he changed it his understanding ; Job xxxiii. 
20, Drib VVn nnnqf, his soul abhors it bread; Ps. lxxxiii. 12. 
Such is the predominant construction in the Chaldee and Syriac. 

§ 544. The suffixes of nouns are sometimes pleonastic. 

E. g. Is. xvii. 6, n^b n^^PpS in the twigs of it the fruit tree ; 
Prov. xiv. 13, nTOb nnnqM, the end of it joy ; Cant. i. 6, ^12 
*?$?, my vineyard which [is] to me. Such also is the general usage 
of the Chaldee and Syriac. 



216 §§545 — 547- syntax; pleonasm. 

§ 545. The Dative case of pronouns after verbs, and 
especially verbs of motion, is often pleonastic. 

E. g. Gen. xii. 1, ^(W?. } go for thyself, i. e. go; Cant. ii. 11, W2^\. 
*)b, it has gone for itself i. e. has gone ; Gen. xxvii. 43, ^T f^m^flee 
for thyself i. e. flee; Is. xxxi. 8, 1 ' D3, ^ ie has fled for himself i. e. 
he has fled ; Job xxxix. 4, ^{ -*ntf 'Sb } they turned not back for them' 
selves, i. e. turned not back; Cant. ii. 17» 1? ^OTj compare for thyself 
i. e. compare; Job xii. 1 1, c the palate "tVd^I^., relishes for itself i. e. 
relishes; xv. 28, 'houses which l^b •'Gtp.VNb, t j ie y j noi i n j iao it y or 
themselves' \. e. which no one inhabits; Prov. xiii. 13, VS v^n^ ? he 
shall perish for himself i. e. shall perish ; Job xix. 29, E?t ^^, fear 
for yourselves, i. e. fear ye. The Arabic has the same idiom ; and it 
is also very common in Syriac; and even in the Greek; see Matth. 
Gramm. § 389, 

§ 546. The Dative pleonastic also occurs after par- 
ticiples and adjectives ; but more seldom than after 
verbs. 

E. g. Hos. viii. 9, e a wild ass <? TPl, lonely for itself,' i. e. alone, 
or lonely ; Amos ii. 13, nb nsb^ ) } f u \l f or itself i. e. full ; Ps. cxliv. 
2 } "O^tOvE^, my deliverer for me, i. e. my deliverer. 

§ 547. Of Prepositions. The prepositions 2 and p 
are sometimes pleonastic. 

(a) ^; as Ex. xxxii. 22, 'thou knowest this people that &W1 3TEJ, 
they are evil,' lit. they that are in evil; Hos. xiii. 9, ^HT^ ^" , ? , for 
my help is in thee, lit. in respect to me [\ am] in thy help; Ps. xxix. 
4; Prov. iii. 26; Is. xxvi. 4: xlv. 14, bs 7JS T]N, only thou Qirt] 
God, or only in thee ps] God ; Job xviii. 8 ; Ezra iii. 3. In the three 
last examples, it stands even before the subject of a sentence. This is 
technically called Beth essentia*. 

Note. The name of Beth essentice is also extended to 5 used in 
cases like the following; as Ps. cxviii. J, ^1}^ rr 5 r H, Jehovah is 
among my helpers, i. e. Jehovah is my helper. Ps. liv. 6 : xcix. 6 ; 
Job xxiv. 13; Judg. xiii. 35. 

(b) 19 ; as Deut. xv. 7, ' a poor man TO*? ^H^B, one of thy bre- 
thren,' lit. from one of thy brethren; Lev. iv. 2: v. 13; Ezek. xviii. 
10. This idiom is common in Arabic. 



§§548 — 551. syntax; ellipsis. 217 

ELLIPSIS. 

§ 548. Of Nouns. The Nom. case is sometimes 
omitted before verbs. 

(a) Before verbs used in an intrans. way, in order to denote condi- 
tion or state of feeling ; e. g. Gen. xxxi. 36, 1 v *"in*1 it wa s hot to him, 
viz. *1*3 anger, i. e. his anger burned ; Gen. xxxiv. 7- comp. Gen. xxx. 
2 ; Ex. iv. 14, etc., where ^ is expressed. So 1 Sam. xxiv. 11 , Dn^JI 
T\?y, and it pitied thee, i. e. mine eye (^37) pitied : comp. Gen. xlv. 
20; Deut. vii. 16, etc. where T.V is expressed, (b) Words such as the 
mind of the reader will spontaneously supply, are sometimes omitted, 
viz. such as FljrTj, ETpN ? e. g. Prov. x. 24, the desire of the right- 
eous, 1^1"! he will grant, i. e. Jehovah will grant ; xii. 12 ; xiii. 21 : 
xxi. 13 ; Job iii. 20; Ecc. ix. 9 ; Ps. x. 4, comp. ver. 13, and see below 
in § 555. 

§ 549. The Ace. case after several verbs which are 
in frequent use, is often omitted as being unnecessary 
to render the language intelligible. 

E. g. rn 7J. she bore, i. e. children ; rp3 he concluded, viz. fTH^ an 
agreement ; nt03 he inclined or spread, i. e. ]$^ the ear, or • »!& the 
tent: WE\-he lifted up, i. e. bip the voice ; T!}? he arranged, i. e. 
D^bto words in prayer, etc. These omissions are sometimes supplied ; 
but more generally the noun is omitted. 

§ 550. When the subject of a proposition is required 
by the sense to be repeated in the predicate with some 
addition, the actual repetition of it rarely takes place. 

E. g. Cant. i. 15, E*W ^.TV. thine eyes [[are the eyes] of doves ; 
Ps. xviii. 34 : xlviii. 7 : lv. 7 ; Is. Iii. 14. 

§ 551. In the designation of weights and measures, 
the ordinary words which express the standard of them 
are commonly omitted ; days and months, also, are in 
like manner occasionally omitted. 

E. g. *\P!P. ffjM, a thousand [shekels] of silver ; 2HJ nnto j ten 
[shekels] of gold; 0*1$$ WW six [ephahs] of barley ; Dnb >m two 
[loaves] of bread ; comp. § 463. So in respect to time; as "T^Wa 
ttJ'J - on the first [day] of the month. Gen. viii. 15; Ex. xii. 18; 
Ezek. i. 1. Comp. § 465. 

e e 



218 §§ 552 — 554. syntax; ellipsis. . 

§ 552. Of Pronouns. The personal pronouns are 
often omitted ; e. g. 

(a) In the Norn, most commonly, as in Greek and Latin, (b) In 
the Gen. after the Inf. nominascens, or after a noun ; e. g. Gen. vi. 
19, ni^nn 1 ?, to preserve [them] alive, etc., instead of Di"VPr]n^ ; Ex. 
xv. 2, ' Jehovah is my strength, JTJ??"! and [my] song,* for VTpjri; 
Ps. xl. 10, 11 : lxvi. 6, etc. (c) In the Ace. after verbs; as Ex. ii. 
25, ' and God SH*] observed them/ for DSH"- > so perhaps Ps. exxxvii. 
5, ' let my right hand nStPfil forget [me];' exxxix. 1 : xvii. 11; Gen. 
ix. 22, etc. 

§ 553. The relative pronoun "1#N[ is often omitted in 
various constructions ; viz. 

(a) In the Nom. ; as Gen. xv. 13, 'in a land Enb sb, [which] 
is not theirs ;' Is. xl. 20 : li. 2 : liv. 1 : lv. 5 : lxi. 10, etc. (b) In 
the Gen. after a noun in the const, state ; Ex. iv. 13, ' send *T^ 
nbtt?n ["KP^], by the hand [of him whom] thou wilt send.' See 
§ 433. (c) In the Ace. ; Prov. ix. 5, ' as wine [which] ^^*? / have 
mingled;' Gen. iii. 13, rPttfS n&mD, what is this [which] thou 
hast done ? 

(d) When used to qualify pronouns, adverbs, etc. (§ 478) ; as Ex. 
xviii. 20, 'the way ^ ^7.1 [in which] they go; Job iii. 3, 'perish 
the day 13 "T^JM ["^], [in which] / was born;' Ps. xxxii.2; Is. i. 
30: xxiii. 7, etc.; Ecc. i. 5, E$ WH mit p#H], [where] he arose. 

(e) Sometimes even the pronoun which "N??*?. would qualify, is also 
omitted; as Ps. iv. 8, 'more than in the time DttJtYtfT] EOT [■>?$] 
[in] *®~\ s [in which] their corn and new wine increase, etc. Comp. 
§ 478. Note. 

(f) ""^y in the sense of that which, he who, those who, etc., is often 
omitted; e.g. Job xxiv. 19, ' Sheol takes away ^Wiprj [those who] have 
sinned;' Ps. xii. 6, ' I will place in safety > • fTDJ [him whom] one 
puffs at,' i. e. who is contemned, (g) In an adverbial sense ; as 1 Chr. 
xv. 12, r? ^niZ^Tl ?M to [the place which] / have prepared for it; 
comp. § 478. Note. 

Note. The omission of ~4r ?? is much more common in poetry than in prose. In prose, it is 
generally inserted after a definite noun, and omitted after an indefinite one, as in Arabic. (De 
Sacy, Gramm. Arabe, II. § 363.) 

§ 554. Of Verbs. The verb of existence ( n ?7) is 



§§ 554 — 558. syntax; ellipsis. 219 

commonly omitted between a subject and its predicate, 
especially when the predicate stands first ; see § 446. 

E. g. Gen. iii. 11, "OSM DTT3P3 , /or naked [am] I; iv. 13, Vh| 
^V. , great Qis~| my iniquity, etc. 

§ 555. When the words of any one are repeated, the 
verb "1BN (which marks quotation) is very often omitted, 
and must be supplied from the sense of the passage. 

E. g. Ps. viii. 4, when I behold the heavens, P?** ")£N / exclaim^, 
Lord, what is man !' x. 4, ' the wicked in his pride P 1 ^ has saidT\, 
tEn-p-72 [[Jehovah]] will not punish ;' comp. ver. 13, where the ellip- 
sis is supplied : Ps. Hi. 8, 9 : lix. 8 ; Job viii. 18 ; Ecc. viii. 2, ^, f. e# 

§ 556. When a finite verb would be preceded by an 
Inf. abs. of the same verb, the former is sometimes 
omitted; comp. § 517. 

Note. Besides the above common cases of ellipsis in respect to the 
verb, there are many others, especially in poetry, which cannot be 
made the subject of rules, but must be supplied in conformity with the 
context ; e. g. in Job xxxix. 24; Is. lxvi. 6 ; Ps. iii. 9 : iv. 3 : vi. 4 : 
vii. 9; Jer. xi. 15; 2 Sam. xxiii. 17, comp. 1 Chr. xi. 19; 1 Kings xi. 
25 ; 2 Kings vi. 33 ; Hos. viii. 1 ; Prov. vi. 26. 

§ 557. Of Adverbs. The interrogative n is often 
omitted. 

E. g. Gen. xxvii. 24, "^ nj HWN , art thou my very son, for ni^JKH; 
iii. 1, ^-P H^, is it so then that, for ^ *VSn ; 1 Sam. xvi. 4: xxx. 8; 
2 Sam. ix. 6: xviii. 29; Job xl. 25. Such ellipsis often takes place 
in a negative interrogation before wb; as Jon. iv. 11, D^nM Nv "^S^ 
and should not I spare Nineveh ? instead of ^brj ; Lam. i. 12 : iii. 36 ; 
Ex. viii. 22; 2 Kings v. 26; Job xiv. 16, -lbtp/i ribl., and wilt thou 
not keep watch over my sins? So also before ^?, 1 Sam. xxvii. 10. 

§ 558. When two negative propositions follow each 
other in the same construction, especially in poetic pa- 
rallelism, the negative adverb is sometimes omitted in 
the second proposition, and must be supplied. 



220 §§ 558 — 561. syntax; ellipsis. 

E. g. 1 Sam. ii. 3, e speak not proudly, pJTO N*T., let [not] any rash 
thing proceed from your mouth ;' Ps. ix. 19, ' for he will not always 
forget the poor, the expectation of the afflicted "ON-TH, shall [not] 
always perish; Ps. lxxv. 6; Job xxviii. 17: xxx. 20; Is. xxiii. 4: 
xxxviii. 18. 

Note. When a negative is expressed in the first member of a pa- 
rallelism, and the second has a Vav prefixed to it, that Vav should be 
rendered disjunctively, viz. nor, but, etc. ; e. g. Ps. xliv. 19, ' our heart 
has not turned back from thee, ^nU/N toff)], nor our steps declined; 
Is. xli. 28, to^WJI nor did any answer, or but none gave answer; 
Job iii. 10; Is. xxviii. 27; Deut. xxxiii, 6. 

§ 559. Of Prepositions. The prepositions ^, -J, etc., 
are not unfrequently omitted where the sense requires 
them. 

(a) The prefix 3: as Ps. lxvi. 17, VWJipS ^8, / cried to him 
[with] my mouth, for S TO; xii. 3: xvii. 10, 13, 14: lx. 7, ' help me 
Tf^'S [with] thy right hand; cviii. 7 : cix. 2, etc. Note also that the 
prefix ?, when used as a conjunction, usually excludes 22: as Am. ix. 
11, Obfp ^3 , as [i n ] ^ e ^y, y u for ^.53. (6) The prefix \ ; 
as Prov. xxvii. 7, n ?3P. ^53, [to] the hungry soul, for E^?. 1 ?; xiii. 18: 
xiv. 22 ; Jer. ix. 2. (c) The preposition ]P ; Ecc. ii. 24, ' nothing is 
better for a man bz&lV [than] that he should eat,' for bDtf a EJO . 

§ 560. Of Conjunctions. Conjunctions which would 
express some particular relation of the latter part of a 
sentence to the former, are sometimes omitted, and their 
place is supplied by the copulative Vav *. 

§ 561. Conjunctions which serve to connect words 
and phrases are often omitted f . 

(a) The copulative Vav; as Gem xxxi. 2, DhttJbtt? Vl»fl yesterday 
[and] the day before; Judg. xix. 2, &&$* n ¥?1« D>D;, a year 
[and] /cm r months ; Hab. iii. 11, T^ ^*?*?> *w?z [and] moon; Nah. 
iii. 1 ; Is. lxiii. 11 ; Ex, xv. 9; Judg. v. 27; Ps. x. 3. The asyndic 
construction occurs principally in poetry, or in the phraseology of com- 



* In technical language, that part of the sentence which in cases like the above precedes Vav, 
is called protasis ; that which follows, apodosis. 

t This is called the construct™ asyndetica or asyndic construction, i. e. without ovvdefffxoc, 
or conjunction. 



§§561,562. syntax; ellipsis. 221 

mon life, (b) The disjunctives \ 9 IN, or; as 2 Kings ix. 32, E?2t£ 
Tltiptp i W o £or] three eunuchs ; 1 Sam. xx. 12 ; Is. xvii. 6. (c) The 
sign of comparison ? , " l ^^ : ? , as ; Is. xxi. 8, rTHN Nnp*^ Ae jpi/Z roar 
Qas] a /iow/ Ps. xi. 1, ")15^ E3"in ^ 3 ,./fy *o 2/owr mountain £as] a 
bird; Is. li. 12, who shall be made "^n £as] grass; Job xxiv. 5; 
Ps. xl. 8; Nah. iii. 12, 13. Especially when the second member of a 
sentence has 1? so, the first member often omits 3 ; as Is. lv. 9, ' for 
[as] the heavens are higher than the earth, ]? so are his ways/ etc. 
Ps. xlviii. 6; Job vii. 9; Judg. v. 15. (d) The particles ^ , n#», 
Ma/; as Ps. ix. 21, 'the nations shall know H^n ttfag, [that] ffoy 
are mere men; 1. 21 : lxxi. 8 ; Job xix. 25 ; Lam. i. 21. 

Ellipsis in poetic parallelism. 

§ 562, In poetry, a noun, pronoun, verb, adverb, or 
preposition, expressed in the first member of a parallel- 
ism, is frequently omitted in the second member ; and 
vice versa. 

In the second member, (a) A noun ; as Ps. xxiv. 1, HJPPb 'Jeho- 
vah's is the earth and all that is in it, [Jehovah's is~] the world and they 
who dwell therein,' (b) A pronoun; Ps. xxii. 1, "O^N ' I am a worm 
and no man, \_I am] the scorn of men;' so '"f^^, in ver. 10. (c) A 
verb ; as Ps. xxiii. 3, ' O my God, ^i?^ / call all the day, .... and 
all the night [do I call];' xiii. 3, H^'w H3« IV, 'how' long shall I 
have anxiety in my soul, \_how long shall I have] sorrow in my heart?' 
Is. xlix. 7, ' kings ! WT shall behold and rise, princes [shall behold] and 
do reverence,' etc. (d) An adverb; as Ps. x. 1, ^"^7, e why, Jeho- 
vah, standest thou afar off, [why] hidest thou thyself;' xiii. 3: xxii. 
2, etc. For the omission of sb, see § 558. (e) A preposition ; as 
Job xii. 12, nrt^tp^, with the aged is wisdom, STjV^ and [with] 
length of days is understanding;' xv. 3 ; Is. xxviii. J: xliv. 28, 'saying 
to Jerusalem — ^5^1 an( i [ to ] tne temple/ for vSVyp; xxviii. 6; 
Job xxxiv. 10 ; Gen. xlix. 25, vND 'from the God of thy father — 
^W nS"] and [from] the Almighty,' for riKE ; P s . xxii. 2, ' why art 
thou distant Tl^H [from] the words of my cry,' for v 35 : !*3 ; Job xxx. 
5 ; Is. xlviii. 9 : xlix. 7 : &i. 7- 

In the first member; e. g. Is. xlviii. 11, ' for how shall [my glory] 
be profaned, for I will not give ^"P? 3 my glory to another V And 
so often. 

Remark. These principles of ellipsis are by no means limited to 



222 §§562 — 565. syntax; change of construction. 

poetry ; oftentimes they for substance occur in prosaic parts of the 
Hebrew Scriptures; e. g. Ex. vi. 3, 4. A multitude of obscurities 
in the English translation of the Old Testament might be removed by 
the aid of these principles, and much light diffused over the sacred 
writings. 

CHANGE OF CONSTRUCTION. 

§ 563. When a sentence begins with a verb in the 
Inf., preceded by a preposition and used in a finite 
sense, it often proceeds with -a, finite verb. 

E. g. Ps. lx. 2, 2^- — l^n^O^, when he strove — and returned; 
Gen. xxxix. 18, ^"JI7^J V^P "^"HD?* when I raised my voice and 
cried ; Is. xviii. 5 : xxx. 12 : xlix. 5 Qeri ; Amos i. 11 : ii. 4 ; Gen. 
xxvii. 45 ; Job xxviii. 25 : xxix. 6 : xxxviii. 7« 

§ 564. Sentences often begin with a participle, and 
proceed with a finite verb. 

E. g. Prov. xix. 28, D« TO nW-TJttJp, he who abuses Ms fa- 
ther, [and] chases away his mother ; ii. 14; Is. v. 11 : xlviii. 1 : lvii. 
3 ; Gen. xxvii. 33 ; Ps. xv, 2, 3, etc. 

§ 565. Sentences often exhibit a change of person, 
especially in poetry ; viz. 

(a) A transition from the third person to the second; and vice versa. 
E. g. Is. i. 29, 'for they shall be ashamed of the groves, which ye 
have loved ; Gen. xlix. 4, ' thou wentest up to thy father's bed — he 
went up to my couch;' Mic. vii. 18; Mai. ii. 15. 

(b) A transition from the first person to the third. E. g. Is. xlii. 
24 : xliv. 25, { I am Jehovah who made the universe, — he frustrates 
the signs/ etc. This transition, however, is not very frequent, and for 
the most part it is altered in the Qeri. 

Note. The same changes of person occur also in the use of suffix- 
pronouns, a transition being often made from the first or second per- 
son to the third, and vice versa; as Prov. viii. 17 (Kethib), ' I love 
rp^nS, her lovers/ i. e. those who love me; Mic. i. 2, 'hear ye peo- 
ple, Q^"? a M of them/ i. e, all of you; Job. xviii. 4; Is. xxii. 16, etc. 



§§ 566 — 569. syntax ; constructio pr^gnans, etc. 223 

CONSTRUCTIO PRjEGNANS. 

§ 566. The name of constructio prcegnans is applied 
to phrases, which imply more than the words literally- 
express, although there is no direct ellipsis. 

E. g. Ps. xxii. 22, ^Q^ D'W NHl?^ answer [and deliver] me 
from the horns of the wild bulls, comp. ver. 13 ; Ps. lxxiv. 7, ^ vH V7) t^? 
^7?^ 7?tp*? to i^e ear^A ^a?;e Mey [cast down and] defied thy dwell- 
ing; 1 Sam. x. 9, ^™ ^b D^rjbN iV"1T$D-!, and God changed [his 
heart and gave] to him another heart ; 1 Chr. xii. 17, > 1^< ^fT^ J?, 
6w£ zy to deceive [and betray] wze to my enemies ; Ps. cxviii. 5 ; Is. 
xxxviii. 17; Jos. iv. 18; 2 Sam. xviii. 19 ; Hos. i. 2, etc. 

ZEUGMA. 

§ 567- The name of Zeugma is applied to a construction, where 
two subjects have a verb in common, but this verb expresses action, 
etc., which can with propriety be predicated of only one of the subjects; 
e. g. Job iv. 10, ' the voice of the lion, and the teeth of the young lions, 
are broken out,' i. e. the roaring of the lion [is made to cease], and the 
teeth, etc. Gen. xlvii. 19, ' wherefore should we die, we and our land,' 
i. e. we die, and our land [become desolate]; Is. Iv. 3; Hos. i. 2; 
Jer. xv. 8; Est. iv. 1. 

§ 568. The figure Zeugma also includes those cases where nouns 
are grammatically connected with preceding nouns, when in respect 
to sense strictly considered such connection cannot be admitted ; e. g. 
Ps. lxv. 9, ( thou makest "^.^p^, the outgoings of the morning and the 
evening to rejoice/ where outgoings cannot be predicated of evening ; 
Gen. ii. 1, ' the heavens, and the earth, and all ^^ iae nos ^ of them, 
i. e. the host of the heavens, viz. the stars. Compare Neh. ix. 6. 

HENDIADYS. 

§ 569. The name Hendiadys is applied to a construc- 
tion, in which two nouns are put in the same case,, and 
connected by a copula, while in respect to sense one of 
them must be taken as a Gen. following the other, or 
as an adjective qualifying the other, § 443. 

E. g. Gen. i. 14, 'and they shall be for signs, ^"T^tty^ and for 



13? 



«b 



nb 



Pr^t. i 



Pr^t. 
Inf. 

Fut. 
Part. 



H 


*$ 


T T 


n?a 

T T 


nop 

T '|T 


t It 


t : it 


nrbz 

t :It 


ntip 


jm 


dn^o 


jrb-i 


Dj^n 




axon 


nb^n 


opin 




ason 


Jifen 


DjW 




NSD* 


n^p 


□p^ 




N^ftO 


n^o 



Pr.£T. j D?^^ 

Inf. j D ? ;, P ; ? r T 

FuT< DDipiT 

Part. ! d ?W 



N-xann nbirin 



) himself, and practice for a few 
able progress in the knowledge of 
)s in Kal, on one day; those in 
; and keep on repeating this prac- 
ately distinguish all the different 
e same conjugation, he will in the 
repaid for his labour. 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW 

OP ALL THE CONJUGATIONS OF THE HEBREW VERBS. 







Verb Reg. 


3 Gutt. 


BOatl 


"5 Gutt. 


ND 


•5 1. 


4 if 


l's 


9 3l 


" ,J 


..:: 


s^ 


















KAL. 










* 


Pb,e 


t. 3 m. 


bw 


lay 


Pi'! 


yavri 


to» 


3W; 


aa; 


Wj: 


a? 


op 
nag 
najj 

■i 

BRBg 

Dip 

ap 

Dip' 

mpn 

nraipri 


na 

W3 








3f. 

2 m. 

3 (pi.) 


rbap 


niay 

VTDJf 


npyi 


nyaw 


rtojl 
$a» 
Aon 


naW' 
nag; 


(T3BJ 

™a; 
iaa< 


nwa 


H3D 

rtao 


sua 
n»ffl 


*3 

rtn^ 


Inf. 
Put. 


2 m. 

abs. 
const. 

3 m. 

3 (pi.) 
3f. 


bap 
tep; 

Aep; 
nAisjjn 


□may 
liay 
lay 
ibyi 
lbyn 
■nay; 
ruibyn 


Dnpyt 
PW 

piii 

??H 
pytn 


Dnyaw 
yiaw 
yaw 
yetf; 

satin 
Waw; 

rayawn 


^>i3N 
>-. 

Aa* 

riAaRn 


a^aw< 
aiw; 
•naj? 
ai»: 

2W,1 

uw; 
nuwji 


o^aa' 
a^a; 

aa-; 

aa<n 

«a" 

ruaa-fl 


OJlWM 
WiM 

nil 

Wa; 

•1WJ; 
raWjin 


Drtap 

aiaj 
ab 
3b; 

abfl 

13D; 
™>3i?n 


Bfua 
na 
ra 
raj 

pin 

ya; 


,N T« 

o.iK-i-a 
to 

»sa; 
Nxan 
wsa; 

raspn 


nnAa 

*| 

ni 1 -: 

niin 
Ai; 

n;'J?4" 


Imp. 


2f. 


lay 
nay 


pyi 


yae 
'yaw 


bin 


a«» 

i^W 


aa; 

"a; 


'W3 


3D 

lib 


Dip 
'»lp 


T a 


Nsa 


ni| 
4j 




pass. 


Viap 


lay 
nay 


pvi 

piy; 


yaw 
yiaw 




aw- 
a^w; 


aia' 


WJi 
WUJ 


aab 

313D 


D B 


la 


^a 
















NIPHAL. 
















Pr.T.T 


3 m. 


tepa 


"'?w 


P?P 


yaw 


^aw 


awij 




W3J 


a?J 


Dipj 


liaa 


»SBJ 


nba 




2 m. 


rnap: 


rnaw 


npyn 


nyawj 


r ;'??s'j 


jiawu 




riWM 


riiao: 


ntoipa jii:iai 


nsjiaj 


'jAm 


Inf. 




" t *?vo 


PYJ n 


yw'.i 


toKn 


2Vf! 




IW?7 


3Dn 


Dipri 


liari 


Nsan 


nfen 


#*" 




tep_> 


1»£ 


P?J! 


yaiif; 


toa; 


ivy. 




"m; 


3D' 


Dip; 


pa; 


»sb; 


% 


"Imp. 




^?pn 


layn 


Wrf! 


yawn 


^asn 


a«?jn 




"•^r 1 


3D.1 


Dipn 


pan 


SSBil 


rtm 


Part. 




i^M 


PJ?U 


yam 


^asu 


awij 




WM 


a» 


Dip: 


p33 


•w 


iS: 














P1EL (Pool, Polol). 














Piuet 




^9P. 


i?V 


TO 


yaw 


k» 


aw; 


aa; 


W33 


aaiD 


Daip 




xsa 


nVs 


Inf. 




top 


^b? 


TO 


y? 1 ? 


tar. 


a«?: 


aa; 


"S 


aato 


DUip 




Ksa 


ni'ja 


Put. 




tep; 


lay 


TO! 


yaw; 


*>»: 


a?]' 


aa;; 


*S! 


aaiD' 


bb^p; 




MSBi 


nVj; 


Part. 




^?P_<? 


laya 


TO . 


yawa 


taxa 


ai^;a 


aa;a 


isaa: 


aaiDa 


Daipa 




SSBB 


rrtaa 










(Imp. SBK?) 
















(Imp. nb?) 














PUAL 


(Pool, Polol). 














Pr,et. 




biaja 


lay 


TO 


yaw 


ta.N- 


3? h 


aa< 


\Ba 


aaiD 


Daip 




Nsa 


nfc 


Inf. 




to? 


lay 


TO 


yaw 


tasj 


aw 


aa- 


W3J 


aaiD 


Daip 




sp 


nfe 


Pot. 




bapj 


lay 


TO] 


yaw; 


tas; 


aw;; 


aa;' 


I03JI 


aaiD- 


DBip; 




Np' 


.iSr 


Part. 




tepa 


laya 


Tjaa 


yawa 


taaB 

(Imp 


a^a 


aa'a 


W3JB 


33iDB 


Daipa 




Nsaa 


n^:a 














HIPHIL. 
















PltffiT. 


3 m. 


b'Qpri 


Tayn 


pvwn 


yawn 


^assi 


a'Win 


a'a\i 


W'jn 


apn 


D'pil 




N-i-an 


r*jn 




2 m. 


jitepn 


nibyn 


WW 


iyaw.1 


ritax/l 


nawin 


naa'rj 


rjisan 


niapn 


/lia-pn 




™san 


njjn 


Inf. 




b<Bjjn 


"PByn 


p-ytn 


yawn 


^asn 


a'Win 


a'a - n 


war; 


a?T 


D'pn 




N'i-a.i 


nfen 


Put. 




i»Bp; 


Tay; 


p*n 


yaw; 


^'?K 


a>Wi' 


a'a" 


Wj; 


ap; 


o'p; 




(jisa; 


niji; 


Part. 




Vapa 


i\aya 


p'yi? 


yaWa 


tosa 


a-wia 


3'B'B 


iS'ja 


apa 


D'pB 




N'^aa 


rfjoo 










(Imp 


satprj) 
















(Imp. n L :n, 




Prjet. 




^>Dpn 


■"ay. - ; 


pyjn 


yawn 


tasri aitfir? 


aoin 


■w 


3DM 


DP'-l 




N m 7 


n>i 






^opn 


"'?¥'7 


pyin 


yaw.i 


tosn 


awin 


ap-in 


Wil 


3CT.1 


apn 




Msion 


nvijn 


Put. 




"?tDp; 


"™" 


PI''; 


!"??'. 


^si 


aa'v 


3BV 


0r 


3DV 


Dp' 




.\i-a- 


— 




^apa 


" , 9¥9 


pyia 


yaeto 


toxa 


a-i'ia 


3BK3 


.':- 


3Dia 


DjJB 




Niaa 


rton 














(Imp 


^.iog.) 


























IIITI1PAEL 




















tepnn 
Sap/in 
tepn; 
tepna 


layjin 
iBVnn 


TCaiyi ynrrew 


ta»nn 


stKiyi 


3BW1 


tfarei — ■:,-! Dtfpnn 




ttsann 




I'i; i i 




!jT3jin yaflin 


'asm 


Hfyjn 


3BW 


.::-- rtlann Doip«7 




ttonn .--;.-T 


Inf. 
Put. 
I'm-.i. 




laina 


^lan; 

liana 


ya/v:" 
panda 


te»n; 
taHno 


a*yia 


3BW 

3b;jib 


i; ;•;-.-• 

- : Drtpro 


HXBJT 
NXBJTD 


■Aina 



n, .ti,.:^.- '■■'■■■' ' 

He i« W i m**» ':":::: a ^^ Va uh m 

. .vlioits tol„^;o.Jl '-•;-- lvbcolultth(!V 



^'nscnhrt*'" 111 



If the student nil! be faithful to himself, nod practice for a few 
weeks, after he has made some tolerable progress in the knowledge of 
form*, the declining of all the rerbs in Kal. on one day : thoae in 
.1 keep on repealing this prac- 
tice until he can readily and accurately distinguish all ihe different 
forms of the different verbs under the same conjugation, he will in the 
end be eery amply and satisfactorily repaid for bis laboor. 



PARADIGMS 



VERBS AND NOUNS 






196 



PAR. I. REGULAR VERB TRANSITIVE 



212—219. 







Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Piel. 


Preet 


. 3 m. (sin 


g .) foij 


33n 

- T 


fop3 


^?R 




3f. 


nfop 

t :'it 


rr33i 

T : IT 


nfop:i 

t : ': * 


nfop 

t : ' • 




2 m. 


t : -'t 


mbi 

t : - t 


t : -': • 


.nfop 

t : -'■ 




2f. , 


pbvj) 


rum 

: : - t 


nfop: 


nfop 




1. 


\nfop 

' : -'t 


vofn 

• : - t 


^?i?J 


^^p 




3. (plur 


) ^fop 

.It 


1331 

: it 


ifop: 


ifop 




2 m. 


Dfifop 


D ^?"l 


Dr)fopj 


nnfop 




2 f. 


infop 


V3??1 


W!fy?B 


infop 




1. 


vbfa% 


*D33i 

: - t 


siAopi 


ttfop 


Inf. 


abs. 


't 


1*7 ( bi 


SDj7?)foj5n 


fop_ 




const. 


fop 


»1 


fojsn 


fop 


Fut. 


3 m. (sin 


g .) fop> 


331^ 


fop 1 ' 


fop^ 




3f. 


fopjn 


331*) 


fop;-! 

•*'t * 


fopn 




2 m. 


fopr) 


331H 


fojsin 


fopn 




2f. 


''fopri 


♦331H 


^fop;i 

■ :'it • 


•'fojpri 




1. 


fopa 


n ?1>* 


••'t V 


fopi* 




3 m. (pi« 


r.) *fop 


!)33"V 


ifop^ 

: 'it- 


!)fojT> 




3f. 


t : : 


t : - : • 


rubhpn 

t : "'t • 


mfopil 




2 m. 


!)fop,n 


W3nn 


ifopjn 

: 'it • 


ifoptt 




2f. 


nAiopn 

t : ' : • 


rmlin 


rubvpn 

t : "'t • 


rtifopn 




1. 


fopJJ 


3313 


fop^ 


^i?-? 


Fut. apoc. 


Imp. 


2 m. (sins 


,) fop 


331 


foj3il 


fop 




2f. 


*»fop 


031 


^fopn 

• :'it ■ 


>fop 




2 m. (Plur.) ^fop 


!)331 


^fopn 

:'it • 


ifop 




2f. 


rufop 

t : ' : 


H1331 

t : - : 


mfopn 

t : "'t • 


rufop 

t : "'- 


Parte 


:. act. 


foip 


3311 




fopD 




pass. 


fcbg 


2^31 

T 


fop: 
t': • 





PAR. I. REGULAR VERB 


TRANSITIVE. §§ 212—219. 197 


Pual. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Hithpael. 


(btap T ) b®j? 


b^pn 


fbttpn) bzopn 


(bts|2nn) ^pnn 


etc nbap 


nb^pn 

t •' : • 


etc. nbapn 

t :': t 


etc. nbtaprin 

t :'- : • 


rb&p 


,nbtbpn 

t : -' : • 


pbhpn 

t : -' : t 


rbtopm 

r : -'- : • 


pbtop 


pbvpn 


jnfojpn 


nbtopnn 


>nb&p 


\nbtbpn 


• : -' : t 


rfibb^nrr 


&top 


•lb^pn 


^bapn 

:': t 


btopnri 


nrbBp 


n^baprr 


nrtepn 


nnbtepnn 


]pb®p 


]nb&pn 


wtepn 


)r\b®p_m 


tibhp 


vbbpn 


ttbDpn 

: - : t 


^bhp_m 


btip 


b^pn 


btopn 

••' : t 




b®p 


bwpT\ 


bapn 


btopjyn 


£mjg) b®j)> 


bw$i 


(boRj) bap^ 


(btapn : >) bfcp/V 


etc. blSfcft 


bwpn 


etc. btOp.fi 
-': t 


etc. b®p_nn 


tegrt 


bwpn 


btopr) 


btopnn 


^bjv\ 


tyapF 


• :': t 


*b®pnn 


bfigK 


^DpN 


btopa 

- ': t 


*>®?/]* 


!|te|^ 


^bp> 


^bzap^ 

: ':t 


typjy 


t : -'••. : 


nAfijpjn 


mbtbp.fi 

t : -' : t 


Tvbtopnn 

t : •• '- : • 


*btopn 


^BRJ^ 


ibtDpn 

:' : t 


tepAfi 


nphpn 


nAoRJi 


mbhpn 

t : -': t 


n&hpnn 


bisfb 


^DJtt 


bap: 

- ':t 


btopr)} 


^£i?- 




btopn 




(bagnn) teghn 




*!?%n 




etc. ^BgJllI 




^bpn 




•ibtsprn 




nAfepi 




rtAbpnn 




b^zopb 




tep/iD 


(bfcg& : ) bzapD 




(btapE) biopD 





PAR. II. REG. VERBS INTRANSITIVE. §§ 220 — 222. 



Kal. 



Kal. 



Kal. 



Kal. 



Preet. 3 m. ») b$p r 

3 f nbBU) 

" f * t : it 

t : - t 

2 f. Fb&& 

1 \n*7Btfl 

• : - t 
3. (plur.) b$V 

2 m. DJgtett? 

2 f. y$]Btf 

1 . -1^310 



^ttj IT 

t -: it > t :Jt 

fbfotf (nib") rr6> 

t : - t Vt.-t; t : yr 

-: t :'t 



13' 

T 

t:it 

T T 

: : t 

• : t 

:It 

Dill^'' 

v :t: 



Inf. 


abs. 
const. 


T 


Li^.^i (The other forms in these two words 
/ Ws\U belong to the irregular verbs.) 

biW 


Fut. 


3 m. (sing.) 

3f. 

2 m. 


bBitfn 


but) 
bxtin 




2f. 


'bstin 


*towjfl 




1. 


^DtfN 


bxvx 




3 m. (Plur.) 

3f. 








2 m. 
2f. 








1. 


*?St£) 


bxm 


Imp. 


2 m. (sing.) 

2f. 




bm 




2 m. (Plur.) 

2f. 


rubhti 

t : - : 


mbkv 

t : - : 



Part. act. 
pass. 



b^ti 



bw& 



PAR. III. VERBS 5 GUTT., SMOOTH ENUNCIATION. § 224. 199 






Kal. 




Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Preet. 




- T 




Tpg? 


Twggn 


Toyrr 

- t: t 






t : it 




rnB?3 


rrpagri 


t : T T 






t : - t 




ijT^ga 


mjn 


t : - t: ' t 






FHQP 

: : - t 




*?"!?#?. 


flTOgn 


mDyrr 

: : - t: r 






• : — t 




TO 


wjjn 


• : - t: t 


Plur. 




: it 




^??3 


ircign 


rroyn 

: t t 






dbid; 




DJjnfijg 


DJTiDjrn 


v : - t: t 






V?T9g 




Tnigjg 


TO738T! 


yvrfcyrr 

v : — f: t 






: " t 




TO 


ww? 


: -t: t 


Inf. abs. 


T 




rrtqga 


Tp^n 




c 


onst 


iw 




Toyrr 
.. T .. 


TQJJTT 


TDyrr 

-t: t 


Fut. 


T&JP 


Pin.' 


.. T .. 


TI2&5 


TDJP 
-t:t 






Tb#n 


pTPrn 


Toyjn 
.. T .. 


"PCigJn 


TDJtt) 

- t: t 






Tqgn 


ptrrii 


td^ji 

•• T , " 


Togn 


T&jwn 

- t: t 






najwn ■'ptnn 


noyrj 


7OT 


• : t t 






^w 


ptna 


tdw 
.. T .. 


Taga 


-t: t 


Plur. 




n^; 


•lpnr 


: it" 


W 


: t t 






nrr&w roptrin 

t : -: - t' :— .•: v 


t : •• t •• 


t : — : - 


rmqyn 

t : -t: t 






rttiyn ^pjrvj 


HOT 

: it •• 


^PS*! 


: t t 






njrSgn n^pnn^ 


t : •• t •• 


nrrgjta 


t : -•■ r: t 






t&jh 


prm 


tow 
.. T .. 


T PP_ 


- t: t 


Fut. apoc. 








T£3P 




Imp. 




iag 


ptn 


Toyn 
.. T .. 


T?gn 








HD^ 


^?rr 


noyn 

• : it •• 


n^rr 




Plur. 




rrcu? 


W. 


: it •• 


rrpyn 








nrriay mprrr 

t : -: t' :- -: 


runfeyn 

t : •• t •• 


rtrrbyn 

t : •• -: - 




Part. 


act. 


TDty 






TEJgD 






pass, W 




^?J?3 




TWO 

t t: t 



200 PAR. IV. VERBS S GUTT.. ROUGH ENUNCIATION. ^ 225. 



Kal. 



Kal. Niphal. Hophal. Hiphil. 



Praet. 


(bin) bin 


-on 

- T 


■SISTU 


Tjsnn 


y&tt 


3f. 

2 m. 




n*?nn 

t : it 

pbin 


nn:n 

t : It 
etc. 


rosru 

t : : v 

etc. 


rD3nn 

t : : t 
etc. 


rrvunn 

t * : v 

etc. 


2f. 




pbm 










1. 




V)bin 










3 (Plur.) 




bin 




WBTO 


oan 


rwwi 


2 m. 




urbin 




etc. 






2f. 




]nbin 










1. 




tibin 











Inf. abs. b'Mn -fan ivnn 

t t •• : - 

const. bin -bn ^jHjnn yznn "vpnn 



Fut. 3 


m. 


bin* 


inn* 


ttn*> 

' •• T" 


- :t 


TO 


3f. 




bmn 


iann 


Tfsnn 


^nn 


■win 


2 m. 




Inrvi 


iann 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


2f. 




"bmn 


narvi 








1. 




bmx 


iana 








3 m. 


(plur. 


&!W 


nun 1 ' 








3f. 




nibinn 


rtpann 








2 m. 




tfnroi 


nann 








2f. 




mbinn 


mnsn^ 








1. 




^nm 


iato 








Imp. 2 


m. 


bin 


ian 


Tjsinn 




ipnn 


2f. 




^-in 


n:n 


• : it •• 




etc. 


2 m. 


(plur. 


) ^nn 


nan 


^DHinn 

: It •• 






2f. 




npin 


n:"i:n 

t : ~: 


mDsnii 

t : •• t •• 






Part. act. 


bm 

•• T 


iy\n 






TO 


pass. 






TBPg 


t : t 





PAR. V. VERB 37 GUTTURAL. 



229—232. 



201 



Kal. 




Niphal. 


Piel. 


Pual. 


Hithpael. 


P?l 




poni 


(3J73) ^2 


(\rrno ^-}i 


T3vn 


npyr 

't-:t 




njj^n 


etc. flTO 
t : •• 


etc. rma, 

t : 


nnanrr 

t : It : ■ 


t':-t 




jjpro 


t : - •• 


t : - 


t : - t : • 


FWi 




fjjgftt 


rp-a 


rp-Q 


ro-anrr 

: : - t : • 


\npyt 




ynjjgra 


OT2 


*JWll 


ttpWn 


W r 




^ 


tiia 


•0")i 


wmnri 

: it : • 


nn$n. 




Dtffgfa 


^^ 


arana 


Draninn 


WM 




TnRgti 


W3?13 


V5?l^ 


ira'tann 


i#I 




wpyn 


udhzl 


^?Tpi 


wnann 


pw 












pyt 

A 




py-jn 


TSa 


Tja 


^onrr 


tin? 




PSf. 


pnglj in;tt 


(VCnV) Tp* 


Tl¥)\ 


nrtin \ 


33nh 


raj*! 


etc. tfnin 


etc. Tpiiin 


Taznn 


pmn ' 


TVTJn 


Bwn 


^nyi 


TW 


T)znn 


Sjyyjn * 


25^ 


TSV^ 


• : IT : 


•q-pn 


• : It : • 


brpa 


PS|*$ 


pS» 


TJ?** 


^ha 


T}3™! 


•IDrW 


^ 


W£ 


: it : 


mi* 


: It :• 


robn:i;n rupiw 


nirojn 


rurran 

t : - t : 


nxrhn 

t : - : 


t : - t : • 


jjDmjn Jipvm 


j)pg$r> 


: it : 


•■D-pn 


: it : • 


n^Dni^ rupyrn 


nipjttri 


rtcrnh 

t : - t : 


rurnin 

t : - : 


t : - t : • 


proa 


P?jJ 


8$ 


T*A 


TP? 


T3^ 


P^f 




w*n 


(ans) ^j-)i 




Tiznn 


W. 




T?sjn 


etc. 0"I2 
• : it 




• : it : • 


WL 




w-jn 


: it 




: it : • 


™$k\ 




t':-t • 


t : •• t 




rurranrr 

t : •• t : • 






(M33P)^T30 



Tiano 



p?w 



c c 



202 



PAR. VI. VERB *p GUTTURAL. §^ 233 — 236. 





Kal. 


NiphaL 


Piel. 


Prset. 3 m. (sing.) 


- T 


JflMft 


(yaa?) yattf 


3f. 


t : it 


t : : • 


etc. nyDttf 

t : • 


2 m. 


t : - t 


ijJDtftJ 


Fmv 

t : - • 


2f. 


: - - t 


flflflStt 


tyhti 


1. 


• : - t 


V^DttfJ 


yqjratf 


3. (Pi".) 


: It 


wtwb 


waw 


2 m. 


D^D^ 


DJJltfMfc 


DW&tf 


2f. 


lfJ?Dttt 


tflfibtftj 


W??*? 


1. 


: - t 


^?aw 


^yatt| 


Inf. abs. 


T 






const. 


ybtfl 


- T ' 


y&tf 


Fut. 3 m. (sing.) 


^?^! 


- T - 


(28Hft) TO^> 


3f. 


yotfjn 


ymr\ 

- T • 


etc. jtetwn 


2 m. 


yDtftt 


- T ' 


y&ttf/n 


2f. 


9?»«fcn 


• : it • 


flHWffl 


1. 


JtfSttfK 


- T V 


3K30tt 


3 m. (plur.) 


ftDtf* 


: It* 


wwh 


3f. 


t : - : 


t : - t 


ftgi&n 


2 m. 


•WDlWn 


: it ♦ 


wmn 


2f. 


rojpDHfcn 


t : - t • 


t : - - : 


I. 


^?^ 


- T ' 


y®tf} 


Fut. apoc. 


Imp. 2 m. (sing.) 


yatf 


- T ' 


(BJBf) y?# 


2f. 


^DW 


• : it • 


etc. *?&# 


2 m. (plur.) 


Wptf 


: It • 


tyDttf 


2f. 


myibtf 


t : - t . 


ruyibttf 

t : - - 


Part. act. (safe") ??W 




(3?a^p) ^a^D 


pass. 


T 


t : • 





PAR 


VI. VERB lj 


GUTTURAL. 


§§ 233—236 


;. 203 


Pual. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 




Hithpael. 


yatf 


ywn 


yoi^n 


(yant^n) 


yftntin 


t : ••. 


nsHbisn 


nyotfrr 


etc. 


t : - : • 


t : - ••. 


TOOtWl 


jwottfrr 




t : - - : • 


■ny&tf 


w^^n 


TOUri 




WDii^rr 


vbhwj 


Wbttfn 


wwbttfn 




WDfitfn 


watf 


Wn 


wotctrr 

: : t 




wanton 


nwatf 


Drawn 


v : - : t 




DWpntfrT 


V3??i? 


twottfrr 


V3?otfn 




V3?an^pT 


w^ 


I3JOW 


: - : t 




Wfonttfn 


yptf 


rotwi 


- : t 




y&ntfrr 


ya^ 


jpaa^ 


- : t 


(y&nwy 


y&^tfrt 


y&tfn 


spDtfjn 


- : t 


etc. 


ypr)tfn 


y&tto 


JPDtWn 


yntin 




y&r?tto 


SrtDtttn 


>yotttn 


i^btttn 




^aajatfn 


yatwj 


yptf» 


yDttfK 




yanwj 


WDtf* 


^D^ 


tow 




^w 


rwawn 

t : - ••. : 


rwbtftn 


iTOHMto 




t : - - : 


WDtftn 


Wpttfn 


: : t 




ty&rttfjn 


t : - ••. : 


royown 

t : - : - 


t : - : t 




t : - - ; 


yBt^3 


ywj 


- : t 




yfontto 


2£B?> 




tf?tfn 




(san^n) 


jaantfn 




^Dtef'rr 




etc. 


ty&JWn 




^pttfn 






tyftntfn 




ruwrr 






njj^ttfrr 



rfctfrr 



(TOJjnfS) y&iitfp 



yDTO 



y»ttfD 



204 



PAR. VII. VERBS NS. §§ 240, 241. 





Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Praet. 3 m. 


tea 

~ T 


- T 


k§3 


toan 


tearr 

- t: t 


3f. 


(regular) ( 


regular.) (s 


is 2 Gutt.) (as q Gutt.) as q Gutt. 


Inf. abs. 


tea 


"ftDK 








const 


. tea 


ib» 


tean 
.. T .. 


b^xn 


tearr 

- t: t 


Fut. 3 m. 


te# 


"i»tf» 


tew 


b^OW 


tew 


3f. 


te^n 


1»*ta 


te*tft 


etc. 


etc. 


2 m. 


tewi 


"mn 


tetffl 






2f. 


^teita 


n»*ta 


^aiwn 






1. 


tea 


TDh 


te^H 






Plur. 3 m. 


}te# 


no# 


*te»* 






3f. 


rote&i r 


waifa 


nAlbttn 






2 m. 


te*n 


noita 


itean 






2f. 


rate^n ? 


tnbrtn 


mtean 






1. 


te*to 


nD*to 


tew 

.. T .. 






Fid. apoc. 








te^n 




Imp. 2 m. 


r sing.) TON 


ibvt 


te^n 

*' T " 


tear; 




2f. 


*tetf 


n»a 




etc- 




2 m. 


'plur.) V?3N. 


noa 








2f. 


t : -: 


n f??** 








Part. act. 


telN 






ta«D 




pass. 


T 




tew 

t v:v 




teas 

tt: t 



The derivative conjugations of verbs S3 are declined in the same 
manner as those of Guttural; S being treated (out of Kal) as a 
Guttural, and not as a Quiescent ; see Niphal, etc. in the Paradigm. 
In like manner, Piel ^5*^ p ua l v3S, Hithp. v?Nrjn • compare verbs 
Q Guttural, "TQ3f and P?n , for the mode of inflection. 



PAR. VIII. VERBS ORIG. fe ; I. CLASS >D . ^ 243—247- 205 





Kal. 


Kal. 


Niplial. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Praet. 


2W 


tth* 


atWi 


antftn 


nwi 


3- ft 


(regular) 


(regular) 


natfij 

t : 


rontftn 

T 


t : 


2 m. 






ratcfa 


ratcftn 


]5Q#IPT 

t : - 


2f. 






nittfij 


mttfin 


mttfon 


1. 






vntfa 


\natbin 


VtoWr 


Plur. 3. 






piwi 


tt^hn 


ratton 


2 m. 






fcjriatfti 


onagri 


Dm^rt 


2f. 






TFDtfti 


y^atfin 


ynawi 


1. 






mfeti 


*iai«hn 


wat^n 



Inf. abs. aW 
const. JOtf 



T 



itthn 



a^in 



atf-irr 



Fut. i¥! 


(ohi) teh^ 


•• T" 


yyft 


» 


3 f. at£to 


Eh\n 


atflvi 


a*tf\n 


M 


2 m. atfin 


ith*ri 


•* T * 


S^tfta 


M 


2 f. *attn 


Win 


• : It • 


*antftn 


*n#in 


1. ^ttftt 


lth*tf 


attfia 


a^ia 


nittoa 


3 m. (Plur.) !Qt?» 


sreh* 


:It- 


mft* 


w 


3 f. njlttfjn 


ru^h\n 


roatkn 


matfin 


roattf-m 


2 m. s Qt?J!J 


•ittfny) 


:It • 


sa^n 


lattfvi 


2 f. ruatto 


rutfwi 


ronton 

t : "t • 


mattfi.n 

t : •• 


rmttf-in 


1. ^ 


«hrj 


.. T . 


n*tfto 


atf-u 


jFwf. apoc. 






a#ii 




Imp. m. (sing.)2t^ 


(Eh) ttfT 


attfn 
.. T . 


attfin 




f. W 


^ 


*at#n 

• :it • 


•a^in 




m. (pio tottf 


!)«h^ 


•lattftrr 

:It • 


mfln 




f. mattf 

t : •' 


t : - : 


t : "t • 


t : •• 




Part. act. a?rr 


#-iv 




ytflto 




uass. 3^ 


WV 


Itflfa 




atwo 



206 



PAR. IX. VERBS "<0. II. CLASS. 





Kal. 


Hiphil. 


Kal. 


Kal. 


Prset. 3 m. 


(sing.) 2W 


(nnpn) *wn 


-T 


p*: 


3f. 


(regular) 


na^vr 

T • " 


(regular.) 


etc. 


3 (plur 


) 


*awi 






Inf. abs. 


ato* 

T 




T 


pte; 


const 


S& 


awn 




P^? 


Fut. 3 m. 




(n^>) a*ip* 


DSP 


w 


3f. 


aa\n 


awn 


nam 


p^n 


2 m. 


MV) 


awn 


mn 


p^n 


2f. 


»ao*n 


>awn 


tfran 


TW 


1. 


ami 


MM* 


nan* 


p2N 


3 m. 


(plur.) ttW 


^&» 


w 


V¥ 


3f. 


t : - 


ronton 

t : •• 


nuiatn 

t : - • 


njpw 


2 m. 


ttOVI 


WDVj 


Wl 


W! 


2f. 


rmto\n 

t : - 


matovn 

t : •• 


t : - • 


napstn 


1. 


38^ 


5^3 


/1$) 


p^a 


Fut. apoc. 


"i?*?3 


2§\1 




Imp. m. (sin 


t) 2^ 


ao*n 






f. 


*ao* 


?Swn 






m. (pi» 


v.) too; 


ti^frti 






f. 


mato* 

t : - : 


roaon 

t : •• 






Part. act. 


aai* 


awn 


njrt* 


prr 


pass. 


aw 

T 




T 


p* 



Remarks. Niphal, in verbs of this spe- 
cies, does not occur. The Daghesh'd con- 
jugations are regular throughout ; e. g. 

Piei mat, Puai aa;, mthpaei s^hn. 

Hophal conforms to the model in Par. VII ; 
e. g. 2tt^ a etc. Only Hiphil, therefore, 
distinguishes the II. class of verbs ^, from 
those of the I. class. 



PAR. X. ''S. III. CLASS. 



Remarks. The conj. 
Niphal, Hiphil, and Ho- 
phal, are declined in the 
same manner as these 
conjugations are in verbs 
Pe Nun, Par. XL E.g. 

Niph.n^D, Hiph. n>$n, 

Hoph. HSrj, etc. 



PAR. XI. VERBS JQ. 



207 







Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Prat 


. 3 m. 


- T 


- T 


^ 


teftan 


ttfaii 




3f. 


(regular) 


(regular) 


ntfaa 

t : • 


rrchan 

T • 


nt^an 

t : ••• 




2 m. 






nttfaa 

t : - • 


mflan 

t : - • 


^t^an 

t : - ••. 




2f. 






JTOtoa 


nttfan 


.nttfan 




1. 






^1? 


inv&n 


\nttfan 




3 m. (pi«r.) 




WfeJ 


w^n 


W5JT 




2 m. 






Dfitfaa 


origan 


nrittfan 




2f. 






VfWlfl 


ywan 


liit^arr 




1. 






Btfaa 


wttfin 


wan 


Inf. 


abs. 


T 


T 


"T " 


tfrarr 






const 


fei 


nttfa 




tthan 


Eton 


Fut. 




fe> 


w 


"T * 


^ 


% 


3f. 




fen 


tfan 


" T * 


t^^rt 


ttfari 


2 m. 




fcn 


ww 


ttfaa^ 

"T * 


t^afi 


t^ajj' 


2f. 




^jan 


ntfarj 


• :It • 


win 


wzn 


1. 




few 


tfaa 


"T V 


mx 


ttfaa 


3 m. 


(plur.) 


!)^> 


wa; 


imp 

: It* 


WW 


waj 


3f. 
2 m. 




na^sn 

t : 


natfan 

t : - • 

Wan 


natfaan 

t :"t • 

:It • 


t : •• - 

win 


natfa,n 

t : - •.. 

wm 


2f. 




na^'an 

t : 


t : - • 


natfaan 

t :**t • 


ri$0§n 


t : - •.. 


1. 




^>3J 


^ 


ttfaaa 

"T * 


t^aa 


tfaa 


Fut. Apoc. 








ttfe 




Imp. 


m. 


fel 


tfa_ 


ttfaan 

"T * 


ttfan 






f. 


(regular) 


^. 


nttoan 

• :It • 


>^arr 






m. (Pl«r.) 


•Wa 


:It • 


^>an 






f. 




na#a 

t : - 


natfaan 

t : "t • 


rwarr 

t : •• - 




Part. 


act. 


^§ti 


tftjti 




t^aa 






pass. 




T 


T " 




T \ 



208 




PAR. 


XII. VERBS 3727. §§• 


256—266. 










Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Praet 


. 3 m 




ID 


mo 

- T 


(bna) id: 


(non) npn 




3f. 
2 m 




mb 

T - 

rriio 

T 


miD 

t : it 
t : - t 


nib 

t -t 

/flaw 

t - : 


nnbrr 

T *• " 

/raDn 

t • -: 




2f. 




/too 


AMD 

: : - t 


rrtaoi 


rtadn 




1. 




\rniq 


VOID 

• : - t 


viiiaM 


vyapn 




3. (pi 


ur.) 


ttD 


mD 

: it 


*3M 

- T 


teprr 




2 m 




DJli^D 


0^1 D 


Dfiiapj 


Drtapn 




2f. 




IJTDD 


D*}MD 


lrrtaoa 


1-ntapn 




1. 




^iiq 


: - t 


*tiiw 


toiipn 


Inf. \ 


lbs. 




T 








const. 




(ba) nb 

A. 




(brin) aqn 


1DH 

•• T 


Fut. 


3D* 

T 


3D? 


>K 


(D^.) 2D^ 


(D^l) 2D> 


3f. 




1DD 

T 


IDPi 


^Ijn 


nan 


nDn 

" T 


2 m. 




riDn 

T 


IDD 


^n 


iDrt 


IDD 

•* T 


2f. 




T 


^BF\ 


^gn 


^jBj 


' •' T 


1. 




3DN 

T 


3DN 


^P_* 


IDtf 


2DK 

*• T 


3 m. 


(plur.) 


T 


!inp> 


&gj 


ttGP 


pBPjl) U& 


3f. 


t v ••. ; 


t : 


tv'- : 


TV- 


rwzvn 

tv* : 


2 m. 




T 


JjlDjn 


&pjn 


ttpfl 


!J2D^ 

" T 


2f. 


t v ••. : 


ru:ib.n 

t : 


t v'- : 


TV- 


rwsDfi 

tv* : 


1. 




3M 

T 


ID) 


>E 


id: 


2D: 

" T 


Fut. conv. 


T T" 








VT- 


Imp. 


m. 


3D 






2DH 


nbrr 

" T 




f. 


>i5 






>2pn 


• •• T 




m. 


tib 




( 


^n)topn 


•nbrr 

" T 




f. 


T V ••. 






TV" 


W2LDTT 

t v • -: 


Part 


. act. 
pass. 


md 

T 






id: 

T T 


2DD 





PAR. XII. VERBS 373? . §§ 


256—266. 


209 


Hophal. 


Poel. 


Poal. 


Pilpel. 


Polpal. 


(pwri) np^rr 


into 


2liD 


^P4 D 


npnp 


mo-in 


nniio 


ranio 


mono 

t : : • 


t : : ••. 


niio-in 


rmiD 


t : - 


D2D2D 


mono 


rfciD^n 


JilliD 


miiD 


MDlp 


mpip 


vtfiwn 


\pmiD 


vmiD 


W3D 


\nnpnp 


^awn 


miD 


mio 


npnp 


lapnp 


Diitopirr 


orinniD 


Dr)12iD 


orqpnp 


D^DDID 


iniap^in 


tfrniD 


iraiio 


irapnp 


impnp 


■tf&p^n 


•i:nniD 


wiito 


uapnp 


mpnp 



2V1T1 



nnio 



miD 



nono 



nono 



(n?;) npv 


naiD^ 


22W 


2D2V] 


npnp^ 


np^ 


iiiD^ 


22SVD_ 


2V2VD 


npnpn 


npin 


iiion 


22SVD 


npipii 


npip^ 


>ip^ 


miDfi 


mtofl 


upnpn 


^onwn 


ipw 


iiiDN 


iniDK 


npnpN 


1D2DK 


aw 


! )21iD> 


miD^ 


•HDID'' 


■IIDID^ 


T V ~ 


t : - : 


rtDaiD.n 

t : - : 


rnnpnp^ 


rmpnpr] 


^D-ln 


miDin 


^anion 


ttpip.n 


^nonon 


T V ~ - 


t : - : 


t : - : 


t : - : - : 


rmpnpn 


npu 


nniw 


nito 


^raw 


npipi 




niiD 




n P^_ 






•»12iD 




^npiD 






miD 




toDlD 






n:miD 

t : - 




rmpnp 






l^DD 




2?1 V A 




T 




rnipft 


D d 


t : •-. : 



210 



PAR. XIII. VERBS TO . 



267—271 





Kal. 


Kal. 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Praet. 3 m. (sing-: 


Qp T 


/ID 


rtpa 


D^pn 


3f. 


™P T 


T " 


TfltfpJ 


T '* •* 


2 m. 


t :'- 


hhd 

T - 


nibipa 

t ' : 


rvihyn 


2f. 


™P_ 


tfD 


Jita-ipa 


niD^pn 


1. 


\nDj$ 


V)D 


vfibipa 


rni^prr 


" Cplur. 


) «5 


1J1D 


itfp* 


wprr 


2 m. 


D^Dp 


DFMD 


nrtteipi 


Drtopn 


2f. 


Ti5»E 


ino 


irtapj 


liitoTpri 


1. 


wpj5 


WID 


tt&ipj 


■tffrpn 


Inf. abs. 


Dip 


Jl\D 




op*] 


const. 


Dip 


niD 


Dipn 


am 

'• T 


Flit. 3 111. (sing) 


Dlp^ 


T 


Dip;» 


'•T 


3f. 


Dip/) 


etc. 


Dip.n 


D*pfi 

'• T 


2 m. 


own 

' T 




Dipn 


d*« 


2f. 


wp^ 




wpn 


^.n 


1. 


mp» 


• 


Dip** 


D>pN 


3 m. (plnr.) 


' T 




iDip 4 ; 


wr; 


3f. 


nraip.n 

tv : 




n:pp^ 


ruapn 


2 m. 


tapjn 




iDip.n 


Wp/) 


2f. 


nyjyipii 




iTJDptf 


n ?PP.^ 


1. 


DIpJ 




Dip:) 


bl?3 


JFW. flj90C. 


°p; 


T 




°p: t 


Imp. 2 m. (sing.) 


Dip 


(na) JT1D 


Diprr 


Dpi! 


2f. 


W? 




*b"ipn 


wpn 


2 m. (plur.) 


^p 




iDipVt 


wpn 


2f. 


map 




rriDpn 

t :' 


raopn 


Part. act. 


DP T 


™ 




DT?0 


pass. 


Dip 




cflpa 

' T 





PAR. XIII. VERBS 13? • §§ 267- 


-271. 


p. xiv. ^. 211 


Hophal. 


Polel. 


Polal. 


Kal. 


op^n 


Dpip 


Dpip 


^ 


nDp^in 

t': 
t : ' - 


HDDip 

t : ' 

■ftppip 
flppip 


HDpip 
FppSp 

rippip 


ma 

T T 

t : - 


vwopn 


rnppip 


^ppip 


»m 


•iftp^rr 


^Dpip 


•i^pip 


T 


Dribpn 


anattfp 


Drippip 


dhh 


l^ppn 


l^ppip 


ynppip 


inn 


wopn 


toppip 


ttppip 


tta 








fla 


op^n 


DErtp 


Dpip 


ra 


Dp-V 


Dpip* 


Dpip* 


?4J 


opin 


DDipJH 


Dpipn 


ran 

• T 


OpV) 


DDipin 


Dpip.n 


pan 


*Dpvi 


^DDip^) 


"♦ppip-n 


wan 

' • T 


DjHH 


DDIpK 


DpipNf 


> 


topv 

roppto 

Dp 1 ): 


topip? 

ruppipn 

topipn 

n;jppip.n 
nty\py 


^pip* 
njppipr) 

•iDpiprt 

ruppipri 

Dpipj 


'T 

ru^an 

tv • : 

wajn 

> ■ T 

nyyan 




15; 




Dpip 




ra 




••ppip 

JlDDip 








roppip 








Dpipp 




** 


ap-iD 

't 




DDipp 





212 



par. xv. verbs $$. §§ 276—279. 





Kal. 


Niphal. 


Piel. 


Praet. 3 m. (sing,) 


T T 


t : • 


**£& 


3f. 


t : it 


t : : • 


t : * 


2 m. 


T T T 


t •• : • 


T " * 


2f. 


T T 


flttSt&S 


mxn 


1. 


T T 


VJMXQQ 


vimsd 


3 (plur.) 


: it 


ttmxt 


totSD 


2 m. 


t : 


DHttStg 


Qiltttt 


2f. 


yircsq 


W^PS 


w*?id 


1. 


T T 


! o«?w 


wsp 


Inf. abs. 


T 




liSKD 


const. 


N^D 


.. T . 


NSD 


Fut. 3 m. (smg.) 


Manor 1 

t : • 


.. T . 


msd*. 


3f. 


r : ■ 


.. T 


NSBfl 


2 m. 


t : • 


•• T 


Msnn 


2f. 


WtDfl 


• : it • 


**?*??*! 


1. 


t : v 


•' T V 


KSDN 


3 m. (piur.) 


WM* 


: it' 


msd; 


3f. 


roaabjn 

t v : 


T V T - 


roM&Dn 


2 m. 


1NSDA 


: it • 


mson 


2f. 


t v : • 


T V T * 


■mmnn 

r v - : 


1. 


N2D3 

t : • 


.. T . 


rite) 


.FW <7/?0C. 


Imp. 2 m. (^ng.) 


t : 


" T - 


M£D 


2f. 


woq 


• : it • 


WD 


2 m. (plur.) 


ttttD 


: it • 


tttBKD 


2f. 


t v : 


roMx&n 

T V T r 


H3MSD 

T V - 


Part. act. 


Nafta 




MSDD 


pass. 


MUD 

T 


am: 

t :■ 





PAR. XV. VERB Sb §§ 276—279. 



213 



Pual. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Hithpael. 


(«•?») ttSD 


tf^Dfl 


(sspn) asan 


N&ann 


etc. TMiZft 


HK^DH 


etc. nK^on 


rmaonn 


JU»SD 


n^DH 


mxnn 


nasDJin 


msa 


fitfiasi 


fitfSDH 


n^arin 


vmsd 


vwspn 


»n«Dn 


'JlttStDJin 


WSD 


IK^DTr 


^^n 


tt*mnn 


DJT8SD 


DmsDn 


pmaDn 


q/wsDnn 


?^^? 


IJINSDfl 


jrmsDn 


litttatnnrr 


W*99 


^$?i 


ttMS03il 


WSD/TPI 




NSDH 






T ••. 


W2DTT 


t : v 


xxnnri 


(«••>;«>) fc^D^ 


W2*o; 


(s^;) rcsnj 


NSDrp 


etc. m®& 

t ••. : 


Mttt^ 


etc. xwn 

t : ••. 


xznnn 


t\ : 


s*ns$n 


NjJEn 


xvqnn 


wsnan 


W2K}n 


*raaon 


wvqnn 


t ••. -: 


W3&N 


NSDN 


ksd™ 


M&& 


W 


%W 


tttiton; 


t v ••. : 


ruKsojn 


mKSDJn 


rorannn 


tttgEQF) 


=)K*SDB 


ttTCDJn 


to&DJV! 


t v ••. : 


ruasDin 


t v : ••. 




t ••. : 


liwi 


t : •-. 


amro 




«^i 








K^prr 




xmr\7\ 




Wi 




wxnnn 




towpy? 




^Djin 




t v : - 




t v - : • 




HMO 




KSfcJID 


(W^ttD ; ) tfSOB 




(N3$») N^DD 





214 par. xvi. verbs nb. §§280—292. 





Kal. 


NiphaL 


Piel. 


Pual. 


Praet. 3 m. 


(nb ?) n^ 


ribaa 

t : * 


nbii 

T * 




3f. 


ni 3^ 


rm*?aa 


n; T ^. 


anba 


2 m. 


jySa (n^D)rj^: 


W% ,n4 


n4a 


2f. 


/vba 


etc. n^aa 


etc. JT^]} 


n^a 


1. 


w$a 


\rvtfaa 


w£a 


wfti 


3 (P'«r. 


pftl) ^3 


^ 


*j 


*J 


2 m. 


DJtba 


DJVbaa 


D/r^a 


Djrba 


2f. 


V3^3 


yrbaa 


W^3 


V?k| 


1. 


wba 

• T 


®%& 


wft 


to#| 


Inf. abs. 


rf?a 


ribaa 


rtba 


rtba 


const 


riiba 


riban 

T * 


rnba 


ji^a 


Fut. 3 m. 


rfcp 


^ 


n^ 


n ^' 


3f. 


nban 


r6a,n 


rfefl 


rfea«n 


2 m. 


rfnn 


r6an 


rteafl 


n ^^ 


2f. 


^an 


^an 


^an 


*Vajn 


1. 


nbaa 


nba» 


nkn* 


rfeia 


3 m. 


(plur.) TO* 


£a> 


** 


£a> 


3f. 


rry^an 


ny$in 


nrfan 


nyftfi 


2 m. 


sfrM 


jfewn 


fefl 


^n 


2 f. 


nyftj 8 ! 


ny&n 


n ?§w? 


nyfen 


1. 


rrbaa 


r6aa 

VT ' 


nbaa 


ri^aa 


Fut. apoc. 


b$ 


T * 


(V:) ^ 




Imp. 2 m. 


(sing.) ri73 


nban 

"T * 


C 1 ??) nba 




2f. 


^ 


^in 


^ 




2 m. 


'plur.) TO 


£an 


** 




2f. 


t v : 


T VT * 


T V ~ 




Part. act. 


nVui 




nbap 




pass. 


T 


r6aa 




rfeap 



par. xvi. verbs nb. §§ 280 — 292. 



215 



Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Hithpael. 


Hithpalel. 


nbxn 


nban 


n^a/in 


mnwn 


nrbsn 


rrrj^n 


n/torin 




t * : -J t •• : • 

etc. nfen 


t •■ : t 


Jitorin 


/vinnttfn 


mt^h 


viton 


^torin 


^TO«(n 


ton 


fen 


fenn 


rinfitfh 


DJiton 


Diiton 


D/ito/in 


DJ^iiintfn 


w^n 


iriton 

v": t 


1-ntorin 




w^n 


•• : t 


Htf&mn 




nban 


n ^ri 


rtbzrvn 




rfon 


: t 


rtonn 


riinnttfn 


rfar 


n ^ T 


rf?|jr 


n;nnt^ 


n^n 


rfylFs 


n^ann 


ninmn 


n^r) 


rbin 


iT^njn 


mnjwfcn 


74^ 


?5iri 


4l™ 




n^K 


rtoa 


nkma 


nnnitfK 


&£ 


toj 


fejr 


wtjw 


ny?in 


n^on 


nrfartfi 




fan 


ton 


fann 


vfniwrs 


nr&n 


n^in 


n:jtojin 




rtoa 


v :t 


nfetfts 


rtjnjntt 


b£ 




^IT! 


vvittfr 


(bjrj) rferr 




n^jrin 




ton 




torn 


^irntfrr 


ton 




ferin 


arwttft 


roton 

t v : - 




tv- : • 





nbaD 



rtoiio 



mrvrato 



nb:iD 



216 PAR. XVII. ^Q & nb. 



PAR. XVIII. VERBS ]S & wb- 





Kal. 


Hiphil. 


Kal. 

T T 


Hiphal. 

T ' 


Niphil. 


Praet. 


TT 


min 

T 


*^n 


3f. 
2 m. 


t :It 

T T 


nmin 

t : 

finin 

T " 


t :it 

(as Nb) 


t : • 

T " • 


T ' • 

T •' ' 


2f. 


jtt 

*T 


nnin 




nx^ 


mififn 


1. 


• *T 


wnin 




^.^ 


\nN&n 


3 (Ptar.) 


T 


n^n 




ilHttfa 


wfen 


2 m. 


djw 


Djyitn 




brttttt; 


Driatsfn 


2f. 


VJ^TI 


yy^rtn 




yiMtKj 


ywafn 


1. 


•T 


ttnlin 




MNWj 


timfn 


Inf. abs. 


T 




T 


•• T " 


awn 


const. 


jiVr 


ri-tfn 


rmto 






Fut. 


rn* 


nnv 


MP 

T • 


•• T* 


Wtf* 


3f. 


rwi 


nnin 


T 


(as sb) 




2 m. 


PTW) 


rnto 


Kton 

T 






2f. 


«rjn 


nto 


wi&n 






1. 


pryn 


rn*iN 


T V 






3 (Pl»r.) 


rv; 


nv 


wten 




W*Bh 


3f. 


T V 


nanta 

T V 


T V * 






2 m. 


n»ji 


Din 


Wto 




wfrn 


2f. 


T V 


T V 


T 






1. 


HTJ 


rrrta 


T ' 






Fut. apoc. 




ni»3 




Imp. 


n T 


rnirr 


T 






2f. 


n* 


^n 


^ 






2 m. (pi"r.) 


TT 


nin 


^ 






2f. 


t v: 


nanin 

T V 


T 






Part. act. 


rnv 


rnto 


iftft ^ 


From IM& (not «*??) 


pass 


T 




MMCU 

T 







ft It \ 
PAR. XIX. ]Q & TT>. 




Kal. 


Hiphil. 


Prset. 
3f. 
2 m. 


ntw 

TT 

t :it 

(as nb) 


nan 

T * 

t : • 

/vfen 

T * • 


2f. 




jr^n 


1. 




WBn 


3. (Plur.) 




^n 


2 m. 




onnan 


2f. 




yyan 


1. 




W9PT 


Inf. abs. 
const 


. /fizoi 


ni^n 


Fut. 


TO^| 


n^ 


3f. 


n®n 


n&n 


2 m. 


r\®r\ 


roan 


2f. 


nan 


wn 


1. 


mx 


nm 


3. (plar.) 


w 


w 


3f. 


T V * 


T V - 


2 m. 


r£>n 


y&to 


2f. 


T V * 


T V " 


1. 


r\B2 


nm 


Fut. apoc. 


& 


w 


Imp. 
2f. 


(as nb) 


(ton.) r\®n 


2 m. (Plur.) 




ran 


2f. 




n^zsn 

T V - 


Part. act. 


nefa 


™ Q . 


pass. ^^ 





PAR. XX. VERB SS2. 217 



Kal. Hiphil. Hophal. 



KB 

T 


wan 


an^n 


n*ta 

T T 

naa 

T T 


nwan 

T ' " 

nahn 

r •• •• 


nKin 

T ••. 
T T •. 


rma 

T 






\HNa 

T 


yiaan 




^22) WB 


wan 


my\n 



djini oman 



waa wwan 



K12 
(to) Nia 



wan 



T 


wa 1 

"T 


aav 

T 


WOtf 


wan 




wan 

T 


Wan 

• T 




wan 






Waa 


waa 

* T 




win 1 

T 

rorian 

T T 

won 


•T 

rowan 

t -.-is • : 


wav 

AT 



WQJ 



Waj 



wn s i 



wa 


wan 


wa 


wan 


wia 


wan 

• T 


»a 

T 


was 



aaiD 



e e 



218 



PAR. XXI. PARTICIPLES. § 301 









Kal. 








Masc. 


Fem, 


Fem. Segh. 


Verbs final Pattahh act. 


^P 


(nbiap) ntep 


rbvp 





pass 


't 


n^iop 

t ' : 




Tseri 


act. 


yfr 


t •*: 


n& 


— Hholem act. 


T 


my 

t : 




i gutt. 


act. 


pp 


njw 


flS$ 


% gutt. 


act. 


??'^ 


T : 


nyaw 


W 


act. 


°p T 


*8 




rb 


act. 


r6ii 


(n»Va) rto 






pass 


i. ^ 

T 


rvba 

t : 










Niphal. 




regular 




t ': • 


t t': • 


nj??p5 

> 


3 gutt. 




"TDJtt 


t tv:v 


^1?^ 


h 




ID} 

T T 


raw 

t - : 




U 




b^a 


HDip^ 










Piel. 




regular 




togD 


rtepB 

t : '- : 


rbtbpp 


■fr 




t™ 


t : It : 


HTOD 


rb 




n ^ D . 


t - : 




Poel of yy 




linpp 


ronton 

t : : 


raitop 








Pual. 




regular 




t ••. : 


t t'--. : 


jifr&gD 






Hiphil. 






regular 




fwapo 


nbwpn 

t • ': - 


rbibpp 


3 gutt. 




TEBjD 


nrqgo 


rnbyp 


h 




3DD 


naDD 

t • : 




tr 




bpD 


iWpD 










Hophal. 




regular 




*7Z0pD 

t': t 


nbvpn 

t t': t 


nbzbpD 

v v : t 








Hithpael. 




regular 




^™ 


nbvpno 

t : '- : • 


n&)*0p 



PAR. XXI. PARTICIPLES. 



§301. 



219 







Kal. 




Plur. masc. 


Plur. Fem. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


obisjjp 


rrttep 


Dec. VII. b. 


Dec. X. XIII. 


d^ibr 


rh^top 


III. c. 


X. 


DW 


f»W 


V. e. 


XI. XIII. 


'un}\ 


nVu* 


III. c. 


X. 


D*»py? 


nSpyi 


VII. 


X. XIII. 


tftftjp 


nfypft 


VII. 


X. XIII. 


ttDJJ 


ntoj? 


I. 


X. 


p^a 


nfti 


IX. a. 


X. 


NX* 


riwbz 


III. c. 


X. 






Niphal. 




D^ropi 

• t': • 


t': • 


II. 


XI. XIII. 


oncga 


t v: v 


II. 


XI. XIII. 


MM 


jtqdj 


VIII. 


X. 


D^Dipi 


rhDip:i 


III. c. 


X. 






Piel. 




D^rspD 


ni^pp 


VII. c. 


X. XIII. 


• :It : 


: it : 


VII. 


X. XIII. 


p4ao 


rftbffi 


IX 


X. 


DmiDD 


nmiop 


VII. b. 


X. XIII. 






Pual. 




D^BpD 

• t '••. : 




II. 


XI. XIII. 






Hiphil. 




D^OpD 


ni^Dpp 


I. 


X. XIII. 


D*TfigflD 


niTpyp 


I. 


X. XIII. 


MOD 


jtqdd 


VIII. 


X. 


frD^D 


rfioT?» 


III. 


X. 






Hophal. 




D^tOpD 

• t ': t 


ni^zopD 

t': t 


ii. 


XI. XIII. 






Hithpael. 




a^Bpnp 


/Vbfcpnp 


VII. c. 


X. XIII. 



220 PAR. XXII. VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 


§§ 303—312. 


Suffixes. Sing. 1. 2 masc. 2 fem. 


3 masc. 3 fem 



£j «R «R «« 5} *> 

t t ' : 1 

3f. ^?p ^p *#£ *2^| n ^p 

2 f . <v x > — — >V" : C n\nbtop 

*»??&) ^tepj T ' : 

1. T$??R T*&9!, vr) btqp ntftep 

3. (piur.) »Abr ?p^br -sptoR vn&Dp n&BR 

2 m. ^nribrop _ — vwtep nvfy?R 

1 — ^&&R I^BR *rafr?R m^tpp 



Inf. tyag 1^ij> iVdjj frtojj rfejj 



Fut. *$br; "f^Pi "si^op; *$?P! T§?l?! 
3. (piur.) > ^^P > t&dij "sp^oi?! vt^d?; nfoiQp* 





(WDR!) 




( 


T07BP!) 




Imp. 


^top 

... . I T 
• •• t : 


— 


— 


vifcp" 

•• :'t 


tv :'t 


Piel. 


r#bp 


*fr?R 


^»R 


V?BR 


t :'• 



Hiph. fut. ^t?i?! "fp^i?: ^'Pi?! *n$Dp; nf^ 



PAR. XXII. 1 


fERBS WITH SUFPIX-PRONOUNS. §§. 303- 


-312. 221 


Plur. 1. 


2 masc. 


2 fern. 


3 masc. 


3 fem. 


t t ': 


ttAap! 


P.^9R 


D^tOp 

t f ' : 


itapj 


urSvp 

: - t' : 


03/topp. 


pntep. 


DJlfop 

-t t' : 


infos 

-t t' : 


t : - ' : 


— 


— 


arbvp 

t: -'■: 


jij&R 


wi^zop/) 
vrptqp ) 


— 


— 


DWttR 


VFbtop 


dfeigp 


oypbvp 
n^btap 

t' : 

DS^tOp 


19V£?P. 

p^tjp 


DVJ^DR 

tntep 

t 'i: 

mAbr 


Vrbvp 

ptep 

Pfltep 



•• :'t 

(D^_n) 



Datep-\ ptepi O^Dp- 

D?telJ> P^> 0^ 

Ki^bp-j p^tDp) (Dina) 

v : t': v : r : \ tt: t/ 1 



ftE 






•ufop 

.. . F T 



D^W ptep* 



oatep; i?^i?l 



D^p v 

t t: ■ 
•• t : • ' 



ptep* 



D^tOp 



.« 



fa$9R DD^p 

1 pers. Fut. °5n^?«. 



py^p D^p 



fr?D 



ttjfof? D?^t?pj \i?®\>\ Q !?^P! 1^*9K 



222 PAR. XXIII. VERBS Tib WITH SUFFIXES. & 313. 



Suffixes. Sing. 1. 2 roasc, 3 masc. Plur. 3 masc, 

Kal. Preet. ^ W tftife °"W 

" - T J IT TT TT 

3 f. ^rxvy ^\r\w tofcaj o/tiw; 

1. — f/iW v f)^f DWV 

' ' : WW] 

3 (pinr.) w *ptfy sim^ dw 



inf. viwj ^rw ^^c d;vw 



VtttflJJ 



Fut. 3 m. W n'W >-=-> DW 

3 m. with } 
epenth. 3 5 






*«K! JPBK ^¥8! — 

— 1*S» W^» tflgjaj 

3 m. (Piur.) *3fltg£ *pW VflW DflW£ 



Imp. m. 'm — WIJJJJ D^ 



Piel. Prset. 3 m. *» ^ in* Dtt 

Fut. 3 m. W? ^ ^rw D** 

^a} %i ?S «fe' - 



Hiph. Prset. 'J3H *J3n TOT! D3H 

$£S?M ** ?k ^ 



PAR. XXIV. NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. § 334 340. 



223 





No. I. Noun masc. 


ending with a 


consonant. 


Abs. 


(sing.) V)V a horse. 


(piur.) DtftD horses. 


Suff. 


1 . ""WD my horse. 




WV my horses. 


2 m. 


?jD!)P % — 




*pWp thy — 


2f. 


?JMD % — 




TWO thy — 


3 m. 


taD to — 




WID Aw — 


3f. 


TO Aer — 




n^DID Aer — 


1 (plur. 


< 

) ^D-ID our — 




< 

WW owr — 


2 m. 


DDD^D your — 




DD^DID j/^wr — 


2f. 


Ipp^D j/owr ■ — 




13-WD j/owr — 


3 m. 


DC^D ^Aofr — 




DrPWD tfAe/r — 


3f. 


lWta JAez'r — 




tSTO* #«> — 




No. II. Noun masc. 


ending with a 


Quiescent. 


Abs. 


(sing.) IS father. 


Abs 


(sing.) 2S father. 


Suff. 


1. US my father 


PI. 


1. WIS our father. 


2 m. 


f a» % _ 


2 tr 


i. DDUS j/owr — 


2f. 


■spitf % — 


2f. 


pUS j/owr — 


3 m. 


=irrus, ius /& — 

• T * T 


3 ir 


i. QnUS ^Aeir — 


3f. 


> 

HUS Aer — 


3f. 


lnus ^Ae/r — 




No. III. 


Voun feminine 




Abs. 


(sing.) rrrijft # to. 


(plur 


o ni-iin /<m?. 


Suff. 


1 . W\n TTZy /fltt?. 




\ni")in ??2j/ /#ws. 


2 m. 


Vnta % — 




^JThin % — 


2f. 


■sr/nta % — 




^jhi-to % — 


3 m. 


irniri Aw — 




vrrniri Aw — 


3f. 


PLmin Aer — 

T T 




n\ni"i\n Aer — 


1 (Pl«r 


< . 

) ^TH^n our — 




wrn-nri our — 


2 m. 


DDJVVi.n your — 




DpYpTIJl your — 


2f. 


P-THto your — 




p\ryni,n your — 


3 m. 


orpin their — 


, 


DiTrfhtti their — 


3f. 


liirnta their — 




lnyiVrifi *Aei> — 



224 



PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. §§ 345 SEQ. 





Sing. abs. 




Const. 


Light Suflf. 


Grave Suff. 






Dec 


. I. Singular. 


§345. 




(a) 


D^)D 




D^D 


TOD 


DDtttD 


(*) 


nil-) 




ntoa 


ntaa 


DDli^ 


(c) 


zotettf 




BiBtf 


•>rpi3^ 


DDtqis^ 


id) 


nft» 




pfi 1 ?** 


*nfyt 


DgrfftK 






Dec. 


II. Singular. 


§347. 




(«) 


T 




D 1 


" T 


(once) DDDl 


(» 


2Di3 

T 




IDfa 


• T 


nrmto 


(c) 


jn\a 




JD13 


^2i3 

• T 


DDWia 


(d) 


■rtf 




Tti 


• T 


D3"T^ 






Dec. 


III. Singular. 


§350. 




(a) 
(b) 


TJJB 




Tp>3 


*TpB 




(c) 






bwp 


^WbR 


a&ep 


(d) 


]i13T 




lilDT 


tfhbt 


Orfh3? 


(e) 


linn 


(]in^) pnn 


tfton 


oaton 


(/) 


T 




dud 


TO 


DDDtop 


(g) 


tfQtf 




d^n 


Wlj 


DZTOnN 


(h) 


T 




t : 










Dec. 


IV. Singular. 


§353. 




(a) 
(b) 


T T 

lib 

T " 






• t : 


taran 

U222b 


(c) 


DD17 

T T 




DDn 


*Mrr 

• t -: 


DDjsbn 


W) 


1^ 
T •' 




13?? 


' t : 


B3T2& 


(«) 


PW 




p»2 


y&. 


Q5i??? 


(/) 


*® 




sea 


*03 

* t r 


D 5^ 3 . 


(g) 


T T 











PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. §§ 345 SEQ. 



225 



Plural abs. 




Light suff. 


Const. 


Grave suff". 




Dec. I. Plural. 






D^D 




W 


^? D 


Q ?tnD 


onto? 




ntaa 


nlaa 


osntaa 


fffiftSWl 




*lM3tfl 


TOH)# 


og^Btf 


DTT^N 




^rft» 


*r|W 


nyrfrti 




Dec 


. II. Plural 






* T 




- T 


w 


d? 3 ??. 


• T 




- T 


^53 


nyyyft 


• T 




- T 


^nte 


nyyisz 


brntf 

• T 




- T 


ntf 


ayiv 




Dec. 


III. Plural 






DH^S 




'TPP. ' 


*TP3. 


B?*rpB 


D^D 




' T*? D . 


rsrt?D 


nyxbn 


D^tDp 




•^top 


^fWDpi 


nybwp 


D^i-or 




^i-pr 


^IIDT 


nyfny 


(niDint^n) nwrn 


(As 


Dec. X.) 






DTO 




*MD 


TO 


oyvvn 


D^DtoK 




^WIK 


^P;DN 


ny?)2x 




Dec. 


IV. Plural 






om^i 




nn^T 


nn^T 


DDna"7 


• t : 




- t : 


^ 


P?n:£ 


■ t -: 




- t -: 


*MPT 


DD^pn 


any® 

' t : 




- t : 


nyto 


Dirnyfr 


o*pqg 




'- T-: 


TO 


OPpDy 


MJ3 

• t : 




*M3 

-t : 


'BID 


°?5?? 


t : 




rriaas 




(D/tiKlS) 



pf 



226 



PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. §§ 356 SEQ. 





Sing. abs. 


Const. 


Light suff. 


Grave suflf. 


(h) 


WW 

T T 


(wjD W? 






(i) 


T " 


(b 1 ?!) 3^1 


^5 






Dec 


:. V. Singular 


. § 356. 




(a) 


m 


'2! 


qj 


D^pt 


03) 


" T 


-ran 


1S3 


Drrpsn 


(c) 


S|TQ 


Bjn| 


*¥> 


EDara 


(d) 


"Q3 

" T 


(tj?.) 113 


*!¥! 


DD1M 




Dec. VI. 


Singular. ^4 class. § 359. 




(a) 


OftB) ^| 


# 


*rf» 


DD^D 


(b) 


etc. IJtt 


"«?? 


*T!9 


D5"1W 


(c) 


Vl i 


£ class. 


VH 


DDjnt 


W) 


^p. 


-I3D 


*W> 


DD-I3D 


(e) 


n $ 


""? 


nnp 


dd-qjj 


(/) 


p*?n 


p*?r? 


*p!?n 


D ?^n 


Or) 


iS 


t£ 


^bn 


Q3*$n 


Ok) 


rrci 


raj 

class. 


W. 


DDTOi 


a) 


Tja 


ip 


: t 


Mips 

v : : t 


U> 


V?P 


V»P 


*2Dj5 


D ?*P.p 


(k) 


^9 


!>i?9 


(ibrb) ^3 


v : T T 


(0 


ttfTp 


^*!P 


^ip 


DDttHp 



PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. §§ 356 SEQ. 227 



Plu r. abs. 


Light suflF. 


Const. 


Grave suff. 


Dttttjg 


*3ttg 


wy 


D ?^ttfy 


• t : 


- t : 


$K 


D3$» 




Dec. V. Plural 






Mgt 


'55 


*3R! 


DMp? 


Dnsn 


nai 


*wi 


DD^tm 


JTlB/tt 


(As Dec. XI.) 






DH13 


H23 


'7.4 3 . 


D ^7A? 




Dec. VI. Plural. y4 class. 




• t : 


- t : 


O^D 


nypbq 


• t: 


- t : 


*Tjg5 


DDn^_ 


• t : 


- t: 

.E class. 


*jnr 


DD^nt 


DH9D 

• t : 


nsjD 

- t : 


'7 3 .9 


D^nso 


ony, 


ni T P: 


*¥?R 


D^nip 


'• t -: 


^ (npn) 


$?n 


nypbq 


DH^ etc. 
• t -: 


- t-: 


n'pn 


nyibn 


' t : 


- t : 

class. 


TPP. 


nynx* 


onpa 

• t : 


nga 


npn 


oanpa 

v ••' : t 


DTSDp 


*DR 


*BDp 


DD^Dp 


• t : 


^9 

- t : 


^3 

"t: t 


nybys 

v " t: t 


DWp 


ntnp 

- t't: 




DD^Tp 

v '• :'t 



228 



PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. §§ 3?! SEQ. 



Segholales of roots IV and ''V. (q) TPT, const. TFT, pi. WW*. 

(m)Pnn, const, rm (r) tia> ■ — - ito — D-nitf 

(n) ~^p\- • tfifl Segholates of roots iT?. 

('oj Vn Vri ^j ■n?, (>-i|.) const. v "!9, suff. i^B *m?- 

C p j t& tj?, pi. onvg f<j isn c^n.) •>:sq__t<3q Tps.ri 



(«) 
(ft 

(ft 
W) 
(e) 

(/) 
(*) 



Dec. VII. Singular. § 371 seq. 



Sing. abs. 

PQTD 

TV 



Const. 

(Dig) Dtf 

rata 

bpp_ 

nrao 

If? 



Light suff. 

tqtd 



^jDD 



^ 



Grave suff. 

mnara 



(a) 

(ft 

(ft 

W) 

(e) 

(/) 

(g) 
(k) 

(i) 

0') 
(ft 



Dec. VIII. Singular. 



T 

ID 

nb 

pn 

jy 

boa 

T T 

go 



(DJ) D: 

ID 

(-pn) pn 
(iv) & 

pb 

■• T 

n 1 ? 



§374. 

0* 3 ?) H? 

• • T 

*6 



D3W 

v : t 



v : it 



(4) 



Dec. IX. Singular. § 377- 

rim ri\n "in 

7TW mfr nfr 



orrw 

v : It 



PAR. XXV. NOUNS MASCULINE. 



371 SEQ. 



229 



Segholates of Tib continued. Inf. Segholates. 

(u ) ^>n ^Vrj), const. °?n, su ff. i^bn ( x ) afe^ const. ab?, suff. infcp 

r ^ ■n?, piur. q^h 2 : [pi. D "V? : oj D ? t ? — D ?^ — ^pa? 

f W ) *s$ 9 — n^ f *j "^ — "^3, pi. n ^g? 



^j bap, ib^jj. (W) D3?s, invz 



Dec. VII. Plural. 



Plural abs. 

D^ppp 

nirnrp 
ni^p 

DTTMO 



Light Suff. 
>b_PP_p 

vrmtp 

(as Dec. XIII.) 



^ 



Const. 



»2*y 



Grave Suff. 

D3V"firQ?0 



d:w 



Dec. VIII. Plural. 



DHp 

nil*? 



■>pn 



rteib 



°3W 



" ' T 

onto 

• T 

dt6 



*-tfD 
_. T 

?! 



.. . T 



V *• • T 



Dec. IX. Plural. 



onto 






*TTT 






230 



PAR. XXVI. NOUNS FEMININE. §§ 380 — 392. 





Sing. abs. 


Const. 


Light suff. 


Grave suff. 






Dec. X. Singular. 


§380. 




(a) 


T 


/rlta 


VTTln 


tnnita 


(» 


rfnrm 

t : 


rfana 


• t : 


tDrfana 






Dec. XI. Singular. 


§383. 




(a) 


T T 


I\X0 


•t : 


oaratf 


(« 


T •* 


nai 


• t : 


cnnatf 


(P) 


rrp*ra 

'tt : 


Jipix 


>J ?iT^ 


Djxnjns 


(d) 


T T ~J 


man 


^D3TT 


DghD3TT 


(e) 


fi^S 


ntag 


^? 


tw^ffi 


(/) 


nrfeD 

t t : - 


HD^DD 


WteD (as 


Dec. XIII.) 


(g> 


t t : 


nnii^D 


W1B10D (as 


Dec. XIII.) 






Dec. XII. Singular. 


§387. 




(a) 


rete 


nabia 


\H26d 


Dansfo 


(b) 


t : • 


j-teto 


• t : • 


Donate 


(0 


T : •• 


nrin 


\n*nn 

• t : v 


tnwin 


(d) 


t : t 


n:nn 

- : t 


TQ-irr 

• t : t 


DDJ-i:nn 

v : - : t 


(e) 


my: 

t -; - 


rnxa 


vrjg? 


do'ith 




Dec. XIII. Singular. 


§390. 




(a) 


nison 


maw 


»JT]»D 


DDiTlJjDD 


(» 


mfb 


J"H.4a 


VTUU 


VH? 3 . 


(c) 


DpU 


JltfK 


VM0H (*Ttiti*!) W?H 


(<0 


rtirta 


ni/na 


• : t ••• 


SfJWQ 


(«) 


jitfn: 


ntfro 


'JWFTO 


iww 


(/) 


nrf 


nrf 


¥ ^ 


W3^ 


(ff) 


™? 


na&> 


\nntf 


*jnntf 



PAR. XXVI. NOUNS FEMININE. §§ 380 — 392. 231 



Plur. abs. 


Const. 


Suffix, sing. 


Sufif. plur. 




Dec. X. 


Plural. 




rrrnn 


rrhta 


Whta 


D3\rvh\n 


nfam 


il^VO 


vffana 


oavifrvB 




Dec. XI. 


Plural. 




nW 


nW 


♦iTfotf 


tDVjW 


nW 


nW 


irtW 


o:>\ni:ittf 


rnp'is 


rnp^ra 


VtfjTK 


DWrtfTO 


jiiDDn 


nton 


\mDDn 


DD\nton 


nfey 


rrfay 


vifciy 


DDVrfay 



t : 
t : 

.ntein 

t -: 
tt: 



Dec. XII. Plural. 

: t .- T v •• : T 



jth-idd 



Dec. XIII. Plural. 



MVlilJIDD 



ilWtt 



rnana 



vro/ia 



MTfa/13 



232 



PAR. XXVII. NOUNS DUAL. 



393. 



Sing. abs. Dual abs 



Const. 



I. 

rri:n D^rna-i 
II. 



T 

T 


* —r 
• - 't : v 

III. 


*T. 


T 


IV. 




*U3 

T T 


DIMS 

• - t : 

vkbn 
V. 




3pi; 


VI. 


'3i3? 


A *« 


D$n 


*sn 


£ TO 


D^ll 


T^i 





D^JID 


VD12 


- tyi 


D^Jtt 


'bvz 



Sing. abs. 


Dual abs. 


Const. 


15> 


onrre 

• -t:t 


w 


*fc 


*■" t : 

VII. 






DjStjto 


WtfD 




VIII. 




B|3 


raa 


*?? 


w 


X. 


W 


HDtf 


• - T - 

XI. 




T T 
T " 


• -t : 

• - t : 

XII. 


VJBfc 


t :- 


DVI3T 

• -t :~ 

D^riDpn 

• - t': • 

XIII. 


OT 


.ntfro 


Dvntfro 





PAR. XXVIII. NUMERALS, ETC. §§ 395 398. 



233 







(A) Cardinals, 


etc* from 


1 to 10. 




No. 


Signs. 


Masc. abs. Const. 


Fern. abs. 


Const. 


Ordinals. 


1 


k 00) Trm ina 


nn» 


jttk 




2 


n 


D>r^ w 


D7]tfl 


^ 


W 


3 


j 


t : v : 


T 


ttfttf 


Wtyfl 


4 


i 


t t : - - - : - 


JET)** 


y?1** 


^41 


5 


n 


t • -: v •• -: 


T 


t^DH 


(^»n) ^Dn 


6 


i 


T * V " 


W 


ttftf 


■>$# 


7 


r 


t : • - : • 


JDttf 


yn# 


T^ 


8 


n 


npt npt 


rubtf 




wotfl 


9 


ID 


rwn rwv)r\ 


yte 


ytr\ 


*ynwn 


10 


> 


t t -: v v -: 


TW 


W 


n^ 






(B) Cardinals from 11 to 15. 








Masculine. 






Feminine. 


11 


Nt* 


T T - - 

t t •• : - 






r^S •• : v - - 


12 


2> 


t t •• : 
t t •• : 








13 


y 


T T T : 






rntyy u^ttf 


14 


i? 


T T T T : - 






rn'w ya-ia 


15 


fe 


T T T • -: 






rntoy t^Dn 


16 


v 


T T T * 






nnw xc^tcf 


17 


p 


T T T : • 






rnfoy yntf 


18 


IT 


I'm robtf 

t t t : 






rntyy robitf 


19 


#■ 

^ 


t t . t : 






rnfoy jw) 



Gg 



234 PAR. XXVIII. NUMERALS. §^ 395 — 398. 



(C) Cardinals from 20 to 90. 



20 


3 


ontyj; 


60 


D 


D^tf 


30 


b 


Dn?6tf 


70 


V 


DW3tf 


40 


D 


* t : - 


80 


3 


wpu) 


50 


3 


D^Dn 


90 


2S 


nytin 






CD) 


Hundreds. 






100 


P 


r •• 


600 VI 


(°) 


rria& tftf 


200 


1 


DTIND 

" - T 


700 vn 


0) 


jtind ynttf 


300 


V 


/tind ttf*?tf 


800 An 


TO 


rt»o nibtf 


400 


n 


jtind jehh 


900 pnn (V) 


rfiKD y# a 


500 


ih (T 


) j-nao ttton 












(E) 


Thousands. 






1,000 


K 


*)$* 


10,000 mm 

' t t : 


, ten, aian 


2,000 


5 


D 'l^_ 


20,000 




/ran vwf 


3,000 


i 


d^n ntibv 

' t -: v : 


30,000 




jy\2T) vbt 


4,000 


i 


D^N j^21« 


40,000 




Nian ran** 


5,000 


n 


D'S^H JTtfDn 


rl20,000 


ten 


nn'w D\n# 


6,000 


i' 


• t -: v •• 


lor 12 times 10,000 


7,000 


? 


D'B^K nja«f 


600,000 


*)bk niNB ## 



> 



6 £ 4 



4# 












Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: June 2007 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 



